PrismHR Help · Public documentation for Microsoft 365 Copilot

PrismHR Help — System Administration

System Administration / Maintenance

This file is a combined export of PrismHR help topics in System Administration / Maintenance. Source help system: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Default.htm Each topic is separated by a heading and includes its original URL.

========================================================================

Defining General Ledger Accounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Corporate/GL_Account_Definition_Corp.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Corporate/GL_Account_Definition_Corp.htm

Defining General Ledger Accounts

Use the G/L Account Definition (Corporate form to define general ledger accounts. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To define general ledger accounts:

  1. Enter the Account code to distribute.

  2. Select the Prefix Values that you want to attach to the beginning of the G/L account code.

  3. Select the Suffix Values that you want to append to the end of G/L account code.

  4. Enter the Segment Delimiter to use. Valid delimiters are: *, - , ., or ! If you leave the field blank, there will be no mark or spaces between the account number and any prefix or suffix.

  5. Enter any Prefix/Suffix Overrides:

a. Select the Override When Prefix/Suffix term.
b. Enter the is equal to term.
— —
c. Enter the Replace with value to append to the account number instead.
— —
d. Click Save.
— —
  1. Enter any Account Value Overrides:
a. Select the When Field Equals term.
b. Enter the is equal to term.
— —
c. Enter the Replace Account # With value to append to the account number instead.
— —
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Periods for Your General Ledger

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Corporate/GL_Periods_Corp.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Corporate/GL_Periods_Corp.htm

Defining Periods for Your General Ledger

Use the G/L Periods form to define the periods for your general ledger.

To define periods for your general ledger:

  1. Enter the Period code, ensuring that it conforms to the format used by your general ledger.

  2. Enter a Description of this G/L period.

  3. Enter the calendar Year.

  4. Enter the Month or G/L period within the year.

  5. Enter the External G/L Period to be passed to an external general ledger.

  6. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Global G/L Accounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Corporate/Global_GL_Account_Definition_Corp.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Corporate/Global_GL_Account_Definition_Corp.htm

Defining Global G/L Accounts

Use the Global G/L Account Definition (Corporate) form to define global G/L accounts.

To define global G/L accounts:

  1. Select the Prefix Values that you want to attach to the beginning of G/L account codes that allow prefixes.

  2. Select the Suffix Values that you want to append to the end of G/L account codes that allow suffixes.

  3. Enter the Segment Delimiter to use. Valid delimiters are: *, - , ., or ! If you leave the field blank, there will be no mark or spaces between the account number and any prefix or suffix.

  4. Enter the Code Acct Segment No, which is the segment where the “core” account number is found.

  5. Enter any Account Value Overrides:

a. Select the When Field Equals term.
b. Enter the is equal to term.
— —
c. Enter the Replace Account # With value to append to the account number instead.
— —
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining Codes for Corporate Payroll Accounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Corporate/Payroll_Account_Codes_Corp.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Corporate/Payroll_Account_Codes_Corp.htm

Defining Codes for Corporate Payroll Accounts

Use the Payroll Account Codes form to define codes for your corporate payroll accounts.

To define codes for corporate payroll accounts:

  1. Enter the unique payroll Account number.

  2. Enter a short Account Name, such as Payroll Tax Expense or FICA Liability.

  3. Select Prefix/Suffix Allowed if the G/L account code can take prefixes and suffixes using the variables set up in the account definitions.

  4. Click Save.

========================================================================

1099 Exports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099%20Exports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099 Exports.htm

1099 Exports

This section explains how to create 1099 export files.

========================================================================

1099 Printing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099%20Printing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099 Printing.htm

1099 Printing

This section explains how to perform 1099 printing tasks.

========================================================================

1099 Processes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099%20Processes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099 Processes.htm

1099 Processes

This section explains how to perform 1099 processing tasks.

========================================================================

1099 Reporting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099%20Reporting.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099 Reporting.htm

1099 Reporting

This section explains how to perform 1099 reporting tasks.

========================================================================

Working with 1099 Forms

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099%20Reports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/1099 Reports.htm

Working with 1099 Forms

Use this form to open, reprint, or delete 1099 forms that were printed using the Printing Employee 1099 Formsoption. When you print an employee 1099 form using the Printing Employee 1099 Forms option, the output file generates a corresponding entry here. These files will auto-delete after 60 days.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access this form, click Work Centers. In the Work Centers|Tax section, click 1099 Processing, then click 1099 Reports.

To use this form:

  1. In the Show Reports Dated On or After field, enter the appropriate date.

  2. Select the appropriate Sort By option:

The 1099 Tax Reports panel displays information matching the attributes selected above. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Click Next Page to go to the next page. If you cannot find your entry, click the

[Image: screenshot]

icon to refresh the window.

Note: Note the following:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: If the report parameters change, the resulting report could be different.

========================================================================

3rd Party W-2 Export Files

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/3rd%20Party%20W-2%20Export%20Files.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/3rd Party W-2 Export Files.htm

3rd Party W-2 Export Files

This section explains how to build EFW2 export files.

========================================================================

Building the 941 Quarterly Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/941-Quarterly-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/941-Quarterly-Report.htm

Building the 941 Quarterly Report

Use the 941 Quarterly report option to build a CSV file (no on screen report) to report income taxes, Social Security tax, or Medicare tax withheld from employee’s paychecks. It also reports Schedule R credit for the disabled or elderly. You can also define the format for Schedule B (income tax due on interest and dividends earned). An icon is available for downloading the file.

Note: Note: The wages and tax withholding for a 1099 contractor will not be included in the Employer 941 Quarterly Report for any employer who is withholding federal or state income taxes from a 1099 contractor as defined under the Work tab of the Employee Details form. Evidently, such wages and tax withholding for a 1099 contractor will also not appear in Employer 941 Register, Employer 941 Schedule R, 941 File Processing download etc.

An expandable History section is available for you to see historical reports.

To build the 941 Quarterly report:

  1. In the Work Centers panel, select Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly Tax Reports > 941 Quarterly Report.

  2. In Build 941 Files By, select one of the following options:

  1. If you selected Employer or All Clients, provide the following parameters for the report:
  1. If you selected Client, provide the following parameters for the report:
  1. If you selected Schedule R, provide the following parameters for the report:
  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the 941 Quarterly Report page. The system sends you an email notification that the process competed successfully.

  3. Click the Download 941 link to download the file.

Note: Note: On, the 941 Quarterly Report built either by Employer, All Clients, a specific Client or with Schedule R breakout will not include wages and tax withholdings for any W-8 employee. A W-8 employee in PrismHR is one who according to the Employee Details form, under Tax tab, under the Federal Tax Filing section has the Form W8 Filed field checked. This change will also affect the following:

To view historical reports:

  1. Expand the 941 File History section.

  2. Select the Tax Year, Quarter, and 941 Type for the reports you want to see. The list of reports is shown as in the following example.

  3. To download a report, click the link in the Report column.

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Adding or Updating an Employee 1099 Record

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Add-Update-1099.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Add-Update-1099.htm

Adding or Updating an Employee 1099 Record

Use the Add/Update 1099 form to add or update an employee’s 1099 record.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To add or update an employee 1099:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > 1099 Processing > 1099 Processes > Add/Update Employee 1099.

  2. In the Add/Update Employee 1099 section, complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Employer — The Employer ID for whom to generate 1099 data.

SBEA Entity — An optional field that is available only when Build W2s from Client Federal Tax Registers is checked in the Global Configuration form. This is a client federal entity who represents a client of your organization that is included in SBEA reporting.

Employee — The employee whose record is being added or updated. If a 1099 record is found for the specified employer ID and employee ID, the record is displayed so that you can make the necessary changes. If a 1099 record is not found for the specified employer ID and employee ID, the system prompts you to specify whether to add a 1099 record for that employee. Click Yes or No.

Tax Year — The tax year for which to generate 1099 data. Typically this is the year before the current year.

1099 Manually Updated — When the record is manually updated. The system selects this option when you make manual changes to the record.

  1. In the Federal Form 1099 Misc section, add or change these fields as necessary.

Field — Description

Recipient’s TIN — The recipient’s tax ID number.

Recipient’s Name — The recipient’s name.

Employee Address — The employee’s street address.

City, State & Zip — The employee’s city, state, and zip code.

Non-employee Compensation — Whether the record was manually updated. The system selects this option when you make manual changes to the record.

Federal Income Tax Withheld — The amount of federal income tax withheld.

Federal Income Taxable — The amount of taxable federal income.

State Tax Withheld — The amount of state tax withheld.

State Income — The amount of state income.

State/Payer’s State No. — The number for the state or payer.

  1. Click Save and then Yes when prompted to continue. When the data is saved, the system writes these changes to the status change log and flags the 1099 as manually updated. See Viewing the 1099 Record Change Log

  2. Click Delete to delete the record.

Note: Note: From tax year 2024, for an employee who is a 1099 contractor and has federal or state income tax withheld by the employer, the employee 1099 Build process in PrismHR will include the following information apart from Non-Employee Compensation:

========================================================================

Generating the ADP Quarterly Tax Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/ADP-Quarterly-Tax-Download.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/ADP-Quarterly-Tax-Download.htm

Generating the ADP Quarterly Tax Download

This form generates a quarterly fixed width file similar to the MasterTax RTS file, only with slight variations in the format.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To generate a quarterly report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > 3rd-Party Exports > ADP Quarterly Export.

  2. Select a Tax Year.

  3. Select a Tax Quarter.

  4. Click Build to generate a report for download. A dialog box opens showing steps to process this file. This process may take time so wait for a status update that the build has completed.

  5. Click Close, then click Download ADP Quarterly Tax Export file to download a .txt file to your local system.

========================================================================

Running the Benefit Plan W-2 Reporting Status Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Benefit-Plan-W2-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Benefit-Plan-W2-Report.htm

Running the Benefit Plan W-2 Reporting Status Report

This report provides information about the W-2 reporting status for your organization’s benefit plans. You specify whether the report includes only plans that are reported, only plans that are not reported, or both benefit plans that are reported and those that are not reported

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the Benefit Plan W-2 Reporting Status report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Setup Reports > Benefit Plan W-2 Reporting Status.

  2. In Is Benefit Plan Reported on W2? select one of the following options:

  1. Click Process to run the report. The system displays the report. You can click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Building the Employee W-2 Box 12 Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building%20the%20Employee%20W-2%20Box%2012%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building the Employee W-2 Box 12 Report.htm

Building the Employee W-2 Box 12 Report

Use this form to build a W-2 Box 12 Report for an employee.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To build the Employee W-2 Box 12 report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Box 12 Report.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Tax Year — The year for the download. Required field.

Employer — The specific employer for the download. Click to open the Employer look-up. If left blank, it displays all employers.

Employee — The specific employee for the download. Click to open the Employee look-up. If left blank, it displays all employers.

  1. Click Run. When complete, the report is displayed. You can download the report in XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

Building the Massachusetts (CSV) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building%20the%20Massachusetts%20(CSV)%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building the Massachusetts (CSV) Report.htm

Building the Massachusetts (CSV) Download

Use the Massachusetts (CSV) form to generate unemployment insurance reports in CSV (comm-separated value) format. The reports are used to electronically transmit both employer tax data and employee wage data, eliminating the need to print paper reports.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form and build a report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Exports > Client Reporting > Massachusetts (CSV).

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Report Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to make a selection from the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. To close the list, click Done.

  1. Click Run. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. Click Close when the process is complete to return to the Massachusetts (CSV) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Massachusetts (ICESA Format) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building%20the%20Massachusetts%20(ICESA%20Format).htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building the Massachusetts (ICESA Format).htm

Building the Massachusetts (ICESA Format) Download

Use the Massachusetts (ICESA Format) form to generate unemployment insurance reports in ICESA (Interstate Conference of Employment Security Agencies) format. The reports are used to electronically transmit both employer tax data and employee wage data, eliminating the need to print paper reports.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form and build a report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Exports > Client Reporting > Massachusetts (ICESA Format).

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to select clients from the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. To close the list, click Done.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. Click Close when the process is complete to return to the Massachusetts (ICESA Format) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the W-2 Count by Client Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building%20the%20W-2%20Count%20by%20Client%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Building the W-2 Count by Client Report.htm

Building the W-2 Count by Client Report

Use this form to build a W-2 Count by Company report.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the W-2 Count by Client report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Count by Company.

  2. Select a Tax Year.

  3. Click Run. When complete, the report is displayed. You can download the report in XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

California Environmental Fee Worksheet Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/California%20Environmental%20Fee%20Worksheet%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/California Environmental Fee Worksheet Report.htm

California Environmental Fee Worksheet Report

Use this form to generate a report to display a summary of all employers and Client and the employee count for each Client who meet a threshold of hours (including those total hours) to comply with California Environmental Fee Reporting for a calender year.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security. Only Service Providers with full client access can use this form.

To access the form, under Work Centers, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly Tax Reports, click California Environmental Fee Worksheet Report.

To generate the California Environmental Fee Worksheet Report:

  1. Complete the following:

Field Name — Description

Year — Select the year from the drop-down for which you want to run this report. The default is the current year. The drop-down has a 10 year look back starting from the current year.

  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report shows up on screen.

This report shows the following columns:

========================================================================

Changing Employer IDs

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Change-ER-ID-Company.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Change-ER-ID-Company.htm

Changing Employer IDs

Use the Change Employer IDs for a Client form to change employer IDs for pre-existing clients. You must rebuild registers after running this process.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To change employer IDs for preexisting clients:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Action, select Change Employer IDs for a Client.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Client ID The client ID of the client whose status is to be changed.
To Employer ID The employer ID to which historical tax registers will be moved.
  1. Click Update.

  2. Click Yes when prompted for confirmation. A message notifies you when the change is complete.

  3. Rebuild the registers. See Rebuilding Registers for more information.

========================================================================

Change Reason History- Employer Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Change-Reason-History-Employer_Details.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Change-Reason-History-Employer_Details.htm

Change Reason History- Employer Details

Use this form to get the change reason history for the Employer Details form.

Note: Note: This form will be able to capture the change reason history only if the field named Require change reason on critical forms on the System Parameters form is either selected as Optional (and the user has entered a reason for record update) or Required. When you make any change to the Employer Details form, you will be presented with the following dialog box. Once you record the reason for the change herein, the same will be presented in the Change Reason History form.

[Image: screenshot]

To access the form, under the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

on the Employer Details form, click Change Reason History.

On this form the following two fields are available:

Click Close to close this form and return to the base form.

========================================================================

Clearing Employee SSN Verification Reporting Dates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Clear%20Employee%20SSN%20Verification%20Reporting%20Dates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Clear Employee SSN Verification Reporting Dates.htm

Clearing Employee SSN Verification Reporting Dates

Use this process to reset the Employment Verification Service (EVS) reporting dates. These Employee SSN Verification Reporting Dates are used when processing the EVS download file that is generated from the W-2 work center (W-2 Processing > W-2 Processes > Create Employee SSN Verification Download). If a reporting date is entered in the Employment Verification Service (EVS) reporting date, the employee is not shown on the EVS download. This process resets the EVS reporting dates so that the employees will be shown on the EVS download file.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under the heading Complianceclick on New Hire and Termination Reporting. Then under the heading Reporting Date Overrides click on Clear Employee SSN Verification Reporting Dates.

To clear employee SSN verification reporting dates:

  1. Enter Starting EVS Report Date which is a mandatory date field. Please enter the date from which you want to clear the employee SSN Verification reporting.

  2. Enter Ending EVS Report Date which is a mandatory date field. Please enter the date upto which you want to clear the employee SSN Verification reporting.

  3. Company ID is an optional free text field. Leave it blank to select all clients.

  4. Click Process. A progress window opens that shows the number of records read and the number of records cleared and notifies you when the process is complete. The Close and Report buttons remain disabled while the report is being generated.

  5. Click Close to close the window.

  6. Click Report to display the Job Control Status Report window.

  7. In the Job Control Status Report window, click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Running Client Tax Register Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Client%20Tax%20Register%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Client Tax Register Report.htm

Running Client Tax Register Report

Use the Client Tax Register Report form to generate a report that produces a detailed or summary output of client-reported tax amounts. This informational report includes gross pay, taxable hours, gross taxable, and tax withheld amounts.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, clickReports menu. Under Employer|Report, click Client Tax Register Report.

To generate the Client Tax Register Report:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Starting Date Enter or select the starting date of the reporting period.
Ending Date Enter or select the ending date of the reporting period.
Client ID This field is not mandatory. Leave this field blank to select allclients. If you want to run this report for specific clients, enter the Client IDs here or click the Client ID link and select them from the Select Clients list. The corresponding Client Name displays.
Tax Authority This field is not mandatory. Leave this field blank to select all tax authorities. If you want to run this report for specific tax authorities, enter the tax authority IDs here or click the Tax Authority link and select them from the Select Tax Authority ID list. The corresponding Tax Authority Name displays. (This entry could be a state, county, or city tax authority.)
Tax Identifier This field is not mandatory. Leave this field blank to report all tax types. If you want to run this report for specific tax identifiers, enter the tax identifier IDs here or click the Tax Identifier link and select them from the Select Tax Identifier ID list. The corresponding Tax Identifier Name displays.
And Other Tax Auth = This field is not mandatory. If you enter a tax authority code here it will not display on the report, but only records that have this tax authority will be included in the report. Enter the tax authority IDs here or click the And Other Tax Auth = link and select them from the Select Tax Authority ID list. The corresponding Tax Authority Name displays. (This entry could be a state, county, or city tax authority.)
And Other Tax ID = This field is not mandatory. If you enter a tax identifier ID here it will not display on the report, but only records that have this tax identifier ID are included in the report. Enter the tax identifier IDs here or click the And Other Tax ID = link and select them from the Select Tax Identifier ID list. The corresponding Tax Identifier Name displays.
Include Client SUI Report Only Register This field is not mandatory. By default, this box is disabled. Select this field if you want to include client SUI report only register.
Report Type Select the type of report that you want to generate from the following options: - Summary (Default) - Detail
  1. Click Run to generate the report on-screen.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

  3. Click Close to close this form at any time.

Report Outputs

The ClientTax Register Report displays the following columns:

Report Name Columns
Summary Report - Client ID - Auth ID - Tax Authority Name - Tax ID - Tax Description - Gross Pay - Taxable Hours - Gross Taxable - Tax Withheld - EE Count - Totals (per Client ID) - Grand Totals

[Image: screenshot]

Example of Detail Report:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Searching for Client Tax Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Client_Tax_Lookup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Client_Tax_Lookup.htm

Searching for Client Tax Information

Search for tax information with the Client Tax Lookup form.

To search for information:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|View, select Client Tax Lookup. [Image: screenshot]

  3. Use Company Tax Lookup Search Criteria fields to specify search parameters.

  4. Click Search. Results display in a table.

========================================================================

Cloning Employer Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Clone%20Employer%20Detail.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Clone Employer Detail.htm

Cloning Employer Details

Use this form to copy an existing Employer Detail record to a new Employer Detail Record. This is especially helpful for customers in the entertainment industry where each new show is a separate PEO clientwith a corresponding employer record that is identical to the other employers in the system. Using this form, you can avoid setting up all the state information for a new employer. You can just clone it from an existing employer.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form.

To access this form, click the Back Office menu. Under Employer|Action, click Clone Employer Detail.

To clone an existing employer record to a new employer:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

From Employer ID — Enter the existing Employer ID from whom you want to clone the employer record, or click the From Employer ID hyperlink and select it from the Select Employer dialog box. If you enter an employer ID that does not exist, you will receive an error stating Record is not on file EMPLOYER.MASTER.

New Employer ID — Enter the Employer ID of the new employer. If you enter an employer ID that already exists, you will receive an error stating Employer ID already exists.

New Employer Name — Enter the name of the new employer

  1. Click Clone to copy the existing employer details to the new employer. All information on the original employer record will clone to the new employer except Init History. This is because you would not want to clone the init history from prior years for another employer as this is a new employer.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

The following information of the existing employer will be copied to the new employer:

========================================================================

Compliance

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Compliance-Work-Center.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Compliance-Work-Center.htm

Compliance

The Compliance area on the Work Centers panel provides convenient access to the forms required to perform ACA Processing.

========================================================================

Creating Employee W-2C Forms

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Create%20Employee%20W-2C%20Forms.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Create Employee W-2C Forms.htm

Creating Employee W-2C Forms

Use Create Employee W-2C Forms to create the electronic W-2c form data that needs to be uploaded to federal, state, and local government agencies. If the system detects any errors that will prevent processing, it displays an error message when you select the option. Click OK to dismiss the message and then resolve the errors. Click Pre-Process Error Report to download errors if any before you create the W-2c forms.

To create employee W-2c form data:

  1. Open the Work Centers menu and select Work Centers|Tax > W-2 Processing.

  2. Under W-2 Processes, select Create Employee W-2C Forms.

  3. Complete the form.

Option Description
Clear options: Select one of the following options: - Do not clear existing forms - This is the default option. This option provides the following two options: - Only create W-2C forms for employees without an existing W-2C record. This is the default option. - Overwrite W-2C form if values are different. Any Form W-2c included in an EFW2C export file that is not in a status of regenerate or canceled will be skipped. - Clear all existing forms - This option will delete all W2-C records. Any Form W-2c included in an EFW2C export file that is not in a status of regenerate or canceled will be skipped. This process does not create W2-C automatically after clearing. You will need to create W2-C records separately.
  1. Click Create Forms to create W-2c records. You will receive the following warning:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Error Report to download errors if any in a .csv format. The following is a sample Error Report.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Pre-Process Error Report to download errors if any before you create the W-2c forms. The following is a sample pre-processing error report:

[Image: screenshot]

Updates to Form W-2 build

The State Income Tax Account Number on the employee Form W-2 will now be pulled from the Client Details form or the Employer Details form based on the tax deduction code, unless an override exists on the Employer Details form on the SIT Rpt Entity field for that state under the State Tax section.

The State Income Tax Account Number on the employee Form W-2 will be:

Note: If the State Tax ID is not available on the corresponding reporting entity, the Form W-2 will not be built, and an error will appear in the W2 Error Report stating State Employer ID not found for Client # for State XX OR State Employer ID not found for Employer for State XX

========================================================================

Creating Payroll Tax Summary Export Files

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Create-Payroll-Tax-Summary-Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Create-Payroll-Tax-Summary-Export.htm

Creating Payroll Tax Summary Export Files

The MasterTax PTS (Payroll Tax Summary) File Build transmits data from the TAX.JOURNAL file to MasterTax. MasterTax is a third party vendor that handles the tax payments for many service providers.

This file is typically generated once per day and uploaded to MasterTax. There are multiple versions of the PTS file. There are also SBEA and Non-SBEA versions of this file, depending on the settings on the MasterTax Interface Parameter form. A process lock on the TAX.JOURNAL file prevents multiple users from running this file concurrently.

In the past, PTS files contained deleted data. PTS files created out of PrismHR archive that data for 45 days, and then it is deleted.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To build the PTS file:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click MasterTax Processing. > File Exports > Mastertax PTS File Build.

  2. Select Build File by:

  1. Click Build to generate the PTS file. A progress window opens and displays process steps and a date/time stamp. When the build is finished, it automatically downloads to a local drive and appears on the PTS File History list.

If a PTS file is already being generated, a process lock is applied to prevent others from attempting builds. You can clear the lock, but it should be cleared only if the process is frozen.

  1. Check the MasterTax version by expanding the Configuration Information panel.

  2. Check the PTS File History for a build status. The system displays a time and date stamp, the user who ran the build, and what the file name is.

  3. Click a File Name link to download that file. You can also view an audit report by clicking View next to one of the file names.

========================================================================

Creating the Employee SSN Verification Service Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Creating-The-Employee-SSN-Verification-Service-Download.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Creating-The-Employee-SSN-Verification-Service-Download.htm

Creating the Employee SSN Verification Service Download

The Employee SSN Verification Service Download builds an electronic file that you can upload to the Social Security Number Verification Service, which verifies names and SSNs before generating Employee W-2s. It also updates employee records with an Eligibility Verification System (EVS) date. Once this process is complete, you are notified with a pop-up window.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access this form and run the report:

  1. Open the Work Centers menu and select Work Centers|Tax > W-2 Processing.

  2. Under W-2 Processes, select Create Employee SSN Verification Download.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Requester ID — ID of the person requesting the file. This required field is limited to 4 alphanumeric characters (no special characters).

Starting Report Date — Starting date of the date range for creating this file.

Ending Report Date — Ending date of date range for creating this file.

Client ID — Click the link to display a list from which you can select a specific client for the report. If left blank, the file includes all clients.

  1. Click Generate File. If errors occur, fix them and then regenerate the download.

  2. Click Close to download the file.

If you return to the Create Employee SSN Verification Download screen, a Re-Download Verification File option is available.

========================================================================

Edit EFW2C File Status

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Edit%20EFW2C%20File%20Status.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Edit EFW2C File Status.htm

Edit EFW2C File Status

Use this form to change/update the Status of the EFW2C download file in the Generated EFW2C Files grid on the EFW2C Download and Maintenance form. The Status of the EFW2C download file in the Generated EFW2C Files grid on the EFW2C Download and Maintenance form reflects the current Status of the file. Depending on your external processes, use this form to change/update the Status of the EFW2C download file along the life cycle of the file. For example, once you generated a download file, it will be in the Unsent status. Once you submit it to the SSA you will need to change the Status to In-Process.

Click any Status on the Generated EFW2C Files grid on the EFW2C Download and Maintenance form to open this form for that particular download file. The following fields will be read only on this form:

Click Save to save the changes made on this form so that it reflects correctly on the Generated EFW2C Files grid on the EFW2C Download and Maintenance form. If you do no wish to save the changes, then you can close this form using the Close button on the top right of this form.

========================================================================

Building EEO-1 and Pay Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Build_EEO-1_Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Build_EEO-1_Data.htm

Building EEO-1 and Pay Data

Before creating the EEO-1 download file, you must build the appropriate pay data into the database. The build process will progress differently depending on the settings you configure here.

Configuring EEO-1 Report Settings

In PrismHR, open the Work Centers menu and select EEO Processing under Work Centers|Compliance. In the EEO-1 Report Processing category, select Build EEO-1 & Pay Data.

Then, fill out each section of the form specified below. When you are ready to start the data build, see Running the Build.

EEO-1 Information

Set up the following fields according to your reporting needs. This data will display in Consolidated record of the EEO-1 reporting file.

Field — Action

Unit number Assigned by the EEOC — Enter the unit number assigned by the EEOC.

Headquarters Company — Enter the company headquarters ID number.

Headquarters Location — Enter the company headquarters location ID number.

Is Federal Contractor or Financial Institution — Select this option if the company counts as a financial institution or does contract work for the federal government.

Dun & Bradstreet Number — If the company has a Dun & Bradstreet number, enter it here.

Unique Entity ID — This field is not mandatory. You may enter the 12 character (no special characters) Unique Entity Identifier (UEI) number issued by the System for Award Management (SAM) to identify businesses and other entities that do business with the federal government.

Client Settings

Use this section to determine the inclusion and exclusion of client data in the data build process.

Field Action
Exclude ASO Companies Select this option to exclude clients set up as Administrative Services Organizations.
Build Data For Specify whether the system will build data for: - All clients - All clients except for ASOs - Only specific clients (a grid displays for you to specify the clients) - All clients except specific clients (a grid displays for you to specify the clients)

To build EEO data:

  1. Complete the following setup fields in the Build Options panel:
Field Action
Report As‑of Date The date for the report, based on year and employee-related information (such as active/inactive status and position). > Note: Note: As a best practice, PrismHR recommends using the date for the last scheduled payroll batch of the reporting year.
Employee Filter Select the rule to use when the system determines whether to include an employee in the data build: - Active during reporting period - Paid more than $0 during reporting period
  1. Click Build. The Job Control form displays the progress of the build process.

========================================================================

Clearing EEO-1 Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Clear_EEO-1_Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Clear_EEO-1_Data.htm

Clearing EEO-1 Data

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

Use the Clear EEO-1 Data form to delete previously built EEO-1 data for a given reporting year.

Note: Note: You cannot reverse this process. Any EEO-1 data you decide to clear will be deleted permanently.

To clear EEO-1 data:

  1. In the Work Centers menu, select EEO Processing under Work Centers|Compliance.

  2. Under the EEO-1 Report Processing category, select Clear EEO-1 Data.

  3. Choose the appropriate reporting Year.

  4. Indicate whether you want to clear data for all clients, selected clients, or all clients except specifically listed ones.

  5. Click Clear Data.

========================================================================

Setting Up Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Reporting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Client_EEO-1_Files.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Client_EEO-1_Files.htm

Setting Up Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Reporting

Use the Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Reporting form to configure settings related to EEO-1 report file generation for:

To access this form, in the Work Centers panel, under Compliance click EEO Processing. Under the EEO-1 Processing section, under GENERATE EEO-1 REPORTING FILES heading, select Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Files.

Company Information

This section specifies the client-level information to include in the consolidated record of the EEO-1 reporting file. Client client

Note: Note: Ensure that you have the correct client selected in the top bar. The form then automatically populates the basic address information for that client below.

Field — Action

Company Name — This field is already populated or enter the name of the client as it should report within the file.

Address 1 — This field is already populated or enter the line 1 postal address of the office of the client.

Address 2 — This field is optional. Enter the line 2 postal address of the office of the client.

City — This field is already populated or enter the name of the city of the office of the client.

State — This field is already populated or enter the two character state code of the office of the client.

Zip Code — This field is already populated or enter the 5 digit zip code of the office of the client.

County — This field is optional. Enter the name of the county of the office of the client.

Company FEIN — This field is already populated or enter the Federal Employment ID Number (FEIN) of the client.

NAICS Code — This field is optional. The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code of the client will populate here as entered in the Client Details form. However, please note that if an NAICS code is not assigned to your client, or if it is obsolete, then the EEO-1 build will fail.

Major Activity — This field is optional. This field will get auto-populated based on the NAICS code entered above.

Report Parameters

Use the following report parameters to define client level information. This data will display in Consolidated record of the EEO-1 reporting file.

Field — Action

Headquarters Location — Enter the client headquarters location ID number.

Federal EEO-1 filed in prior year — Check this box if an EEO‑1 report was filed for the client last year.

Entire Company Has at Least 100 Employees — Check this box if the client has at least 100 employees.

Is in Enterprise With at Least 100 Employees — Check this box if the client is part of a larger client with 100 or more employees.

Federal Contractor Or Financial Institution — Check this box if the client counts as a financial institution or does contract work for the federal government.

Dun & Bradstreet Number — If the client has a Dun & Bradstreet number, enter it here.

Unique Entity ID — This field is not mandatory. You may enter the 12 character (no special characters) Unique Entity Identifier (UEI) number issued by the System for Award Management (SAM) to identify businesses and other entities that do business with the federal government. > Note: Note: This UEI here will be used for all worksite locations within the EEO-1 download. If all worksite locations being reported should not report as a Federal Contractor, do not assign this setting to this form.

Certifying Official

This section specifies the client-level information to include in the consolidated record of the EEO-1 reporting file.

Field — Action

Name — Enter the name of the certifying official.

Title — Enter the title of the certifying official.

Phone Number — Enter the phone number of the certifying official.

Email Address — Enter the email address of the certifying official.

Address 1 — Enter the line 1 postal address of the office of the certifying official.

Address 2 — Enter the line 2 postal address of the office of the certifying official.

City — Enter the name of the city of the office of the certifying official.

State — Select the state of the office of the certifying official from the drop-down.

Zip Code — Enter the zip code of the office of the certifying official or click the Zip Code link and select it from the Select Zip Code dialog box.

California Pay Data

This section controls report file generation settings specific to California Pay Data reporting.

Field — Action

Company is a California State Contractor — Check this box if the client does contract work for the State of California. Else leave it unchecked.

California Pay Data Filed in Prior Year — Check this box if California Pay Data was filed for this client for the previous reporting year. Else leave it unchecked.

California SEIN — Enter State Employer Identification Number (SEIN) for the state of California for this client.

Parent Company (if applicable)

If this client has a parent company then it must be reported on the EEO-1 file.

Field — Action

Parent Company Name — Enter the name of the parent company.

Address 1 — Enter the postal address of the parent company.

City — Enter the name of the city of the office of the parent company.

State — Select the state of the office of the parent company from the drop-down.

Zip Code — Enter the zip code of the office of the parent company or click the Zip Code link and select it from the Select Zip Code dialog box.

Parent FEIN(s)

If the client has a parent company indicated above, then

Field Action
FEIN Enter the Federal Employment ID Number (FEIN) of that parent company here.

Affiliates FEIN(s) (If applicable)

If the client has any affiliate(s), then

Field Action
FEIN Enter the Federal Employment ID Numbers (FEIN) of the affiliate companies here.

Additional Companies to be Included in this Companies EEO-1

Use this grid if you want to combine multiple clients data within a single report.

Field — Action

Company ID — Enter the Company ID number or click the Company ID link and select the client from the Client Master Search dialog box. You can enter more than one client here.

Company Name — This field will auto-populate based on the Company ID selected above.

Note:

Client and Worksite Location level federal contractor settings are now applied to the EEO-1 Download Report.

If in the Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Files form Additional Companies are included, and:

Review all the information that you have entered in the form above. Then,

File Generation Settings

Field Action
Year Select the year for which you want to generate EEO-1 data from the drop-down. Data generated based on payrolls inclusive of Report As-of Date.
EEO Pay Period Start Date This data pulls from the Generate EEO-1 Files section of the Service Provider EEO-1 Files form.
EEO Pay Period End Date This date will the same as the Report As-of Date field used for this build.
EEO File Type Select EEO file type from the following options: - Federal - California Employee Payroll Report - If you select this file type, then check the box beside to Indicate if you want to Include Employer Information in the Report. This will produce as additional section 1 of the report providing information you may need to supply for the state of California. Else leave the check box unchecked. - California Labor Contractor Report - IL Pay Data Report - Use this option to support Illinois Equal Pay Registration Certificate reporting. This report includes employees who worked at your factory/facility/office in Illinois plus the 100% remote employees who report directly to Illinois management. For ease of reference the Company and Employee ID columns are added to this report. You will need to remove them before submitting to the state of Illinois. Once you select this option, then: - The EEO Pay Period End Date field will be 12/31 of the year selected. - The EEO Pay Period Start Date field will be 01/01 of the year selected.

========================================================================

Creating the EEO-1 Download Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO-1_Download_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO-1_Download_Report.htm

Creating the EEO-1 Download Report

This form produces a report in .csv format, summarizing EEO-1 and, if applicable, Component 2 data.

To run the report:

  1. In the Work Centers menu, navigate to Work Centers|Compliance > EEO-1 Processing.

  2. Under the EEO-1 Report Processing category, under Reports, select EEO-1 Download Report.

  3. Select the report Year.

  4. To generate a report that contains Component 2 reporting data, select Build Component 2 Format.

  5. Click Generate Report: the Job Control form displays the progress of the report generation.

  6. Review the Job Control details and the click Close.

  7. Click Download Report to obtain the report download through your web browser.

The generated .csv file will contain labeled counts for each EEO-1 reporting category.

Note:

Client and Worksite Location level federal contractor settings are now applied to the EEO-1 Download Report.

If in the Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Files form Additional Companies are included, and:

========================================================================

Running the EEO Detail Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Detail_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Detail_Report.htm

Running the EEO Detail Report

Use the EEO Detail Report to view detailed employee information relevant for EEO-1 reporting.

To run the report:

  1. In the Work Centers menu, navigate to Work Centers|Compliance > EEO-1 Processing.

  2. Under EEO Reports, select EEO Detail Report.

  3. Specify whether to produce a report for All Clients or the Currently Selected Client.

  4. Use the Report Filters panel to restrict the report output to specific entities within the client or clients. If you run the report for a single client, there are additional filter options.

  1. Use the Report Parameters panel to restrict the output to employees of one or more Status Codes, Status Classes, or Employee Type Codes.

  2. Enter the As Of Date, which is the start date for the range of data that the report selects and displays (the end date is today’s date).

  3. Click Generate Report: the Job Control form displays the progress of the report generation.

  4. Review the Job Control details and the click Close.

  5. Click Download Report to obtain the report download through your web browser.

Analyzing the Report Output

The report output includes much of the data necessary for generating the EEO-1 output file. Use this output to review employee data and ensure that it is ready for filing.

========================================================================

EEO Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Processing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Processing.htm

EEO Processing

All forms related to EEO-1 processing are now available under EEO Processing in the Work Centers.

To access the EEO-1 processing work center, click EEO Processing under the Compliance category in the Work Centers panel.

To get detailed instructions for using the open form:

To return to the processing page:

The following forms can be accessed from the EEO Processing work-center.

EEO Setup EEO Reports EEO-1 Processing
- EEO Class Codes - EEO Ethnic Codes - EEO Position Codes - EEO Detail Report - EEO Summary Headcount Report - Build Data Registers - Build EEO-1 & Pay Data - Clear EEO-1 Data - Import & Export Data - Export EEO-1 Data - Import EEO-1 Data - Generate EEO-1 Reporting Files - Service Provider EEO-1 Files - Client EEO-1 & Pay Data Files - EEO-1 Download Report

Employers must annually file the Employer Information Report (EEO-1 Report) with the Joint Reporting Committee of the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission. The report provides a count of company employees by job class, ethnicity, race, and gender.

This document describes how to create a download file that contains a multi-establishment report for all employers. The data file includes:

Where applicable, clients can report each location as a separate establishment record, regardless of the number of employees working at the location. These line items will use EEOC status codes as detailed in the table below.

Note: Note: The Unit Number mentioned in the table below refers to the field under Client > Change > Worksite Location > Other Parameters, called EEO Unit Number.

EEOC Status Code — Description

2 — Consolidated report record This only displays in the first record of the download. > Note: Note: If your download is for single-establishment reporting, you must manually change this value to 1 and ensure that any worksite locations are linked (contact Customer Support for details).

3 — Headquarters record This only displays in the second record of the download. > Note: Note: If your download is for single-establishment reporting, you can remove this record.

4 — Establishment has 50+ employees and it is not first time reporting (a Unit Number exists for the establishment).

8 — Establishment has fewer than 50 employees (a Unit Number does not exist).

9 — Establishment has 50+ employees and it is the first time reporting (a Unit Number does not exist).

Other Documentation

For more general information about EEO-1 filing and Component 1 of the report, please consult the following official resources:

========================================================================

EEO-1 Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Report_Processing_Forms.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Report_Processing_Forms.htm

EEO-1 Processing

This section explains how to use EEO-1 processing forms. These forms control the processes that build, delete, import, export, and download EEO-1 reporting data.

========================================================================

EEO Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Reports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Reports.htm

EEO Reports

This section provides several useful reports that can help you ensure that your employee configurations, statuses, and head counts are accurate for EEO-1 filing.

========================================================================

EEO Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Setup_Forms.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Setup_Forms.htm

EEO Setup

This section explains how to use the EEO-1 setup forms. These forms control system-level entities and codes, such as ethnicity and position classifications, that have a direct impact on the EEO-1 data build process.

========================================================================

Running the EEO-1 Summary Headcount Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Summary_Headcount_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/EEO_Summary_Headcount_Report.htm

Running the EEO-1 Summary Headcount Report

Use the EEO Summary Headcount Report to obtain a .csv file featuring summary totals and percentages for various EEO reporting categories.

To run the report:

  1. In the Work Centers menu, navigate to Work Centers|Compliance > EEO-1 Processing.

  2. Under EEO Reports, select EEO Summary Headcount Report.

  3. Specify whether to produce a report for All Clients or the Selected Client.

  4. Use the Report Filters panel to restrict the report output to specific entities within the client or clients. If you run the report for a single client, there are additional filter options.

  1. Use the Report Parameters panel to restrict the output to employees of one or more Status Codes, Status Classes, or Employee Type Codes.

  2. Enter the As Of Date, which is the start date for the range of data that the report selects and displays (the end date is today’s date).

  3. Click Generate Report: the Job Control form displays the progress of the report generation.

  4. Review the Job Control details and then click Close.

  5. Click Download Report to obtain the .csv file through your web browser.

========================================================================

Exporting EEO-1 Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Export_EEO-1_Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Export_EEO-1_Data.htm

Exporting EEO-1 Data

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

Use the Export EEO-1 Data feature to create .csv export files of employee-level EEO-1 data from the latest build.

Note: Note: The export file is not valid for submission to the EEOC.

To export EEO-1 data from the most recent build:

  1. Open the Work Centers menu and select Work Centers|Compliance > EEO Processing.

  2. Under the EEO-1 Report Processing category, select Export EEO-1 Data.

  3. Select the Year of the data to export.

  4. Specify whether to export all employees or only employees with invalid positions, gender, or ethnicity.

If you export all employees, employees with errors will display at the top of the output file.

  1. Click Export Data. A new form displays the progress of the export.

  2. Review the export progress and click Close when finished.

  3. On the Export EEO-1 Data form, click Download EEO-1 Data. Your browser displays the downloaded .csv file.

  4. Open the export file and review its contents. Make modifications if necessary.

Output Examples

This is an example of an export file that includes all employees. Note that the employee with a race/ethnicity error displays at the top of the file, in row 2.

[Image: An excel spreadsheet featuring many rows of employee data. The employee in row 2 has the word “Error” in their race/ethnicity column.]

This is an example of an export for the same year, where the output includes only employees with errors.

[Image: An excel spreadsheet similar to the previous example, except it has only one row. This row features the employee who had the error in the original file.]

========================================================================

Importing EEO-1 Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Import_EEO-1_Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/Import_EEO-1_Data.htm

Importing EEO-1 Data

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

Use the Import EEO-1 Data form to correct any errors that were identified by the Export EEO-1 Data feature. The form also provides some import preferences you can customize.

Note: Note: Use either .txt. or .csv files with this feature. The format of the input file must match the format generated by the EEO-1 data export feature. For details, see Exporting EEO-1 Data.

File Requirements

Note: Note: This form accepts input files that follow the format of the EEO-1 export file. The import will ignore any data in columns to the right of the System column, as these are informational only.

You can import employees who do not already have records in the system. There is a setting on this form that determines whether to include them in the report. See the procedure below for more information.

If you want to import data for employees that are not already in the system, you must assign each of these employees a unique ID on the import file. For example, you can use their SSN, a unique number, or some form of their name. This ID will act as their employee ID on the report.

Requirements for the EEO-1 import file:

Procedure

To import EEO-1 data into PrismHR:

  1. Open the Work Centers menu and select Work Centers|Compliance > EEO Processing.

  2. Under the EEO-1 Report Processing category, select Import EEO-1 Data.

  3. The EEO-1 Report As Of Date populates automatically from the EEO-1 configuration. Change this value if necessary.

  4. Use the Replace Behavior option to specify how the import process works:

  1. Select whether to Import Employees That Are Not in Prism. Otherwise, PrismHR will ignore data for any employees not already in the EEO-1 registers.

For details, review the Import File Requirements section, above.

  1. In the Import File panel, specify the number of Header Lines to Skip. For example, enter 1 if the import file has header data or labels in the first row.

  2. Click Choose File. A new form displays where you can upload the import file.

  3. Upload the file and click submit.

  4. Click Import Data to run the import. The Job Control form displays the imported employees.

  5. After the process completes, select Error Report to review any errors.

========================================================================

Service Provider EEO-1 Files

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/SP_EEO-1_Files.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/EEO/SP_EEO-1_Files.htm

Service Provider EEO-1 Files

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

Use this form to set up EEO-1 reporting information on the global/service provider level and build the service provider EEO-1 reporting file.

Note: Note: You can also override some of these options on the client level.

Path

Open the Work Centers menu and select Work Centers|Compliance > EEO Processing.

Under EEO-1 Processing > Generate EEO-1 Reporting Files, select Service Provider EEO-1 Files.

Company Information

This section specifies the client-level information to include in the consolidated record of the EEO-1 reporting file.

Field — Action

Company Name — Enter the company name.

Company Address 1, Address 2, City, State, Zip Code — Enter the company street address information.

FEIN — Enter the federal employment ID number of the company.

Apply to all records — Select this option to apply the client FEIN to all records on the download. Otherwise, the data build will pull each individual client FEIN.

NAICS Code — Enter the company NAICS code.

Certifying Official

Name — Enter the name of the certifying official.

Title — Enter the title of the certifying official.

Phone Number — Enter the phone number of the certifying official.

Email Address — Enter the email address of the certifying official.

EEO-1 Information

Set up the following fields according to your EEO-1 reporting needs. This data will display in Consolidated record of the EEO-1 reporting file.

Note: Note: You can override some of these options at the client level.

Field Action
Company Number Assigned by the EEOC Enter the number assigned to the company by the EEOC. > Note: Note: You can only enter a company with a Worksite Location that: - Has its EEO Unit Number set up appropriately - Has employees who were paid within the EEO Pay Period Start and Report As Of Date

Use these settings to filter specific client data out of the download file, if needed.

Field — Action

Exclude ASO Companies — Select this option to exclude ASO organizations from the reporting file.

Download Data For — Specify whether to generate service provider EEO-1 files for all clients under the company, certain clients only, or all clients except a specific list.

Generate EEO-1 Files

The settings in this panel define how service provider EEO-1 reporting files are created.

Field — Action

EEO Pay Period Start Date — Pay period start date to use when calculating EEO-1 reporting data for the year.

Report As-Of Date — The date for the EEO-1 report, based on year and employee-related information (such as active/inactive status and position). > Note: Note: As a best practice, PrismHR recommends using the date for the last scheduled payroll batch of the reporting year.

Component 2 Data — Select this option to include EEO-1 component 2 reporting data on the generated file. > Note: Note: Currently, this is only necessary when generating files for 2017 or 2018.

========================================================================

Running the 1099 Forms Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-1099-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-1099-Report.htm

Running the 1099 Forms Report

The 1099 Forms report shows the data that was included on the employee 1099 forms that were generated for a specified tax year, employer, and zip code.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the 1099 Forms report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > 1099 Processing > 1099 Reporting > 1099 Forms Report.

  2. Select a tax year and employer ID and enter a zip code. If you leave the zip code blank, the report includes all zip codes for the selected tax year and employer.

  3. Click Process.

The report contains columns that display the following information:

You can navigate through the report by going to the next or previous page, going to a specific page, or searching for specific information. In the Actions list, you can print the report, convert it to PDF, or print specific PDF pages. You can also convert the report to XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

Running the W-2 Audit Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Audit-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Audit-Report.htm

Running the W-2 Audit Report

Use this report to list all manual entries made to employee W-2s.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To Running the W-2 Audit report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Audit Report.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Employer ID — Click the link to select an employer. For each employer, the list shows the Employer Name, and Employer Name. If left blank, the report runs for all employers.

Client ID — Select a client from the Select Client selector. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. If left blank, the report runs for all clients.

Tax Year — Select a tax year from the list.

  1. Click Run. When complete, the report is displayed. You can download the report in XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

Running the External Benefits W-2 Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Benefits-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Benefits-Report.htm

Running the External Benefits W-2 Report

This report includes information about payments for external benefit that are included on the W-2 form.

The report contains columns that provide the following information:

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To generate the External Benefits W-2 report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > External Benefits W-2 Report.

  2. To limit the report to a single client, click Client ID and select a client. To include all companies in the report leave the Client ID blank.

  3. Select the Year for the report.

  4. Click Process. When complete, the report is displayed. You can download the report in XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

Running the W-2 Box Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Box-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Box-Report.htm

Running the W-2 Box Report

Use the W-2 Box Report form to display the values reported in each box of the employee’s Form W-2. You can run this report at the employer or client level.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the W-2 Box report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Box Report.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Employer ID — Limits the report to a specific employer.

Client ID — Limits the report to a specific client.

Last Name — The employee’s last name.

Tax Year — Year in which the report is being run.

Zip Code Above or Equal To — Five digit zip code for an employee that is above or equal to a specific value.

Zip Code Below or Equal To — Five digit zip code for an employee that is below or equal to a specific value.

Box 12 Code — The code for the amount to be reported in Box 12 of the Federal W-2 form. (Note: You can select a one-character or two-character alphabetic code.)

  1. Click Process. When complete, the report displays.

Note: Note: When you withhold federal and/or state income tax for W-8 employees, this data for the W-8 employees will be omitted from the W2 and W2C builds. Consequently, this report in PrismHR will not include data for W-8 employees.

========================================================================

Running the W-2 Forms Needed Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Forms-Needed-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Forms-Needed-Report.htm

Running the W-2 Forms Needed Report

The Employee W-2 Forms Needed Report provides a list of the number of W-2 forms that need to be completed for a specified year and employer. Employees that receive an electronic Form W‑2 are not included in the report, since your organization does not need forms for those employees.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To Running the W-2 Forms Needed report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > Employee W-2 Forms Needed.

  2. Enter a tax Year.

  3. Select an Employer ID.

  4. Click Run. When complete, the report is displayedSee Viewing the Job Control Status Report You can download the report in XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

Running the W-2 Local Detail Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Local-Detail-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Local-Detail-Report.htm

Running the W-2 Local Detail Report

The W-2 Local Detail Report provides information about state and local taxes paid by a specified client, state, and year.

The report displays information in the following columns:

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the W-2 Local Detail report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Local Detail Report.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Employer ID — When you select the client’s employer, the system displays the Employer ID and Name.

Client ID — When you select the client ID, the system displays the name of the client for whom the report will be generated.

Tax Year — Year for which the report is run. The default is the current year.

State Code — The state of which the client is a resident.

Local Tax Authority ID — The local tax authority for the area where the client resides (if any).

Zip Code Above or Equal To — Five digit client zip code that is above or equal to a specific value.

Zip Code Below or Equal To — Five digit client zip code that is below or equal to a specific value.

Box 12 Code — Code for the amount to be reported in Box 12 of the federal W-2 form. This code is two alpha characters only.

  1. Click Run. When complete, the report is displayed. You can download the report in XLS format by clicking the XLS link.

========================================================================

Running the W-2 Verification Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Verification-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee-W-2-Verification-Report.htm

Running the W-2 Verification Report

The verification code is a 16-digit code found on Form W-2. Taxpayers and tax professionals enter the code when prompted by the electronic tax return. The Verification Code helps to verify the accuracy of the wage and income information and verify the taxpayer and employer.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the W-2 Verification report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Verification Report.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Employer ID Limits the report to a specific employer.
Employee ID Limits the report to a specific employee.
Year Year for which the report is being run.
  1. Click Process. If errors occur, fix them and process the report again.

  2. Click Close. The system displays the report. You can click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Viewing the Employee Tax Summary

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee_Tax_Summary.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employee_Tax_Summary.htm

Viewing the Employee Tax Summary

View an employee’s annual tax information with the Employee Tax Summary form.

Note: Note: Only Service Provider users have access to the Employee Tax Summary.

To view a tax summary:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Employer|View, select Employee Tax Summary. [Image: screenshot]

  3. Specify an Employee ID by entering the ID or by clicking the link and selecting the ID from a pop-up list of matching employee records.

  4. Select the tax year from For the Year to display tax totals.

========================================================================

Reviewing Quarterly Employer Tax Liability

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer%20941%20Register.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer 941 Register.htm

Reviewing Quarterly Employer Tax Liability

Use the Employer 941 Register form to review the tax liability of an employer for a quarter.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access this form, click Back Office. Under Employer|View, click Employer 941 Register.

To view the Employer 941 Register:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

Employer ID — Enter the applicable employer ID or click the Employer ID link and select it from the Select Employer dialog box.

Year — Select the calendar year from the drop-down.

Quarter — Select the tax quarter from the drop-down.

The Employer 941 Register displays on the screen. Following is a sample:

[Image: Employer 941 Register]

========================================================================

Importing Employer Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer%20Details%20Template.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer Details Template.htm

Importing Employer Details

You can bulk import or update the account numbers and other information on the State Tax panel on the Employer Details form.

To upload and import W/C classification rates, do the following:

  1. Select the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Import Processing, select Data Import Tool. Select the Employer Details import template option.

–OR–

  1. Select the Back Office menu. Under Employer|Change select Employer Details. Click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. The Employer Details import template option automatically displays.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Employer (Required) – Must be a valid Employer that is currently in the system. If you try to import an employer who is not in the system, you will receive and error stating Record is not on file. - State Code (Required) – Must be a valid state code. If you try to import a state code that is not in the system, you will receive and error stating Record is not on file on STATE.CODES. - Licensed – Any one of the following options only: - Yes - No - Blank - Taxpayer ID / UI Account – Only Alpha-Numeric characters are allowed for this field. - State Tax Nbr – Only Alpha-Numeric characters are allowed for this field. - Mag Authority ID – Only Alpha-Numeric characters are allowed for this field. - Misc ID 1 – Only Alpha-Numeric characters are allowed for this field. - Misc ID 2 – Only Alpha-Numeric characters are allowed for this field. - SUTA Rpt – Any one of the following options only: - C – Company - P – PEO - Blank - Rpt Entity Eff Date – Must be a valid date. - Rpt Entity End Date – Must be a valid date after the Rpt Entity Eff. Date. - SIT Rpt Entity – Any one of the following options only: - C – Client - E – Employer - Blank - SIT Eff Date – Must be a valid date. - SIT End Date – Must be a valid date after the SIT Eff. Date. - GL Segment EEHL – Only Alpha-Numeric characters are allowed for this field.

========================================================================

Maintaining Employer Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Details.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Details.htm

Maintaining Employer Details

You can maintain employer information using the Employer Details form. Use this form to update federal and state tax processing settings, local tax information, and other important employer data.

========================================================================

Setting Employer Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Details_and_General.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Details_and_General.htm

Setting Employer Details

Use the Employer Details panel to create new employer IDs and add basic employer information, or to edit information for an existing Employer ID.

Setup Procedure

To configure employer details:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details.

  3. Change these fields as required.

Field Description
Employer To create or edit an employer, enter an employer ID. IDs must be an integer up to 6 digits long. For ASO clients, this ID is the same as the client ID.
Employer Name Name that displays in PrismHR.
Employer Print Name Name that displays on checks and reports.
Federal EIN Federal Employee Identification Number issued to employers by the IRS, in one of the following formats: ##-####### (two numbers, dash, seven numbers) or ######### (nine numbers).
Address, City, State, ZIp Code, Zip Extension, Telephone Enter the employer’s basic contact information.
Obsolete Select this option if the employer is no longer active. If there are payrolls that still exist for this employer, a message displays during calculation that indicates the employer is discontinued.
G/L Company Number Prefix to the general ledger account number. > Note: Note: PrismHR accounting files put the company number before the account number. QuickBooks and PeachTree cannot process the numbers, so the system removes the company number when it builds files for those programs. You can use the G/L Company Number to group data for accounting purposes, such as for an ASO.
G/L Cost Center General ledger cost center, if any.
G/L Sub-Cost Center General ledger sub-cost center. Use this field for generating G/L accounts, if any.
New York City Public Entity Select this option if the employer is a public entity in New York City. This enables special Section 125 handling for New York City public employee health deductions, because New York State does not allow those plans to be deducted pre-tax.
ESS URL Employer Override ESS override URL for this employer.
EP URL Employer Override Employee Portal (EP) override URL for this employer.
Prism URL Employer Override PrismHR URL for this employer.
Federal Deposit Method Federal deposit method in use. Options include: - MasterTax - Select to include tax data on the MasterTax PTS file. Then, enter the MasterTax Employer ID and the EFTPS PIN code. - Other - Select if tax data on the MasterTax PTS file is not required. These fields only display if the SBEA feature set is enabled. Contact your system administrator or consult the SBEA User Guide for more information.
Certified PEO This field and the following three fields apply to the SBEA features. Select if the employer is certified by the IRS as a PEO according to the provisions of the SBEA.
Certified Start Date Date when the SBEA certification went into effect.
Certified End Date Date when the SBEA certification expires.
Limit Testing on Employer Register When the Certified PEO functionality is enabled, select this field if you want to build client entity registers, but test for federal taxes at the employer level. Select this option if you need to set the Certified PEO flag mid-year. It enables you to produce Schedule R Reports without interfering with payroll and tax processing.
PTM Identifier Number Enter the PTM Identifier Number of the employer here. This field is optional and supports alpha numeric characters. - The PTM Identifier Number field must be set at the system level on the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form, so that the PTM Identifier Number field is available on the Employer Details form here. - If no PTM Identifier Number is set at the system level on the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form, then no PTM Identifier Number will display on the files. - If an employer PTM Identifier Number on the Employer Details form exists for an employer and the same or a different PTM Identifier Number is set at the system level on the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form, then the employer PTM Identifier Number will override the system level PTM Identifier Number. Then: - The employer PTM Identifier Number on the Employer Details form will appear on all PTM reports including the Daily Tax Export (including PTM Agency export), the Monthly Tax Export and the Quarterly Tax Export reports. - If an employer PTM Identifier Number does not exist on the Employer Details form, but a system level PTM Identifier Number exists on the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form, then the system level PTM Identifier Number on the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form will appear on all PTM reports like the Daily Tax Export (including PTM Agency export), the Monthly Tax Export and the Quarterly Tax Export reports.
  1. Click Save.

Note about deleting employers

Note: If you try to delete an employer who has active employees or employees on leave, the following confirmation message displays:

[Image: screenshot]

Do the following if this message displays:

========================================================================

Setting Online Access for Form W-2

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Form_W-2_Audit.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Form_W-2_Audit.htm

Setting Online Access for Form W-2

Set up employer online access to Form W-2, Form W-2c, and Form 1099 using the Form W-2/1099 Initialization Audit & Control panel under Employer Details.

To configure online tax form access:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details and expand the Form W-2/1099 Initialization Audit & Control panel.

  3. Fill out these fields as required:

Field Description
Year Enter a tax year. The grid displays the Last Init Date, Last Init Time, and Last Init By fields. Use the Create Employee W-2 Forms (found under Work Centers > W-2 Processing) to perform these initializations.
Allow Web Access Provide web access permissions for Form W-2. Options include: - Yes - All employees can access Forms W-2 for the year. - No - No employees can access Forms W-2 for the year. - Electronic - Employees who elected early online access to their W-2s can see the forms. This is controlled by the Electronic Form W-2 option in the Employee Details > Tax tab. To see which employees have elected electronic Form W‑2 access, use the Client Master report or the Employee General Information report in Report Center.
These steps make Form W-2c/Form 1099 accessible from both Employee Details and Employee Portal (EP):
1099 Web Access Set to Yes to allow employees to view and print Form 1099.
W2C Web Access Set to Yes to allow employees to view and print Form W-2c.
Mask SSN on W-2’s Beginning In Specify a reporting year. If this field: - has a year selected then: - from that selected year onwards the Social Security Number for an employee will be masked and only the last 4 digits will display on both Form W-2 and Form W-2c PDFs. This functionality has been extended to the Employee Portal PDF. - for any prior year the Social Security Number for an employee will not be masked on both Form W-2 and Form W-2c PDFs. - does not have a year selected then: - for any year the Social Security Number for an employee will not be masked either on Form W-2 or Form W-2c PDFs.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Invoice Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Invoice_Information.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Invoice_Information.htm

Maintaining Invoice Information

Use the Invoice Information Maintenance panel to customize the information that displays on invoices. Standard invoices are not impacted by these updates.

Note: Note: See Setting Up Invoice Header Information for information on customizing invoice headers.

To customize invoice information:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details to view the Invoice Information Maintenance panel.

  3. Fill in these fields as required.

Field — Description

Contact Name — Contact person at an employer

Return Address, Return City, Return State, Return Zip Code, Return Zip Extension — General employer contact information. If a return address is not supplied, the system uses the address from the General panel.

Invoice Contact Phone — Employer phone number

Invoice Contact Fax Number — Employer fax number

Invoice Email Address — Employer email address

Invoice Website — URL for the employer website

Invoice Logo File Path — Complete path to an mvQuery printer location. For example, C:\Images\logo.gif. See see Setting Up Invoice Header Information for more information.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Identifying Local Tax Authorities

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Local_Tax_IDs.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Local_Tax_IDs.htm

Identifying Local Tax Authorities

Use the Local Tax Identifiers panel to track local authorities that this employer must pay taxes to.

The system uses this information when interfacing with MasterTax. It sends the tax IDs defined for local tax authorities on the 210 record in the MasterTax PTS file, when reporting transactions.

To define a local tax authority:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details and expand the Local Tax Identifiers panel.

  3. Enter an ID for each Local Authority that this employer must pay taxes to. The Authority Name displays.

  4. Enter the Tax ID associated with the Local Authority

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Processing Form W-2 with a Common Pay Agent

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Pay_Agent_Form_W-2.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Pay_Agent_Form_W-2.htm

Processing Form W-2 with a Common Pay Agent

Common Pay Agents provide FICA consolidation and also handle income tax withholding, reporting and remittance under their Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN). Common Pay Agent Name Control is not applied to Form W-2’s built by Client Federal Entity Registers for SBEA W2 Reporting. Common Pay Agent PDF only applies to 2023 and forward.

If an employer has registered with the IRS as using a common pay agent for remittance of federal withholding taxes, use the Employer Details > Common Pay Agent for Form W-2 Processing panel to identify the common pay agent contracted to process W-2s.

To set Common Pay Agent details:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details and expand the Common Pay Agent for Form W-2 Processing panel.

  3. Complete the following fields:

Field Name Description
Year The year for which this setup will apply. For example, for 2023 you have a common pay agent and reporting option is Agent only. For every year starting 2023 the Form W-2 or Form W-2c will report only the common pay agent information until you change it. If you make any changes later, you will need to add a line, enter the year and make the changes. For example, for 2025 you change the Report Option to *Agent\ Employer. You would then see the Common Pay Agent information reported on the Form W-2 only for 2023, 2024, and in 2025 you would see the Agent\ Employer* information reported on the Form W-2 or Form W-2c. (It is not required to add the 2024 record for common pay agent to continue)
Agent FEIN Enter the common pay agent’s FEIN (or Federal Tax Identification Number). FEIN format must be either ##-####### (two digits, dash, seven digits) or ######### (nine consecutive digits).
Agent Name The name of the agent.
Address The street address of the agent.
City The city of the agent.
State The two digit state of the agent.
Zip The zip code of the agent.
Report Option Select is the default option which will only report the employer information. You need to select one of the following options: - *Agent\ Employer* - Select this option to report the Common Pay Agent and Agent for {Employer}. - Agent only - Select this option to report only the Common Pay Agent. > Note: Note: To display Common Pay Agent information on the Form W-2 or Form W-2c PDF, even if this was used in the past, you will need to select a Report Option and Save the changes on the Employer Details form.
  1. Click Save.

PrismHR now supports Common Pay Agent reporting within the Form W-2 and Form W-2c. Previously, this information was used in third party downloads for W-2 printing. With the 2023 November QR, you will now see this information applied to the PDF generated within PrismHR and Employee Portal.

========================================================================

Setting State Tax Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_State_Tax.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_State_Tax.htm

Setting State Tax Information

Maintain state tax information in Employer Details with the State Tax panel.

To set up tax information:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details and expand the State Tax panel.

  3. In the State Tax ID Numbers table, set tax information for each state where an employer does business:

Note: Note: SUTA Rpt Entity and SIT Rpt Entity must have equivalent values. You cannot set one to report at the client level and the other to report on the employer level.

Field Description
State Two-character postal code. States will display in alphabetical order once any changes are saved.
State Name The full state name displays when you enter a postal code. For example, enter CA in the State field and the State Name of California displays.
Licensed Select Yes if an employer is a licensed PEO in a specific state.
Taxpayer ID/UI Account Employer Taxpayer ID number for a specific state. Enter APPLIED FOR if you are awaiting an ID.
State Tax Nbr State number for reporting income taxes that appears on W-2 forms.
Mag Authority ID Magnetic authorization number for a state.
Misc ID1 - California: Enter the Wage Plan Code. - Iowa: Enter the 3 digit suffix location number. If an employer has multiple locations that requires the 3-digit suffix for the location they are filing from, they should enter the 3-digit suffix location number here to capture the employer 9 digit FEIN along with the 3 digit suffix when generating the Iowa New Hire Report. Iowa New Hire reporting file will be rejected if the FEIN is not 12 digits long. - New Jersey: Enter the Disability Insurance Private Plan Number.
  1. Set up invoice and fax headings using the Heading table:

Field — Description

Heading Information — Information that prints on the invoice or fax.

Used On — Select whether the heading is used on invoices, faxes, or both.

X Coor / Y Coor — Printer Command Language/PCL coordinates for invoice headings that do not appear on a fax form.

  1. Edit and review any Federal Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA) overrides. You can override FUTA rates using the FUTA Override form: click the FUTA Override Edit field in the State Tax ID Numbers grid to edit override information.

Field — Description

Year — Tax year for the override.

Override FUTA Rate — Override tax rate.

Suppress Self-Adjust — Suppresses year-to-date self-adjustments. Select Yes to suppress for both Accrual and Billing, or select Accrual Only or Billing Only. Leave blank for neither self-adjustment type.

  1. Click Save.

Updates to Form W-2 build

The State Income Tax Account Number on the employee Form W-2 will now be pulled from the Client Details form or the Employer Details form based on the tax deduction code, unless an override exists on the Employer Details form on the SIT Rpt Entity field for that state under the State Tax section.

The State Income Tax Account Number on the employee Form W-2 will be:

Note: If the State Tax ID is not available on the corresponding reporting entity, the Form W-2 will not be built, and an error will appear in the W2 Error Report stating State Employer ID not found for Client # for State XX OR State Employer ID not found for Employer for State XX

========================================================================

Establishing Employer Tax Rates (SUTA)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Tax_Rates_SUTA.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Tax_Rates_SUTA.htm

Establishing Employer Tax Rates (SUTA)

Use the Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) form to set up State Unemployment Tax Act (SUTA) and State Disability Insurance (SDI) rates for an employer and the states where they do business. (In PrismHR, SUTA is based on employee home location.)

Note: Click the Data Import Tool icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to upload a database file and import data. (This icon displays for all user roles, except “Inquiry Only.”)

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, see the Payroll Administration Guide.

To set rates:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer Details to view the Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) panel.

  3. Fill in these fields as required.

Panel Description
Tax Rates Define the general Tax Rate information: - Enter the Employer ID. - Enter or select the State in which the employer does business. - Select an existing Effective Date, or click New Date and enter the date on which the rates go into effect. > Note: Note: The effective date is when the rate takes effect, not when the employer received the rate.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Viewing an Employer Tax Register

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Tax_Register.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_Tax_Register.htm

Viewing an Employer Tax Register

The Employer Tax Register displays an employee’s SUTA or SDI tax deductions for a specific tax year or quarter, by employer.

Note: Note: Only Service Provider users have access to the Employer Tax Register.

To view an employer tax register:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Employer|View, select Employer Tax Register. [Image: screenshot]

  3. Fill out these fields as required.

Field — Description

Employer ID / Employee ID / Tax Dedn Code — Click the link and select an item from the pop-up list, or enter a value in the field to have the system search for the item.

For the Year — Select a tax year from the drop-down.

Quarter — Select a quarter in which taxes were paid. Options include Year-to-Date and Quarter 1 - Quarter 4.

========================================================================

Setting Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_WC_Accrual_Modifiers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Employer_WC_Accrual_Modifiers.htm

Setting Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers

Set Workers’ Compensation rates for a selected employer and state with the Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers form.

Importing an Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers File

Clicking the Import button

[Image: screenshot]

displays the Data Import Tool form, which allows you to import an Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers template file that contains the following fields (this file must be in .txt format):

The Import button displays on the Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers form for all service provider user roles except the “Deny” and “Inquiry-only” roles. Imports can be performed for multiple clients at the operations level.

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, refer to the PrismHR Payroll Administration Guide.

To set rates:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers.

  3. Complete the following fields:

Field Description
Employer Enter or select the employer ID.
State Code State code where the employer does business.
Effective Date Date when workers’ compensation is effective. Enter a new date or select an existing date.
Discount/Debit Employer discount/debit rate for the state.
Modifier Modifier rate for the state.
Effective Rate This value is determined by the Discount/Debit and Modifier rates.
Override by W/C Policy You can override the rates by policy in the Override by W/C Policy panel: - Enter the W/C Policy. - Enter the Discount/Debit rate for the policy. - Enter the Modifier for the policy.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Creating the ESAC Client Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/ESAC%20Client%20Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/ESAC Client Export.htm

Creating the ESAC Client Export

The Employer Services Assurance Corporation (ESAC) is an independent non-profit corporation; it is the official accreditation and financial assurance organization for the PEO industry. The ESAC Client Export process creates a file that contains a list of clients for a specified PEO, which can be sent to ESAC for accreditation verification.

Note: Note: This process does not use Client Access Group security.

To access this form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, select ESAC Client Export.

To download the ESAC Client export:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Start Date Enter the start date of the export period.
End Date Enter the end date of the export period. > Note: Note: The End Date must be after the Start Date and must be the last day of the month.
Include PEO Clients Only? This field is optional. Select one of the following options from the drop-down: - Yes (Default) - Only PEO clients are included in the export. - No - All clients
  1. Click Build. The ESAC Client Export processing starts. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the export file.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the ESAC Client Export page

  3. Click the Download link to download the export file.

  4. Click Clear to clear the screen at any time.

========================================================================

BLS Multiple Worksite Electronic File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting%20BLS%20Multiple%20Worksite%20Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting BLS Multiple Worksite Data.htm

BLS Multiple Worksite Electronic File

Use this form to generate the BLS-3020 electronic file to be submitted to the federal or state Bureau of Labor Statistics.

BLS Reports provide analytical information related to the labor force, consumer spending, earnings, and work injuries and illnesses. Typically, reports contain a few pages of written analysis followed by statistical tables, which allow you to gather detailed information on economic conditions. Most reports have an annual cycle.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security.

To access this form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Government Exports, click BLS Multiple Worksite Electronic File.

To generate the BLS Multiple Worksite Electronic file:

  1. Fill in the following fields:
Field Description
BLS Type Select the BLS type from the following: - PEO (Default) - ASO
  1. Click Build.

  2. Click Yes in the dialog box when asked Are you sure you wish to build the BLS Multiple Worksite Report at this time?

  3. A job progress window opens showing the building the BLS Multiple Worksite Downloads Report. The errors are listed. You can go back and fix those errors and redo the process.

  4. Click Close to close the job progress window

  5. The report is downloaded on your system in a .txt format.

========================================================================

Exporting Daily Tax Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting%20Daily%20Tax%20Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting Daily Tax Data.htm

Exporting Daily Tax Data

You use PrismHR to export daily tax information to a CSV or TXT file. This file generates all relevant daily tax data from the tax registers and compiles it into a report, which you can export into Excel.

To build the monthly tax report:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Action, select Daily Tax Export.

  3. Fill in the form as shown in the following table.

Field Description
Employer ID This field is optional. Leave this field blank to generate the daily tax data export for all employers. - If you want to limit this export to a particular employer, enter the Employer ID here or click the Employer ID link and select it from the Select Employer dialog box. Make sure that the Filter Option is set to Limit To. - If you want run this export for all employers except a particular employer, then enter the Employer ID here or click the Employer ID link and select it from the Select Employer dialog box. Make sure that the Filter Option is set to Exclude From.
  1. Click Build. When the progress box shows that the process is complete, you have the following options:

If you click Close, you return to the Daily Tax Export page where the following links are available:

If you click Report, the Job Control Status Report opens. See Viewing the Job Control Status Report.

  1. Click Cancel to refresh the form.

The PTM Tax Agency Export has the following columns:

========================================================================

Exporting IL Employer Monthly Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting%20IL%20Employer%20Monthly%20Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting IL Employer Monthly Data.htm

Exporting IL Employer Monthly Data

Employers in Illinois who have more than 25 IL employees must submit an electronic file to the state each month, for SUI wage reporting. They have the option of using either a CSV or Fixed Width Text file.

To export Illinois employer monthly data:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Action, select IL Employer Monthly Reporting. The IL Employer Monthly Reporting page opens.

  3. Fill in the form as shown in the following table.

Use this option — To define this

Employer ID — Enter the Employer ID or click the link to display a list from which you can select an employer. The system displays the employer name.

Month Begin Date — Enter the start month for the report.

Month End Date — Enter the end month for the report.

Company ID — Enter the company ID or click the link to display a list from which you can select a company ID. The system displays the company ID and name. To create a new row where you can enter another company. click + or >

Override for Company Level Reporting — Select this check box if you want to override settings and use the company tax registers.

Report File Type — Select Text or CSV.

  1. Click Build.

========================================================================

Exporting Monthly Tax Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting%20monthly%20tax%20data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting monthly tax data.htm

Exporting Monthly Tax Data

You can use PrismHR to export monthly tax information to a CSV or TXT file. This file generates all relevant monthly tax data from the tax registers and compiles it into a report, which you can export into Excel.

To build the monthly tax report:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Action, select Monthly Tax Export. The Monthly Tax Export Entry page opens.

  3. Fill in the form as shown in the following table. When searching for information, you have the following options for displaying search results:

Use this option — To define this

Tax Year — Enter a tax year from 2000 to 2050.

Tax Month — Select the tax month.

State — Select the state.

Reporting Type — Select Employer or Client.

Limit to Employer ID — Click the link and then select an employer from the list. The system displays the employer name.

Link to Company ID — Click the link and then select a company. The system displays the company name.

Export File to CSV/TXT — Select TXT or CSV.

  1. Click Build. When the progress box shows that the process is complete, you have the following options:

If you click Close, you return to the Monthly Tax Export page where the following links are available:

If you click Report, the Job Control Status Report opens. See Viewing the Job Control Status Report

========================================================================

Exporting Quarterly Tax Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting%20Quarterly%20Tax%20Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Exporting Quarterly Tax Data.htm

Exporting Quarterly Tax Data

You can use PrismHR to export quarterly tax information as a CSV or TXT file. This file generates all relevant quarterly tax data from the tax registers and compiles it into a report, which you can export into Excel.

To build the quarterly tax report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > 3rd-Party Exports > Quarterly Tax Export.

  2. Fill in the form as shown in the following table. When searching for information, you have the following options for displaying search results:

Use this option — To define this

Tax Year — Enter a tax year from 2000 to 2050.

Tax Quarter — Select the tax quarter.

Limit to Employer ID — Click the link and then select an employer from the list. The system displays the employer name.

Limit to Client ID — Click the link and then select a client. The system displays the client name.

Export File to CSV/TXT — Select TXT or CSV.

  1. Click Build. A progress box displays the status.

  2. When the progress box shows that the process is complete, you have the following options:

If you click Close, you return to the Quarterly Tax Export page where the following links are available:

If you click Report, the Job Control Status Report opens. See Viewing the Job Control Status Report

========================================================================

Federal 940 Credit Reduction Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Federal%20940%20Credit%20Reduction%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Federal 940 Credit Reduction Report.htm

Federal 940 Credit Reduction Report

Use this form to generate a report to display the FUTA taxable amount by state for a calendar year. You can run this report by Clients, Client Federal Entity or Employer.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click Reports. Under Employer|Report, click Federal 940 Credit Reduction Report.

To generate the Federal 940 Credit Reduction Report:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Year Select the calendar year you want to run this report for from the drop-down. The default option is the current year. The drop-down has a ten year look back starting from the current year.
Employer ID This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all employers. If you want to run this report for a particular employer, enter the employer ID here or click the Employer ID link and select it from the Select Employer dialog box.
SUI State This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all states. If you want to run this report for a particular state, enter the two digit state code here or click the SUI State link and select it from the Select States dialog box.
Report Type Select the type of report you want from the following options: - Client – This is the default option. - Client Federal Entity - Employer
  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report shows up on screen.

If you run this report by Client, then this report shows the following columns:

If you run this report by Client Federal Entity, then this report shows the following columns:

If you run this report by Employer, then this report shows the following columns:

========================================================================

FICA Tax Imbalance Report - By Employee

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/FICA%20Tax%20Imbalance%20Report%20-%20By%20Employee.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/FICA Tax Imbalance Report - By Employee.htm

FICA Tax Imbalance Report - By Employee

Use this form to generate a report to display a breakdown of employee and employer paid OASDI (Social Security) and Medicare taxes that are out of balance on a voucher by voucher basis sorted by Client ID.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click Reports. Under Employer|Report, click FICA Tax Imbalance Report - By Employee.

To generate the FICA Tax Imbalance Report - By Employee:

  1. Complete the following:

Field Name — Description

Start Pay Date — Enter the starting pay date for which you want to run this report.

End Pay Date — Enter the ending pay date for which you want to run this report.

Employer ID — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all employers. If you want to restrict this report to selected employers, enter the employer IDs here or click the Employer ID link and select them from the Select Employer dialog box.

  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report displays on screen.

This report shows the following columns:

========================================================================

Employer-Level Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Chapter_ER_Admin.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Chapter_ER_Admin.htm

Employer-Level Setup

In PrismHR, employers can include your organization, divisions of your organization, and client companies that manage themselves to some extent. You must set up employers as part of your basic system configuration.

========================================================================

Inquiries

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Chapter_Inquiries.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Chapter_Inquiries.htm

Inquiries

You can look up employer-related information with inquiries.

========================================================================

Selecting Contractor New Hires

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Contractor_New_Hires.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Contractor_New_Hires.htm

Selecting Contractor New Hires

Select the type of hire when hiring new employees with the New Hire form.

To access the New Hire form:

  1. Click HR.

  2. From the HR|Action menu, select New Hire.

  3. Complete the required information, including the Hire Type. For example: [Image: screenshot]

  4. Click Save.

See the Human Resources Guide for detailed instructions on setting up new hires.

========================================================================

Setting Up Contractors

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Contractor_Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Contractor_Setup.htm

Setting Up Contractors

Your organization needs to set a couple of options to enable your clients to hire contractors.

There are several options you need to set up that enable clients to hire contractors.

To enable independent contractors:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters. [Image: screenshot]

  3. Select Independent Contractors Allowed.

  4. Click Save.

To allow 1099 contractors:

  1. Click Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Client Details. The Client Details form displays.

  3. Select the Other tab.

  4. Select Contractors (1099) Allowed. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Tax Administration

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Section_Admin.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Section_Admin.htm

Tax Administration

========================================================================

Building FUTA Credit Reduction Registers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/FUTA-Credit-Registers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/FUTA-Credit-Registers.htm

Building FUTA Credit Reduction Registers

You can build Federal Unemployment Tax Act credit registers with the FUTA Credit Reduction Register Build form. This process also creates the - 17 record.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To rebuild FUTA credit registers:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click MasterTax Processing. > Setup Forms > FUTA Credit Reduction Register Build.

  2. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Tax Year — Tax year for this register build.

SUI State — State that this report is being generated for.

Employers — Select an employer ID to limit the report to a specific employer. Leave the field blank to include all employers in the report.

  1. Click Build. The system asks if you want to proceed.

  2. Click Yes to confirm the register build. The system displays a status for the rebuild operation.

========================================================================

Building the EES Authentication File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Generating%20the%20EES%20Authentication%20report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Generating the EES Authentication report.htm

Building the EES Authentication File

Use the EES Authentication File form to download an authentication file for EES Plus. This enables employees to create accounts on the EES Plus website.

To download the EES Authentication file:

  1. Click the Back Office menu.

  2. From Employer|Action, select EES Authentication File. The EES Authentication File page opens.

  3. Complete the appropriate information:

Field — Description

Use SSN or EEID in Field1 — Select whether to include social security number or employee ID in Field 1.

Use SSN or EEID in Field2 — Select whether to include social security number or employee ID in Field 2.

Use DOB or PIN in Field3 — Select whether to include date of birth or PIN in Field 3.

Year — Select the year for the report. This will default to the current year, but the drop down will provide the option to select the following year as well to not prevent you from working ahead. The download does not report employees that were terminated in previous years.

  1. Click Build. The following warning displays:

[Image: EES Authentication File Warning]

  1. Click Yes. A job progress window opens and the system creates the download file.

  2. Click Close to close the job progress window. The CSV file named EES.AUTH is downloaded to your system.

========================================================================

Maintaining the Quarterly Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Maintain-Quarterly-Download.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Maintain-Quarterly-Download.htm

Maintaining the Quarterly Download

Use this form to update two SUTA downloads for missed payments in previous quarters and to update the quarterly register without having to re-run the previous quarter.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To update the SUTA downloads for missed payments:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Exports > Maintain Quarterly Download.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Reporting Entity — Select Employer or Client.

State — Select the state.

Employer ID/Company ID — Select the employer or company ID. This changes to Company ID if Client is selected as the Reporting Entity.

Year — Select the tax year.

Quarter — Select the quarter.

Tax Rate — Enter the tax rate.

Previous Quarter(s) Underpayment — Enter underpayments for the previous quarters, including previously due penalty and interest).

Interest Due — Enter the amount of interest due.

Penalty Due — Enter the amount of the penalty due.

Credit/Overpayment — Enter the previous credit or overpayment to apply to the balance due.

Employer Assessment Amount — If applicable, enter the employer assessment amount, as levied by the state.

Amount Remitted — Enter the amount remitted to the state.

  1. Select one of the following options:

========================================================================

Maintaining Employee Lock-in Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Maintaining-Employee-LockIn.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Maintaining-Employee-LockIn.htm

Maintaining Employee Lock-in Information

Employers and employees might receive a lock-in letter from the IRS if they are in debt to that organization. This letter states how much withholding allowance the employee can claim — typically zero. Employees who have a lock-in letter cannot change their allowances in Employee Portal. A lock-in can also be set for a particular state.

When an IRS employee lock-in is set, any users who are not Service Providers will see the following message when they try to change their withholding amount:

Note: Federal taxes for this employee are locked and may not be changed.

To maintain employee lock-in information:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Change, select IRS Employee Lock In Letter. The IRS Employee Lock In Letter form opens.

  3. Fill in the form as shown in the following table. When searching for information, you have the following options for displaying search results:

Field Description
Client ID Click the link and select a Client ID. The form displays the Client ID and Name.
Employee ID Click the link and select an Employee ID. The form displays the Employee ID and Name.
IRS Lock-In Date Click and select the IRS Lock-In Date. > Note: Note: The system will ignore any future dates entered in this field. The lock will go into effect immediately, even if a future date is entered.
Lock-In State If applicable, expand the list and select the Lock-In State.
Lock-In Date If applicable, click and select the Lock-In Date for the state.
Lock-In Auth User Click the link and select a service provider who is authorized to change the withholding amount for an employee who has a lock-in letter. The system displays the ID and username of the service provider in the list. - Click + in the header or > in any row to display an additional row where you can select another service provider. - Click x to delete a service provider from the list.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Mass Update W-2 Access

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Mass_Update_W2_Access.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Mass_Update_W2_Access.htm

Providing Employee Access to W-2 Forms

Set employee access to electronic W-2 forms for multiple employers using the Bulk Update W-2 Access form. You must initialize the W-2s before you can provide access.

Note: Note: In Employer Details, users must provide the employer with online access to W‑2s. See Setting Online Access for Form W-2

To set employee W-2 access:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Printing > Bulk Update W-2 Access. [Image: screenshot]

  2. Complete the fields as required.

Field — Description

Tax Year — Tax year for a W-2.

Search for Employer Name — Displays a list of employers after an employer name is entered.

Action — Sets access for W-2s. Options include: - Set all to Show W-2: All employees can access their W-2s for the tax year. - Set all to Hide W-2: No employees can access their W-2s for the tax year. - Set all to Early Access: Only employees who elected early online W-2 access can view their forms. This is set in the Electronic Form W-2 option in the Employee DetailsTax tab. To see which employees have elected electronic Form W‑2 access, use the Client Master report or the Employee General Information report in Report Center. You can also click the links in the W2 Web Access column to change the settings for individual employers.

If most employers are set to one access level and some are not, use the Action drop-down for the most common setting and then click the links for the exceptions. For example, you could use the drop-down to apply Set all to Early Access to the entire list and then use the links to change the access for the employers who are not ready for early access.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Setting MasterTax Interface Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-Interface-Parameters.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-Interface-Parameters.htm

Setting MasterTax Interface Parameters

This form controls the version number, SBEA vs Non-SBEA reporting breakouts, File IDs and Customer codes for MasterTax. It also features options that control how data is generated on MasterTax reporting files.

To set MasterTax interface parameters:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click MasterTax Processing > Setup Forms > Mastertax Interface Parameters.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Mastertax Interface Active Activates the MasterTax interface. Enable this to have the system write transactions to the TAX.JOURNAL file automatically during batch posts, voucher reversals, or tax adjustment posts.
Mastertax PTS Import File Version Select the appropriate version of the PTS import file. PrismHR setting this to Version 29, the most recent supported version. If you are running a version of the MasterTax PTS Import File that is version 28 or older, you will receive and the following error message: [Image: screenshot] Position 57-58 on the header record Line 1 in 000 record will reflect “29”. > Note: Note: MasterTax PTS has required updates for Alabama withholding overtime wage reporting changes in record 500 - starting in Q1 2024. PrismHR now supports this when using version 28 in the MasterTax PTS Import File Version field in the MasterTax Interface Parameters form. These changes should only appear when using Version 28 in the MasterTax PTS Import File Version field. If you are using Version 20 or earlier, you will not see the updates. - For both SBEA and non-SBEA clients, the MasterTax v29 PTS will include Work Out of State Flag which is either Y or N in position 15 for the 210 and 500 records for PA resident tax codes not including Philadelphia. This does not apply to Philadelphia residents and this position will remain blank for Philadelphia and all other locality taxes. For example: - If an employee has a resident address and the Courtesy EIT is withheld for Lancaster, PA - position 15 for the tax code 39711930-31 will report Y for all records. - If an employee has a resident and work address in Lancaster, PA - position 15 for the tax code 39711930-31 will report N for all records.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

MasterTax Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-Landing-Page.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-Landing-Page.htm

MasterTax Processing

The options available in the MasterTax Processing work center are organized under the following headings:

========================================================================

Building the MasterTax Monthly Tax Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-Monthly-Tax-Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-Monthly-Tax-Export.htm

Building the MasterTax Monthly Tax Export

Use this form to build a monthly tax summary, which provides a breakdown of an employee’s monthly tax information.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To build the monthly tax summary:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click MasterTax Processing > File Exports > MasterTax MTS File Build.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Tax Year Year the tax summary is based on.
Tax Month Month the tax summary is based on.
State State the tax summary is based on. If Pennsylvania is selected: - All tax codes that start with 39 are added to the Monthly Tax Summary file. - If the MasterTax version is set to a value lower than 25, the system displays this warning: You must be on version 25 to generate the file for Pennsylvania. This version can be edited on the MasterTax Interface Parameters. - The MTS file is only generated for LTS taxes. This includes any tax code that starts with 39, but it has 7 digits for the first part of the tax code and -31 for the second part of the tax code. For example, 390950320-31. - Excludes any taxes with an authority ID of 391013000 in the tax code because these are not monthly reported taxes for Philadelphia.
  1. Click Build. A progress window opens.

  2. Click Close when the export is finished. You are presented with these export options:

MTS File History

MTS File History provides a way to save historical files and download them more than once. MTS File History is closed by default, but can be expanded by clicking +. Filters let you narrow down search options by State, Tax Year, or Tax Month.

The history displays the date and time the process was started, the person who started the process, the file name, and both detailed and summary reports.

You can download reports as .txt or .csv by clicking the hyperlinks. In this example, if you click the first link under Detailed Report, the report is displayed and you can print it, save as PDF, or download in .XLS format.

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

MasterTax PTS Clear Lock

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-PTS-Clear-Lock.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/MasterTax-PTS-Clear-Lock.htm

MasterTax PTS Clear Lock

A process lock is applied to the Mastertax PTS (Payroll Tax Summary) file during its build process to prevent other users from attempting builds. However, it is possible that the process that generates the file can hang, preventing generation of a new file. This function removes the lock on the PTS generation process so the file can be recreated.

To remove the lock on a PTS file being built:

  1. From the Work Centers panel, click MasterTax Processing.

  2. From File Exports, click Mastertax PTS File Build.

  3. Click Build. If a PTS build is already in progress, this message displays: [Image: screenshot]

  4. Click Yes to remove the lock.

  5. Click Build again to start the build process.

========================================================================

Medicare Tier 2 Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Medicare%20Tier%202%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Medicare Tier 2 Report.htm

Medicare Tier 2 Report

This report shows the employees who have more than 200K in Medicare subject wages for an employer for a particular quarter in a year.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax section, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly Tax Reports click Medicare Tier 2 Report.

To generate the Medicare Tier 2 Report:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Employer ID Enter the employer ID for whom you want to run this report or click the Employer ID link and select one from the list. > Note: Note: This field is optional. If no Employer ID is entered, the report will run for all employers.
Tax Year Select the tax year from the drop-down for which you want to run this report. This field defaults to the current year based on today’s date.
Tax Quarter Select the tax quarter from the drop-down for which you want to run this report.
Report Type Select the report type that you want from the following options: - Schedule R - This report type provides a breakout of the Employer ID, Client ID, Client Federal Entity and Employee ID. - Non Schedule R - This report type provides a breakout of Employer ID and Employee ID.
  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report shows up on the screen.

  2. Click XLS to download the report.

========================================================================

New York Quarterly Combined Wage Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/New%20York%20Quarterly%20Combined%20Wage%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/New York Quarterly Combined Wage Report.htm

New York Quarterly Combined Wage Report

Use this form to generate a report to display the original and amended NY Quarterly Combined Wages Report, as well as an employee detail download of those employees with NY SUTA / Income Tax and an exception report (when an employee has negative wages in the reporting quarter) for an employer for a quarter.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

The state of New York has updated their combined reporting file specifications as of 01/01/2025. Click thislinkto visit the official website of New York State for the changes to withholding tax and wage reporting.

As this report can be created in Report Center in CSV format as per the updated specifications, you will need to use the Report Center only to generate this report for Q1 2025 and beyond. However, you can still generate this report in PrismHR for Q4 2024 and prior for past filings and verification of data.

To access the form, under Work Centers, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly Tax Reports, under NEW YORK QUARTERLY REPORTS, click New York Quarterly Combined Wage Report.

To generate the New York Quarterly Combined Wage Report for Q1 2025 and beyond:

Use Report Center only to generate this report for any period starting Q1 2025 and beyond. For information on how to generate this report in Report Center, consult the Report Center help documentation located on the Report Center sidebar. If this report is not available for your User ID in Report Center, contact your Report Center Administrator for assistance.

To generate the New York Quarterly Combined Wage Report for Q4 2024 or prior:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Report Type Select the report type that you want to run from the following options: - Original - This is the default option. Line 2 Position 127 displays an O in the download file. - Amended - Line 2 Position 127 displays an A in the download file.
  1. Click Generate Report to generate the report. A job progress window open up. Click Close to close the job progress window. In case of any errors, redo the process. The following three links become visible on the form.

The Detail report in PrismHR shows the following columns:

========================================================================

Pennsylvania Local EIT Quarterly Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Pennsylvania%20Local%20EIT%20Quarterly%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Pennsylvania Local EIT Quarterly Report.htm

Pennsylvania Local EIT Quarterly Report

Use this form to generate a quarterly report to show the details for one or more Employers of Pennsylvania Local EIT Taxes. This is a single page report for each Municipal Taxing Authority and those employees who have Pennsylvania Local EIT taxes under that authority with a subtotal for the authority. It includes the Gross Pay, Taxable Wages, EIT Withheld, and the Resident PSD code per employee.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, under Work Centers, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly Tax Reports, click Pennsylvania Local EIT Quarterly Report.

To generate the Pennsylvania Local EIT Quarterly Report:

  1. Complete the Report Period using the following:
Field Name Description
Tax Year Select the tax year for which you want to run this report. The tax year defaults to the current year, or you may select another one from the drop-down which has a ten year look back.
Tax Quarter Select the tax quarter for which you want to run this report. The tax quarter defaults to the previous quarter, or you may select another one from the drop-down. Valid options between 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Sort Select one of the following sort options for your report: - Employer ID - this is the default option - Client ID
  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report shows up on screen.

This report shows the following columns:

========================================================================

Exporting Pennsylvania Local Taxes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Pennsylvania-Local-Tax-Exports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Pennsylvania-Local-Tax-Exports.htm

Exporting Pennsylvania Local Taxes

Use this form to create the following local tax downloads for Pennsylvania:

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the EIT (Earned Income Tax) download for Keystone:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Export > Pennsylvania Local Tax Exports.

  2. In the Vendor/Template list, select Keystone.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Tax Type — Select EIT.

Employer ID — Click the link and select the employer for the download

Year — Select the year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Reporting Period — Select Quarter or Month

Quarter/Month — If Quarter is selected as the reporting period, select the quarter. If Month is selected, select the month.

  1. Click Generate File. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Pennsylvania Local Tax Exports page. You can see a preview of the file by expanding the Preview panel.

  3. Click the Download File to download the file.

To build the EIT (Earned Income Tax) download for Berkheimer:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Export > Pennsylvania Local Tax Exports.

  2. In the Vendor/Template list, select Berkheimer.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Tax Type — Select EIT.

Employers — If blank, the download includes all employers. If you want to restrict the download to specific employers, click the Employer ID link and select the employers. Click Done when finished.

Year — Select the year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Reporting Period — Select Quarter or Month

Quarter/Month — If Quarter is selected as the reporting period, select the quarter. If Month is selected, select the month.

Report by Company — Specify whether to organize the download by company.

Suppress District Limiter — Select this option if you want to send all tax records regardless of the district. Expand the PA Local Districts panel if you want to specify the local districts and then click Save.

  1. Click Generate File. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Pennsylvania Local Tax Exports page. You can see a preview of the file by expanding the Preview panel.

  3. Click the Download File to download the file.

To build the Berkheimer LST (Local State Tax) download:

  1. In the Vendor/Template list, select Berkheimer.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Tax Type — Select LST.

Employers — If blank, the download includes all employers. If you want to restrict the download to specific employers, click the Employer ID link and select the employers. Click Done when finished.

Year — Select the year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — Select the quarter for the download.

Report by Company — If selected, the report is organized by company rather than employer.

Suppress District Limiter — Select this option if you want to send all tax records regardless of the district. Expand the PA Local Districts panel if you want to specify the local districts and then click Save.

  1. Click Generate File. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Pennsylvania Local Tax Exports page. You can see a preview of the file by expanding the Preview panel.

  3. Click the Download File to download the file.

========================================================================

Periodic Tax JSON Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Periodic%20Tax%20JSON%20Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Periodic Tax JSON Export.htm

Periodic Tax JSON Export

Use the Periodic Tax JSON Export form to generate PrismHR Tax Periodic JSON export file or to regenerate a processed PTS file in the PrismHR Tax JSON Format.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form. PrismHR

To access this form, on the Work Centers under Tax, click PrismHR Tax Processing. Under File Exports, click Periodic Tax JSON Export.

To build the periodic tax JSON export file:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Build File by Select one of the following options from the following: - All Clients and Employers - This is the default option. Select this option to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for all clients and employers. - Employer ID - Select this option if you want to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for all employers, all employers except some or some employers. Enter the specific Employer IDs in the box on the right or click the Employer ID hyperlink to select them from the Select Employer dialog box. Set the Filter Option field to: - Limit To from the drop-down to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for the specified employers. - Exclude From from the drop-down, to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for all employers except the specified employers. - Client ID - Select this option if you want to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for all client or for all clients except some clients or for some clients. Enter the specific Client IDs in the box on the right or click the Client ID hyperlink to select them from the Client Master Search dialog box. Set the Filter Option field to: - Limit To from the drop-down to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for the specified clients. - Exclude From from the drop-down to build the Periodic Payroll Tax Export file for all clients except the specified clients. - Regenerate Processed PTS File - Select this option to regenerate a processed PTS file in JSON format. Select the appropriate Processed PTS File from the drop-down to regenerate.
  1. Click Build to generate the export file. The following hyperlinks appear on the form depending on the selections made:

Note: If you are running this build for All Clients and Employers and set the Report Period as Include All, then the build process might take a while.

  1. Click Cancel to clear this form at any time.

========================================================================

Printing Employee 1099 Forms

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Print%20Employee%201099%20Forms.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Print Employee 1099 Forms.htm

Printing Employee 1099 Forms

Use this form to print 1099 forms for employees.

Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form.

To access this form, click Work Centers. In the Work Centers|Tax section, click 1099 Processing, then click Print Employee 1099 Forms.

To print 1099 forms for employees:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Tax Year Select the tax year to be processed. The default tax year is the prior year based upon today’s date.
Create Forms By Select an option if you want to generate 1099 forms for employees: - Employer: Select this option if you want to print Forms 1099 for employees for certain employers. Enter the employer IDs here or click the Employer ID link and select the employers from the Select Employer dialog box. - Client: Select this option if you want to print Forms 1099 for employees for certain clients. Enter the client IDs here or click the Client ID link and select the clients from the Select Clients list. - All (default)
  1. Click Print to print the 1099 forms for employees based on the selections made above.

========================================================================

Printing Employee W-2 Forms

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Print%20W-2%20Forms.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Print W-2 Forms.htm

Printing Employee W-2 Forms

You can print all Forms W‑2 together or specify ones printed to a particular group by setting certain criteria.

Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form.

To access this form, click Work Centers. In the Work Centers|Tax section, click W-2 Processing, then click Print W-2 Forms.

To print W-2 forms for employees:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Tax Year Select the tax year to be processed. The default tax year will the prior year based upon today’s date.
Create Forms By Select if you want to generate Form W-2 for employees for: - Employer: Select this option if you want to print Form W-2 for employees for certain employers. Enter the employer IDs here or click the Employer ID link and select the employers from the Select Employer dialog box. - Client: Select this option if you want to print Form W-2 for employees for certain clients. Enter the client IDs here or click the Client ID link and select the clients from the Select Client dialog box. - All (default)
  1. Click Print to print the Form W-2s for the employees based on the selections made above.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

========================================================================

Building PrismHR Client Setup JSON Export File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/PrismHR%20Tax%20Client%20Setup%20Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/PrismHR Tax Client Setup Export.htm

Building PrismHR Client Setup JSON Export File

Use the PrismHR Tax Client Setup Export form to build the PrismHR Client Setup JSON export file. This will create an initial JSON export for setting up an initial group of client data in PrismHR Tax.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form.

To access this form, on the Work Centers under Tax, click PrismHR Tax Processing. Under Setup, click PrismHR Tax Client Setup Export.

To set up an initial group of client data in PrismHR Tax:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Date Range Select this option to limit the setup to a specific date range. Complete the following fields which will only display if you select this option: - Tax Date Start - Enter the starting tax date of the group of clients to be included in the client setup files. - Tax Date End - Enter the ending tax date of the group of clients to be included in the client setup files. > Note: Note: We suggest using a period that does not exceed a single quarter for each setup export.
  1. Click Build. If successful, the Download PrismHR Tax Agency Export File hyper link will appear. (If an Account No. and a Routing No. is available on the PrismHR Tax Parameters form, then this report will include the override fields.) When generating the PrismHR Tax Client Setup JSON file, any client reported taxes will include a 00-10 and 00-17 (FIT and FUTA tax code) required for set up.

  2. Click Cancel to clear this form at any time.

========================================================================

Setting Up Tax Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/PrismHR%20Tax%20Parameters.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/PrismHR Tax Parameters.htm

Setting Up Tax Parameters

Use the PrismHR Tax Parameters form to set up parameters to be used for various needs in the PrismHR Tax files. This form is currently informational only with future development planned for future quarters.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form.

To access this form, on the Work Centers under Tax, click PrismHR Tax Processing. Under Setup, click PrismHR Tax Parameters.

To set up PrismHR Tax Parameters:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
PrismHR Tax Interface Active This field is currently inactive. Functionality will be released later in 2025.
PrismHR Periodic File Version Select one of the following options: - Version 01 - This is the only options available at this time.
  1. Click Save to save the parameters set on this form.

========================================================================

Working with PrismHR Tax Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/PrismHR%20Tax%20Processing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/PrismHR Tax Processing.htm

Working with PrismHR Tax Processing

Under the Work Centers menu, under the Tax section, a new group named PrismHR Tax Processing is added. This is a central location to access the PrismHR tax setup and reporting forms.

[Image: screenshot]

The following two sections are available under PrismHR Tax Processing work center:

========================================================================

Exporting the QEX Plus 941 File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/QEX-941-Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/QEX-941-Export.htm

Exporting the QEX Plus 941 File

QEX Plus is a third-party software application that imports information and processes IRS tax payments for certified PEOs. The QEX Plus 941 Export form builds three .csv files that are uploaded to QEX Plus for processing.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To export and process the QEX Plus 941 file:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > 3rd-Party Exports > 941 File Processing.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Employer ID — Click the link and select the ID of the employer whose information is being uploaded and processed.

Year — Year for the tax information.

Quarter — Quarter of the year for this tax information. For example, 1 indicates first quarter, and so forth.

Include Schedule R? — Generates a third, optional file that breaks out federal taxes by client. Enabling this field displays the Schedule R Report field.

Deposit Schedule — Specifies the frequency at which the employer makes deposits. Options are Monthly and Semi-Monthly.

941 Worksheet — Builds the Form 941 worksheet.

941 Schedule B — Builds Form 941 Schedule B.

Schedule R Report — Builds the Schedule R report.

  1. Click Build.

========================================================================

Reporting Qualified Overtime and Tips

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Qualified%20Tips.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Qualified Tips.htm

Reporting Qualified Overtime and Tips

Use the Qualified Tips and Overtime form to update the annual data for qualified overtime and qualified tips to report them in the employee Form W-2 for the tax year This option is provided to support federal reporting and compliance requirements supporting the One Big Beautiful Bill Act (OBBBA). For more information, please visit the article named OBBBA No Tax Setup Guide on the Customer Resource Center. If an employee works for multiple clients in a tax year, this form will report information for the activeclient only. If an employee works for multiple clients in the same employer, then Box 14 will have combined amounts when built on the employer. W2 data will be aggregated by employer if applicable. If an employee works between multiple positions, you should determine a single TTO Code for reporting purposes.

Box 14 of the employee Form W-2 reports the qualified tips and overtime dollar amounts against the following applicable designations for SBEA and employer builds:

Note: Note: You cannot access this form using the search bar.

To access this form for an employee, select the employee in the Employee Details form. From the Actions menu, select the Qualified Tips and Overtime form for the employee for the client.

Note: This information can also be added via the Data Import Tool.

To report qualified overtime and tips for an employee for an active client:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

Employee ID — This field is auto-populated with the Employee ID from the Employee Details form.

Client ID — This field is auto-populated with the active Client ID.

Employer ID — If the employee has more than one employer for the active client in the tax year, select the Employer ID for the list of employer IDs available in the drop-down. This list will populate the main employer for the client and any alternate employer assigned to the client.

Entity ID — If the active client is set up to have a Client Federal Entity, it will display here. Note: If the client was cloned from another client prior to the option to clone the Client Federal Entity on the utility, you may see a federal entity when there should not be. If this occurs you should remove the entity on the client by following the steps listed here.

Year — Select the tax year.

TTO Code — Enter the TTO Code (Tipped Taxable Occupation Code) manually, or you can click the TTO Code hyperlink and select it from the TTO Codes dialog.

TTOC Tip Amount — Enter the TTOC Tip Amount for the corresponding TTO Code.

Premium OT Amount — Enter an approximate premium portion of overtime, if applicable.

  1. Click Save to save the record.

  2. Click Cancel to clear the form. Changes made to this form will be removed, but the auto-populated fields will display as is.

  3. Click Delete to delete the record.

  4. Click Close to close this form at any time.

========================================================================

Exporting Quarterly Tax JSON File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly%20Tax%20JSON%20Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly Tax JSON Export.htm

Exporting Quarterly Tax JSON File

Use the Quarterly Tax JSON Export form to review the various tax registers and generate a file in a JSON format for PrismHR Tax processing. Run this process quarterly and use it to reconcile the wage and tax amounts that were reported through the Periodic JSON Tax report for the previous quarter. This format currently only supports the non-SBEA required output. The SBEA format will be released in 2025. More information will be available in a future release.

State specific information has been added to the JSON quarterly download. If data point is missing that state specific field is not populated for example, if LASUI is missing, then that position will not be populated.

PSD codes have been applied to the quarterly tax JSON export to ensure the data matches the daily tax JSON export.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is not enabled on this form.

To access this form, on the Work Centers under Tax, click PrismHR Tax Processing. Under File Exports, click Quarterly Tax JSON Export.

To build the quarterly tax JSON export file:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Tax Year Select the appropriate tax year from the drop-down menu. The default is the current year with a 10 year look back.
Tax Quarter Select the appropriate tax quarter for which you want to build export from the following options: - 1 (default) - 2 - 3 - 4
  1. Click Build to build the quarterly tax JSON export file for the selected tax year and the tax quarter.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

On the File History section, you can select the following fields:

Note: Note: Development is already in progress after which this File History section on the Quarterly Tax JSON Export form will have more reports added to it in future releases.

========================================================================

Building the Alaska Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Alaska.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Alaska.htm

Building the Alaska Download

Use this form to create an export file, to upload to the state of Alaska for SUTA reporting. When the processing is complete, a link is available to download the file.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, on the Work Centers panel, under Tax click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Alaska.

To build the Alaska download:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Year The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.
Quarter The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.
  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Arkansas Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Arkansas.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Arkansas.htm

Building the Arkansas Download

Use this form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Arkansas.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Arkansas download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Arkansas.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to make a selection from the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. Close the list when done

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Arkansas page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the California SUTA Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/California.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/California.htm

Building the California SUTA Download

Use the California form to build the quarterly SUTA download for California.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To build the California download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > California.
In this field Enter this
Year The year for the download.
Quarter The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the date entered.
Client ID The specific client for the download. If blank, all clients are downloaded. You can: - Enter a client ID. If the client already exists, the system fills in the Client Name. - Click the Client ID link to open the Select Client selector: - Select a client from the list - Search for a client ID or name - Select a service type, employer, or status - Click Done.
  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the California page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Connecticut Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Connecticut.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Connecticut.htm

Building the Connecticut Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Connecticut.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Connecticut.

To build the Connecticut download:

  1. Complete the following fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific clients for the download. Click the link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. If blank, all clients are selected. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done when you finish selecting clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Employer Quarterly SUTA Tax Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Employer-Quarterly-SUTA-Tax-Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Employer-Quarterly-SUTA-Tax-Export.htm

Building the Employer Quarterly SUTA Tax Export

Use this form to create electronic files that contain state unemployment data that will be sent to the various states. Each state has a different format.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To build the quarterly SUTA tax processing file for download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Exports > Employer Quarterly SUTA Tax Export.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
State State that the quarterly SUTA tax file is based on. If South Carolina is selected, these fields appear: - Taxable Gross Wages (Gross Wages minus non taxable earnings and section 125 sheltered earnings) - Report Gross Wages If Louisiana is selected, the system displays: Do any of your employee’s report wages to other states in addition to Louisiana?
  1. Click Build. A progress window opens.

  2. Click Close when the report building is finished. You are presented with these options:

  1. Click one of these export links and the file is downloaded.

File History

File History provides a way to save historical files and download them more than once. File History is closed by default, but can be expanded by clicking +. Filters let you narrow down search options by State, Employer ID, Tax Year, or Tax Quarter. In this example, Massachusetts was chosen as the State filter.

[Image: screenshot]

You can download historical files as .txt or .csv file by clicking the hyperlinks. In this example, if you click the first link under Report, the report is displayed and you can print it, save as PDF, or download in .XLS format.

========================================================================

Building the Florida Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Florida.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Florida.htm

Building the Florida Download

Use the Florida form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Florida.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Florida download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Florida.

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client No — The specific client for the download. The system displays the Client Number and Name. If blank, all clients are downloaded.

Use the PEO FEIN for this client — Whether to use the PEO FEIN for the selected client. This option is enabled only if a specific client is selected.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Florida page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Georgia (CSV) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Georgia-CSV.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Georgia-CSV.htm

Building the Georgia (CSV) Download

Use the Georgia (CSV) form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Georgia.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Georgia (CSV) download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Georgia (CSV).

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client No — The specific client for the download. The system displays the Client Number and Name. If blank, all clients are downloaded.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Georgia (CSV) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Georgia (txt) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Georgia.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Georgia.htm

Building the Georgia (txt) Download

Use this form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Georgia.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Georgia (txt) download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Georgia (txt).

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to open the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. Close the list when done.

  1. Click Run. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Georgia (txt) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Illinois Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Illinois.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Illinois.htm

Building the Illinois Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Illinois.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Illinois.

To build the Kentucky download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Employer ID — The employer ID or click the Employer ID link and select one from the Select Employer look-up.

The following section is not visible when you open the form. It only appears after you enter a valid Employer ID.

Tax Contact Name — The name of the tax contact for the selected employer.

Employer Name — The employer name of the selected employer ID.

Tax Contact Phone — The phone number of the tax contact.

Address — The street address of the tax contact.

City — The city of the tax contact.

State — The state of the tax contact.

Zip Code — The zip code of the tax contact.

Tax Contact Email Address — The email address of the tax contact.

Federal EIN — The federal Employer Identification Number of the tax contact (must contain 9 characters)

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Iowa Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Iowa.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Iowa.htm

Building the Iowa Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Iowa.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Iowa.

To build the Iowa download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Kansas Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Kansas.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Kansas.htm

Building the Kansas Download

Use this form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Kansas.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Kansas download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Kansas.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Employer ID — Select a single employer ID from the Select Employer look-up.

Tax Contact This section opens after you select an employer ID. It is closed by default when you first access this form.

Tax Contact Name — The name of the tax contact for the employer.

Employer Name — The name of the selected employer ID.

Tax Contact Phone — The phone number of the tax contact.

Address — The street address of the tax contact.

City — The city of the tax contact.

State — The state of the tax contact.

Zip Code — The zip code of the tax contact.

Tax Contact Email Address — The email address of the tax contact.

Federal EIN — The federal Employer Identification Number of the tax contact (must contain 9 characters)

Parameter

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client for the download. Click the link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. The system displays the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Srvice Type, Employer, and Status. If blank, all clients are downloaded. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done when you finish selecting clients.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Kansas page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Kentucky Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Kentucky.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Kentucky.htm

Building the Kentucky Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Kentucky.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Kentucky.

To build the Kentucky download:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Employer ID — The employer ID or click the Employer ID link and select one from the Select Employer look-up.

The following section is not visible when you open the form. It only appears after you enter a valid Employer ID.

Tax Contact Name — The name of the tax contact for the selected employer.

Employer Name — The employer name of the selected employer ID.

Tax Contact Phone — The phone number of the tax contact.

Address — The street address of the tax contact.

City — The city of the tax contact.

State — The state of the tax contact.

Zip Code — The zip code of the tax contact.

Tax Contact Email Address — The email address of the tax contact.

Federal EIN — The federal Employer Identification Number of the tax contact (must contain 9 characters)

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Louisiana Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Louisiana.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Louisiana.htm

Building the Louisiana Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Louisiana.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Louisiana download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Louisiana.

  2. Click the link and select an Employer ID and then enter the following information. The tax contact information is not shown until you enter the Employer ID.

In this field — Enter this

Employer ID — Select a single employer ID from the Select Employer look-up.

Tax Contact This section opens after you select an employer ID. It is closed by default when you first access this form.

Tax Contact Name — The name of the tax contact for the employer.

Employer Name — The name of the selected employer ID.

Tax Contact Phone — The phone number of the tax contact.

Address — The street address of the tax contact.

City — The city of the tax contact.

State — The state of the tax contact.

Zip Code — The zip code of the tax contact.

Tax Contact Email Address — The email address of the tax contact.

Federal EIN — The federal Employer Identification Number of the tax contact (must contain 9 characters)

Parameter

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client — The specific client for the download. Click the link and select a client from the Select Client look-up. The system displays the Client Number and Name. If blank, all clients are downloaded.

Use Client or Employer EIN — Whether to place either the client’s or the employer’s FEIN number in the file that is generated on the RE record.

Multi State Indicator — Whether the state is a multi-state employer.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Louisiana page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Michigan-72 Byte Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Michigan-72-Byte.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Michigan-72-Byte.htm

Building the Michigan-72 Byte Download

The Michigan (72 Byte) quarterly download provides payroll information for a specified year, quarter, and company ID, where Michigan is a client reported state.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build this file:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Michigan (72 byte).

  2. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
File Format Type Format used for this download; this is read-only. The only choice is 72 Byte.
Tax Year Four digit year for the report download.
Tax Quarter The quarter for the download (1-4).
Company ID Enter an ID or click the link to open the Select Client selector. You can: - select a client from the list - search for a client ID or name - select a service type, employer, or status
  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Michigan (72 byte) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Michigan Standard Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Michigan-Standard.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Michigan-Standard.htm

Building the Michigan Standard Download

Use the Michigan standard form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Michigan.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Michigan standard download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Michigan.
Field Description
Reporting Entity Options are: - All Clients or Employers - Includes all clients or employers. - Company - Limit the report to a specific company. - Employer - Limit the report to a specific employer.
  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Michigan page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Minnesota Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Minnesota.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Minnesota.htm

Building the Minnesota Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Minnesota.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Minnesota.

To build the Minnesota download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Mississippi Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Mississippi.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Mississippi.htm

Building the Mississippi Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Mississipi.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Mississippi.

To build the Mississippi download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Missouri Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Missouri.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Missouri.htm

Building the Missouri Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Missouri.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Missouri.

To build the Missouri download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Nebraska Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Nebraska.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Nebraska.htm

Building the Nebraska Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Nebraska.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Nebraska.

To build the Nebraska download:

  1. Complete the following fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific clients for the download. Click the link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. If blank, all clients are selected. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done when you finish selecting clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Nevada Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Nevada.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Nevada.htm

Building the Nevada Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Nevada.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Nevada.

To build the Nevada download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Submitter — Enter the EFW2 Submitter ID. This is set to DEFAULT. For specific submitters, manually enter the Submitter ID or select it from the Select EFW2 Submitter window. This pulls information from the EFW2 Submitter record.

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the North Carolina Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/North%20Carolina.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/North Carolina.htm

Building the North Carolina Download

Use the following North Carolina form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of North Carolina.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select North Carolina.

To build the North Carolina download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Ohio Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Ohio.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Ohio.htm

Building the Ohio Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Ohio.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Ohio download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Ohio.

  2. Click the link and select an Employer ID and then enter the following information. The tax contact information is not shown until you enter the Employer ID.

In this field — Enter this

Employer ID — Select a single employer ID from the Select Employer look-up.

Tax Contact This section opens after you select an employer ID. It is closed by default when you first access this form.

Tax Contact Name — The name of the tax contact for the employer.

Employer Name — The name of the selected employer ID.

Tax Contact Phone — The phone number of the tax contact.

Address — The street address of the tax contact.

City — The city of the tax contact.

State — The state of the tax contact.

Zip Code — The zip code of the tax contact.

Tax Contact Email Address — The email address of the tax contact.

Federal EIN — The Federal Employer Identification Number of the tax contact (must contain 9 characters)

Parameter

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client for the download. Click the link and select a client from the Select Client look-up. The system displays the Client Number and Name. If blank, all clients are downloaded.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Ohio page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Oklahoma Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Oklahoma.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Oklahoma.htm

Building the Oklahoma Download

Use the Oklahoma form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Oklahoma.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Oklahoma download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Oklahoma.

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client No — The specific client for the download. The system displays the Client Number and Name. If blank, all clients are downloaded.

FEIN — Whether to use the PEO FEIN for the selected company or employer. This option is enabled only if a specific company or employer is selected.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Oklahoma page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Oregon Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Oregon.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Oregon.htm

Building the Oregon Download

Use this form to create an export file, to upload to the state of Oregon for SUTA reporting. When the processing is complete, a link is available to download the file.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, on the Work Centers panel, under Tax click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Oregon.

To build the Oregon download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client — The specific client ID for the download. Click the Client link and select the client from the Select Client look-up. Leave this field blank to select all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Pennsylvania (Bulk by Client Under Employer) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Pennsylvania%20(Bulk%20by%20Client%20Under%20Employer).htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Pennsylvania (Bulk by Client Under Employer).htm

Building the Pennsylvania (Bulk by Client Under Employer) Download

Use this form to build the (bulk by client under employer) quarterly SUTA download for Pennsylvania in CSV format.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Pennsylvania (Bulk by Client Under Employer) download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Pennsylvania (Bulk by Client Under Employer).

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field Enter this
Year The year for the download.
Quarter The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.
File Type Original or Amended.
  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Pennsylvania (Bulk by Client Under Employer) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Pennsylvania (TXT) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Pennsylvania%20(TXT).htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Pennsylvania (TXT).htm

Building the Pennsylvania (TXT) Download

Use this form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Pennsylvania in TXT format.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Pennsylvania (TXT) download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Export > Client Reporting > Pennsylvania (TXT).

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Employer ID — Select a single employer ID from the Select Employer look-up.

Tax Contact This section opens after you select an employer ID. It is closed by default when you first access this form.

Tax Contact Name — The name of the tax contact for the employer.

Employer Name — The name of the selected employer ID.

Tax Contact Phone — The phone number of the tax contact.

Address — The street address of the tax contact.

City — The city of the tax contact.

State — The state of the tax contact.

Zip Code — The zip code of the tax contact.

Tax Contact Email Address — The email address of the tax contact.

Federal EIN — The Federal Employer Identification Number of the tax contact (must contain 9 characters)

Parameter

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client for the download. Click the link and select a client from the Select Client look-up. The system displays the Client Number and Name. If blank, all clients are downloaded.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Pennsylvania (TXT) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Pennsylvania (Individual Client) Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Pennsylvania%20Individual%20Client.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Pennsylvania Individual Client.htm

Building the Pennsylvania (Individual Client) Download

Use this form to build the quarterly SUTA download for Pennsylvania for a specific client in CSV format.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Pennsylvania (Individual Client) download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Pennsylvania (Individual Client).

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field Enter this
Client ID Click the link to select the client.
Year The year for the download.
Quarter The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.
File Type Original or Amended.
  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to return to the Pennsylvania (Individual Client) page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Rhode Island Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Rhode%20Island.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Rhode Island.htm

Building the Rhode Island Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Rhode Island.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Rhode Island.

To build the Rhode Island download:

  1. Complete these fields as required

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific clients for the download. Click the link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. If blank, all clients are selected. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done when you finish selecting clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the South Carolina Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/South%20Carolina.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/South Carolina.htm

Building the South Carolina Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of South Carolina.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select South Carolina.

To build the South Carolina download:

  1. Complete these fields:
In this field Enter this
Earnings Type Select one of the following: - Taxable Wages - Gross Wages
  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Tennessee Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Tennessee.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Tennessee.htm

Building the Tennessee Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Tennessee.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Tennessee download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Tennessee.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Report Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to make a selection from the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. Close the window when finished.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. Click Close when the process is complete to return to the Tennessee page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Vermont Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Vermont.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Vermont.htm

Building the Vermont Download

Use this form to create an export file, to upload to the state of Vermont for SUTA reporting. When the processing is complete, a link is available to download the file.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, on the Work Centers panel, under Tax click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Vermont.

To build the Vermont download:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select the clients from the Select Client look-up. Leave this field blank to select all clients having client reported Vermont SUTAs.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

  4. Click Clear to clear the screen.

========================================================================

Building the Virginia Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Virginia.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Virginia.htm

Building the Virginia Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Virginia.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Tax click on Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported), select Virginia.

To build the Virginia download:

  1. Complete these fields:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — The specific client IDs for the download. Click the Client ID link and select one or more clients from the Select Clients look-up. Each selected client is disabled in the search list and added to the Selected Clients list. Click Done to complete client selection. Leave this field blank to download for all clients.

  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Washington Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Washington.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Washington.htm

Building the Washington Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Washington.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Washington download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Washington.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Report Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to make a selection from the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. Close the list when finished.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. Click Close when the process is complete to return to the Washington page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

========================================================================

Building the Wisconsin Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Wisconsin.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-SUTA-Exports/Wisconsin.htm

Building the Wisconsin Download

Use this form to create the electronic SUTA file for uploading data to the state of Wisconsin.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To build the Wisconsin download:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > Quarterly Tax Processing > Government Exports> Quarterly SUTA Tax Processing (Client Reported) > Wisconsin

  2. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Report Year — The year for the download.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Defaults to the previous quarter based on the current date.

Client ID — Leave blank to select all clients or click the link to make a selection from the Select Client list. The list shows the Client ID, Client Name, Legal Name, Service Type, Employer, and Status. You can filter the list by Client ID or Client Name, Service Type, Status, or Employer. Close the window when finished.

  1. Click Build. If errors occur, fix them and then rebuild the download.

  2. Click Close when the process is complete to return to the Wisconsin page.

  3. Click the Download link to download the file.

JIRA # RRT-6863 CSH 1283

========================================================================

Quarterly Tax Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-Tax-Processing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Quarterly-Tax-Processing.htm

Quarterly Tax Processing

The options available in the Quarterly Tax Processing work center are organized under the following headings:

========================================================================

Rebuilding the Tax Journal

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Rebuild-Tax-Journal.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Rebuild-Tax-Journal.htm

Rebuilding the Tax Journal

When PrismHR posts a payroll, it collects voucher data and writes it to the TAX.JOURNAL file. The Mastertax PTS export file is built based on values stored in the TAX.JOURNAL file. The final step of these processes is archiving voucher data from the file, so that voucher data is not reported twice. It is possible that either of these files can become corrupted, so you need to rebuild this file using historical payroll data. The Rebuild Tax Journal file completes this process.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To rebuild the journal:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Employer|Action, select Rebuild Tax Journal file.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Clear Tax Journal prior to rebuild? — Select No so that the process does not delete existing values. Payroll vouchers that are selected in the next screen are added. Select Yes to delete all values in TAX.JOURNAL before rebuilding. Contact PrismHR Support before attempting this action.

Use Pay Date or Post Date — Determines the data to look at when adding voucher data back to the tax journal.

Pay Dates — Start/End Pay Date: Enter the starting and ending pay dates for this rebuild process.

Post Dates — Start/End Post Date: Enter the starting and ending posting dates for this rebuild process.

Employer ID — Select the employer ID for this process.

Client ID — Optional: Select the client ID for this process.

  1. Click Run. The system asks if you want to proceed.

  2. Click Yes. The system displays a rebuild progress window.

  3. Click Report to view or download the report. See Viewing the Job Control Status Report

========================================================================

Building the Reconciliation Tax Summary

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Recon-Tax-Summary.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Recon-Tax-Summary.htm

Building the Reconciliation Tax Summary

The MasterTax RTS (Reconciliation Tax Summary) file build process reviews the various tax registers and generates a file in a specific format for a third party vendor called MasterTax. Run this process quarterly and use it to reconcile the check amounts that were imported throughout the previous three months. Now, positive and or negative adjustments made in the grid in the FUTA Credit Adjustment Entry form displays on the MasterTax Reconciliation Tax Summary (RTS). The values entered in the grid adjust the state XX-17 total YTD value in the RTS. This will not require a register rebuild, instead when you run the RTS, any value in the grid will offset either the E or F code record based on the Employet and/or Client setup.

Adjustments to the xx-17 record will be saved and stored to the Futa Credit Adjustment Entry grid for each employee.

The 501 record is reduced in statistic four (which is the employee count) by any employee in which an adjustment reduces their FUTA taxable wages to 0 for the state, or increase the 501 record by any employee in which an adjustment adds fUTA taxable wages that were not originally to be reported.

There are multiple versions of this form as well as a NON SBEA and SBEA build that look to different tax registers when generating the values on the file. These build types are controlled by the MasterTax Interface parameter form.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To build the RTS file:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click MasterTax Processing > File Exports > Mastertax RTS File Build.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Tax Year Tax year for this build.
Tax Quarter Tax quarter for this build.
Limit to Employer Filters so that the file generated only contains tax information for a specific employer.
Include client reportable taxes for PEO clients Client-reported taxes that are under the client’s FEIN or unemployment ID. This only displays when the Limit to Employer field has a set value.
Limit to Client Client ID that this build is limited to. This only applies to client SUTA reporting states.
Build FUTA Exempt Records This only applies when running an RTS build for the fourth quarter.
Exclude Pennsylvania local taxes when no tax has been withheld Enable to exclude PA local taxes if no tax has been withheld.
Include zero taxable wages for Ohio non-resident local tax Enable to include zero taxable wages for Ohio non-resident local tax.
Limit to ASO/ASA/PAY service types Enable to limit this build to ASO/ASA/PAY service types.
Build SBEA certified relationship file Enable to build an SBEA certified relationship file.
Use tax code 00-87 to determine SS credit within MasterTax? > Note: Note: This setting applies to 2021 COVID-19 tax reporting. If selected, the system performs the following calculation during the RTS build: (00-87 tax amount associated with line item) / (0.062). After computing this value, the system uses this value to fill in Statistic 1 of the 501 record for tax code 00-81, up to the value reported under 00-81 on the 500 record. If any amount remains after reaching the 00-81 reporting value, the system enters the remainder into Statistic 1 of the 501 record for tax code 00-80. For more details about these tax codes, see the COVID-19 Feature Guide.
Use COVID Credits as post March 31? > Note: Note: This setting applies to 2021 COVID-19 tax reporting. The federal government makes a distinction, for reporting purposes, between COVID-19 credits accrued before and after April 1 2021, since this is the date the American Rescue Plan Act (ARP or ARPA) took effect. Select this option to consider any COVID-19 credits accrued in Q2 2021 as “post-March 31” credits, which means they were accrued subject to the American Rescue Plan Act. These credits will be reported accordingly on the RTS file. On the file itself, this means: - On 501 records for 00-80 and 00-81, the full value under these tax codes populates under statistic 1. - On FE0000-116H and FE0000-117H records, statistic 1 is set to 0. For more details about reporting COVID-19 tax credits, see the COVID-19 Feature Guide.
  1. Click Build. A progress window displays. You can download an RTS file, or view an audit detail or summary report.

Note: Note: If an RTS build process is already running when you attempt to build the file, the system displays a message stating that the process is currently running for and was started at . You cannot build the file until the current process has finished.

========================================================================

401(k) Extended Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/401(k)%20Extended%20Download.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/401(k) Extended Download.htm

401(k) Extended Download

Use this form to generate a retirement export that shows both eligible and participants for 401(k) plans. This is not related to a 401(k) TPA, but is a generic export. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

To set up the 401(k) Extended Download retirement export, complete the following fields as required:

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. This is read-only field. This is Generic 401(k) Download.
File Format Select the appropriate file format from the following: - Eligible and Participants (Default) - This will return hours and pay values for everyone for the full Pay Date Range entered. - Participants Only - This will return hours and pay values only from Election Effective Date. > Note: Note: If you have employees that are new to the plan within the year and your carrier needs information for the full year even if the employee did not participate the full year, then you use the Eligible and Participants file format for the full year date range because if you use the Participants Only file format, it only returns pay and hours since election started.

ADP

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/ADP.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/ADP.htm

ADP

See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

To build the ADP retirement exports download:

  1. Click the ADP Export Setup link — a new window opens where you can review and edit the ADP Export Setup options.
  1. File Type is read only — 300 Byte Download.

  2. Enter a 401(k) Plan ID or click the Plan ID link and select one.

  3. Enter Start Pay Date - the start date of the pay period for which you want to download the exports.

  4. Enter End Pay Date - the end date of the pay period for which you want to download the exports.

========================================================================

Anico

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Anico.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Anico.htm

Anico

To set up the Anico retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Employment Status Employment status. Click the link to open the Select Employment Status selector. Enter a search term or select from the statuses listed. For example, A for Active.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Boston Land

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Boston%20Land.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Boston Land.htm

Boston Land

To set up the Boston Land retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Fascorp

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Fascorp.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Fascorp.htm

Fascorp

To set up the Fascorp retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Generic (Non Third Party) Retirement Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Generic%20(Non%20Third%20Party).htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Generic (Non Third Party).htm

Generic (Non Third Party) Retirement Export

To set up a generic retirement export, complete these fields as required.

See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is PrismHR Generic.
Include Roth Columns Yes or No. The default value is No. If set to No, it is the equivalent of 401K Contribution within Pay Dates by Employer or Client w/Census Option. If set to Yes, it is the equivalent of 401K Contribution w/Roth within Pay Dates by Employer or Client w/Census Option.
File Format Select the appropriate file format from the following: - Census (Default) - Participants - This will return hours and pay values only from Election Effective Date. - Eligible and Participants (Default) - This will return hours and pay values for everyone for the full Pay Date Range entered. > Note: Note: If you have employees that are new to the plan within the year and your carrier needs information for the full year even if the employee did not participate the full year, then you use the Eligible and Participants file format for the full year date range because if you use the Participants file format, it only returns pay and hours since election started.

Great West

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Great%20West.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Great West.htm

Great West

To set up the Great West retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

ING

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/ING.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/ING.htm

ING

To set up the ING retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name - Select a service type, employer, or status Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

John Hancock

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/John%20Hancock.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/John Hancock.htm

John Hancock

To set up the John Hancock retirement export, complete these fields. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
File Format Select either Contribution New or Contribution Old.
If File Format is selected as Contribution New, then complete the following fields:
Plan ID Enter the Plan ID or click the Plan ID link to select a plan from the list.
Start Pay Date Enter the pay date from which you run the file.
End Pay Date Enter the pay date up to which you run the file.
Clients - Leave empty to select all clients that you has access to OR - Click the Client ID link and select the clients you have access to for the export. Click Done when finished selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection made.

Kentucky Retirement Systems

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Kentucky%20Retirement%20Systems.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Kentucky Retirement Systems.htm

Kentucky Retirement Systems

To set up the Kentucky Retirement Systems export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Employment Status Employment status. Click the link to open the Select Employment Status selector. Enter a search term or select from the statuses listed. For example, A for Active.
Client ID Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Lincoln Financial

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Lincoln%20Financial.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Lincoln Financial.htm

Lincoln Financial

To set up the Lincoln Financial retirement export, complete these fields. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field — Description

File Type — The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Census.

Plan ID — Enter the Plan ID or click the Plan ID link and select one from the Select Plan window.

Start Pay Date — Enter the start date of the pay period for which you want to download the exports.

End Pay Date — Enter the end date of the pay period for which you want to download the exports.

Client ID — Enter the Client ID or click the Client ID link and select a client that participates in the Plan selected above. Leave this field blank to include all clients participating in the Plan selected above.

Include Participants Only — Select this option to include participant employees only or clear it to include eligible participant employees to the plan selected above.

========================================================================

Mass Mutual

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Mass%20Mutual.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Mass Mutual.htm

Mass Mutual

Note: Note: If the master contract number is not assigned to the database, the system displays a warning. The system also displays a warning if the master contract number is not assigned to an account, or if the compensation file is not valid. Contact PrismHR support for assistance.

To set up the Mass Mutual retirement export, complete these fields as required. The field selections change depending on the File Format selected.

See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field — Description

File Type — The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Compensation Download.

File Format — File format for the export file. Options are Compensation, Contribution/Loan, and Demographic.

Plan ID — Plan ID, opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.

Exclude Terminated Employees — Determines whether terminated employees are excluded from the export file. Options are Yes or No (default).

File Format = Compensation

Year — Required field. Select a year from the drop-down. Default value is the current year minus 1.

Report Date — Required field. Date of the retirement export report.

File Format = Contribution/Loan

Start/End Pay Date — Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.

Schedule Date — Date when this export is scheduled. Required field.

========================================================================

Michigan Benefit Services

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Michigan%20Benefit%20Services.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Michigan Benefit Services.htm

Michigan Benefit Services

To set up the Michigan Benefit Services retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Plan ID, opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Pallet

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Pallet.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Pallet.htm

Pallet

To set up the Pallet retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Pinnacle

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Pinnacle.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Pinnacle.htm

Pinnacle

Complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Plan ID, opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Required field.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Exporting Retirement Contributions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Retirement-Exports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Retirement-Exports.htm

Exporting Retirement Contributions

An export file contains data extracted from the system, often to provide to another party. The Retirement Exports form offers multiple retirement export types from a single page. These export types are shown in the Vendor/Template field. When you select an export type from the list, the fields relevant to that type display. Once the export file is generated, you can export it to your computer.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form. If client selection is left blank to run for all clients, only clients to which you have access are available.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under Operations|Action, click Retirement Exports.

To generate a retirement export:

  1. Select a Vendor/Template from the following options, and complete the fields as required:
  1. Click Generate File. A new job progress window opens and displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

Note: The system only allows one user at a time to build the file, which accommodates the fixed format in the output filename.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Close to close the job progress window.

  2. The Preview section shows a preview of the text file - up to 100 records show up on the Preview section. If there are more than 100 records a pop up window tells you the number of records ready for export. Click OK to close the pop up window. [Image: screenshot]

  3. Click Download File to download the .txt file.

  4. Click Clear to clear the screen.

========================================================================

Ruby

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Ruby.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Ruby.htm

Ruby

To set up the Ruby retirement export, complete the following fields. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Slavic

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Slavic.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Slavic.htm

Slavic

To set up the Slavic retirement export, complete these fields as required.

See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

In the Export Parameters panel, select one of the following File Format options:

If you select Census as the File Format, complete the following information:

Field — Description

Start Pay Date — Enter the start date of the pay period to include in the export download.

End Pay Date — Enter the end date of the pay period to include in the export download.

Clients — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run the export for all clients. If you want to run this export for selected clients, enter the Client IDs or click Client ID and select them from the Select Clients list.

Include 1099 Employees — By default, this field is disabled and 1099 employees are not included. Enable this field if you want to include 1099 employees in the export.

Include Hours-paid for non-productive Pay Codes — Enter non-productive pay codes. The hours paid for these pay codes are included in the total hours that display in the export file.

Exclude Hours-worked for Productive Pay Codes — Enter productive pay codes. The hours for these pay codes are not included in the total hours that display in the export file.

If you select Census (Specific Plan), Participants, or Eligible and Participants as the File Format, complete the following information:

Field — Description

Plan ID — Enter or select the Plan ID to include in the export download. For example, 401K is a plan ID.

Start Pay Date — Enter the start date of the pay period to include in the export download.

End Pay Date — Enter the end date of the pay period to include in the export download.

Clients — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run the export for all clients. If you want to run this export for selected clients, enter the Client IDs or click Client ID and select them from the Select Clients list.

Include 1099 Employees — By default, this field is disabled and 1099 employees are not included. Enable this field if you want to include 1099 employees in the export.

Include Hours-paid for non-productive Pay Codes — Enter non-productive pay codes. The hours paid for these pay codes are included in the total hours that display in the export file.

Exclude Hours-worked for Productive Pay Codes — Enter productive pay codes. The hours for these pay codes are not included in the total hours that display in the export file.

========================================================================

The Standard

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/The%20Standard.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/The Standard.htm

The Standard

Complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Plan ID, opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Transamerica

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Transamerica.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Transamerica.htm

Transamerica

Complete these fields. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

A Transamerica Export Setup link appears when Transamerica is selected as the retirement contribution Vendor/Template. See Setting Up Transamerica Retirement Export

Under File Type — Choose any one of the following options:

If File Type is selected as Contribution Version 6.1, then complete the following:

Field — Description

Include Roth Columns — The default value is No. Set to Yes for Roth 401(k) plans.

File Format — Census, Participants, Eligible and Participants. The default is Census.

Plan ID — Enter a 401(k) plan ID, or click the Plan ID link and select one.

Start Pay Date — The start date of the pay period for which you want to download the exports.

End Pay Date — The end date of the pay period for which you want to download the exports.

Employer — Enter the participating Employer ID or click the Employer link and select a participating employer for the Plan ID selected above.

Termination Date — Shown only if Include Roth Columns is set to Yes. Click in the field and select from the calendar.

If File Type is selected as Census with Prior Year Eligibility, then complete the following:

Field — Description

Plan ID — Enter a 401(k) Plan ID or click the Plan ID link and select one.

Year — Enter the Plan year.

Employer — Enter the participating Employer ID or click the Employer link and select a participating employer. If left blank will include all participating employers for the Plan ID selected above.

Termination Date — Click in the field and select from the calendar if a termination date is available.

========================================================================

Wells Fargo

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Wells%20Fargo.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Retirement-Exports/Wells Fargo.htm

Wells Fargo

To set up the Wells Fargo retirement export, complete these fields as required. See also: Exporting Retirement Contributions.

Field Description
File Type The retirement export file type. Read-only field. This is Contribution.
Plan ID Plan ID, opens the Select Plan selector. For example, 401K can be the plan ID and plan name. Leave this field blank to select all plans.
Start/End Pay Date Starting and ending pay dates. For example, 7/24/20 and 7/31/20. Required field.
Clients Select a client ID (leave blank for all clients). The Select Client Window opens. You can: - Click Client ID and select a client from the list (the selection appears in the Selected Clients list). - Search for a client ID or name. - Select a service type, employer, or status. Click Done when you are finished with client selection. The Client ID and Client Name are filled in for each selection you made.

Setting Up Transamerica Retirement Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Setting%20Up%20Transamerica%20Retirement%20Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Setting Up Transamerica Retirement Export.htm

Setting Up Transamerica Retirement Export

Use Transamerica Export Setup to configure file export settings.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To generate a Transamerica retirement export:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Action, select Retirement Exports.

  3. Select Transamerica from Vendor/Template. A link appears next to the drop-down.

  4. Click the link to launch the Transamerica Export Setup form. [Image: screenshot]

  5. Fill in the Transamerica Plan Number and Contract Number.

  6. Enter a client ID or select an ID by clicking the Client ID link and selecting the ID from the look-up.

  7. Click Done.

  8. Enter the equivalent Transamerica Company ID.

  9. Click Save.

Note: Note: You can also delete company translations by clicking Delete, but this will remove all company translations for Transamerica files.

  1. Fill in the remaining fields on the Retirement Exports form.

  2. Generate and download an export file.

Note: Note: See Exporting Retirement Contributions for more information.

========================================================================

Running Tax Adjustment Voucher Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Tax%20Adjustment%20Voucher%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Tax Adjustment Voucher Report.htm

Running Tax Adjustment Voucher Report

Use this form to generate a report of any tax adjustments that exist either globally or for a single employer or client.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, click Reports. Under Employer|Reports, click Tax Adjustment Voucher Report.

To generate the Tax Adjustment Voucher Report:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Tax Adjustment Date Select this radio button if you want to generate this report based on tax adjustment date range. - Start Date - Enter the start date of the date range. - End Date - Enter the end date of the date range.
  1. Click Run to view this report on screen.

========================================================================

Running Tax Register Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Tax_Register_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Tax_Register_Report.htm

Running Tax Register Reports

There are two different Tax Register Reports that display basic tax information (such as gross taxable earnings and tax amounts) for a given tax year and quarter. The two report types are:

This report is useful for verifying changes to tax registers or to the MasterTax RTS file – for example, if a register rebuild is needed.

To run the Tax Register Report:

  1. In the Reports menu, select Payroll|Report > Tax Register Report Entry.

  2. For Report Type, select either Employer Detail or Employer Summary.

Note: If you set a user role’s security for the Show Unmasked SSN field to Enable on the Field Security Maintenance form and select Employer Detail in this step, the Show Unmasked SSN field displays. Selecting this field displays the employee’s full Social Security number in the report instead of only the last four digits.

  1. Enter the Tax Year and Quarter as appropriate. You can also run the report for All quarters.

  2. You can limit the report to specific Employers, Tax Authorities, and taxes (Tax IDs), if needed.

  3. Click Build Data. A Job Control form displays the progress of the data build. Click Close when the build finishes.

  4. If the build was successful, a new Run Report button displays. Click this button to download the report.

Report Outputs

This first example was run with the following parameters:

[Image: screenshot]

This second example was run with the following parameters:

Note: Note: This is page 1 of 55, which is why only one tax code is visible.

[Image: screenshot]

This third example was run with the following parameters:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Transferring Employees to New Clients

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Transfer-EE.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Transfer-EE.htm

Transferring Employees to New Clients

You can move employee records and accompanying check information to a different client using the Transfer Employee to New Client form.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To move records:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Action, select Transfer Employee to New Client.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
From Client/To Client From Client: Click the link and select the client ID for the client that the employee is transferring from. To Client: Click the link and select the client ID for the client that the employee is transferring to. > Note: Note: To ensure that an employee remains enrolled in a benefit plan after transfer. benefit plans must be set up in the To Client.
Employee/To Employee Employee: Click the link and select the ID of the employee whose information requires a transfer. To Employee: Displays the employee ID for the company where the employee is being transferred.
Employer/To Employer Employer: Displays the employer ID assigned to the current client. To Employer: Displays the employer ID assigned to the new client where the employee is being transferred. Observe the following behavior that occurs during these transfer scenarios: - If the new client and the current (old) client have different primary employer IDs and the same Service Type of Professional Employer (PEO), you can perform a valid transfer of employees between those clients by selecting the employee’s new employer ID, which the system updates in the employee record under the new client. In addition, if you select the non-primary employer ID in the above scenario, a transfer alert displays, “The primary employer for Client <new/to client ID> is <primary employer ID>. You will receive payroll calculation errors for this employee if Employer <selected Employer ID that is non-primary> is not set up as an alternate employer in this client.” - If the new client and the current client have different primary employer IDs and different Service Types, such as PEO and ASO, or they both have the same ASO Service Type, when you enter the full employee ID or paste the employee ID in the Employee field, you can only select a valid (primary) employer ID. Also, after you make the selection, the To Employee field displays “New Employee will be created.”
  1. Click Transfer.

========================================================================

Viewing the 1099 Record Change Log

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Update-EE-1099-Record_Change-Log.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Update-EE-1099-Record_Change-Log.htm

Viewing the 1099 Record Change Log

The 1099 Record Change Log captures changes made to a Form 1099 record. Display the change log by opening the Actions menu on the Add/Update Employee 1099 form and selecting Change Log.

The change log displays information about each change in the following columns:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Viewing an Employee Tax Register

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Viewing%20an%20Employee%20Tax%20Register.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Viewing an Employee Tax Register.htm

Viewing an Employee Tax Register

The Employee Tax Register displays amounts earned by the employee and employee-paid tax deductions. For some fields, you can enter information by typing it or you can click a link to display a list of possible values from which you can make a selection.

The Employee Tax Register is a standalone page. You can also view it while viewing the employee paid tax codes or the Employee Tax Summary form.

To view the employee tax register:

  1. On the PrismHR menu bar, click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Employer|View, select Employer Tax Register. The Employer Tax Register page opens.

  3. Fill in the form as shown in the following table.

Use this option — To define this

Employer ID — Enter an employer. The system displays the employer name and ID.

Employee ID — Enter the employee. The system displays the employee name and ID.

Tax Deduction — Enter a deduction code. The system displays the tax deduction name and ID.

For the Year — Select the tax year from the list. The default is the current year.

Quarter — Select the quarter in which taxes were paid. Options include Year-to-Date and Quarter 1 - Quarter 4.

The system displays the report. You can click School Tax Detail or Monthly Tax Amounts to see more detail.

  1. Click Cancel when you finish viewing the report.

========================================================================

W-2 Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/W-2%20Reports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/W-2 Reports.htm

W-2 Reports

Use the W-2 Reports form to open, reprint, or delete Forms W-2 that were printed using the Printing Employee W-2 Forms utility. When you print an employee Form W-2 in this way, the output file will generate a corresponding entry here. These files will auto-delete after 60 days.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access this form, under Work Centers, under the Tax section, click W-2 Processing. Under W-2 Reporting click W-2 Reports.

The W-2 Tax Reports show on screen using the attributes selected above.

Click Next Page to go to the next page. If you do not find your entry, then click on the

[Image: screenshot]

icon to refresh the screen.

Following is a sample W-2 Reports screen:

[Image: screenshot]

Please note:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Running the W-2 Reconciliation Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/W-2-Reconciliation-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/W-2-Reconciliation-Report.htm

Running the W-2 Reconciliation Report

Social Security’s Old-Age, Survivors, and Disability Insurance (OASDI) program limits the amount of earnings subject to taxation for a given year. The W-2 Reconciliation Report compares OASDI with Medicare to determine whether the wage data processed by the SSA was less than the amount reported to the IRS. If the wage data is different, the SSA assumes that the processed earnings are incorrect.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the W-2 Reconciliation report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, select Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2 Reconciliation Report.

  2. Select an Employer ID from the selector that opens.

  3. Select a Tax Year from the drop-down.

  4. Click Run. If errors occur, fix them and run the report again.

  5. Click Close. The system displays the report. You can click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Running the W-2c Box Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/W-2C-Box-Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/W-2C-Box-Report.htm

Running the W-2c Box Report

Use the W-2c Box Report to change the values reported in each box of the employee’s Form W-2. You can run this report at the employer or client level.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To run the W-2c Box report:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, click Tax > W-2 Processing > W-2 Reporting > W-2C Box Report.

  2. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Employer ID — Limits the report to a specific employer.

Client ID — Limits the report to a specific client.

Last Name — The employee’s last name.

Tax Year — Year in which the report is being run.

Zip Code Above or Equal To — Five digit zip code for an employee that is above or equal to a specific value.

Zip Code Below or Equal To — Five digit zip code for an employee that is below or equal to a specific value.

Box 12 Code — The code for the amount to be reported in Box 12 of the federal W-2 form. This code is two alpha characters only.

  1. Click Process. If errors occur, fix them and process the report again.

  2. Click Close. The system displays the report. You can click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Setting Up Form W-2 Batch Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/W2_Batch_Download.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/W2_Batch_Download.htm

Setting Up Form W-2 Batch Download

Use the W2 Batch Download form to set up bulk Form W-2 downloading and printing for an employer.

Note: Note: This form does not observe location, department, or any other security settings and a user can access all employees in a company. If the user has access to multiple companies, data for all companies and all employees is viewable.

Only unrestricted Worksite Managers and Worksite Trusted Advisers can access this form. See Defining User Roles for more information about assigning and editing user roles.

To set up Form W-2 batch downloading:

  1. Click Reports.

  2. From Payroll|Reports, select W2 Batch Download.

  3. Enter the Year for the batch download.

  4. Enter a range of employees using From Employee ID and To Employee ID.

  5. Click Run.

========================================================================

Tax

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/WC_Tax.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/WC_Tax.htm

Tax

The Tax area on the Work Centers panel provides convenient access to the forms required to process the following work centers:

To open a Tax work center:

To get detailed instructions for using the open form:

To return to the processing page:

Note: Note: The Tax Center options do not use Client Access Group security.

========================================================================

Generating Worker’s Compensation Export File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Employer/Workers-Comp-Exports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Employer/Workers-Comp-Exports.htm

Generating Worker’s Compensation Export File

Use this form to build an export file for worker’s compensation to send to various third party administrators.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under Operations|Action, select Worker’s Compensation Exports.

To generate a Worker’s Compensation Export file:

  1. Select a Vendor using one of the following options:

SUNZ Worker’s Compensation

Select a Version using one of the following options:

By State 2017 Version

Complete the following Export Parameters:

Field Description
Start Pay Date Enter the starting pay date for the pay period.
End Pay Date Enter the ending pay date for the pay period.
State This field is optional. Leave this field blank for this export to run for all states. If you want to limit this export to a single state, select it from the drop-down.
Include State in Column J “WKC Code” This field is optional. Check this box if you want to include the two digit state code in the WKC Code in column J in the exported .csv file.
Policy This field is optional. Leave this blank to include all worker’s compensation policies. If you want to limit this export to selected worker’s compensation policies, enter them here or click the Policy ID link and select them from the Select W/C Policy dialog box.
PEO FEIN Number Enter the Federal Employer Identification Number for the PEO.
Include Terminated Employees Select this option to include employees who were terminated during the date range but may have been paid wages during this range.
Include Client ID or Location Select which option you want to include in the export from the following: - Client ID - Location

Complete the following Export Parameters:

Field — Description

Start Pay Date — Enter the starting pay date for the pay period.

End Pay Date — Enter the ending pay date for the pay period.

State — This field is optional. Leave this field blank for this export to run for all states. If you want to limit this export to a single state, select it from the drop-down.

Include State in Column J “WKC Code” — This field is optional. Check this box if you want to include the two digit state code in the WKC Code in column J in the exported .csv file.

Policy — This field is optional. Leave this blank to include all worker’s compensation policies. If you want to limit this export to selected worker’s compensation policies, enter them here or click the Policy ID link and select them from the Select W/C Policy dialog box.

Include Terminated Employees — Select this option to include employees who were terminated during the date range but may have been paid wages during this range.

By State Version 2

Complete the following Export Parameters:

Field Description
Start Pay Date Enter the starting pay date for the pay period.591
End Pay Date Enter the ending pay date for the pay period.
State This field is optional. Leave this field blank for this export to run for all states. If you want to limit this export to a single state, select it from the drop-down.
Include State in Column J “WKC Code” This field is optional. Check this box if you want to include the two digit state code in the WKC Code in column J in the exported .csv file.
Policy This field is optional. Leave this blank to include all worker’s compensation policies. If you want to limit this export to selected worker’s compensation policies, enter them here or click the Policy ID link and select them from the Select W/C Policy dialog box.
File Name Cedar Hill only: File name for the export. Default is CedarHlll.csv.
PEO FEIN Number Enter the Federal Employer Identification Number for the PEO.
Include Terminated Employees Select this option to include employees who were terminated during the date range but may have been paid wages during this range.
Include Client ID or Location Select which option you want to include in the export from the following: - Client ID - Location

Complete the following Export Parameters:

Field — Description

Start Pay Date — Enter the starting pay date for the pay period.

End Pay Date — Enter the ending pay date for the pay period.

State — This field is optional. Leave this field blank for this export to run for all states. If you want to limit this export to a single state, select it from the drop-down.

Policy — This field is optional. Leave this blank to include all worker’s compensation policies. If you want to limit this export to selected worker’s compensation policies, enter them here or click the Policy ID link and select them from the Select W/C Policy dialog box.

File Name — File name for the export. Default is CedarHlll.csv.

Generic (Non-Third Party)

Complete the following Export Parameters:

Field — Description

Start Pay Date — Enter the starting pay date for the pay period.

End Pay Date — Enter the ending pay date for the pay period.

State — This field is optional. Leave this field blank for this export to run for all states. If you want to limit this export to a single state, select it from the drop-down.

Policy — This field is optional. Leave this blank to include all worker’s compensation policies. If you want to limit this export to selected worker’s compensation policies, enter them here or click the Policy ID link and select them from the Select W/C Policy dialog box.

Employer — This field is optional. Leave this blank to include all employers. If you want to limit this export to selected employers, enter them here or click the Employer ID link and select them from the Select Employer dialog box.

  1. Click Generate File. A File Generation Process window opens. In case of any error, redo the field entries.

  2. Click Close. The data to be exported populates in the Preview section, which displays a maximum of 100 records. A message prompts you the total number of records.

  3. Click Download File to download the .csv file to a local system.

Note: This export file contains one total line for each company, employer, employee, and W/C class code combination within the entered pay date range. Also, the check date that displays is the last check date for that employee.

  1. Click Clear to clear the form at any time.

========================================================================

Assigning a Benefit Commission Code

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/Benefit_Commission_Type.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/Benefit_Commission_Type.htm

Assigning a Benefit Commission Code

When you create a commission based on the benefit commission type, the system bases the calculations on any plans that have that type defined in the special options.

To assign a benefit commission code to a benefit plan, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Change, select Group Benefit Plans.

  3. Enter or select a benefit plan ID for the plan you want to edit.

  4. Scroll down to the Special Options panel.

  5. Enter a Commission Type Code. Make the code simple, such as DENT for Dental. You can create as many benefit commission codes as needed, but you can only assign one code to a specific benefit plan.

  6. Click Save.

  7. Repeat for each plan that requires this commission code.

  8. Enter that code in the Based On Item field of the commission plan. When the code entered on the commission plan matches the code on the group benefit plan, the commission calculation includes that benefit plan. [Image: screenshot]

Related Topic

Creating Commission Structures

========================================================================

Grouping Commissions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/Commission_Groupings.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/Commission_Groupings.htm

Grouping Commissions

PrismHR’s commission plan grouping feature enables the system to compare the results of the commission calculations and, according to how you arrange the groups, apply only the commission structure with the lowest or highest result. The grouping feature also enables the system to choose between commission results that use the same basis for calculation.

When the system calculates commissions, it totals the commission amounts within the same numbered group and compares the results against the results of other groups. The group with the highest or lowest commission amount (depending on what is indicated in the Commission Group Highest or Lowest field) is the one added to the commissions of the salespeople assigned to the commission plan.

For example, this example shows that the salesperson’s commission is the total of the fourth commission line (benefit plans with the commission code MED) plus whichever group is the highest:

Related Topic

Creating Commission Structures

========================================================================

Processing Contract Employees

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Chapter_Processing_1099_EEs.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/ER_UG_Chapter_Processing_1099_EEs.htm

Processing Contract Employees

There are procedures for working with employees that are paid by Form 1099 instead of Form W-2.

========================================================================

Sending and Receiving Messages

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_Messages.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_Messages.htm

Sending and Receiving Messages

The messaging feature lets a user send and receive messages within PrismHR and also by e-mail.

========================================================================

Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_Reports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_Reports.htm

Reports

Use reports to view system-related information.

========================================================================

System Code Files

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_System_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_System_Codes.htm

System Code Files

Define specific system-level codes for payroll and benefits as well as other system code files.

========================================================================

System Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_System_Params.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_System_Params.htm

System Parameters

System parameters control the behavior of PrismHR, and should be maintained carefully after installation. There are two forms for configuring global settings:

========================================================================

User Roles, Users, and MFA Security

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_User_Roles_Users.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Chapter_User_Roles_Users.htm

User Roles, Users, and MFA Security

PrismHR uses role-based security to manage user accounts. The use of multi-factor authentication (MFA) further ensures security.

Administrative users control system access across multiple dimensions to ensure that company, client, user, and employee information is secure and protected. Access controls include:

========================================================================

Maintaining Information With System Code Files and Utilities

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Other_Sys_Utilities.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Front_Matter/SA_UG_Other_Sys_Utilities.htm

Maintaining Information With System Code Files and Utilities

PrismHR includes different utilities for maintaining information.

========================================================================

Adjusting Client’s Status History

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Adjust%20Client%20Status%20History.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Adjust Client Status History.htm

Adjusting Client’s Status History

Use this form to change the effective date in the client’s status history. To change the existing status of a client, see See Changing the Client Status.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office). Under Operations|Action, click Adjust Client Status History.

To adjust the status history of the client:

  1. Enter the client ID, or click the Client ID link to select the client whose status history needs change. The client history populates.

  2. Change the Effective Date of the client status visible in the Status Code field.

  1. The Status Code is read only, and shows the status of the client from the Effective Date, for example: Active, Terminated, Pending and so on.

  2. Click Save to save the changes made.

  3. Click Clear to clear the form.

========================================================================

Adjusting Commission Balances

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Adjust_Commission_Balance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Adjust_Commission_Balance.htm

Adjusting Commission Balances

You might need to make an adjustment to a commission calculation if there was an error. You need to make an adjustment rather than altering the commission setup; if you alter the permanent data, you would create conflicting reports. To avoid this accounting problem, make an adjustment that displays in an adjustment column in reports and justifies the new total amounts.

[Image: screenshot]

To make an adjustment to commissions where the data has already been computed, do the following:

  1. Enter the Client ID for which you are going to adjust the commission balance.

  2. Enter the Invoice number. The commission information displays in the table.

  3. For existing commissions, you can only change the value in the Commission Adjustment field:

The Net Commission and Grand Total display the new amounts.

  1. You can enter new lines, if needed. Be sure that this is what you want to do because once you save, you cannot remove the line. (You can only adjust it as described in step 3.)

To enter a new line, do the following:

Field Name — Description

Salesperson — Enter the user ID of the Salesperson, which must be a service provider user with the Sales Representative account management role.

Commission Adjustment — Enter the Commission Adjustment, as described above.

The Net Commission and Grand Total display the new amounts.

  1. Click Save to finalize the adjustments in the system.

Related Topics

Creating Commission Structures

Computing Commissions

========================================================================

Client Miscellaneous Bill Register

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Client%20Miscellaneous%20Bill%20Register.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Client Miscellaneous Bill Register.htm

Client Miscellaneous Bill Register

Use this form to generate a report of Bill Codes created by Miscellaneous Billing Events.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under Operations|Report, click Client Miscellaneous Bill Register.

To generate the Client Miscellaneous Bill Register:

  1. Complete the following:

Field Name — Description

Bill Date On Or After — Enter the billing start date.

Bill Date On Or Before — Enter the billing end date.

Bill Code — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all billing codes. If you want to restrict this report to one billing code, enter the billing code here or click the Bill Code link and select the billing code from the Select Billing Codes dialog box.

Bill Event Code — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all billing event codes. If you want to restrict this report to one billing event code, enter the billing event code here or click the Bill Event Code link and select the billing event code from the Select Billing Event Codes dialog box.

Employee ID — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all employees. If you want to restrict this report to one employee, enter the Employee ID here or click the Employee ID link and select the employee from the Select Employee dialog box.

Client ID — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all clients. If you want to restrict this report to a few selected clients, enter the Client IDs here or click the Client ID link and select them from the Select Client dialog box.

  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report shows up on screen. Click XLS to download the report.

  2. Click Clear to clear the form at any time.

  3. Click Close to close this form at any time.

This report shows the following columns:

========================================================================

Importing Clients from a Flat File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Client%20Record%20Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Client Record Import.htm

Importing Clients from a Flat File

Use the Client Record Import utility to import PrismHR clients from a flat file. This utility will clear all data from the IMPORT.CLIENTS file and populates new data from the import source file.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access this form, click Back Office. Under Operations|Import Processing, click Client Record Import.

To import clients from a flat file:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

Client Code Translation Table — Enter the code set to be defined or click the Client Code Translation Table link and select it from the Select Code Table dialog box. > Note: Note: Make sure Table Setup is done.

Create Employer Records Using Client ID — Check this box if you want to create Employer Records Using Client ID. By default his is blank.

Skip Header Lines — Select the number of header lines that you want to skip.

Filename — The import file once uploaded shows up here.

  1. Click Upload File and the File Upload dialog box will appear.

Note: Note: The import file needs to be in a .txt format.

Note: Note: If you are trying to import a client record that already exists in the system, then you will get error as we do not want to duplicate clients in the system.

  1. Click Report to see how many clients were created.

========================================================================

Computing Commissions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Compute_Commissions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Compute_Commissions.htm

Computing Commissions

The Compute Commissions form calculates all salesperson commission assignments, based on the client invoices, and includes them in the Commission Report. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To calculate all salesperson commission assignments:

  1. From Operations|Action, select Compute Commissions.

  2. If required, enter the Begin Date and End Date. The system bases the computation on the date range that you enter, which coincides with client invoice dates. If you leave these fields blank, all outstanding commissions to the present date will be included in the computation and marked as computed.

When you enter the date range, be mindful of the way the commissions were set to calculate. For example, commissions are paid out once a month and your organization has a commission based on the number of active lives. If you run the report twice during the month instead of once, the salesperson would be set to receive twice the proper amount.

  1. If you are recalculating commissions, select Clear Comm to replace the previous commissions computations with the new information.

  2. Enter the numbers of the Flat Amt Group(s) to include in the calculation, if flat amount groups are specified in the plans. For example, entering 12 would include groups 1 and 2, and entering 135 would include groups 1, 3, and 5, and salespeople assigned to the specified flat amount group will receive the amount.

Note: For flat-rate commissions that are based on the Benefit Commission Type, the system applies the commission per billed enrollment (as opposed to per invoice).

  1. Enter each Company ID of the clients for which you need to calculate commissions.

  2. Click Start Computation.

  3. Click Yes in the message that prompts you to confirm that you want to start computing commissions.

The system displays a window to show that the computations are running. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. When the computation is complete, click Close.

The system displays a printable report. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. After computing the commissions and closing the on-screen report, the Download Pay File link displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click the Download Pay File link to download a .csv file that contains the following commission data that was just calculated:

Note: Note the following:

Related Topics

Creating Commission Structures

Adjusting Commission Balances

========================================================================

Working with the Custom Code Translation Table

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Custom_Code_Translation_Table.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Custom_Code_Translation_Table.htm

Working with the Custom Code Translation Table

Use the Custom Code Translation Table for PrismHR-assisted data conversions only. Custom Code Translation Tables are used to create and maintain mapping/translation tables to convert legacy software data into PrismHR.

Adding and Updating Translation Codes

  1. Select the Table ID. The Table ID is used to categorize different types of codes.

  2. Enter Legacy Code. Enter the code from the legacy platform. This must be a unique value.

  3. Enter the Prism Code. Enter the corresponding Prism Code related to the Legacy Code on the same row.

  4. Enter Additional Columns. Enter additional Prism Codes in the applicable columns for each table.

  5. Click Save.

Most data conversions use a standard set of translation (mapping) tables. The format and need for each type of table will vary based on your specific conversion. Use the various column headings as a guide on how to enter each translation table. For more information, see the section Translation Table Overview.

If there are a large quantity of codes you need to add to the table at once, Data Engineering can upload them for you. Prepare a spreadsheet per Table ID with a layout matching the headings of the Tabe ID and send to your Data Engineer.

Sorting Codes

Sort By — Use the drop-downs menus to sort the specific column by ascending or descending order.

Searching Codes

  1. Search—Use the drop-down to select either the Legacy Code or Prism Code column for a specific value.

  2. Search Value—Enter the specific value you want to search for. This value can be the entire code or a portion of the code. The search will look for that phrase found anywhere in the column specified above.

  3. Click Search.

  4. Clicking Search again will take you to the next value that meets your search criteria. To see all matching records, continue clicking Search until you receive a message that the last value has been found.

Exporting Translation Tables

  1. Select the Code Translation Table ID you want to export.

  2. Select Download Type. Either .xls or .csv from the drop-down menu.

  3. Click Export.

Code Translation Table Overview

Code Translation Tables uniquely identify legacy system codes and map them to PrismHR codes. All legacy system codes must be unique. You can map multiple legacy codes to the same PrismHR code if they are set up the same. You may have multiple legacy software databases that will be used as part of the legacy code.

For example, if you had two pay codes, “REGULAR” and “REGULAR1”, that have the same set up in the legacy system, you can map both pay codes to the same pay code in PrismHR (REG). Doing this allows you to consolidate similar codes during the conversion and minimize the amount of codes to set up in PrismHR.

Legacy Code Prism Code
REGULAR REG
REGULAR1 REG

Depending on the Code Translation Table, if a Legacy Code is set up differently for a specific client, you can make the code specific to that client by adding a “^” and the Legacy Client ID (refer to Legacy Code in the CM Code Translation Table).

Deduction Codes are the most common codes that are used differently by client in legacy software.

For example, you have a Legacy Deduction Code = DENTAL125. For the majority of clients this Legacy Deduction Code should be mapped in PrismHR to “DEN125”. But for Legacy Client ID = 01-123 it is set up differently than the majority and should be mapped to a different PrismHR Deduction Code = CDEN125 that will be specific to that client. You would enter one row that will map the majority of clients and an additional rows for mappings that are specific to individual clients.

Refer to the sample below for the proper mappings to accomplish this.

Legacy Code Prism Code
DENTAL125 DEN125
DENTAL125^01-123 CDEN125

Clients Import Translation Tables

The following Code Translation Table IDs are used to convert client-level information. Most conversions will need the all the Code Translation Table IDs noted as required below, but may vary based on your specific conversion.

CM - Client Mapping Table (Required)

CM Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Client ID to their new PrismHR Client ID. You can map multiple Legacy Client IDs to a single PrismHR Client ID if you are consolidating multiple Legacy Clients together as a part of the conversion. This Code Translation Table can also be used to set various client parameters that may differ for each individual Legacy Client ID (i.e. Billing Template, Bill Format, Retirement Plan, etc.). Refer to the column headings set up for your conversion for the various client parameters.

EM - Employer Mapping Table (Required)

EM Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Employer ID to their new PrismHR Employer ID. You will need to enter a mapping for each PEO and ASO Legacy Employer ID.

DM - Delivery Method Mapping Table (Required)

DM Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Delivery Method Code to their new PrismHR Delivery Method Code (System/Change/Delivery Methods).

USER - User Mapping Table (Required)

USER Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy User ID to their new PrismHR Service Provider User ID (System/Change/Users).

LC - Location Mapping Table (Optional)

LC Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Client Worksite Location Code to their new PrismHR Worksite Location Code (Client/Change/Worksite Locations). The Legacy Code should be a combination of the Legacy Client ID^Legacy Worksite Location Code (i.e. Legacy Worksite Location Code = Main for Legacy Client ID = 01-123 would be Legacy Code = 01-123^Main).

CK - Bank Account Mapping Table (Optional)

CK Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Bank Accounts to their new PrismHR Bank Account ID (System/Change/Bank Accounts).

WCP - W/C Policy Mapping Table (Optional)

WCP Code Translation Table is used to map Legacy Workers Compensation Plan Codes to their new PrismHR Workers Compensation Policy ID (System/Change/W/C Policies).

Employees Import Translation Tables

The following Code Translation Table IDs are used to be able to convert Employee information. Most conversions will need the all the Code Translation Table IDs noted as required below, but may vary based on your specific conversion.

CM—Client Mapping Table (Required) - Refer to Clients Import Translation Tables for Details.

EM—Employer Mapping Table (Required) - Refer to Clients Import Translation Tables for Details.

ES - Employee Status Mapping Table (Required)

ES Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Employee Status Codes to their new PrismHR Employee Status Codes (System/Change/Employee Statuses).

ET—Employee Type Mapping Table (Required)

ET Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Employee Type Codes to their new PrismHR Employee Type Codes (System/Change/Employee Types).

EC—Ethnicity Code Mapping Table (Required)

EC Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Ethnicity Codes to their new PrismHR EEO Ethnic Codes (System/Change/EEO Ethnic Codes).

ETR—Employee Term Reasons Mapping Table (Required)

ETR Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Employee Term Reason Codes to their new PrismHR Reason Codes (System/Change/Reasons).

FS—Tax Filing Status Mapping Table (Required)

FS Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Filing Status Codes to their new PrismHR Filing Status Codes (HR/Change/Employee Tax > Tax tab). Legacy Code is commonly the State combined with the Filing Status, however, Legacy Code may be entered with dashes between the State and FIling Status depending on your Legacy software.

Please see sample below for States without Alternate Calculations.

Legacy Code Prism Code
ALMAR M
ALSINGLE S

Certain States have Alternate Calculations as their Filing Status. Similar to the above sample, map the Legacy Filing Status Code to their new PrismHR Filing Status Code and/or the Alternate Calculation Code as applicable.

Please see sample below for States with Alternate Calculations.

Legacy Code Prism Code Alt. Calc Code
AZ1.3 9
NJMARA M 1

Employee Deduction Import Translation Tables

The following Code Translation Table IDs are used to be able to convert Employee Deduction information. Most conversions will need the all the Code Translation Table IDs noted as required below, but may vary based on your specific conversion.

D—Deduction Code Mapping Table (Required)

D Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Deduction Codes to their new PrismHR Deduction Codes (System / Change / Deduction Codes).

The following are records that are created from the Employee Deduction Import:

For all Legacy Deduction Codes enter the respective PrismHR Deduction Code.

For Legacy Deduction Codes that you desire to create Employee Benefit Enrollments, add the PrismHR Group Benefit Plan ID (System / Change / Group Benefit Plans) in the “Benefit Plan ID” column. Also, if the Legacy Deduction Code uniquely identifies the Benefit Plan Type, add the PrismHR Benefit Plan Type (System / Change / Group Benefit Plan Types) into the “Plan Type” column.

Note: Note: Note that the D table is used differently based on the “Deduction Type” of the PrismHR Deduction Code mapped. Only populate columns as instructed above or as directed by your Implementation Consultant or Data Engineer.

PAYEE—Payee Mapping Table (Required)

PAYEE Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Payee Codes to their new PrismHR Payee Codes (System/Change/Payees).

B—Benefit Plans Mapping Table (Required for conversions from Pay Plus)

B Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Benefit Plan Codes to their new PrismHR Group Benefit Plan Codes (System / Change / Group Benefit Plans).

BP - Benefit Plan Types Mapping Table (Required for conversions from Pay Plus)

BP Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Benefit Plan Type Codes to their new PrismHR Group Benefit Plan Type Codes (System / Change / Group Benefit Plan Types).

Employee YTD Import Translation Tables

The following Code Translation Table IDs are used to be able to convert Employee YTD Check History information. Most conversions will need the all the Code Translation Table IDs noted as required below, but may vary based on your specific conversion.

P - Pay Code Mapping Table (Required)

P Code Translation Table is used to map the Legacy Pay Codes to their new PrismHR Pay Codes (System / Change / Pay Codes). P Code Translation Table is used when importing the following types of records:

D—Deduction Code Mapping Table (Required) - Refer to Employee Deductions Import Translation Tables for Details.

EET—Employee Paid Tax Codes Mapping Table (Required)

EET Code Translation Table is used to map the legacy system Employee Paid Tax codes to their new PrismHR Employee Paid Tax Deduction Codes (System / Change / Tax Deductions). The Legacy Code is usually a combination of the Tax Authority and Tax Code columns in YTD Check History data files. The Prism Code should be mapped as a combination of the PrismHR Tax Authority and Tax Deduction concatenated by a dash.

Please see sample below:

Legacy Code Prism Code
ALSTATEINC 01-20
FEDINC 00-10

For Legacy Employee Paid Tax Codes that are Local School District Tax Codes, add the School District Tax ID with the School District Tax Code. Additionally, you will need to add the PrismHR (Vertex) School District Code in the respective column of the EET Table.

ERT—Employer Paid Tax and Employer Match Codes Mapping Table (Required)

ERT Code Translation Table is used to map Legacy Employer Paid Tax Codes and Employer Paid Benefit Match Codes in YTD Check History data files.

Employer Paid Tax Codes

The Legacy Code is usually a combination of the Tax Authority and Tax Code columns in the check history data files. The Prism Code should be mapped as a combination of the PrismHR Tax Authority and Tax Deduction concatenated by a dash.

Please see sample below:

Legacy Code Prism Code
FEDERALFUTA 00-17
ALSUTA 01-24

Employer Paid Benefit Match Codes

Use ERT Code Translation Table to map Legacy ER Benefit Match Codes to the respective Employer Match Code listed below. These categories are used to direct the applicable amounts to the correct sections of the converted Payroll Vouchers.

Employer Match Code Type = Prism Employer Match Code

Note: Note: Not all legacy systems can provide the information needed to properly populate the information needed for Employer Matches that are Employer Paid Contributions/Premiums for W-2 reporting. You will be advised by your Implementation Consultant or Data Engineer if that import is possible.

========================================================================

Importing Client BE/OE Workflows

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Client%20BE%20and%20OE%20Workflow.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Client BE and OE Workflow.htm

Importing Client BE/OE Workflows

You can import BE/OE workflows into the Client Workflow Grid to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available for service providers.

To upload and import BE/OE workflows for a client, do the following:

  1. You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool form by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. From the Import Template drop-down menu, select Client BE/OE Workflows.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Workflow Effective Date (Required): Date on which the workflow is available. - BE Workflow (Optional): The workflow to use for benefit enrollments. - BE Open Window Length (Optional): The number of days from the benefit enrollment effective date during which an employee can enroll in benefits. (Note: If you enter the BE Workflow, the BE Open Window Length is required.) - Enable Notifications (Optional): - If left blank, defaults to ALL ON (Value = Y) - ALL ON (Value = Y) - ALL OFF (Value = N) - BE ONLY (Value = B) - OE ONLY (Value = O) - AE ONLY (Value = A) - Min # of Overlap Days (Optional): Designates the limited amount of time an employee has to complete the open enrollment workflow when the workflow start date plus the Min # of Overlap Days extends beyond the open enrollment window. - AE Workflow (Optional): The workflow to use for automatic benefits enrollment. - OE Workflow (Optional): The workflow to use for benefits open enrollment. (Note: If you enter the OE Workflow, then the OE Start Date, OE End Date, and End Effective Date are required.) - OE Start Date (Optional): The date when benefits open enrollment start. - OE End Date (Optional): The date when benefits open enrollment ends. - End Effective Date (Optional): The date till which employee benefits apply.

========================================================================

Using the Data Import Tool

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Database_File_Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Database_File_Import.htm

Using the Data Import Tool

The Data Import Tool lets you upload data and import it into the system. The Data Import Tool is available from the Operations|Import Processing menu in the Back Office menu. For example, the following form displays after you access the Data Import Tool and select the Department Codes import template option:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

Before you can upload and import data, your source file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. When you select the import template that you want on the Data Import Tool form, the required file layout displays. The layout must match the requirements for number and order of columns, category descriptions, and the required fields.

In addition, you can use the sample header file before importing, whose link resides on the Data Import Tool form, to avoid manually creating an import file that matches the import template type.

Note: Note the following when using a comma (,) in a description in your import file:

Using the Sample Header File

Before starting the import process, you can first download a sample header file by clicking that link on the Data Import Tool form after selecting an import template option or from a local form that displays the Import icon (

[Image: screenshot]

), such as the Departments form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: The header file is in .csv format. You can save the file in .csv or .txt format.

After you click the Download Sample Header File link, the system downloads or prompts for download a sample header file that displays columns and headers that match each column and description for the import template option. Also, the file displays a title that matches the selected option.

Note: Note: The sample header file is only available to users who have access to the selected import template option.

Using the Import Templates

The Data Import Tool provides import templates that you can use to import data.

For more information about each import template, click the following links.

Tab/Field Description
Import Template Select one of the following options: - ACA Offered Employees: Client ACA offered employees information. - ASO Accounting Codes: Client chart of accounts information. - Auto Holiday Pay Days : Client auto holiday pay days information. - Auto Holiday Pay Rules: Client auto holiday rules information. - Backup Account Assignment: Client backup account assignment information. - Benefit Adjustments: Client employee benefit adjustments information. - Bill Pending: Client bill pending information. - Client Account Assignments: Client account assignment information. - Client BE/OE Workflow: Client BE/OE related information. - Client Commissions: Client commissions information. - Client Details: Client NAICS code information. - Client Details (Benefits): Client yearly information imported into the ACA Large Employer Year grid. - Client Details (Special Delivery): Client special delivery instructions. - Client Details (Tax): Client tax-related information. - Department Codes: Client department-related information. - Division Codes: Client division-related information. - Eligible Benefits: Client eligible benefits-related information. - Eligible ZIP Codes: Client eligible ZIP codes. - Employee Benefits Per Hour: Client employee benefits information. - Employee Dependents: Client employee dependents information. - Employee Direct Deposit: Client employee direct deposit information. - Employee Loans: Client employee loan information. - Employee One-Time Deductions: Client employee one-time deductions information. - Employee Position Rates: Client employee position rates information. - Employee Property: Client employee property information. - Employee Recurring Deductions: Client employee recurring deductions information. - Employee Resident Address: Client employee resident address information. - Employee Scheduled Payments: Client employee scheduled payment information. - Employee Skills and Education: Client employee skills and education information. - Employer Details: Client account numbers and other information. - Employer Tax Rates (SUTA): Client tax rates information. - Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers: Client employer W/C accrual modifiers information. - Global W/C Classification Rates: Client W/C rates at the system level. This import template is only available for service providers. - Global W/C Classifications: Client W/C codes and descriptions by state. This import template is only available for service providers and can only be accessed using the Import [Image: screenshot] icon on the W/C Classifications form. - Labor Allocations : Client labor allocations information. - Miscellaneous Invoices : Client stand-alone, miscellaneous charges information. - Network ZIP Codes: Import ZIP codes to benefit plans that have a network assigned. - Offer Types: Import/update offer types for existing benefit plans. - Pay Code Total Compensation Category: Client pay code total compensation category information. - Plan Comparison Data: Import benefit plan comparison information into the Comparison Field tab of the Benefits Enrollment Plan Details form. - Position Classification: Import state and workers compensation classes for existing position classifications. - Position Codes: Client position-related information. - Projects/Cost Codes: Client project information. - Project (Certified Pay Rates): Client certified pay rates information for projects. - Rate Groups: Client rate groups information. - Retirement Loans : Client retirement loans information. - Shift Codes: Client shift code information. - State Tax Rates (SUTA): Client State Tax Rates (SUTA) information. - State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA): Client State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) information. - Third Party Sick Pay Adjustment: Client third-party sick pay adjustment information. - Tip OT Register: Client tips and overtime data. - W/C Billing Modifiers: Client workers’ compensation policy information. - Worksite Locations: Client worksite location-related information.

To upload and import a database file in .txt format and import its data, do the following:

  1. From the Import Template drop-down menu in the Data Import Tool form, select the template type.

  2. At the bottom of the form, click Find File. The Upload a File dialog displays.

  3. Click Choose File and browse to the .txt file you want to upload.

  4. Click Open.

  5. Click Submit.

If the file uploads successfully, a confirmation message displays. If your file does not upload successfully, an error message displays. Click Close, then click Clear to try again or to upload a different file.

  1. Click Close to return to the Data Import Tool form, where the file name and the imported content display.

  2. Review the content, and then click Import to complete the process. A confirmation dialog displays to confirm that the file content was successfully imported.

If the import process encounters duplicates, a dialog displays stating the data already exists. Click OK. The Import Duplicates form displays.

To process the duplicate data, you can either click Skip or Replace with New. If you want to apply the action to all data, select the Apply to all option.

Troubleshooting

If errors occur during the import process, do the following:

  1. Click OK.

  2. Click the Messages tab and review the error messages.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Import to proceed. If the import is successful, a confirmation dialog displays.

  2. Click OK to proceed and view the report or click Close to restart the process.

[Image: screenshot]

Viewing the Report

To view the report on the data you uploaded and imported, do the following:

Click Report.

[Image: screenshot]

The data displays in a report format, which includes the Import Status results. The report (see example below) displays all imported records and includes any records that were skipped.

[Image: screenshot]

When you finish reviewing the report, close the report window and click Clear to upload another file.

========================================================================

Importing ACA Offered Employees

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_ACA_Offered_Employees.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_ACA_Offered_Employees.htm

Importing ACA Offered Employees

You can use this import template to import part-time employees who need to be reported as full-time employees for ACA purposes for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import ACA offered employees, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select ACA Offered Employees. The ACA Offered Employees form displays.

  3. On the ACA Offered Employees form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Deny.)

The ACA Offered Employees import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the ACA Offered Employees form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): The ID of the employee who works for the client. - Stability Start Date (required): The Start Date is based on the predefined stability periods for the relevant employee type. - Stability End Date (required): Populates automatically after you select a Start Date. - Type (required): Date that applies to employee holiday time. - ACA Offer Of Coverage (required): Indicates an offer of coverage for eligible employees.

========================================================================

Importing ASO Accounting Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_ASO_Accounting_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_ASO_Accounting_Codes.htm

Importing ASO Accounting Codes

You can import changes to ASO accounting codes to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import ASO accounting codes, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select ASO Accounting Codes.

  3. On the ASO Accounting Codes form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The ASO Accounting Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the ASO Accounting Codes form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the ASO Accounting Codes import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Account (required): The account code number. - Account Name (required): The name of the account. - Prefix/Suffix Allowed: Indicates if the client uses a prefix or suffix in addition to the core account number.

Importing Auto Holiday Pay Days

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Auto_Holiday_Pay_Days.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Auto_Holiday_Pay_Days.htm

Importing Auto Holiday Pay Days

You can use this import template to import auto holiday pay days to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import auto holiday pay days, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select Auto Holiday Pay. The Auto Holiday Pay form displays.

  3. Click Days. The Auto Holiday Pay Days form displays.

  4. On the Auto Holiday Pay Days form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Deny.)

The Auto Holiday Pay Days import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Auto Holiday Pay Days form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Date (required): Date that applies to employee holiday time.

========================================================================

Importing Auto Holiday Pay Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Auto_Holiday_Pay_Rules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Auto_Holiday_Pay_Rules.htm

Importing Auto Holiday Pay Rules

You can use the Auto Holiday Pay Rules import template to import auto holiday pay rules to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import auto holiday pay rules, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select Auto Holiday Pay Rules.

  3. On the Auto Holiday Pay Rules form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Auto Holiday Pay Rules import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Auto Holiday Pay Rules form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee Type: Type of employee. - Pay Method: Method by which the employee will be paid. Note: The Variable Salary option in the Pay Method field on the Employee Details form only displays if the VARSALMETHOD custom feature code is enabled on the System Parameters form. - FLSA Exempt: FLSA exempt status. - Pay Group: Pay group assigned to holiday. - Pay Code (required): Pay code assigned to holiday. - Number of Hours (required): Number of holiday hours.

========================================================================

Importing Backup Account Assignments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Backup_Account_Assignments.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Backup_Account_Assignments.htm

Importing Backup Account Assignments

You can use the Backup Account Assignment import template to import backup account assignments to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import backup account assignments, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Backup Account Assignment import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

Note: Before you begin the import, you can select to Keep Existing User Data (default) or Remove existing backup account assignments for all clients in the import file, which overrides the existing list of users that are currently assigned to the client.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Role (required): Employee role, such as Payroll, Human Resources, Benefits, Risk, Sales, Coordinator, Broker, and I-9 Approver. - User (required): Name of active service provider user set up at system level for this client.

========================================================================

Importing Benefit Adjustments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Benefit_Adjustments.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Benefit_Adjustments.htm

Importing Benefit Adjustments

You can import multiple benefit adjustments for multiple employees at once to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import benefit adjustments, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Benefit Adjustments import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique identifier for the employee whose benefit billing record will receive an adjustment. - Plan ID (required): Unique identifier for the Benefit Plan that requires an adjustment. - Plan Period (required): The benefit plan period in the format YYYYMM. For example, 202310 for October 2023. - Bill Amount (required): The amount to bill to the client per pay cycle as a result of an adjustment. - Employee Contribution: The amount to deduct from the employee’s pay check per cycle. This amount is credited to the client to offset the billing amount. - Cycles (required): The number of future payroll cycles to apply an adjustment. - Start Date (required): The Start Date of the period when the deduction related to an adjustment goes into effect. - Insurance Cost: The premium cost associated with an adjustment. - Adjustment Amount: The B/R adjustment to apply to the benefits reconciliation process of an adjustment. - Retro Enroll: Whether an adjustment applies to a retroactive enrollment. Pre-tax contributions cannot fund any part of the premium for retroactive enrollments. Valid values are Yes or No. - Comments: Descriptive comments about an adjustment.

========================================================================

Importing Bill Pending Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Bill_Pending_Entries.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Bill_Pending_Entries.htm

Importing Bill Pending Data

You can import changes to bill pending data to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors who have full access to the Bill Pending form enabled for their user role. Bill pending data imported through this process will be added to existing records. Updates to existing bill pending data must be made manually.

To upload and import bill pending data, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Action menu, select Bill Pending.

  3. On the Bill Pending form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Bill Pending import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Bill Pending form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Bill Pending import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Bill Date (required): Date on which billing occurs; the system recognizes different formats as long as they are in the order month, day, and year (if no year is specified, the system uses the current year). - Bill Event Code (required): Billing event code. - Bill Rate (required): Billing rates for each billing unit. - Bill Unit (required): Number of billing units. - Client ID (required): ID of the client for this billing line item. - Employee ID (required): ID of the employee associated with the line item, if applicable (must be in the client in the row). (Optional when using Location.) - Location (required): Location code associated with the line item, if applicable. (Optional when using Employee ID.) - Division: Division code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Comment (max 40 characters): Comment for the line item, if appropriate. (Note: If there are more than 40 characters in a comment, an error displays.) - Department: Department code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Shift: Shift code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Project: Project code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Cost: Cost amount can be positive to charge against the line item, or negative to lower the total amount. - Pay Group: Pay group associated with the line item, if applicable (requires a Location for calculating taxes). Note that you cannot have both an employee ID and a pay group in the same file; the system will reject it if you do. - Payroll Type: Indicates the type of payroll, which can be Regularly Scheduled (R), Manual (M), or Special (S). - Repeat Thru Date: Indicates when the recurring event starts and stops. (Use the MM/DD/YYYY date format.) - Repeat Cycle (required if Repeat Thru Date is used): Indicates billing frequency, which can be one of the following: - W = Weekly - B = Biweekly - M = Monthly - Q = Quarterly - A = Annually

Importing Client Account Assignments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Account_Assignments.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Account_Assignments.htm

Importing Client Account Assignments

You can import changes to client account assignments to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available for service providers.

To upload and import employee client account assignments, do the following:

  1. You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. From the Import Template drop-down menu, select Client Account Assignments.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

You can enable one of the following fields during imports:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Payroll (required): The payroll employee representative. - Human Resources (required): The human resources employee representative. - Benefits: The benefits employee representative. - Risk: The risk employee representative. - Sales: The sales employee representative. - Coordinator: The coordinator employee representative. - Broker: The broker employee representative. - I-9 Approver: The I-9 approver employee representative. - Print/Mail User: The Payroll Processor (Print/Mail) employee representative.

========================================================================

Importing Client Benefits

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Benefits.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Benefits.htm

Importing Client Details (Benefits)

You can use this import template to import yearly information into the ACA Large Employer Year grid for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import yearly information into the ACA Large Employer Year grid, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. The Data Import Tool form displays.

  3. Select Client Details (Benefits).

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Year (required): Indicates the current year. (Must be a four-digit number.) - ACA Large Employer: Indicates if the client meets the IRS definition of a large employer for that year. (The system defaults to No if nothing is selected.) - Show in ESS: Indicates if employees are allowed to view their 1095-C information in Employee Portal (EP). (The system defaults to No if nothing is selected.) Note: You should do this for a reporting year when you have built the registers and confirmed that the information is complete. - 1095 Employer (required): Information to use in the Applicable Large Employer Member fields on Form 1095-C. (Must be an Employer Master or 1094c.)

========================================================================

Importing Client Commissions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Commissions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Commissions.htm

Importing Client Commissions

You can use the Client Commissions import template to import commissions for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import backup account assignments, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Client Commissions import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

You can enable one of the following fields:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Salesperson (required): The user ID of an employee at your organization who is a sales representative associated with the client. - From Date (required): Date on which the commission level goes into effect. - To Date (required): Date on which the commission level expires. - Amount: Indicates the commission amount as a flat amount or a percentage. - Flat or Percent: Indicates if the commission amount is Flat or Percent. - Based On: Indicates what the commission is based on. If you include Based On in the import file, it must match one of these options: - Gross Wages - Admin Fees - Benefit Commission Type - Benefit Commission Percentage - Workers Comp - Workers Compensation Profit - Average Number Lives - Gross Profit - Tax Profit - Percent of Bill Code - Profits to Admin [Enter Bill Code in Based On] - Fixed Amount Group 1 - Fixed Amount Group 2 - Fixed Amount Group 3 - Fixed Amount Group 4 - Fixed Amount Group 5 - Fixed per Paid Employee - Percent of Target Amount - Based On Item: Additional based-on types to the commission rule at the client level, such as Percent of Bill Code, Profits to Admin, Workers Compensation Profit, Benefit Commission Type, and Benefit Commission Percentage. - Based On Plan: Indicates the ID of the commission plan that exists at the system level. (Cannot be used in conjunction with Amount, Flat or Percent, Based On, and Based on Item.) - Target Amount: Indicates the commission’s target amount, which is used in conjunction with the Percent of Target Amount Based On option. (You can enter up to two decimals in this field. The system truncates values with more than two decimals.) The Target Amount field value is an overall dollar figure the system multiplies by the Amount Percent value to calculate the salesperson’s commission payout amount. For example, a Target Amount set to 100,000 for a 30% of Target Amount Commission setup would pay out $30,000 as the Commission amount for the defined commission period.

========================================================================

Importing Client Details

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Details.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Details.htm

Importing Client Details

You can use this import template to import NAICS codes for the client and the client’s work category to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import client details, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. The Data Import Tool form displays.

  3. Select Client Details.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - NAICS Code: The North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) code for the client. Note: This code must be a valid code set up at the system level on the NAICS Codes form. If it is not a valid code, an error message displays. - Client Category: Defines the client’s work category, such as CON for Construction.

========================================================================

Importing Client Details Special Delivery Instructions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Details_Special_Delivery.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Details_Special_Delivery.htm

Importing Client Details Special Delivery Instructions

You can import special delivery instructions for clients to reduce the amount of manual work required.

To upload and import client details special delivery instructions, do the following:

  1. You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. From the Import Template drop-down menu, select Client Details (Special Delivery).

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

You can enable one of the following fields during imports:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - All Locations: Indicates if special delivery method applies to all locations. - Location Code: Indicates location code for this special delivery. - Company Override Method: Indicates special delivery methods defined in your system. - Days In Transit: Indicates special delivery method’s number of days in transit. - Bill Event Codes: Indicates ID of billing event that the system uses to track this special delivery method. If there is no charge for the special delivery method, leave this field blank. - Special Bill Amt: Indicates override for the standard billing amount for this client. - Create Spec Sheet: Indicates that a special sheet will print during payroll processing. (Do not use this option if a special sheet is not necessary.) - Method Active: Indicates status of this special delivery method. - Method Until: Indicates date when the special delivery method should stop being used for the client. - Special Message: A special message that prints on the special delivery sheet. - Name: Indicates name that should appear on the special delivery sheet. - Address: Indicates address that should appear on the special delivery sheet. - Address 2: Indicates second address line that should appear on the special delivery sheet. - City, State, Zip Code: Indicates city, state, and zip code that should appear on the special delivery sheet. - Delivery Sheet Format: Indicates special delivery sheet format used to ensure that the address on the printed special delivery sheet displays in the window envelopes your organization uses.

========================================================================

Importing Client Taxes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Tax.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Client_Tax.htm

Importing Client Taxes

You can use this import template to import taxes for the client into the state tax setup on the Client Details form to reduce the amount of manual work required.

To upload and import client tax details, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. The Data Import Tool form displays.

  3. Select Client Details (Tax).

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

You can enable one of the following fields during imports:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - State: Indicates a two-character state code. States with or without suffixes will display in alphabetical order once any changes are saved. - State Unemployment Insurance ID: Indicates a state unemployment insurance ID for the selected state. - Secondary SUI ID: If this is a PEO company, indicates a secondary ID for reporting a client’s wages in states such as Kansas and Missouri that use the employer’s rate but report it separately using this ID. - State Tax ID: Indicates the state tax ID for the selected state. - Client Reporting Start Date: Indicates the Client Reporting Start Date for SUTA tax reporting. - Client Reporting End Date: Indicates the Client Reporting End Date for SUTA tax reporting. - Misc Tax ID: Indicates the miscellaneous tax ID for the selected state - Misc Tax Code: Indicates one or more miscellaneous comma-separated tax codes to apply to a single Misc. Tax ID. This is helpful for states that require a separate tax account ID such as Washington for WA Cares and WA PFML.

Importing Department Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Department_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Department_Codes.htm

Importing Department Codes

You can import changes to department codes to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import department codes, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select Departments.

  3. On the Departments form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Department Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Departments form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Department Codes import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Department Code (required) : Abbreviation for the department. - Department Name (required): The full name of the department. - Per Diem Percent: Defines the percentage of pay that is allocated to non-taxable per diem when per diem is paid using the percentage method. - GL Segment 1: Code that defines the G/L account number segment instead of the department code. This replaces EEDP instead of the actual code. - GL Segment 2: Allows for more accounting options based on the department code. Rarely used, it ties to the EEDP2 mnemonic in the G/L interfaces. - Union Eligible Days: Number of days for Union eligibility.

Importing Division Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Division_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Division_Codes.htm

Importing Division Codes

You can import changes to division codes to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import division codes, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Divisions.

  3. On the Divisions form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Division Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Divisions form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Division Codes import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Division Code (required) : Abbreviation for the division name. - Division Name (required): The full name of the division. - GL Segment 1: Code that defines the G/L account number segment instead of the department or division code. This replaces EEDP instead of the actual code. - GL Segment 2: Allows for more accounting options based on the department or division code. Rarely used, it ties to the EEDP2 mnemonic in the G/L interfaces. - GL Segment 3: Allows you to enter a third G/L code, if necessary.

Importing Eligible Benefits

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Eligible_Benefits.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Eligible_Benefits.htm

Importing Eligible Benefits

You can import eligible Benefit Plans based on the Eligible Benefits Determinant field assigned to each client on the Client Details form.

A quick link to the Eligible Benefits import template, Import Eligible Benefits, is available in the Eligible Benefits panel on the following forms:

Note: Note: The Import Eligible Benefits quick link only displays on the forms mentioned above if you have selected the Eligible Benefits Determinant field in the Benefits tab on the Client Details form. For example, if you want the Import Eligible Benefits quick link to display on the Departments form, then you must select the Departments Restrict Eligibility option in the Eligible Benefits Determinant field in the Benefits tab on the Client Details form.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import eligible benefits:

  1. Click the Import Eligible Benefits quick link from one of the forms mentioned above or navigate to the import template in the Data Import Tool by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

The Eligible Benefits import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the above-mentioned forms.

  1. Enter the Client ID or select Client ID to pre-populate the client data. If you select Client ID, the Select Clients list displays.
  1. — Select the clients by clicking the list of clients that you want to add. The added clients display in the Selected Clients section. Click Add All to add all the clients at once. Click Remove All to remove the clients from the Selected Clients section at once.
b. Click Done to add the selected clients. The added clients display in the Data Import Tool.
  1. Enable Include Obsolete/Expired valuesbased on your requirement. (The default is disabled.)

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Data File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

Note: Note: While uploading a .csv file to import its data, if there is any error with any of the benefit plans, then under the Messages section, the error message displays errors for all the benefit plans which helps you in correcting the import files.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Client Description: The eligible benefits description. - Eligible Benefits Determinant (required): Indicates the benefits available to an employee if the client makes different sets of benefits available to their employees based on department, division, location, or benefit group. - Benefit Groups: Indicates the benefit groups for each group of employees. - Locations: Indicates the details for the client’s worksite locations. - Departments: Indicates the details for the client’s departments. - Divisions: Indicates the details for the client’s divisions. - Clear Existing Data: Clears any existing data on the form. - Benefit Plan ID: Indicates the Benefit Plan ID where the employees are enrolled. > Note: Note: The valid values for different “Eligible Benefits Determinant” are: D - Departments B - Benefit Groups V - Divisions L - Locations

========================================================================

Importing Eligible ZIP Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Eligible_ZIP_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Eligible_ZIP_Codes.htm

Importing Eligible ZIP Codes

You can use this import template to import eligible ZIP codes for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import eligible ZIP codes, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Eligible ZIP Codes import template option.

  3. Enter or select a Plan ID.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - ZIP (required): Eligible ZIP code for the client.

========================================================================

Importing Employee Benefits Per Hour

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Benefits_Per_Hour.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Benefits_Per_Hour.htm

Importing Employee Benefits Per Hour

You can import the employee benefits per hour at once to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Important! This import process does not display information in the Benefits Per Hour field on the Pay tab in the Employee Details form.

Note: Note the following:

To upload and import employee benefits per hour do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processingmenu.
  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Employee Benefits Per Hour import template option. When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.) You can enable one of the following fields:

========================================================================

Importing Employee Direct Deposit

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_DD.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_DD.htm

Importing Employee Direct Deposit Data

You can import changes to employee direct deposit data to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note the following:

To upload and import employee direct deposit information, do the following:

  1. You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. From the Import Template drop-down menu, select Employee Direct Deposit.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee Identifier (required): Either the SSN, Employee ID, or the Employee Number of an employee who works for the client and belongs to a pay group included in the payroll batch (can be a terminated employee). If needed, you may enter more than one line for an individual employee. Note: Only the last four digits of the SSN display when you review the information on the File Content tab. - Deposit Status (required): Indicates the following: - For active (A) deposit status, the system generates an ACH entry for the voucher. - For inactive (I) deposit status, the system produces a paycheck during payroll processing for the net amount of the pay voucher. - Pay Types to Deposit (required): Indicates the deposit pay types that the system directly deposits, which include the following: - All (RVS): All voucher types - Regular (R): Only regular checks - Vacation (V): Only vacation checks - Supplemental (S): Only supplemental checks - Reg & Vac (RV): Regular and vacation checks - Reg & Sup (RS): Regular and supplemental checks - Sup & Vac (SV): Supplemental and vacation checks - Suppress Account Number Print: Prevents the system from printing the employee’s bank account number on the direct deposit advice. The allowed values are Y or N. - Type (required): The bank account type for the deposit transaction, which includes the following: - C: Checking - S: Savings - HE: Employee checking - HES: Employee savings - HC: Client checking - HSC: Client savings > Note: Note the following: - An employee or client cannot have more than one type of HSA deposit. (They can deposit to a checking or savings account, but not to both accounts.) - A type that begins with an “H” always designates an HSA deposit. - Transit Number (required): The nine-digit ABA Transit Number of the receiving bank or other financial institution. - Account Number (required): The account number associated with the transit number where the money is deposited. (This number is alphanumeric with a maximum of 0-9 characters.) - Pay Type (required): The deposit pay types for the data on the specific row. (You can select different pay types for different accounts.) The pay types include the following: - All (RVS): All voucher types - Regular (R): Only regular checks - Vacation (V): Only vacation checks - Supplemental (S): Only supplemental checks - Reg & Vac (RV): Regular and vacation checks - Reg & Sup (RS): Regular and supplemental checks - Sup & Vac (SV): Supplemental and vacation checks - Method (required): The method used to determine the deposit amount. The allowed values are F, P, or B. (Note: For service providers, additional values are FS and PN.) - Amount (required): The direct deposit amount that is either a percentage or fixed amount, depending on the calculation method defined for the deduction code. (Note: This field is required if the Method chosen is F, P, FS, or PN.) - Limit: The maximum deposit amount. - Status (required): The status of the direct deposit account. The allowed values are P, D, or I.(Note: Worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors are only allowed to import a status of P (processing errors display if they import a status of D or I).)

Importing Employee Dependents

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Dependents.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Dependents.htm

Importing Employee Dependents

You can import multiple employee dependents for multiple employees at once to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import employee dependents do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processingmenu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Employee Dependents import template option. When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.) The layout requirements are: | Field | Description | | | — | — | — | | Column Number | The corresponding column number for the imported data. | | | Category Description | - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Spouse: Whether the dependent is the employee’s spouse. A spouse must have a Relationship Type of Dependent. - First Name (required): The dependent’s first name. - Last Name (required): The dependent’s last name. - Middle Initial: The dependent’s middle initial. - Gender: The dependent’s birth gender. Please note the below validations for the Gender field: - If Gender Non Binary is flagged on the System Parameters form, then you must be able to import Non-binary as a Gender option. The Gender Non-binary field value is defined as X. - If Gender Decline To State is flagged on the System Parameters form, then you must be able to import Declined to state as a Gender option. The Gender Declined to state field value is defined as D. - Birth Date: The dependent’s birth date. - Dependent SSN: The dependent’s Social Security number. - Tobacco Use: Whether the dependent uses tobacco. - EE SSN, EE ID, or Clock No. (required): Used to identify employees using their SSN, Employee ID, or Clock Number. It ensures consistency across import types and provides more flexibility for managing dependent data. - Relationship: The dependent’s relationship to the employee. - Full Time Student: Whether the dependent is a full‑time student. - Address Line 1: The dependent’s address. - City: The dependent’s city of residence. - State: The dependent’s state of residence. - Zip Code: The dependent’s ZIP code and extension. - Phone: The dependent’s phone number. - Work Phone: The dependent’s work phone number. - Gender Designation: Indicates to define the gender designation of the dependents. - Preferred Pronoun: Indicates to define the preferred pronoun of the dependents. | | | | • | Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. | | | • | Spouse: Whether the dependent is the employee’s spouse. A spouse must have a Relationship Type of Dependent. | | | • | First Name (required): The dependent’s first name. | | | • | Last Name (required): The dependent’s last name. | | | • | Middle Initial: The dependent’s middle initial. | | | • | Gender: The dependent’s birth gender. Please note the below validations for the Gender field: | | | • | If Gender Non Binary is flagged on the System Parameters form, then you must be able to import Non-binary as a Gender option. The Gender Non-binary field value is defined as X. | | | • | If Gender Decline To State is flagged on the System Parameters form, then you must be able to import Declined to state as a Gender option. The Gender Declined to state field value is defined as D. | | | • | Birth Date: The dependent’s birth date. | | | • | Dependent SSN: The dependent’s Social Security number. | | | • | Tobacco Use: Whether the dependent uses tobacco. | | | • | EE SSN, EE ID, or Clock No. (required): Used to identify employees using their SSN, Employee ID, or Clock Number. It ensures consistency across import types and provides more flexibility for managing dependent data. | | | • | Relationship: The dependent’s relationship to the employee. | | | • | Full Time Student: Whether the dependent is a full‑time student. | | | • | Address Line 1: The dependent’s address. | | | • | City: The dependent’s city of residence. | | | • | State: The dependent’s state of residence. | | | • | Zip Code: The dependent’s ZIP code and extension. | | | • | Phone: The dependent’s phone number. | | | • | Work Phone: The dependent’s work phone number. | | | • | Gender Designation: Indicates to define the gender designation of the dependents. | | | • | Preferred Pronoun: Indicates to define the preferred pronoun of the dependents. | | Required? | Indicates if the field is required. | |

  3. Optionally, click Clear existing dependents from employee records to replace existing employee dependent records with the information in the import file. Leave this option unchecked to add this information to existing employee dependent records, including duplicates.

  4. When this option is checked, the validation logic evaluates any previously identified dependent record not included in the current import file to determine if that dependent record has current coverage or prior coverage history.

  5. Additionally, an informational message stating, “Required fields may vary based on client setup for New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides” displays.

  6. “Error: You may not delete the dependent ID [Dependent ID Number] for Employee ID [Employee ID] on line [import file line number] because there are existing benefit records associated with it.”

  7. A variation of this same message displays when multiple dependent records with current coverage or prior coverage history must be skipped for the same employee:

  8. “Error: You may not delete the dependent ID’s [Dependent ID Numbers separated by a comma] for Employee ID [Employee ID] on line [import file line number] because there are existing benefit records associated with them.”

  9. This validation works similar to the validation logic used when you attempt to manually delete a dependent with coverage history from the system. In that instance, a message displays indicating that you cannot delete the record but you can mark it Inactive.

Required Fields Validation

When fields are configured as required fields on either the New Hire and Dependent Required Fields (Global) form or the New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides form, validations are in place to ensure correct data is passed and required fields are not missing or invalid during the File Upload process.

Valid Data Checks:

If the following fields are configured as required and the field values are found to be invalid during the File Upload process of the Employee Dependents Import, an error message displays on the Messages tab of the Data Import Tool for each invalid value.

Missing Data Checks:

If the following fields are configured as required and the field values are missing, an error message displays on the Messages tab of the Data Import tool for each missing value.

========================================================================

Importing Employee Loan Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Loan_Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Loan_Data.htm

Importing Employee Loan Data

You can import changes to employee loan data to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors who have full access to the Employee Loans form enabled for their user role. Employee loan data imported through this process will be added to existing records. Updates to existing employee loan data can be made using the Loan Number column, which is an optional field.

Note: Note the following:

To upload and import employee loan data, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Payroll|Change menu, select Employee Loans.

  3. On the Employee Loans form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Employee Loans import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Employee Loans form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Employee Loans import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): ID of the client for this loan item. - Employee Identifier (required): Either the SSN, Employee ID, or the Employee Number of an employee who works for the client. (Note: Only the last four digits of the SSN display when you review the information on the File Content tab.) - Loan Number: Number associated with the loan. - Loan Date: Date on which this loan was granted. - Loan Amount (required): Amount granted to the employee. (This value must be greater than zero.) - Loan Payment (required): Amount to deduct automatically from each paycheck to repay the loan. - Payment Frequency (required): How often the payroll deduction is made: - O: Once per month. - P: Once per payroll period. - A: All payroll types. - Payback Amount (required): Amount required to consider the loan paid in full, which is the amount of this loan plus interest (if any). (Note: This amount can be different from the loan amount.) - Deduction Code (required): Code used for the employee loan. (Note: The deduction type must equal the employee loan payment.) - Start Date: Date on which payroll deductions will begin to pay back the loan. - Stop Date: Date on which payroll deductions will cease. - Reason for Loan: Reason why loan was taken. - Amount Paid: Amount that the employee has paid back on this loan to date. - Payee: Payee associated with the employee loan. > Note: Note the following: - The payee must be an existing payee and have a Payee Type set to Loans on the Payees form. - You can only use payees whose Third Party Format for the Processor ID associated with the Payroll Check Account is set to Cachet or –Select– on the ACH Originators form.

Importing Employee One-Time Deductions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_One-Time_Deductions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_One-Time_Deductions.htm

Importing Employee One-Time Deductions

You can import changes to employee one-time deductions to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note the following when using this import template:

To upload and import employee one-time deductions, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Payroll|Change, select Scheduled Deductions.

Worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors can navigate to the Employee Details form on the HR|Change menu. From the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

, select Scheduled Deductions.

  1. On the Scheduled Deductions form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Employee One-Time Deductions import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Scheduled Deductions form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you access the Employee One-Time Deductions import template from either the Scheduled Deductions form or the Data Import Tool, a message displays: “One-Time Deductions imported through this process will add to existing records. Updates to existing one-time deductions must be updated manually on the Scheduled Deductions form.” Click OK to continue.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company (required): Unique ID for the client. - Employee Identifier (required): Either the SSN, Employee ID, or the Employee Number of an employee who works for the client. If needed, you may enter more than one line for an individual employee. Note: For security purposes, the system only displays the last four digits of the SSN on the File Content tab when you use this number in Column 2 as the Employee Identifier. - Deduction Code (required): The deduction code for the client. - Amount (required): The deduction amount that is either a percentage or fixed amount, depending on the calculation method defined for the deduction code. - Stop Date: The date after which the system ceases taking the deduction. - Check Stub Description: The check stub description for the employee’s Scheduled Deduction. (If you do not use a description, the system populates this field with the deduction code’s description by default.)

========================================================================

Importing Employee Position Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Position_Rates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Position_Rates.htm

Importing Employee Position Rates

You can import changes to employee position rates to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import employee position rates, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Payroll|Change, select Employee Position Rates.

Note: Note: You can also navigate to the Employee Position Rates form by selecting Position Rates from the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

in the Employee Details form.

  1. On the Employee Position Rates form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Employee Position Rates import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Employee Position Rates form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Division Codes import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee (required): The Employee ID of an employee who works for the client. - Position Code (required): The existing position code in the system. - Standard Pay Rate: The pay rate that overrides the employee’s pay rate for the position. - Pay Code: The pay code for this position. - Pay Rate: The pay rate for this position. - Bill Rate: The bill rate for the employee in this position.

Importing Employee Property

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Property.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Property.htm

Importing Employee Property

You can use the Employee Property import template to import property for the employee details record.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import employee property, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Employee Property import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique identifier for your employees. - Property Code: The code that represents the client property assigned to the employee. - Date Issued: The date when the employee received the client property. - Serial No: The client property serial number. - Property Value: The estimated value of the client property. - Date Returned: The date the employee returned the property to the client. - Comments: Comments specific to this client property.

========================================================================

Importing Employee Recurring Deductions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Recurring_Deductions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Recurring_Deductions.htm

Importing Employee Recurring Deductions

You can import changes to employee recurring deductions to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available for service providers.

To upload and import employee recurring deductions, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Payroll|Change, select Recurring Deductions.

  3. On the Recurring Deductions form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.

The Employee Recurring Deductions import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Recurring Deductions form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

Before you import employee recurring deductions, the system prompts you to clear all payroll deductions for this client’s employees before it loads the deduction file.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company (required): Unique ID for the client. - Employee Identifier (required): Either the SSN, Employee ID, or the Employee Number of an employee who works for the client. If needed, you may enter more than one line for an individual employee. Note: For security purposes, the system only displays the last four digits of the SSN on the File Content tab when you use this number in Column 2 as the Employee Identifier. - Deduction Code (required): The deduction code for the client. - Amount (required): The deduction amount that is either a percentage or fixed amount, depending on the calculation method defined for the deduction code. - Periods (required): The deduction periods that determine when this deduction is taken from the employee’s net earnings after payroll taxes. - Start Date: The date to begin taking the deduction. - Stop Date: The date after which the system stops taking the deduction. - Maximum Amount: The maximum amount the system can deduct on a monthly, quarterly, yearly, or lifetime basis, as set in the Maximum Amount Basis category. (Note: Any maximum set here overrides the maximums defined for the deduction code. If you do not enter a maximum here, then any maximums set for the deduction code apply.) Note: An error message displays if you try to import either the Maximum Amount or Maximum Amount Basis categories individually without both having a value (leaving them blank will update to NULL). However, you can import the file without completing these columns because they are not mandatory. - Maximum Amount Basis: The basis to which the maximum applies: Monthly, Quarterly, Annually, or Lifetime. The following valid codes are available: - Monthly (M) - Quarterly (Q) - Annually (A) - Lifetime (L)

========================================================================

Importing Employee Resident Addresses

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Resident_Address.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Resident_Address.htm

Importing Employee Resident Addresses

You can import changes to employee resident addresses to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available for service providers.

To upload and import employee resident addresses:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processingmenu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Employee Resident Address import template option.

You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique ID for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique ID for the employee. - Resident Address - Line 1 (required): First resident address line for the employee. - Resident Address - Line 2: Second resident address line for the employee. - Zip Code (required): Zip code for the employee’s resident address. Note: The system automatically updates the following fields in the Employee Details form if the Zip Code or Geocode changes: - City - State - County - School District - Zip+4: Indicates the ZIP+4 extension for the residential address, if it was not populated by the system. - Geocode: Geocode for the employee’s resident address. - Unincorporated Area: Indicates if the employee’s city or town is not governed by its own local municipal services and is not subject to local resident taxes. - Portland Metro District: Indicates if the employee resides in, or receives pay from the Portland Metro district. This is for highly compensated employees who qualify for the Portland Metro SHS tax.

If the import file includes an address that fails validation or USPS-accepted address status, the system displays a dialog during the import process, Database File Import dialog entry, so you can either replace the incorrect address with a validated version or skip (keep) the current address.

Note: A prompt displays in this instance, “Click Replace to use the suggested address or Skip to not import the employee’s address.”

When this prompt displays during the import process, do one of the following:

After you make a selection, the dialog closes and a confirmation message displays, “File content successfully uploaded and ready to be imported.” Click OK. (Note: Any skipped addresses do not display and any replaced addresses display in the File Content tab in the Data Import Tool.)

After you click Import and the import finishes, a confirmation message displays, “File content successfully imported. View report for details.” (Note: Any skipped addresses display the “Skipped with a Comment” import status.)

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Importing Employee Scheduled Payments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Scheduled_Payments.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Scheduled_Payments.htm

Importing Employee Scheduled Payments

You can use this import template to import employee scheduled payments to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note the following:

Note: Service providers can enable the ALLPAYCODESINT custom feature code on the System Parameters form to override the restriction listed above, so the system imports any pay codes, including the allowed pay codes that are defined in the Control tab on the Client Details form. (See Using Custom Feature Codes.)

To upload and import employee scheduled payments, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Payroll|Change menu, select Scheduled Payments.

Worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors can navigate to the Employee Details form on the HR|Change menu. From the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

, select Scheduled Payments.

  1. On the Scheduled Payments form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Employee Scheduled Payments import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Scheduled Payments form.

Note: Note: You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee Identifier (required): Either the SSN, Employee ID, or the Employee Number of an employee who works for the client and belongs to a pay group included in the payroll batch (can be a terminated employee). If needed, you may enter more than one line for an individual employee. (Note: Only the last four digits of the SSN display when you review the information on the File Content tab.) - Pay Code (required): The pay code for this scheduled payment. - Status (required): The status of the scheduled payment. - Amount (required): The scheduled payment that is either a percentage or fixed amount, depending on the calculation method defined for the payment. - Periods: The payment periods that determine when this scheduled payment is taken from the employee’s net earnings after payroll taxes. - Start Date: The date the system starts taking the payment. - Stop Date: The date after which the system stops taking the payment. - Move to T/S: Select Yes to move this expensed reimbursement or fringe pay code to the detail line on the payroll Voucher Earning Detail form once the payroll initializes.

Importing Employee Skills and Educational Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Skills_and_Education_Information.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employee_Skills_and_Education_Information.htm

Importing Employee Skills and Educational Information

You can import changes to skills and educational information for multiple employees to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note the following:

To upload and import skills and educational information, do the following:

  1. You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. From the Import Template drop-down menu, select Employee Skills and Education.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company (required): Unique ID for the client. - Employee Identifier (required): Either the SSN, Employee ID, or the Employee Number of an employee who works for the client. If needed, you may enter more than one line for an individual employee. - Skill Code: Abbreviation for the skill. (Note: If you enter an invalid skill code, an error message displays.) - Skill Comment: Information that applies to the skill. - Competency Level: Competency level for this skill. - Date Certified: Date when the employee most recently received certification for this skill. - Renewal Date: Date when the employee must renew certification of this skill. - School Name: Institution the employee attended. - Years: Number of years completed at this school. - Graduated (Y/N): Indicates whether the employee graduated from this school. - Year Graduated: Year the employee graduated. - Degree Earned: Degree the employee received. - Comment: Indicates additional information about the employee’s education at this school.

Importing Employer Tax Rates (SUTA)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employer_Tax_Rates_SUTA.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employer_Tax_Rates_SUTA.htm

Importing Employer Tax Rates (SUTA)

You can use this import template to import employer tax rates for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import pay code total compensation categories:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Employer|Change menu, select Employer Tax Rates (SUTA). The Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) form displays.

  3. On the Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Deny.)

The Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Employer (required): Employer ID for the client. - State (required): State in which the employer does business. - Effective Date (required): Date on which the rates go into effect. (This date is when the rate takes effect, not when the employer received the rate.) - SUTA Rate (required): Employer SUTA rate for the state. - Officer SUTA Rate: Employer SUTA rate for the state, if the rate is different for officers. - SDI Rate: Employer SDI rate, if applicable. (This applies to states where the employer pays disability insurance and the rate needs to override the Vertex value.) - State Misc1 Rate: Employer Misc1 override rate for the employer-paid taxes. - State Misc2 Rate: Employer Misc2 override rate for the employer-paid taxes. - State Misc3 Rate: Employer Misc3 override rate for the employer-paid taxes. - State Misc 3 Employee Rate: Employer override rate for the employee-paid Paid Family Medical Leave (PFML) tax (Tax Code XX-40). (As of 2023, the states of Massachusetts, Washington, Oregon & Colorado will have Paid Family Medical Leave (PFML) tax, the tax rates of which will vary between the Employee and Employer.)

========================================================================

Importing Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employer_WC_Accrual_Modifiers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Employer_WC_Accrual_Modifiers.htm

Importing Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers

You can use this import template to import employer W/C accrual modifiers for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import employer W/C accrual modifier categories:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Employer|Change menu, select Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers. The Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers form displays.

  3. On the Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Deny.)

The Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Employer Tax Rates (SUTA) form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Employer (required): Employer ID for the client. - State Code (required): State in which the employer does business. - Effective Date (required): Date when workers’ compensation is effective. (Use a new date or an existing date.) - Discount/Debit (required): Employer discount/debit rate for the state. - Modifier (required): Modifier rate for the state. - W/C Policy: Identifies the W/C policy. - W/C Policy Discount/Debit: Discount/debit rate for the policy. - W/C Policy Modifier: Identifies the modifier for the policy.

========================================================================

Importing Global Workers’ Compensation Classification Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Global_WC_Classification_Rates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Global_WC_Classification_Rates.htm

Importing Global Workers’ Compensation Classification Rates

You can import changes to W/C rates at the system level to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available for service providers.

To upload and import W/C classification rates, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. Select W/C Classification Rates from the System|Change menu.

  3. On the W/C Classification Rates form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Global W/C Classification Rates import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the W/C Classification Rates form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Rate Template (required): The workers’ compensation rate template. - State (required): State for the client’s address. - Effective Date (required): A new or existing effective date. - Class Code (required): The workers’ compensation Class Code used by the state for this classification. To enter a sub-class code, precede it with a period. - Gross Rate (required): The workers’ compensation insurance premium’s gross rate as a percentage. - Published Rate: The published rate for the classification. (Note: This rate is only for informational purposes; it is not used to calculate accrual or billing rates.) - Rate Per Hour: The workers’ compensation rate per hour. - Tax Rate (EE): The workers’ compensation tax rate for employees. - Tax Rate (ER): The workers’ compensation tax rate for employers.

========================================================================

Importing Global Workers’ Compensation Classifications

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Global_WC_Classifications.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Global_WC_Classifications.htm

Importing Global Workers’ Compensation Classifications

You can import changes to W/C codes and descriptions by state to reduce the amount of manual work required. Also, you can import multiple rate templates and effective dates all at once.

Note: Note: This import template is only available for service providers and can only be accessed using the Import

[Image: screenshot]

icon from the system-level W/C Classifications form.

To upload and import W/C classifications, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. Select W/C Classifications from the System|Change menu.

  3. On the W/C Classifications form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Global W/C Classifications import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the W/C Classification Rates form.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - State Code (required): The two-character state code that applies to this workers’ compensation classification. - Class Code (required): The workers’ compensation Class Code used by the state for this classification. To enter a sub-class code, precede it with a period. - Class Description (required): The Class Description for this classification. - OH Construction Class?: The Ohio Construction Class, if the classification pertains to a construction trade class in Ohio. The system uses this class in the Ohio Weekly Construction Cap calculation.

========================================================================

Importing Labor Allocations

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Labor_Allocations.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Labor_Allocations.htm

Importing Labor Allocations

You can use this import template to import labor allocations to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import labor allocations, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the HR|Change menu, select Employee Details. Enter or select an Employee, then select the Pay tab.

  3. In the Allocations panel, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Labor Allocations import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Allocations panel on the Pay tab in the Employee Details form.

Note: A message displays, “Labor Allocations imported through this process will override any existing records. Updates to existing labor allocations must be done manually.” Click OK to continue.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique identifier for the employee whose benefit billing record will receive an adjustment. - Location: Location code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Division: Division code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Department: Department code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Project: Project code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Position: Position code associated with the line item, if applicable. - Percent (required): Amount of the employee’s time that is being allocated.

========================================================================

Importing Miscellaneous Invoices

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Miscellaneous_Invoices.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Miscellaneous_Invoices.htm

Importing Miscellaneous Invoices

You can use this import template to import stand-alone, miscellaneous charges to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import stand-alone, miscellaneous charges, do the following:

  1. Select Payroll.

  2. From the Payroll|Action menu, select Miscellaneous Invoice.

  3. On the Miscellaneous Invoice form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Miscellaneous Invoices import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Miscellaneous Invoice form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Bill Date (required): Bill date for this invoice. - Suppress ACH (Optional): Indicates if this invoice should not follow ACH rules established for this client. - Event Code (required): Billing event code for this invoice. - Billing Units (required): Number of billing units for this invoice. - Bill Rate (required): Billing rates for each billing unit for this invoice. - Amount To Bill (Optional): Amount to bill for this invoice. - Location (Optional): Location code for this invoice. - Division (Optional): Division information for this invoice. - Department (Optional): Department information for this invoice. - Shift (Optional): Shift information for this invoice. - Project (Optional): Project information for this invoice. - Cost (Optional): Cost for this invoice. - Comment (Optional): Descriptive comments about this invoice.

========================================================================

Importing Network ZIP Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Network_Zip_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Network_Zip_Codes.htm

Importing Network ZIP Codes

You can Import zip codes to benefit plans that have a network assigned with the Network ZIP Codes import template.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import ZIP codes, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office, then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.
  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Network ZIP Codes import template option. When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it. The sample header file contains a single column header labeled “ZIP”.) The layout requirements are: | Field | Description | | — | — | | Column Number | The corresponding column number for the imported data. | | Category Description | ZIP (required): The ZIP code(s) you are importing. | | Required? | Indicates if the field is required. |
  3. Before you import, you must complete the following required fields. | Use this option | To define this | | — | — | | Plan ID | Benefit plan ID for zip code import. | | Network ID | Network ID for zip code import. |

Updating ZIP Codes

Importing ZIP codes adds them to the benefit plan record, but it does not update the ZIP code records at the system-level. You must enter All ZIP codes at the system-level to attach them to a benefit plan.

System-level zip code records always display City & State information in the table. If this information is not displayed, then the zip code record does not exist at the system-level. When zip code records are correctly entered at the system-level, you can attach them to the benefit plan.

The import form can save the imported record, but when you select the Network ID to view the benefit plan’s networks in the Benefit Network Locations form, the system displays the following error message for each ZIP code that cannot be validated:

Warning - Key [ZIP code] is not valid for ZIP codes

PrismHR recommends that you review all imported ZIP codes and update ZIP code records in the Zip Codes form before you import. For more information, see Setting Up Zip Codes.

========================================================================

Importing Offer Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Offer_Types.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Offer_Types.htm

Importing Offer Types

You can use this import template to import/update offer types for existing benefit plans. This will save time and effort to manually add/update the Offer Type field on the Group Benefit Plans form. (If you try to modify any other field using this process, you will receive an error.)

Note: Note the following:

To import and update offer types:

  1. To access this form, click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office). In the Operations|Import menu, click Data Import Tool.

  2. Select Offer Types in Import Template.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Data File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Plan ID (required): Unique identifier for the benefit plan. - Plan Description (required): Description of the benefit plan. - Insurance Class (required): Indicates the type of coverage this plan provides. - Offer Type (required): Indicates the offer type that classifies the benefit plan.
  1. Click Download Data File to download the sample header file. The header file contains the four columns in the File Format tab. Fill in the necessary data for all the Benefit Plan IDs to update the Offer Type to build your Import file.

Note: If you want to update the Offer Type for all Benefit Plan IDs in bulk that do not have an associated offer type, select Prepopulate file (all plans with BLANK Offer Type). The system downloads a .csv file to your system that is pre-populated with data from the Group Benefit Plans for all plans with a BLANK offer type. (If you do not select this field, the system downloads the file with headers only.)

  1. Click Find File to open the File Upload dialog box.

  2. Click Add Files in the File Upload dialog box.

  3. Select the specified Import File from your system that you have created. Once selected, the Import File displays in the File Upload dialog box.

  4. Click Start Upload to upload the file.

  5. Click Close in the File Upload dialog box.

  6. The uploaded Import File name displays in the File Name field on the form. The content of the file displays in the File Content tab. Errors, if any, display in the Messages tab. Correct the errors and redo the process.

  7. Click Import to import the content into PrismHR.

  8. Click Report to display the Imported Offer Types Report. The Import Status column indicates whether the offer type for that plan ID was imported. If not, then the Messages tab states the reason why.

Once the import is successful, the system updates the Offer Type field on the Group Benefit Plans form with the plans contained in the Import File.

========================================================================

Importing Pay Code Total Compensation Category

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Pay_Code_Total_Compensation_Category.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Pay_Code_Total_Compensation_Category.htm

Importing Pay Code Total Compensation Categories

You can use this import template to import pay code total compensation categories for the client to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import pay code total compensation categories:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the System|Change menu, select Pay Codes. The Pay Codes form displays.

  3. On the Pay Codes form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Deny.)

The Pay Code Total Compensation Category import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Pay Codes form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Pay Code (required): Pay code for the client. - Total Comp Category: Either the Direct or Indirect category that designates where the compensation displays in the total compensation statement in the Total Compensation dashboard in Employee Portal (EP).

========================================================================

Importing Plan Comparison Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Plan_Comparison_Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Plan_Comparison_Data.htm

Importing Plan Comparison Data

You can import benefit plan comparison information into the Comparison Field tab of the Benefits Enrollment Plan Details form (Workflow Setup > Benefits Specific > Benefits Enrollment Plan Details).

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import plan comparison data, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processingmenu.
  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Plan Comparison Data import template option. When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it. The sample file contains the Plan ID and Effective Date columns plus additional columns based on the Category Descriptions found for the selected Offer Type. It also includes additional fields at the end of the sample header file which can be imported into the fields in the Additional Plan Details section on the Benefit Enrollment Plan Details form. For a particular Offer Type, you can view the names of the fields in the Additional Plan Details section of the Benefit Enrollment Plan Details form under the Category Description column on the Data Import Tool form.) The layout requirements are: | Field | Description | | | — | — | — | | Column Number | The corresponding column number for the imported data. | | | Category Description | - Plan ID (required): Unique identifiers for the Benefit Plan IDs being compared. - Effective Date (required): Effective dates for the benefit plans being compared. Note: Additional Category Descriptions may appear in the file layout. These represent optional columns and will vary based on the Category Descriptions found on the Details tab of the Benefits Enrollment Plan Details form for the selected Offer Type. | | | | • | Plan ID (required): Unique identifiers for the Benefit Plan IDs being compared. | | | • | Effective Date (required): Effective dates for the benefit plans being compared. | | Required? | Indicates if the field is required. | |
  3. Before you import, you must complete the following required field. Use this option — To define this Offer Type — The benefit Offer Type associated with the plans you are comparing. Example: Medical, Vision, or Dental.

========================================================================

Importing Position Classifications

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Position_Classifications.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Position_Classifications.htm

Importing Position Classifications

You can use this import template to import state and workers compensation classes for existing position classifications to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import position classifications, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. The Data Import Tool form displays.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Position Classification import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Position Classification (required): The unique job classification ID. - State: The valid state abbreviation. (For each state, the system ties a state-specific workers’ compensation class to this position when it is performed by employees who work at a location within that state.) Note: If your template lists the same state twice, the system uses the first instance but ignores the second instance. - Work Comp Class: The W/C Class Code applicable to the state for this position classification.

========================================================================

Importing Position Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Position_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Position_Codes.htm

Importing Position Codes

You can use this import template to import position codes to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import position codes, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select Position Codes.

  3. On the Positions form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Position Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Positions form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Position Code (required) : Abbreviation for the position. - Position Name (required): Name that defines the position. - Position Classification (required): Identifies the job classification. - Position Description: Description for this position. - Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory position. - Tipped Position: Indicates that the position allows tips. - GL Segment 1: Code that defines the G/L account number segment instead of the department or division code. This replaces EEDP instead of the actual code. - GL Segment 2: Allows for more accounting options based on the department or division code. Rarely used, it ties to the EEDP2 mnemonic in the G/L interfaces. - GL Segment 3: Allows you to enter a third G/L code, if necessary. - Alaska Position Code: The code sent to MasterTax for quarterly tax reporting to the state of Alaska. - SOC Code: The Standard Occupational Classification (SOC) Code, which only consists of numbers, no dashes. This information is included in the MasterTax RTS file and the Employer and Client LA quarterly files in place of the position’s description. If you do not define a SOC code for the position, the files include the description. - Indiana Seasonal Employee Code: A two-digit code if the position is seasonal and located in Indiana. This code is required for SUI electronic filing in Indiana. - Obsolete: Indicates the position is no longer used. - TTO Code: Indicates a valid Tipped Taxable Occupation Code that applies to an eligible tipped position, which complies with the tips requirements of the One Big Beautiful Bill Act.

========================================================================

Importing Certified Pay Rates for Projects

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Project_Certified_Pay_Rates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Project_Certified_Pay_Rates.htm

Importing Certified Pay Rates for Projects

You can import certified pay rates (that is, position code, position title, base rate, fringe rate, and prevailing wage rate) for projects to reduce the amount of manual work required.

To upload and import certified pay rates for projects:

  1. You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. From the Import Template drop-down menu, select Project (Certified Pay Rates).

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

You can enable one of the following fields during imports:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Project ID (required): Indicates the unique project code for projects subject to certified payroll regulations. - Position Code (required): Indicates the unique code that briefly describes the position. For example, OPER for vehicle operator. - Base Rate: Indicates the portion of the job rate used to calculate the overtime rate. - Fringe Rate: Indicates the fringe portion of the job rate.

========================================================================

Importing Project and Cost Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Project_Cost_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Project_Cost_Codes.htm

Importing Project and Cost Codes

You can import changes to projects and cost codes to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import project and cost codes:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Projects.

  3. On the Projects form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Projects/Cost Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Projects form.

You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Project (required): The unique project code. - Description (required): The project description. - Certified Payroll: Indicates if this project is subject to certified payroll regulations. - G/L Segment 1: The code to use as an alternative to the Project Code. - G/L Segment 2: The G/L code that substitutes for EEPR2 in G/L code routines. - G/L Segment 3: A third G/L code, if needed. - Project Class: The class code for the project. - Obsolete: Indicates if this project is no longer used. - Union Project: Indicates if this project is associated with a union. - Union Code: Indicates the union code for the project. (The Union Project field must be enabled.) - Track Phases: Indicates if the phases of this project are tracked for job costing purposes. - Other W/C Coverage In Place: Indicates if Workers’ Compensation Insurance Coverage has been established for this project. Note: This category only displays if you enable specific custom suffix codes. - Certified Payroll Report Format: Indicates a report format. For example, select MA, or Massachusetts mvQuery. - Wage Decision Number: Indicates a value for prevailing wage rates assigned to this certified project. - Wage Decision Date: Indicates a date for wage decision. - Project City: Indicates the city where the certified project is located. - Project State: Indicates the state where the certified project is located. - Use Higher of Prevailing Wage Rate or Employee’s Pay Rate: Indicates whether the system should use whichever rate is higher; otherwise, the system uses the job rate defined here. - Subtract Benefit/Hour from Calculated Pay Rate: Indicates whether to subtract the employee’s cost of benefits per hour from the employee’s rate when determining the higher rate. - Filter Cert Pay on Jobs: Indicates whether to filter certified payroll on job codes. - Contractor or Subcontractor: Indicates whether a contractor or subcontractor is working on this project. - Name of Contractor: Indicates the contractor’s name as listed on the certified payroll form. - Address: Indicates the contractor’s address to print on the certified payroll report. - Project and Location: Indicates the project and location where the project work takes place. - Project or Contract No.: Indicates a project or contract number. - Signatory Name: Indicates the name that appears on the certified payroll form, which is the person responsible for this project. - Signatory Title: Indicates the title that appears on the certified payroll form. - Fringe Benefits Paid to Approved Plans: Indicates if fringe benefits are paid to approved plans, funds, or programs. - Fringe Benefits Paid in Cash: Indicates if fringe benefits are paid in cash. - Report Hours Paid Instead of Hours Worked: Indicates if you want to include pay codes in the report that are flagged as being included in the certified payroll report but do not represent hours worked, such as sick time. - CA License Type: Indicates the license type: Contractor State License Board, Professional License, or Other License. - CA License No: Indicates the license number that should be presented in the CA XML file. If you indicate Other License as the CA License Type, you should indicate the License Type : License Number. - CA PWCR: Indicates the California Public Works Contractor Registration number. It should be a 10-digit number or NA for not applicable. - CA Ins Number: Indicates the number to be presented for this project in the CA XML file. - CA Contractor Email: Indicates the email address to use in the CA XML for this project. - Awarding Body: Indicates the name of the public entity that owns the project. - Contract Agency Id: Indicates the ID of the contract agency. - Contract Agency: Indicates the name of the contract agency. - CA Awarding Body Id: Indicates the ID number of the public entity that owns the project. - CA Awarding Body Proj No: Indicates the project number assigned to the project by the public entity. - CA Awarding Body Contract Id: Indicates the contract ID given by the public entity to the project. - CA Stmt of NonPerformance: Indicates if you need to indicate a state of non-performance. The system will not include employees in the file. Do not indicate this option if you want to include employees in the file (this is typical, and the value in the CA XML file will be false for this option).

========================================================================

Importing Rate Groups

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Rate_Groups.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Rate_Groups.htm

Importing Rate Groups

You can use this import template to import rate groups to manage billing for benefit plans.

Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import rate groups, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Rate Groups import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Data File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

  1. Select the Prepopulate file checkbox if you want to download the data file that includes all the fields that are being imported from the list of Rate Groups configured with a full export of all existing Rate Group data in a .CSV file.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Rate Group (required): Indicates the rate group code. - Group Name (required): Indicates the description of the rate group. - Inactive: Indicates if the rate group is currently in use in PrismHR. - Premium Rate Group: Indicates if the rate group is used for premiums instead of billing.

========================================================================

Importing Project and Cost Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Retirement_Loans.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Retirement_Loans.htm

Importing Retirement Loans

You can import retirement loans to set up these loans easily in bulk.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers.

To upload and import retirement loans, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processingmenu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Retirement Loans import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique identifier for the employee whose retirement loan is defined. - Retirement Plan (required): The Retirement Plan on which to base the loan. - Loan Amount (required): The total Loan Amount granted to the employee. - Loan Date (required): The date of the loan. - Deduction Start Date: The pay date when payroll deductions begin. - Reason for Loan: The reason the company allowed the loan. - Payment Amount (required): The Payment Amount per pay period as detailed in the plan administrator’s schedule. - Pay Back Amount (required): The total Pay Back Amount, which is the amount the employee must pay back on this loan. - TPA Loan Identifier: The TPA Loan Identifier. - Override Payment Amount: The Override Payment Amount. - Override From Pay Date: The date the override begins. - Override to Pay Date: The date the override ends.

========================================================================

Importing Shift Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Shift_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Shift_Codes.htm

Importing Shift Codes

You can use this import template to import shift codes to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import shift codes, do the following:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From the Client|Change menu, select Shifts.

  3. On the Shifts form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Shift Codes import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Shifts form.

You can navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Shift Code (required): Code for the shift. - Description (required): Description for this shift. - Differential Method: Method to calculate shift differentials. - Differential Amount: Percentage or fixed amount, based on the differential method selected. - Include in Pay Rate: Adds this shift’s differential pay to the employee’s regular pay rate. Otherwise, it uses a separate pay code. - Regular Pay Code: Code to pay the shift differential associated with regular hours. - Overtime Pay Code: Code to pay the shift differential associated with overtime (premium) hours. - Overtime Pay Factor: Pay factor (usually 1.5) to multiply the overtime shift premium amount when using a separate pay code. - Per Diem Percent: Percent to allocate to non-taxable per diem when paid using the percentage method. - Calc O/T Differential on Straight Rate: Calculates the differential on overtime pay using the straight pay rate.

========================================================================

Importing State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_State_Tax_Bill_Rates_SUTA.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_State_Tax_Bill_Rates_SUTA.htm

Importing State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA)

You can import changes to Client State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers who have full access to the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) form enabled for their user role and for non-client reporting states.

To upload and import state tax bill rates:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA).

  3. On the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the State Tax Bill Rates (SUTA) form.

You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

Note: Note the following:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - State Code (required): The two-character state code. - Effective Date (required): The date when the bill rate goes into effect. - SUTA Bill Rate (required): The SUTA Bill Rate for the state that applies to the client. - Officer SUTA Rate: The Officer SUTA Rate, if it is different for officers. - SDI Rate: The employer’s SDI Rate, if the employer pays disability insurance in this state. - Location Code: The location code where the billing rate applies. If the location is not valid for the client an error message displays, “Location Code is not valid for Client <XXX>.” - Lock Down Employer: Set Yes or No (upper, lower, or mixed case) to lock down the employees working in this state to one of the employer IDs. This lock goes into effect during payroll calculation and new hire/rehire. > Note: Note the following: - If you set the Location Code field to Yes, the Lock Down Employer field is not available. An error message displays, “The lock-down option is not available when rates are by location.” - If you do not use Yes, No, or Null in this field (that is, you enter another option), the following error message displays, “Lock Down Employer - Valid entry is required.” - Lock New Hire: Set Yes or No (upper, lower, or mixed case) to lock new or rehired personnel working in this state to the employer. > Note: Note the following: - You must set the Lock Down Employer field to Yes to use this field. If you do not provide a lock down employer an error message displays, “Lock Down Employer is required if Lock New Hire is set to Yes.” - If you set the Location Code field to Yes, the Lock Down Employer field is not available. An error message displays, “The lock-down option is not available when rates are by location.” - If you do not use Yes, No, or Null in this field (that is, you enter another option), the following error message displays, “Lock New Hire - Valid entry is required.” - If you set an option in this field, but not for the Employer ID field the following error message displays, “Corresponding employer ID required for Lock New Hire.” - Lock New Hire 2: Set Yes or No (upper, lower, or mixed case) to lock new or rehired personnel working in this state to the employer. > Note: Note the following: - You must set the Lock Down Employer field to Yes to use this field. If you do not provide a lock down employer an error message displays, “A Lock Down Employer is required.” - If you set multiple Lock New Hire fields to Yes an error message displays, “Only 1 Employer can be locked down at a time.” - If you set the Location Code field to Yes, the Lock Down Employer field is not available. An error message displays, “The lock-down option is not available when rates are by location.” - If you do not use Yes, No, or Null in this field (that is, you enter another option), the following error message displays, “Lock New Hire - Valid entry is required.” - If you set an option in this field, but not for the Employer ID 2 field the following error message displays, “Corresponding employer ID required for Lock New Hire.” - Lock New Hire 3: Set Yes or No (upper, lower, or mixed case) to lock new or rehired personnel working in this state to the employer. > Note: Note the following: - You must set the Lock Down Employer field to Yes to use this field. If you do not provide a lock down employer an error message displays, “A Lock Down Employer is required.” - If you set multiple Lock New Hire fields to Yes an error message displays, “Only 1 Employer can be locked down at a time.” - If you set the Location Code field to Yes, the Lock Down Employer field is not available. An error message displays, “The lock-down option is not available when rates are by location.” - If you do not use Yes, No, or Null in this field (that is, you enter another option), the following error message displays, “Lock New Hire - Valid entry is required.” - If you set an option in this field, but not for the Employer ID 3 field the following error message displays, “Corresponding employer ID required for Lock New Hire.” The following fields indicate the miscellaneous override rates for employer-paid taxes. (Note: If you leave any of State Misc fields blank, the system uses the default rate.) - State Misc1 Rate: The State Misc1 Rate (Tax ID 26). - State Misc2 Rate: The State Misc2 Rate (Tax ID 28). - State Misc3 Rate: The State Misc3 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 22-41 (Massachusetts) and 48-41 (Washington). - State Misc4 Rate: The State Misc4 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 24-54 (Minnesota). The rest of the fields are sometimes associated to include multi-value arrays, which are indicated by displaying a <number> at the end of the field name: - Employer ID, Employer ID 2, and Employer ID 3: The employer ID to which this SUTA bill rate applies. - Overbill Credit Amount, Overbill Credit Amount 2, and Overbill Credit Amount 3: The overbill credit amount back rate only if it is different from the SUTA bill rate. - Location Rate Obsolete Date: If this rate is for a specific location that is closing, and the code is no longer used in calculations, this date refers to the last active pay date. - Overbill CR Bill Code: The overbill CR bill code to use for credit backs for SUTA overlimit credits instead of the default. - Wage Base Override: The wage base override if you want to use a different amount than that specified in the Vertex guide. For example, Michigan has two tiers based on experience. - SUTA Bill Rate 2 and SUTA Bill Rate 3: The SUTA Bill Rate for the state that applies to the client.

========================================================================

Importing State Tax Rates (SUTA)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_State_Tax_Rates_SUTA.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_State_Tax_Rates_SUTA.htm

Importing State Tax Rates (SUTA)

You can import changes to Client State Tax Rates (SUTA) to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is only available to service providers who have full access to the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form enabled for their user role and for non-client reporting states.

To upload and import state tax rates:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select State Tax Rates (SUTA).

  3. On the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The State Tax Rates (SUTA) import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form.

You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

Note: You can import at the operations level for single clients or for multiple clients at once.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - State Code (required): The two-character state code. - Effective Date (required): The date when the rate goes into effect. - SUTA Bill Rate: The SUTA Bill Rate for the state that applies to the client. - Officer SUTA Rate: The Officer SUTA Rate, if it is different for officers. - SDI Rate: The employer’s SDI Rate, if the employer pays disability insurance in this state. - Wage Base Override: The taxable Wage Base Override the system should use for SUTA billing calculations for the state. - State Misc 3 Employee Rate: The State Misc 3 Employee Rate to set employee tax rates for codes 22-40 (Massachusetts) or 48-40 (Washington) paid family medical leave. For example, you can decrease the tax rate paid by employees. The following fields indicate the miscellaneous override rates for employer-paid taxes. (Note: If you leave any of State Misc fields blank, the system uses the default rate.) - State Misc1 Rate: The State Misc1 Rate (Tax ID 26). - State Misc2 Rate: The State Misc2 Rate (Tax ID 28). - State Misc3 Rate: The State Misc3 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 22-41 (Massachusetts) and 48-41 (Washington). - State Misc4 Rate: The State Misc4 Rate to set employer tax rates for tax codes 24-54 (Minnesota).

For example:

Note: These warnings are informational only and when you select Import, the system imports the data unless there are other failure messages. In addition, the warning messages display in the Confirmation Report after the import finishes with the “Success” import status.

========================================================================

Importing Third Party Sick Pay Adjustments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Third_Party_Sick_Pay_Adjustment.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Third_Party_Sick_Pay_Adjustment.htm

Importing Third Party Sick Pay Adjustments

You can use this import template to import third-party sick pay adjustments to create adjustment vouchers and client bill pendings for each record to reduce the amount of manual work required.

To upload and import third-party sick pay adjustments, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

  2. In the Data Import Tool form, select the Third Party Sick Pay Adjustment import template option.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Client ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique identifier for the employer. - Adjustment Date (required): Indicates the date the system uses to derive the tax year, quarter, and month to adjust. - Bill Date (optional): Indicates the date to use for any billing transaction. - Employer ID (required): Indicate the employer ID affected by this adjustment. Note: If you import an Employer ID in a row in the import file that is not assigned to or is an Alternate Employer for the Client ID in the same row an error message displays, “Must be a valid Employer ID for the client,” and the row does not import. - Federal Taxable Sick Pay (optional): Indicates the total amount paid to the employee by a third-party insurer to cover lost wages during an illness. - Federal Non-Taxable Sick Pay (optional): Indicates the amount of sick pay that was not taxable because it was attributed to employee contributions to insurance premiums. - Federal Income Tax Withheld (optional): Indicates the amount of federal income tax withheld by the third-party insurer. - FICA Taxable Sick Pay (optional): Indicates the amount of taxable sick pay paid to the employee by a third-party insurer to cover lost wages during an illness. - FICA Non-Taxable Sick Pay (optional): Indicates the sick pay that was not taxable because it was attributed to employee contributions to insurance premiums. - Social Security Tax Withheld (optional): Indicates the amount of Social Security tax withheld by the third-party insurer. - Medicare Tax Withheld (optional): Indicates the amount of Medicare tax withheld by the third-party insurer. - Adjust Client Tax Register? (optional): Indicates whether the system should update the client’s register for client-based taxes. - State Code (optional): Indicates the two-character postal code for the state that might have miscellaneous state taxes, such as Hawaii employee disability tax. Note: You can indicate a two-character state code (for example, CA, which can be uppercase or lowercase) or an authority ID (for example, 05). - Tax ID (optional): Indicates the tax ID for the state tax withheld from the employee by the third-party insurer. - Taxable Pay (optional): Indicates the taxable pay applicable to that state. Note: If you indicate an amount in the Taxable Pay or the Tax Withheld category, you must include a State Code and a Tax ID. - Tax Withheld (optional): Indicates the tax withheld by the third-party insurer for that state.

========================================================================

Importing Tips and Overtime Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Tip_OT_Register.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Tip_OT_Register.htm

Importing Tips and Overtime Data

You can use this import template to import employee tips and overtime data to reduce the amount of manual work required.

To upload and import tips and overtime data:

  1. Select Client.

  2. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu. The Data Import Tool form displays.

  3. Select Tip OT Register.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

Note: Before you begin the import, you can select to Overwrite Existing Data, which performs as follows in these conditions:

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Employer ID (required): Unique identifier for the employer. - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - Employee ID (required): Unique identifier for the employee. - YEAR (required): indicates the tax year. - TTO Code: The Tipped Taxable Occupation Code (TTO). - Tip Amount: The calculated total of the TTO tip amount. - Overtime Amount: The approximate portion of overtime.

========================================================================

Importing Workers’ Compensation Billing Modifiers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_WC_Billing_Modifiers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_WC_Billing_Modifiers.htm

Importing Workers’ Compensation Billing Modifiers

You can import changes to workers’ compensation policy information to reduce the amount of manual work required. At the Operations level, service providers can import this information for multiple clients.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import workers’ compensation billing modifiers:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select W/C Billing Modifiers.

  3. On the W/C Billing Modifiers form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The W/C Billing Modifiers import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Positions form.

You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company ID (required): Unique identifier for the client. - State Code (required): State code for the client’s address. - Effective Date (required): A new effective date. - Location: If the rate applies to a specific location for this client, this is the location or existing location billing modifier record. - Use Override Rates? (required): Calculates the billing amount using the override rates. - Discount/Debit: The employer’s discount/debit rate. - Modifier: The employer’s modifier rate. - W/C Class Code: The workers’ compensation classification code. - Billing Override Rate: The rate per hundred dollars in wages or per hour worked (depending on the state) used to calculate the bill amount to the client for this workers’ compensation classification. - Bill on Wages or Hours: Determines whether to bill on wages or hours. The standard is to bill on wages unless the state specifies that the rate is based on hours. Note: You must use either W to represent wages or H to represent hours. - Accrual Override Rate: The rate per hundred dollars in wages or per hour worked (depending on the state) used to calculate the accrual override amount to the client for this workers’ compensation classification.

========================================================================

Importing Worksite Locations

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Worksite_Locations.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Data_Import_Tool/Import_Worksite_Locations.htm

Importing Worksite Locations

You can import changes to worksite locations to reduce the amount of manual work required.

Note: Note: This import template is available to service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors.

To upload and import worksite locations:

  1. Select Client.

  2. From Client|Change, select Worksite Locations.

  3. On the Worksite Locations form, click Import [Image: screenshot] to launch the Data Import Tool form. (This button displays for all user roles except Inquiry Only.)

The Worksite Locations import template option and its tabs/fields automatically display when you access this template directly from the Positions form.

You can also navigate directly to the Data Import Tool by clicking

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office), then select Data Import Tool on the Operations|Import Processing menu.

When you select the import template that you want, the required file layout displays in the form. Before you can upload and import data, your file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. (Note: You can click Download Sample Header File to download a sample Excel data file in .csv format, which can be saved in either .csv or .txt format before importing it.)

You can enable the Keep existing data for fields not in the import file field, so optional fields in the Worksite Locations import template will keep their existing data during imports. (If you do not enable this field, the system overwrites optional fields with no data during imports.)

Important! When you enable Keep existing data for fields not in the import file in the Worksite Locations import template, the Address entry validation dialog and the File Content tab display blank information for fields not included in the import file, but the import keeps the original information entered on the Worksite Locations form.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - Company (required): Unique ID for the client. - Location Code (required): Abbreviation for the location. - Location Name (required): Name that defines the worksite location. - Address One (required): First address line for the client. (Note: See “Working with Imported Address Validation,” below.) - Address Two: Second address line for the client. - Zip Code (required) : Zip code for the client’s address. - Geocode: Geocode for the client’s address. - City: City for the client’s address. - County: County for the client’s address. - State: State for the client’s address. - Lat: Latitude for the client’s address. - Long: Longitude for the client’s address. - W/C State (required): State where the client’s location is covered by workers’ compensation insurance. - G/L Seg 1: The first general ledger account number segment code. - G/L Seg 2: The second general ledger account number segment code. - G/L Seg 3: The third general ledger account number segment code. - Min Wage Rate Date: The effective date for the minimum wage rate. - Min Wage: The hourly wage for this location. - Min Cash Wage: The minimum cash wage for this location. - Min Wage Minor: The minimum hourly wage for minors, if it is different than the wage for adults. - Min Cash Wage Minor: The minimum cash wage for minors, if it is different than the wage for adults. - Adult Age: The age that this location classifies individuals as adults. Anyone under this age is considered a minor. - Obsolete Date: The obsolete date for this worksite location. (Note: If you provide an obsolete date but do not provide an obsolete status, the system records the date but leaves the obsolete location unchanged.) - Obsolete Loc?: The obsolete status for this worksite location. (Note: An error displays if you try to import an obsolete location that has active employees.) > Note: Note the following: - If you select Yes but do not include an obsolete date, the system automatically defaults to the date when the import was performed. - If you select No for a location that was previously set to Yes, the system updates the record so it is no longer obsolete (clears the value on the form). - W/C Policy: Defines the W/C policy for this location. - Add Date: The date this location was added. - Default Department: The default department for this location. - Default Division: The default division for this location. - Default Project: The default project for this location. - Default Pay Group: The default pay group for this location. - Remote Location: Defines whether the worksite geocode will be ignored and taxes will be based on the employee’s resident geocode. (Workers Compensation will also follow the resident geocode when enabled on the Benefit tab in the Client Details form.) - EEO Unit Number: The seven-character EEO Unit Number assigned to this location by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission for reporting purposes. - EEO Override Location: The EEO Override Location if employees should appear under a different location on the alternate EEO download. - EEO Federal Contractor: Indicates if this worksite location of the client is a federal contractor and differs from the client or other worksite locations of the client. - EEO Unique Entity ID: Identifies the 12-character (no special characters) Unique Entity Identifier (UEI) number issued by the System for Award Management (SAM) to identify businesses and other entities that do business with the federal government. (This field is only necessary if the worksite location differs from other locations.) Note: Only applies if the worksite location of the client is an EEO Federal Contractor. - Override Work Geocode: The Onboarding module looks to this field and automatically populates the work address with the resident address. (This supports work-from-home employees.) Indicates the Override Work GeoCode setting as appropriate. The system only applies the override if there are no overrides set at the system, client, or employee level. Typically, this is used to create “worksite locations” for remote employees. - Use Worksite Location GeoCode (no value): No override; the system uses the worksite location for the GeoCode. This is the default behavior. - Override with Resident GeoCode (R): The system uses the employee’s resident GeoCode, defined in the Employee Details Address tab (either GeoCode or Override GeoCode) instead of the worksite location’s GeoCode. Typically, you can select this when employees assigned to this location work from home. For example, you can use it for a worksite location defined as “Ohio-Based Works From Home” or “Indiana-Based Works From Home.” - Override with Home Location GeoCode (H): The system uses the employee’s “home” location assignment to supply the GeoCode for the location-based portion of taxes. This selection is not routinely used. - Override T/S GeoCode with Resident GeoCode (T): The system uses the employee’s resident GeoCode from the Employee Details Address tab in place of the worksite location’s GeoCode in the timesheet. Note: If none of the options described above are indicated an error displays, “Invalid Override Work Geocode.” - Worksite Federal EIN: Indicates the Worksite Federal EIN if it is different from the client’s employer identification number. - Worksite ID: If required by the state (such as MN), indicates a Worksite ID. This is the Reporting Unit Number used in 601 record on Mastertax RTS file and for AK-Geo Code. - Federal Entity ID: Indicates the Federal Entity ID only if the location is a different federal entity than the client for SBEA reporting purposes. - Exclude this location from E-Verification: Indicates whether to suppress the Submit for E-Verification field from displaying in the following locations: - New Hire form for this worksite location - Personal tab on the Employee Details form when the worksite location is set to Excluded - Enable Remote Verification for this location: Indicates whether to allow I-9 Approvers to remotely examine supporting documents for a new hire’s Form I-9 using an alternative procedure authorized by the Department of Homeland Security (DHS).

If the import file includes an address that fails validation or USPS-accepted address status, the system displays a dialog during the import process, Database File Import dialog entry, so you can either replace the incorrect address with a validated version or skip (keep) the current address.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: The address information consists of the street, city, zip code, geocode, county, state, latitude, and longitude.

When this prompt displays during the import process, do one of the following:

Note: Note the following:

Note: Note the following that happens if you click Skip:

After you make a selection, the dialog closes and a confirmation message displays, “File content successfully uploaded and ready to be imported.” Click OK. (Note: Any skipped locations do not display and any replaced locations display in the File Content tab in the Data Import Tool.)

After you click Import and the import finishes, a confirmation message displays, “File content successfully imported. View report for details.” (Note: Any skipped locations display the “Skipped with a Comment” import status.)

========================================================================

Deleting Imported Vouchers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Delete_Imported_Vouchers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Delete_Imported_Vouchers.htm

Deleting Imported Vouchers

You can use the Delete Imported Vouchers form to delete vouchers that you imported using the Check History Import process. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This feature is only available for service providers who have access to the payrolls that contain the voucher for deletion.

To delete imported vouchers:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Operations|Utility Processing, select Delete Imported Vouchers.

  3. Enter the Batch ID that contains the voucher you want to delete.

Note: Only vouchers in completed payrolls can be deleted. If the voucher resides in a payroll that is not complete the following error displays, “Batch ID must be for a completed batch.”

  1. Click Delete. A warning displays:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select Yes to delete the vouchers from the selected payroll.

========================================================================

Deleting Unused Employees

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Delete_Unused_Employee.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Delete_Unused_Employee.htm

Deleting Unused Employees

Employees who have never had an initialized voucher or have not received a check or arrearage voucher for any client can be deleted using the Delete Unused Employee form.

To delete an unused employee:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Utility Processing, select Delete Unused Employee.

  3. Fill in these fields as required.

Fields/Panels Description
Client Enter or select the client (required) associated with the unused employee.
Employee Enter or select the employee (required) you want to delete. The employee’s information displays in the Employment panel.
Employment This field displays the following employee information: - Employment Status: Employee’s position status (for example, ACTIVE) - Employer: Employee’s listed employer - Status Date: Employer’s date of inception - Employer Start Date: Date employee began working for employer - Employment Type: Employee’s type of employment (for example, FULL TIME) - Last Hire Date: Most-recent date of hire - Type Date: Date associated with the Employment Type - Original Hire Date: Date when employee was first hired - Position: Employee’s position - Termination Reason: Reason why employee was terminated
  1. Click Delete Employee. A dialog displays asking you to confirm this deletion.

Note: If the employee is currently listed in a payroll batch, an error message displays in the Errors panel and the employee cannot be deleted.

========================================================================

Equifax Export

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Equifax%20Export.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Equifax Export.htm

Equifax Export

Use this form to build an export file for unemployment claim processing and tax credits through Equifax. A link to Equifax Setup form is available on this form to set up the Equifax export file.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click Equifax Export.

To build the Equifax export file:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Start Date Enter the start date.
End Date Enter the end date.
Employer ID Enter the employer IDs for which you want to build this export file or click the Employer ID link and select them from the Select Employer dialog box.
Include History By default this box is un-checked. Check this box if you want to include the previous two years of payroll data.
File Type Indicate the file type from the following options: - Test - Production
  1. Click Build to build an export file.- A job progress window opens up showing the processing. In case of any errors, redo the process. Click Close to close the job progress window.

  2. Click Download File to download the Equifax Export file. This option will only appear after you build the export file.

========================================================================

Equifax Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Equifax%20Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Equifax Setup.htm

Equifax Setup

Use this form to configure the Equifax Export file.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click Equifax Setup.

To set up Equifax:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Report Setup
Source ID This is assigned by Equifax.
Source Type This is assigned by Equifax.
Submission File Code Indicate the appropriate submission file code from the following: - Initial - This is the default option. - Replacement
  1. Click Save to save the record.

========================================================================

Configuring an Import Template

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Export%20Timesheet.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Export Timesheet.htm

Configuring an Import Template

Use the Export Timesheet form to configure an import template and/or create the initial file for a spreadsheet import.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click Export Timesheet.

To create an initial file for a spreadsheet import:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Template Configuration - Use this section to create an import template.
Template ID Enter the ID of a spreadsheet import pay definition or click the Template ID link and select an existing template from the Select Template ID dialog box.
Template Description For a new template ID, Enter a short definition for this import definition. For an existing template, this field auto-populates.
Hourly Only Check this box if only hourly employees should be loaded from the download. Any salary employees that are on the download will be reported as download exceptions.
Employee Identifier Select the employee identifier to be used from the following options: - Employee ID - Employee Number
  1. Click Save to save the record or update the changes.

Export Timesheet Data - Use this process to create an initial file for a spreadsheet import.

Template ID — Enter the ID of a spreadsheet import pay definition or click the Template ID link and select an existing template from the Select Template ID dialog box.

Template Description — This field auto-populates based on the selection above.

Client ID — Enter the Client ID for which you want to create the initial file or click the Client ID link and select it from the Select Client dialog box.

Payroll Number — Enter the payroll number for which you want to create the initial file or click the Payroll Number link and select it from the Select Payroll Batches dialog box.

  1. Click Build to build the initial file for the spreadsheet import. A job progress window appears showing the processing. Click Close to close the job progress window.

  2. Click Download Spreadsheet to download the file to your system.

========================================================================

Exporting the ExpertPay File

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Exporting-Expert-Pay.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Exporting-Expert-Pay.htm

Exporting the ExpertPay File

Use the ExpertPay Export form to generate a CSV file that is transmitted to a third-party vendor (ExpertPay). The data is then transmitted by ExpertPay to various garnishment authorities.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office) > Operations|Action > ExpertPay Export

To build the export file:

  1. Enter Starting Pay Date which is a mandatory date field. It is the starting date for the pay date range for this file.

  2. Enter Ending Pay Date which is a mandatory date field. It is the starting date for the pay date range for this file.

  3. Enter Profile Name for Header — This information is shown in Column B of the ExpertPay CSV file.

  4. Click the Client ID link to limit the report to a selected client or leave blank to include all clients.

  5. Click Build to generate the export file.

  6. Click Close when the process is complete.

After the file is downloaded, the system generates the export file and an error report.

========================================================================

Posting External Third Party Checks Journal

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/External%20Third%20Party%20Checks%20Journal%20Post.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/External Third Party Checks Journal Post.htm

Posting External Third Party Checks Journal

Use the External Third Party Checks Journal Post form to download an export file that can be used to import third party check information to an external G/L system.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under Operations|Action, click External Third Party Checks Journal Post.

To post the External Third Party Checks Journal:

  1. Select a Days Back option to display only the journal data pertaining to that selection, such as 1 Month (default), 2 Months, 3 Months, or 1 Year, or select Show All to display all data.

  2. If you want to select:

  1. Click Process Batch. A message displays asking you to confirm posting all selected entries. Do the following:

Note: Note: Click Cancel to undo all the transaction date selections.

========================================================================

Find a Check from Amount Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Find%20a%20Check%20from%20Amount%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Find a Check from Amount Report.htm

Find a Check from Amount Report

Use this form to generate a report to find a check based upon the date and/or the amount. This is typically utilized for Positive Pay or Bank Reconciliation processes.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, Click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Report, click Find a Check from Amount Report.

To generate the report to find a check from amount:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Check Date <= — This field is optional. Enter the check date or a date earlier than the check date for which you want to generate the report.

Check Amount = — This field is optional. Enter the check amount for which you want to generate the report.

  1. Click Find Check. A progress window opens up. In case of any errors, redo and try again.

  2. Click Report to show the report on the screen.

  3. Click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Locking the Payroll Processing Through Date

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Lockout%20Payroll%20Processing%20Control%20Date.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Lockout Payroll Processing Control Date.htm

Locking the Payroll Processing Through Date

Use the Lockout Payroll Processing Control Date form to set up a through date at the global level for all clients to prevent payroll calculation and finalization from occurring after that date.

Important! This process impacts everyclient in the system, not just clients who use Pre-ACH. Once it is set up, the system does not allow calculation and posting, even for clients with an ACH Status not equal to ACH.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To set the payroll processing through date:

  1. Click Back Office. On the Operations|Action menu, select Lockout Payroll Processing Control Date.

  2. Complete the following:

Field Name Description
Payroll Processing Through Date Enter or select the date up to which you want to process payroll globally. Important! Note the following: - Setting a date in this field impacts payroll processing globally for allclients. - Use this option if you are a Pre-ACH client who wants to release posting daily after ACH notifications are received. - If you are any other user, then leave this field blank or set up a date far in the future. - If a payroll processing through date is set and you are trying to process payroll on a date beyond that, you cannot proceed. Instead, when you try to process payroll on the Process Payroll form past that date the following error displays: Payroll processing through date is set to . You cannot calculate or finalize a payroll until this date is advanced on the Lockout Payroll Processing Control Date screen. However, if the Suppress Payroll Warnings panel is set to Payroll Processing Through Date - Calculation/Finalization on the Users form, then the system does not display any warnings and you can process payrolls.
  1. Click Save to save the payroll processing through date.

Select one of the following:

  1. To delete the existing the payroll processing through date, click Delete.

Select one of the following:

========================================================================

Using the Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Mass_Employee_Transfer_Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Mass_Employee_Transfer_Import.htm

Using the Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool

You can use the Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool to quickly import a list of employees to transfer to new clients.

Note: Note the following:

The Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool is available from the Operations|Import Processing menu in the Back Office

[Image: screenshot]

. For example, the following form displays after you access the Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool:

[Image: screenshot]

Before you can upload and import data, your source file must be saved in either comma-separated values (.csv) tabular format or text tab delimited (.txt) format with no spaces or special characters in the file name. When you open the Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool form, the required file layout displays. The layout must match the requirements for number and order of columns, category descriptions, and the required fields.

In addition, you can use the sample header file before importing to avoid manually creating an import file that matches the import template type.

Note: Note the following when using a comma (,) in a description in your import file:

Using the Sample Header File

Before starting the import process, you can first download a sample header file by clicking that link on the Mass Employee Transfer Import Tool form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: The header file is in .csv format. You can save the file in .csv or .txt format.

After you click the Download Sample Header File link, the system downloads or prompts for download a sample header file that displays columns and headers that match each column and description for the import template option. Also, the file displays a title that matches the selected option.

To perform a mass employee transfer import:

  1. Select Back Office [Image: screenshot] .

  2. From the Operations|Import Processing menu, select Mass Employee Transfer Import.

The layout requirements are:

Field Description
Column Number The corresponding column number for the imported data.
Category Description - From Client (required): The client ID for the client that the employee is transferring from. - Employee ID (required): The ID of the employee whose information requires a transfer. - To Client (required): The client ID for the client where the employee is transferring. - To Employer (required): The employer ID assigned to the new client where the employee is being transferred. - To Pay Group (required): The pay group for the destination client. - To Retire Plan (optional): The retirement plan where the employee is being transferred. - To Position (required): A valid position for the destination client. - To Location (required): A valid location for the destination client. - To Client Hire Date (required): The hire date to use for the company where the employee is being transferred. Note: After entering or selecting a date, a message containing that date displays. Select Yes to confirm that date should be used to update the Status, Type, Status Type History, Position History, and Pay History. If you select No, the system updates that information using the most recent date for that record in the From Client employee record after the transfer finishes. - Update historical dates? (required): Indicates whether to keep status, type, status type history, position history, and pay history dates. - Transfer YTD Check Stubs (required): The year-to-date check stub details to the company where the employee is transferring. - Terminate Employee in Original Client (required): Indicate whether to terminate the employee and their benefits in the original client. - Termination Date (optional): The date when the transferring employee will be terminated in their old client. - Termination Reason (optional): A valid termination reason code. - Terminate Benefit Coverage Today (required): The terminated group benefits for the employee ends coverage today.
  1. Click Find File to open the File Upload dialog box.

  2. Click Add Files in the File Upload dialog box.

  3. Select the specified Import File from your system that you have created. Once selected, the Import File will display in the File Upload dialog box.

  4. Click Start Upload to upload the file.

  5. Click Close on the File Upload dialog box.

  6. The uploaded Import File name will display under the File Name field on the form. The content of the file will display under File Content tab. Errors, if any, will display in the Messages tab. Correct the errors and redo the process.

While processing the uploaded file, the following validation occurs:

  1. Click Import to import the content into PrismHR. After the import finishes, the following occurs:
  1. Click Report to view the transaction report. This report contains the following information:

========================================================================

Calculate Taxes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Calculate%20Taxes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Calculate Taxes.htm

Calculate Taxes

This is the fifth screen of the check import wizard. Use this form to calculate taxable earnings on pay checks and create payroll vouchers.

Note: Note the following:

After calculating taxes, you should compare the totals to the reports from the original system to make sure that the checks and totals match.

You must calculate taxable earnings and create payroll vouchers successfully before finalizing the import. The Finalize & Post button will remain grayed out till you calculate taxable earnings and create payroll vouchers successfully for this check import batch. If you try to run Finalize & Post before calculating taxable earnings and payroll vouchers are created for this check import batch, you will get a prompt stating “Taxes have not been calculated for this batch. You must run the Calculate Taxable Earnings & Create Vouchers process.”

To calculate taxable earnings and create payroll vouchers, complete the following:

  1. Click Calculate Taxable Earnings & Create Vouchers. A job progress window appears showing the processing. The system first calculates taxable earnings and then creates payroll vouchers.
  1. — If payroll vouchers have already been created for this check import batch a pop-up message displays, Payroll vouchers have already been created for this batch. Do you want to delete them and create new payroll vouchers?

  2. — Click OK if you want to delete the existing payroll vouchers of this check import batch and create new ones.

  1. — Click Cancel if you do not want to delete the existing payroll vouchers of this check import batch.
  1. — If the system finds any errors on either process, it will show up on the job progress window.

  2. — Click Close to close the job progress window. A pop-up message confirms that The Create Payroll Vouchers process completed with errors. Click OK to proceed.

  1. — Click Error Report to view the Error Report for Create Payroll Vouchers Process for this check import batch on screen. Click the XLS link to download this error report to your system to review and make the necessary adjustments.

Note: Note: The Error Report button only displays if errors are found while running these processes.

  1. Click Previous to go back to the Review & Fix Data screen to make the adjustments.

  2. Once all errors are fixed for this check import batch, you will see the following sections on the screen:

a. Summary section, which displays the total:

The Voucher Summary Report button is available on the top-right in the Summary section only after you have calculated taxable earnings and created vouchers in the Calculate Taxes screen in the Check History Import form. Click this button to download the report in a .csv format. This report runs off the generated vouchers, that is, all vouchers in the current/selected batch and grand totals. Checks not imported are not included in this report. The report is sorted first by the employee’s last name and then by the voucher number. The report has the following columns:

Batch ID, Batch Name, Client ID, Client Name, Employer ID, Employer Name, Voucher Number, Employee Name (in Lastname, Firstname format), Employee ID, Pay Date (in MM/DD/YYYY format), Hours/Units, Federal Taxable Pay, Gross Earnings, Deductions, Federal Tax, FICA Tax, State Tax, Other Tax, Expenses, Net Pay

The TOTALS row provides totals for the following columns:

Hours/Units, Federal Taxable Pay, Gross Earnings, Expenses, Deductions, Federal Tax, FICA Tax

Note: All numbers are formatted up to two decimal places; for example, 1,234,567.89.

  1. — Total Taxes section, which displays the totals of all the different Employer and Employee paid taxes contained in this check import batch.

  2. — The Employee Tax table displays the total value of each of the tax descriptions for this check import batch including the tax code, the taxable amount and the withheld amount.

  1. — The Employer Tax table displays the total value of each of the tax descriptions for this check import batch including the tax code, the taxable amount and the tax amount.

The Total Taxes Report button is available on the top-right in the Total Taxes section only after you have calculated taxable earnings and created vouchers in the Calculate Taxes screen in the Check History Import form. Click this button to download the report in a .csv format. This report runs off the generated vouchers - all imported vouchers in the current/selected batch and grand totals. Checks not imported are not included in this report. The report has the following sections:

c. Vouchers section, which displays the following:

Voucher Details Report button is available on the top-right in the Vouchers section only after you have calculated taxable earnings and created vouchers in the Calculate Taxes screen in the Check History Report form. Click this button to download the report in a .csv format. This report runs off the generated vouchers - all vouchers in the current/selected batch and grand totals. Checks not imported are not included in this report. The report is sorted first by the employee’s last name and then by the voucher number. The report has the following sections:

An Inline Grid displays the first twenty voucher numbers on the screen. If there are more than twenty vouchers in the check import batch, click the arrows in the bottom-right of your screen to navigate and view them. The vouchers are sorted by employee last name and then employee first name in an ascending order.

  1. Click Close to go back to the Managing Batches for Check Import Process screen. Payroll vouchers are created but are not posted. You can always come to this screen later and post them or delete the created payroll vouchers and create new payroll vouchers and post them.

  2. Click Finalize & Post. A prompt displays, which asks, Do you want to update MasterTax? If you select Yes, the system will create tax journal entries for the imported vouchers and vouchers will be reported via the MasterTax PTS file.

  1. A job progress window opens showing the processing of the finalizing and posting of payroll vouchers for this check import batch.

  2. Click Close once the register update process is complete. A prompt tells you The Finalize and Post process completed successfully. Click OK.

  3. The Import Complete screen opens.

========================================================================

Check History Entry

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Check%20History%20Entry.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Check History Entry.htm

Check History Entry

This is an extension of the third screen of the check import wizard. Use this screen to manually enter a check. (Skip this step if you do not need to enter checks manually.)

Note: Note the following:

To manually enter a check:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Document ID By default, this will show NEW. When you manually enter a new check, the document ID will be the last document ID number plus one. If you want to edit an existing check, click the Document ID link, and select it from the list of existing document IDs from the selected batch from the dialog box.
Client ID Enter the Client ID or click the Client ID link and select one from the Select Client dialog box.
Employer ID Enter the employer ID or click the Employer ID link to select the employer from the Select Employer dialog box.
Employee ID Enter the employee ID or click the Employee ID link to select the employee from the Select Employee dialog box.
SSN This field is auto-populated with the social security number of the employee once you fill in the above field.
Check Number Enter the check number.
Pay Date Enter the pay date for this check. The following validations apply: Pay Date must be a valid date. Valid date formats are MM/DD/YYYY, MM/DD/YY, MM-DD-YYYY, MM-DD-YY, MM.DD.YYYY, and MM.DD.YY.
Period Start Date Enter the start date of the pay period of this check. This field is optional. The following validations apply: i. — Period Start Date must be a valid date. Valid date formats are MM/DD/YYYY, MM/DD/YY, MM-DD-YYYY, MM-DD-YY, MM.DD.YYYY, and MM.DD.YY. \ ii. \ Period Start Date must be before Period End Date. \ \ — \ — \ \ iii. \ Period Start Date cannot be more than 1 year earlier than the Pay Date. \ \ — \ — \
i. Period Start Date must be a valid date. Valid date formats are MM/DD/YYYY, MM/DD/YY, MM-DD-YYYY, MM-DD-YY, MM.DD.YYYY, and MM.DD.YY.
ii. Period Start Date must be before Period End Date.
iii. Period Start Date cannot be more than 1 year earlier than the Pay Date.
Period End Date Enter the end date of the pay period of this check. This field is optional. The following validations apply: i. — Period End Date must be a valid date. Valid date formats are MM/DD/YYYY, MM/DD/YY, MM-DD-YYYY, MM-DD-YY, MM.DD.YYYY, and MM.DD.YY. \ ii. \ Period End Date must be later than the Period Start Date entered above. \ \ — \ — \ \ iii. \ Period End Date cannot be more than 1 year earlier than the Pay Date. \ \ — \ — \
i. Period End Date must be a valid date. Valid date formats are MM/DD/YYYY, MM/DD/YY, MM-DD-YYYY, MM-DD-YY, MM.DD.YYYY, and MM.DD.YY.
ii. Period End Date must be later than the Period Start Date entered above.
iii. Period End Date cannot be more than 1 year earlier than the Pay Date.
Work State Enter the work state code. This will be used to accrue SUI and W/C liability for the state entered.
Weeks Worked Enter the number of weeks worked.
1099 Check? This field is optional. Select one of the following options: - Yes - If this check is for a self-employed or an independent contractor. - No - If this check is for a W-2 employee.
  1. Click the Edit Code Mapping link to edit code mappings if you are getting errors on the check related to code mapping.
a. The Edit Code Mapping screen opens in a modal.
  1. — The current values for the batch are displayed on the fields. Edit the values as necessary.

  2. — Click Save to save the code mapping changes. The check you were working on is automatically sent through the system validation process. You now return to the check that you were working on in the Enter Check History screen.

  1. Click Save to save this check.
a. If there are no errors:
  1. — If you were entering a NEW pay check, a Document ID will be generated and associated with this pay check and you will return to the Enter Check History screen.

  2. — This check will now be listed in the Enter Check History screen.

  3. — If you were editing an existing check from the Review & Fix Data screen, you will return to the Review & Fix Data screen.

b. If there are errors:
i. You will not be able to save the check.
— —
ii. All the fields that have errors will be highlighted in red.
— —
  1. — A top section shows the number of errors and warnings and lists them along with the field name which has the error.

  2. — Only the first five errors/warnings are listed. If there are more errors/warnings, scroll down to see them.

v. Error/Warning icons will also appear beside the field that needs correction.
  1. — Click on an error/warning icon beside the field to see the error/warning details. This will help you to resolve the error.

  2. — Once you resolve an error, it will not be listed anymore on the top section. The corresponding field will no longer be highlighted in red. The error/warning icon beside the field will also be gone.

  3. — If you generate another error in the process of solving an error, it will also be listed at the top section. The new field which now has an error will be highlighted in red and the error/warning icon will show beside the field name.

ix. Resolve all errors/warnings before you can save the check.
  1. To manually add another check, redo the process.

  2. Click Delete to delete the check.

  3. Click Cancel to refresh the screen at any time.

  4. Click Close to close this window and you will return to Enter Check History screen.

========================================================================

Check History Import State Tax Processing Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Check%20History%20Import%20State%20Tax%20Processing%20Rules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Check History Import State Tax Processing Rules.htm

Check History Import State Tax Processing Rules

Use this form to set up state tax rules that are used to process check import batches

To access the form either of the following ways.

Note: Note: This process does not use Client Access Group security.

Choose a Rule Type from the following:

Default - Use this form to set up the default taxation rules for the various states which can then be copied to the batch state rules.

Batch - Use this form to set up the taxation rules for sheltering wages for various section 125 and 401(k) deductions, when the checks are imported (or a manual check entered) for the calculation process to ensure that the net pay is accurate.

State Tax Rules (Rule Type - Default)

  1. Complete the following fields:

In this field — Enter this

Copy from Default — Use this option to copy all associate values from the default to this batch record OR complete the following fields.

State Income Tax Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

State Unemployment Insurance Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

EE State Disability Insurance Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

ER State Disability Insurance Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

State Unemployment Insurance Taxable Limit — The taxable wage limit for state unemployment insurance for this state. This field is optional.

EE State Disability Insurance Taxable Limit — The taxable wage limit for employee paid disability insurance for this state. This field is optional.

ER State Disability Insurance Taxable Limit — If you want to calculate the employer state disability insurance for this state, then enter a wage limit. This field is optional. Leave this field blank if you do not want to calculate this tax.

ER State Disability Insurance Rate — The employer rate for state unemployment insurance tax for this state. The rate is a percentage of taxable pay, for example 8.1234=8.1234 percent.

  1. Under Miscellaneous Employer State Taxes section, complete the following:
In this field Enter this
Tax Deduction Code The tax deduction code for the miscellaneous state employer tax. - Click (+) to add a row. - Click (-) to delete a row.
  1. Click Save to save the default tax rule for the state.

  2. Click Delete to delete the default tax rules for the selected state. A popup asks your Are you sure you want to delete this record? Click Yes to delete and No to cancel the operation.

  3. Click Cancel to clear the screen.

State Tax Rules (Rule Type - Batch)

  1. Complete the following fields:

In this field — Enter this

Batch Number — Import checks batch number, or click the Batch Number link to select one from the Select Import Batch window. > Note: Note: This field will only show up when the Rule Type is set to Batch.

Batch Status — Auto populates on selecting the batch number above. It displays the status of the selected batch.

Batch Description — Auto populates on selecting the batch number above. It displays the description of the selected batch.

State Code — The two character postal code for the state.

Copy from Default — Use this option to copy all associate values from the default to this batch record OR complete the following fields.

State Income Tax Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

State Unemployment Insurance Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

EE State Disability Insurance Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

ER State Disability Insurance Shelter Flag — Choose one from the drop-down: No - (this is the default) 1 - 401(k) Shelters Tax 2 - Section 125 Shelters Tax 3 - 401(k) & Section 125 Shelters Tax 4 - Section 125 (excluding FSA - DEP) Shelters Tax 5 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA-DEP) Shelters Tax 6 - Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax 7 - 401(k) & Section 125 (excluding FSA/HSA) Shelters Tax

State Unemployment Insurance Taxable Limit — The taxable wage limit for state unemployment insurance for this state. This field is optional.

EE State Disability Insurance Taxable Limit — The taxable wage limit for employee paid disability insurance for this state. This field is optional.

ER State Disability Insurance Taxable Limit — If you want to calculate the employer state disability insurance for this state, then enter a wage limit. This field is optional. Leave this field blank if you do not want to calculate this tax.

State Unemployment Insurance Tax Rate — The state unemployment insurance tax rate for this state. The rate is a percentage of taxable pay, for example 8.1234=8.1234 percent.

ER State Disability Insurance Rate — The employer rate for state unemployment insurance tax for this state. The rate is a percentage of taxable pay, for example 8.1234=8.1234 percent.

  1. Under Miscellaneous Employer State Taxes section, complete the following:
In this field Enter this
Tax Deduction Code The tax deduction code for the miscellaneous state employer tax. - Click (+) to add a row. - Click (-) to delete a row.
  1. Click Save to save the tax rule for the state.

  2. Click Delete to delete the information on the screen.

========================================================================

Managing Batches for Check Import Process

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Check%20History%20Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Check History Import.htm

Managing Batches for Check Import Process

Use the Check History Import form for batch management for the check import process. All processes required for check imports can be only accessed from this form using a wizard which takes you step by step through the check import process.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Import Processing, click Check History Import.

Important! If you have employees listed in several clients and employers, you might need to complete a successor wage import before processing a check history import. Note the following instances when you should perform this action:

Note: This is typically correct, but if a client only collects the taxes under one employer and the employee is listed in two employers and you do not want to account for taxes under both employers, you can use successor wages to account for those wages. With successor wages in place, the system will not collect taxes under both employers.

Batch Management Dashboard

This Dashboard has the following sections:

Imports in Progress

This section shows the list of check import batches that are in progress for the selected user.

Note: Note: If you want to copy a batch, you must first set up a new batch.

The details are displayed under the following fields:

Field Name Field Description
Batch ID - The Batch ID of the check import batch under progress in PrismHR. Click New Import to go to the Import Setup screen to set up a new batch. - To edit an existing check import batch that is in progress, click the Batch ID link and you will go to the appropriate screen as per the batch status of that check import batch. Suppose for a check import batch you had accessed the Review & Fix Data screen (Screen 4 in the wizard), and then went back to the State & Code Setup screen (Screen 2 in the wizard) to fix something, and then left the wizard from State & Code Setup screen (Screen 2 in the wizard). When you come back to the dashboard, this check import batch will show a status of 4. When you open the batch now, you will be returned to the Review & Fix Data screen (Screen 4 in the wizard). > Note: Note: When you are editing a check import batch in progress: - The Batch ID, Batch Name and Client ID will be pre-populated. - You cannot edit the Batch ID. - All other parameters for this check import batch on this Import Setup screen can be edited. - Click Next on the Import Setup screen to go to the State & Code Setup screen.

Past Imports

This section lists the completed check import batches for a date range.

The details are displayed under the following fields:

Field Name Field Description
From Enter the start date of the import period.
To Enter the end date of the import period.
Batch ID The Batch ID of the completed check import batch.
Name The check import batch name.
Client The client ID and the client name. Note: If there are multiple clients included in the batch, only the client IDs display.
Date Completed The date when the check import batch was completed.
Processed by User The name of the user who completed the batch.
Total Checks The number of checks contained in the batch.
Imported from File The number of checks imported from an import spreadsheet.
Entered Manually The number of checks entered manually using the Check History Entry form.
Total Net Pay The total check amount contained in the batch.
Reports (CSV) You can click the drop-down beside the Download Reports link to display the following links to reports for the corresponding completed Batch ID: - Original Import File - Click this link to download the check import file used for this batch in a .CSV format. If this batch is only for manual check entry where a check import file is not used, this link will remain inactive. - Checks not Imported - This link will only be active if there are checks that have not been imported. The number of checks not imported is displayed here. Click this link to download the Checks not Imported Report in .CSV format. - Voucher Summary Report - Click this link to download the Voucher Summary Report for this batch in a .CSV format. - Total Taxes Report - Click this link to download the Total Taxes Report for this batch in a .CSV format. - Voucher Details Report - Click this link to download the Voucher Details Report for this batch in a .CSV format.

This section shows links to screens that you may need for check imports. The following links are provided:

Note: This menu is utilized to adjust the default State Tax Processing Rules. You can set up the Batch State Tax Processing Rules from within the check import wizard.

If you use our template, you do not need to delete these headers noted above when saving your file for imports. Our system will automatically detect the headers to ensure data integrity.

========================================================================

Check Import Batch Status Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Check%20Import%20Batch%20Status%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Check Import Batch Status Report.htm

Check Import Batch Status Report

This report displays the summary information for all check import batches.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on the Check History Import Batch Status Report form.

To access the form, on the Back Office menu, under Operations|Import Processing, click Check History Import Batch Status Report.

You can also access this menu from the Check History Import form. On the Back Office menu, under Operations|Import Processing, click Check History Import. Click Batch Status Report in the Tools section on the top right.

To generate a summary of all check import batches:

  1. Select a Batch Type:
  1. Click Generate Report. The Check Import Batch Status Report opens in a new window.

  2. Click the XLS link to download the report.

Note: Note the following:

For check history import batches created in PrismHR the following batch statuses are available:

Report Output

This report contains the following columns:

Column Name — Column Description

Batch ID — This is the check history import batch number.

Batch Name — This is the name of the check history import batch.

Created In — The application where this check history import batch is created.

Batch Status — The status of this check history import batch.

Client ID — The client ID (or multiple IDs) for whom the check history import batch is created. Note: The space limitations in this column truncate multiple IDs. Download this report to ensure you can view all IDs included in this column.

Status Date — The date on which this check history import batch was last processed.

Processed By User ID — The user ID of the person who last processed this check history import batch.

Number of Vouchers — The number of vouchers contained for a completed check history import batch only. If the check history import batch is in progress, then this field will remain blank.

Total Pay — The total pay for a completed check history import batch only. If the check history import batch is in progress, then this field will remain blank.

========================================================================

Import Complete

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Check%20Import%20Complete.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Check Import Complete.htm

Import Complete

This is the last screen of the check import wizard. This screen provides a summary information of this completed check import batch.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

You can access this screen after finalizing and posting this import check batch. The system creates tax journal entries for the imported vouchers and the vouchers are reported via the Master Tax PTS file.

On this screen you can view the following information summary for the check import batch that you have just completed in a tabular format.

Field Description
Batch ID Batch ID of this completed check import batch.
Name Name of this completed check import batch.
Client Client ID and Client Name in the format “ID - Name” (for example 102 - Reliable Construction). Note: If there are multiple clients, only the client IDs displays.
Date Completed Date when this check import batch is completed.
Processed by User Name of the user who has completed processing of this check import batch.
Total Checks Total number of checks contained in this completed check import batch.
Imported from File The number of checks in this completed check import batch out of the total number of checks that were imported from a file. If all checks for this import batch were entered manually, then this field shows 0.
Entered Manually The number of checks in this completed check import batch that were manually entered. If all checks for this import batch were imported from a file, then this field shows 0.
Total Net Pay The sum of Net Pay of all the checks contained in this check import batch.
Checks Not Imported A link to the spreadsheet containing the checks marked as “Not Importing” in a .csv format. The file name will be in the format of - Not Imported().csv for example ArrowTech - Not Imported(2).csv. If there no checks that are not imported, then it will display “-”.
Reports (CSV) You can click the drop-down beside the Download Reports link to display the following links to reports for the corresponding completed Batch ID: - Original Import File - Click this link to download the check import file used for this batch in a .CSV format. If this batch is only for manual check entry where a check import file is not used, this link will remain inactive. - Checks not Imported - This link will only be active if there are checks that have not been imported. The number of checks not imported is displayed here. Click this link to download the Checks not Imported Report in .CSV format. - Voucher Summary Report - Click this link to download the Voucher Summary Report for this batch in a .CSV format. - Total Taxes Report - Click this link to download the Total Taxes Report for this batch in a .CSV format. - Voucher Details Report - Click this link to download the Voucher Details Report for this batch in a .CSV format. Note: The reports that display after clicking Download Reports automatically default to all clients in the check import batch for completed imports when you view them in the downloaded output.

========================================================================

Enter Check History

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Enter%20Check%20History.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Enter Check History.htm

Enter Check History

This is the third screen of the check import wizard. Use this screen to manually enter a check. Skip this step if you do not need to enter checks manually.

Note: Note the following:

If you previously manually entered checks for this check import batch, they display on this screen in an inline grid. The inline grid displays the following columns:

To manually add a check:

  1. Click Add Check. The Check History Entry screen opens. Complete the process in the Check History Entry screen. Once you have successfully entered a check manually for this batch, you are returned to this screen.

  2. The check is now listed on this screen now in the inline grid.

  3. Click Next to go to the Review & Fix Data screen.

  4. Click Previous to go the State & Code Setup screen.

  5. Click Close to go back to the Managing Batches for Check Import Process screen.

========================================================================

Import Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Import%20Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Import Setup.htm

Import Setup

This is the first screen of the check import wizard. Use this form to set up a batch for the check import process or update an existing check import batch.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To create or edit a check import batch, complete the following:

  1. Under the Import Batch Setup section, you can either create a new check import batch or Copy Existing Import batch which would copy all the Code Mapping as well as the FICA & FUTA conditions of that batch on to this screen.
  1. — To copy from an existing check import batch, click Copy Existing Import. Select the Batch ID you want to copy from in the Select Import Batch dialog box. Click OK to close the dialog box.
b. Batch ID - This field is read only:
  1. — This field will by default show NEW if you come to this screen by clicking New Import on the Managing Batches for Check Import Process screen. When you proceed to the State & Code Setup screen in this case, a new Batch ID will be generated.

  2. — To edit an existing check import batch in progress, click the Batch ID link on the Managing Batches for Check Import Process screen. The Batch ID will show here. You cannot edit the Batch ID. When you proceed to the State & Code Setup screen in this case, the Batch ID will remain the same.

  3. — You can click Previous on the State & Code Setup screen to come back to this screen to edit an existing check import batch. The Batch ID will show here. You cannot edit the Batch ID. After editing the check import batch when you proceed to the State & Code Setup screen, the Batch ID will remain the same.

c. Batch Name - The name for this batch:
i. If you are creating a new check import batch, then enter the name for this batch here.
— —
  1. — If you are editing an existing check import batch, then edit the name of the check import batch here.
d. Client ID - The client ID for whom checks will be imported in this batch:
  1. — If you are creating a new check import batch, then enter the Client ID here, or click the Client ID link and select the Client from the Select Client dialog box.

  2. — If you are editing an existing check import batch, then edit the Client ID here, or click the Client ID link and select the correct Client from the Select Client dialog box.

  3. — If you enter or select more than one Client ID a warning displays, “Clients with different taxation rules should have their own check history import batch.” Click OK to continue.

  1. Under the FICA & FUTA section, complete the following fields:
a. If Medicare tax amounts are zero, select one of the following:
  1. — Include Medicare taxable amounts on vouchers - This is the default option where Employer paid Medicare taxable amounts are included on all vouchers in this check import batch.

  2. — Do not include - Select this option if you do not want to include Employer paid Medicare taxable amounts included on all vouchers in this check import batch.

b. If OASDI tax amounts are zero, select one of the following:
  1. — Include OASDI taxable amounts on the vouchers - This is the default option where Employer paid OASDI taxable amounts are included on all vouchers in this check import batch.

  2. — Do not include - Select this option if you do not want to include Employer paid OASDI taxable amounts included on all vouchers in this check import batch.

c. Employer FUTA (Tax Code 00-17), select one the of the following:
  1. — Include - By default, calculation of employer FUTA tax is included on all vouchers in this batch.

  2. — Suppress - Select this option if you want to suppress the calculation of the employer FUTA tax on all vouchers in this batch.

  1. Under the Upload File section complete the following if you want to upload the checks from a file. Skip this section if you only want to enter check history manually.
  1. — Click Upload File to upload a check import batch file in a .txt or .csv format. A dialog box opens.

  2. — Click Choose File to select the check import batch file from your system in a .txt or .csv format.

Note: Note: When importing a .csv file, you do not need to remove the headers.

c. Click Submit to close the dialog box. The file uploaded now shows on the screen.
  1. Click Close to go back to the Managing Batches for Check Import Process screen. All changes made are lost.

  2. Click Next to save all changes made to this screen and go to the State & Code Setup screen.

Warning - Uploading a replacement Check History Import file

You may need to upload a replacement check history import file if you have imported a wrong check history import file or the check history import file is badly formatted and so on. If you try to upload a new check history import file when a check history import file has already been uploaded using the import utility, and to prevent unexpected data loss, you will receive the following pop-up message:

Checks have already been imported from a file.

If you proceed, the previous imported checks will be cleared and you will lose any corrections you have made. Manually entered checks will be retained.

Do you want to clear the existing imported checks and start over?

File Audit

From this Import Batch Setup screen, you can click the Actions menu and select the Audit option to show the Audit Log Display. You can view the logs for all the changes made for this Batch ID.

========================================================================

Review & Fix Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/Review%20&%20Fix%20Data.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/Review & Fix Data.htm

Review & Fix Data

This is the fourth screen of the check import wizard. Use this screen to review the check history and make corrections. Both imported or manually created checks are listed on this screen.

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

This screen has the following sections:

  1. The first section gives a summary count of this check import batch. It shows the following:
  1. The second section gives the totals for this check import batch for the following parameters:
  1. Import Corrections - The third section provides the following options:
  1. — Show - Lists the following views for the inline grid that displays below. (The count of checks for the selected view displays in that field.)
i. All Checks - Lists all the checks in this check import batch.
  1. — Only errors and warnings - Lists only those checks that have errors or warnings in this check import batch.
iii. Not importing - Lists only those checks that are not imported in this check import batch.
  1. — Client ID - You can filter the list of clients to display All clients or a specific client.

  2. — Refresh data - If you have made adjustments to the State Tax Rules or the Code Translation Tables, click this button to send all records through the system validation routine.

  3. — State Tax Rules - You have the ability to edit the state tax rules from this screen to fix errors relating to state tax rules. However, it will open as a modal in Batch view. You will not be able to edit the Batch ID and the Client Name as you are working on that batch. You can edit all the other fields or Copy All from Default. Click Save to close the form, run all records automatically through the system validation routine and return to this screen.

  4. — An inline grid shows all the individual checks for this check import batch. Use this table to review the check history and make corrections where necessary.

i. Name
ii. SSN
— —
iii. Client ID
— —
iv. Employer ID
— —
v. Check Number
— —
vi. Pay Date
— —
vii. Weeks Worked
— —
viii. Work State
— —
ix. Total Hours
— —
x. Gross Pay
— —
xi. Total Deductions
— —
xii. Total Taxes
— —
xiii. Net Pay
— —

To review and fix data:

  1. Click the check you want to edit and the Check History Entry screen opens up. You can click anywhere on the row to open the check for the employee that you want to edit.

  2. Make the necessary changes. No field should be highlighted in red which indicate an error that needs to be fixed.

  3. Click Save to save the changes and return to the inline grid.

  4. Click Refresh Data so that the changes reflect on the inline grid.

Note: Note: If the Show drop-down is set to Only errors and warnings, once you Refresh Data after editing a check, it will not be listed anymore if it does not contain any error or warning.

  1. Click Previous to go to the Enter Check History screen if you want to upload a different import file or want to import more checks manually.

  2. Click Next after you fix all errors and warnings. All records for this check import batch go through the system validation routine. If there are no errors, the Calculate Taxes screen opens.

  3. Click Close to close this window to return to the Managing Batches for Check Import Process screen.

========================================================================

State & Code Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20Check%20Import/State%20&%20Code%20Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New Check Import/State & Code Setup.htm

State & Code Setup

This is the second screen of the check import wizard. Use this form to set up the State Tax Rules for the selected check import batch and Code Translation Tables for Earnings, Deductions and Taxes for the check import batch selected in the Import Setup screen.

Note: Note the following:

Note: Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

This form has the following two sections:

Setting Up State Tax Rules

You will need to have state tax rules setup for each state that appears in your imported data either using the check import utility or manual check entry. You can set up the state tax rules for each state from the State Tax Processing Rules link under Tools section in the Check History Import form. If the rules are not set correctly for any of the states that appear in your imported data, you will see errors/discrepacies later in the workflow.

To set up the State Tax Rules for the selected check import batch:

  1. If you are importing checks from an import file, then the system will automatically load the default State Tax Rules for all the states contained in the imported spreadsheet. This will ensure that you can set up all the required state tax codes correctly to prevent future errors. The following fields appear in an inline grid along with the values imported for each field:
  1. You can click a state link above to open the State Tax Rules form for the state in a modal.
  1. Click Copy All from Default to copy the default state tax rules to the state tax rules form for the batch. The changed values will reflect on the inline grid. You can use this option to

  2. Click Copy State to Default to copy the state tax rules for this batch to the default state tax rules.

Setting Up Code Mapping

For each code that appears in the import spreadsheet, choose the corresponding code in your PrismHR system. Make sure to choose codes with the same tax- settings, or the totals will not match.

If you are importing from a file, then the system will load the codes for Earnings, Deductions and Taxes from the imported spreadsheet. If the imported codes are already contained in your PrismHR code translation tables, they will also reflect in the appropriate table. If not then you will need to manually provide the PrismHR code so that the system can calculate the Earnings, Deductions, and Taxes appropriately. As you already get to see the number of foreign codes that you need to translate (if any), the chances of getting errors is reduced and you can complete the process faster.

Earnings

To map the Imported Pay Codes, complete the following:

a. Enter the corresponding Prism Pay Code for the Imported Pay Code OR
b. Click the Map to Prism Pay Code link and search from the Select Pay Code dialog box.
— —
  1. — Check the Pay Code Description to confirm that you have selected the correct Prism Pay Code for the corresponding Imported Pay Code.

  2. — In case of any errors, redo the process to select the correct corresponding Prism Pay Code for the Imported Pay Code from the Select Pay Code dialog box.

Deductions

To map the Imported Deduction Codes, complete the following:

a. Enter the corresponding Prism Deduction Code for the Imported Deduction Code OR
  1. — Click the Map to Prism Deduction Code link and search from the Select Deduction Code dialog box.

  2. — Check the Deduction Code Description and the Deduction Type to confirm that you have selected the correct Prism Deduction Code for the corresponding Imported Deduction Code.

  3. — In case of any errors, redo the process to select the correct corresponding Prism Deduction Code for the Imported Deduction Code from the Select Deduction Code dialog box.

Taxes

To map the Imported Tax Codes, complete the following:

a. Enter the corresponding Prism Tax Code for the Imported Deduction Code OR
  1. — Click the Map to Prism Deduction Code link and search from the Select Deduction Code dialog box. You can use the Paid By filter to narrow down your search for the correct Prism Tax Code.

  2. — Check the Tax Code Description to confirm that it is the correct Prism Tax Code for the corresponding Imported Tax Code.

  3. — In case of any errors, redo the process to select the correct corresponding Prism Tax Code for the Imported Tax Code from the Select Tax Deduction Code dialog box.

  4. — You have the option to select if the Prism Tax Code selected is Sheltered or not from the drop-down under the Sheltered? column.

  1. Click Previous to go to the Import Setup screen. All changes made will be lost.

  2. Click Next to save all the changes and proceed to the Enter Check History screen.

  3. Click Close to exit the wizard. All changes made will be lost.

========================================================================

New York Form MTA-305 Tax Reporting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New%20York%20Form%20MTA-305%20Tax%20Reporting.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New York Form MTA-305 Tax Reporting.htm

New York Form MTA-305 Tax Reporting

Use this form to generate the download for New York Form MTA-305 Metro Commuter Transport Mobility Tax Report for an employer for a quarter.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security.

To access the form, under Work Centers, under Tax, click Quarterly Tax Processing. Under Quarterly Tax Reports, under NEW YORK QUARTERLY REPORTS, click New York Form MTA-305 Tax Reporting.

Important! Prior to running this report, you must enter the Tax Authority IDs in the Tax Authority Setup link on the top right of this form.

To generate the New York Form MTA-305 Tax Reporting:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Employer ID Enter the employer ID here for whom you want to run this report or click the Employer ID link and select it from the Select Employer dialog box.
Tax Year Select the year from the drop-down for which you want to run this report. The default is the current year. The drop-down has a 10 year look back starting from the current year.
Tax Quarter Select the quarter from the drop-down for which you want to run this report.
Promptax/Overpayment This field is optional. Enter the total of any Promptax payments made during the quarter and the amount of any MCTNT overpayment from the previous quarter.
Refund/Credit This field displays only if an entry is made in the Promptax/Overpayment field above. If an overpayment is claimed, select from the following options: - Credit - Refund
  1. Click Generate Report to generate the report. A job progress window opens. Click Close to close the job progress window. In case of any errors, redo the process. A Download link appears below the File Type field.

  2. Click the Download link to download the New York Form MTA-305 Tax Report in a .TXT format to your system.

  3. Click Clear to clear the form at any time.

========================================================================

Creating a New Client Company

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New_Company.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New_Company.htm

Creating a New Client Company

Create a new client company with the New Client form.

To create a client company:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. Select New Client from the Operations|Action menu.

  3. Fill out these fields as required.

Field Description
Client ID The system generates the Client ID when you save the new record. This field defaults to NEWwhen you open the form.
Legal Name Enter the Legal Name of the new client company.
Client D/B/A Enter the legal doing business as client name in the Client D/B/A field.
Address Enter the client’s main mailing address in the Address fields. After saving the new client record, you can enter other addresses (if required).
ZIP Code Enter the ZIP Code and press Tab. The system automatically displays the GeoCode, City, and State. If multiple GeoCodes are associated with the ZIP Code, the system prompts you to select the correct one.
GeoCode, City, and State After entering the client’s address and ZIP Code, the GeoCode, city, and state display.
Telephone Enter the client’s main Telephone number.
Ext Enter the telephone Ext (optional).
Fax Enter the client’s Fax number.
Website Enter the URL of the client’s Website.
Service Type Select the Service Type provided to this client. You must select the appropriate Service Type to ensure accurate billing. - Administrative Services Only (ASO): When you save the new client record, the system automatically creates both a new client record and a new employer record with the same information as the new client. The system immediately links the new employer record to the client. The system assumes cost equals billed for taxes and workers’ compensation. - Corporate: Indicates that the new record is a corporate client, typically used for tracking the service provider’s internal employees. No billing occurs for a corporate client. If the new client needs to be billed, select a different service type. - Professional Employer (PEO): Indicates that the service provider manages human resources, employee benefits, payroll, workers’ compensation, accounts receivable, and COBRA administration for the new client. Cost is considered the PEO cost for taxes and workers’ compensation rates, which are entered at the system/employer levels. Billed rates can be higher (for profit centers) or lower than cost, if appropriate, and rates are specified at the client level. - HR Services Only: The service provider only manages human resources for the client’s employees, which includes hiring, termination, performance, compensation, training, policy, and OSHA-related services. (There is no payroll.) - Payroll Services Only: The service provider only provides payroll and payroll tax services for the client. (The employer does not provide human resources services.) - Admin. Service/Alt. Billing: This is similar to an ASO in that the system creates an employer record automatically. The system treats the new client as it would a PEO client for billing purposes. The service provider can open profit centers on taxes and workers’ compensation. The system does not assume cost equals billed.
  1. Click Save. The system generates the new client record and displays a message that reads, “Do you want to go to the Client Details?”

Related Topics

Creating a Client Record

Maintaining Client Details

========================================================================

New Hire Reporting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/New_Hire_Reporting.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/New_Hire_Reporting.htm

Previewing New Hire Reporting

Use the New Hire Reporting form to build a preview report and the download file to send to a state. The final New Hire Report download file can be in one of the following two formats:

Note: Note: All states in the US accept .txt files. Some states also accept .csv files.

To access the form, in the Work Centers panel, under Compliance, click New Hire and Termination Reporting. Under Downloads, click New Hire Reporting.

To generate the new hire report:

Complete the following fields:

Field Description
Report Date Enter the date of reporting.
Employer This field is optional. Select one of the following radio buttons: - All Employers (Default Option) - Select this option if you want to report for all employers. - All Clients) - Select this option if you want to report for all clients. If you want to run this for a specific Employer or Client: - Enter the Employer ID or click the Enter Employer ID link and select one from the Select Employer dialog box. - Enter the Client ID or click the Enter Client ID link and select one from the Select cClient dialog box.
  1. Once you have set all the options, click Preview.

Note: This is intended to be a preview of the employees included in the report and not the actual report sent to the state. (That will populate when you generate the report.)

  1. When the process completes, click Close. The report opens.

  2. Review the information in the report. Close it when you are finished by clicking [Image: screenshot] .

When you have verified that the data is correct, you can build the file.

  1. Click Generate File in the New Hire Reporting form.

The Build New Hire Reporting File window displays the process.

  1. When the process completes, click Close. The file downloads based on your browser settings.

  2. Close any windows that opened during the download process aside from the PrismHR window.

Related Topics

New Hire Download Processing

Setting a New Hire Reporting Date

========================================================================

Clearing the Lock on Pay On-Demand Processing Features

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Pay_OnDemand_Clear_Lock.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Pay_OnDemand_Clear_Lock.htm

Clearing the Lock on Pay On-Demand Processing Features

Do not clear the lock on Pay On-Demand processing features until you have verified that no one at your organization is engaged in processing any Pay On-Demand files. If they are, do not use the Pay On-Demand Clear Lock feature.

To clear the lock:

  1. After ensuring that no users are actively working in any Pay On-Demand forms, click Clear Lock.

  2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to clear the lock.

  3. Click OK.

========================================================================

Listing Pending Payments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Payments_Pending.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Payments_Pending.htm

Listing Pending Payments

The Payments Pending form lists any payments required to proceed with a payroll. This is for clients where your organization requires an ACH or wire transfer before finalizing the payroll. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To list pending payments:

Note: Multi-entity groups do not display for a client if the service provider does not have access to that client. Also, the name of the multi-entity group created in the Multi-Entity Groups form displays. (If there is more than one multi-entity group, they display as listed in the Client Details form, which are truncated if necessary.)

========================================================================

PEO Client Accounting G/L Detail Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/PEO%20Client%20Accounting%20GL%20Detail%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/PEO Client Accounting GL Detail Report.htm

PEO Client Accounting G/L Detail Report

Use this form to generate a report of PEO client accounting over a pay date range for all or selected clients.

Note: Note:

To generate the PEO Client Accounting G/L Detail Report:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select PEO Client Accounting G/L Detail Report under Operations|Report.

  3. Complete the following information as appropriate:

Field — Description

Starting Pay Date — Enter the starting pay date from which you want to run this report.

Ending Pay Date — Enter the ending pay date up to which you want to run this report.

Run Legal Width Report — Select this field to adjust the column width to accommodate account codes up to 68 characters.

Client ID — This field is optional. Leave this field blank to run this report for all clients. If you want to restrict this report to a few selected clients, enter the Client IDs here or click the Client ID link and select them from the Select Client dialog box. The Client Name auto populates.

  1. Click Run to generate the report. The report displays.

This report displays the following columns:

========================================================================

Importing New Hires from Employee Portal

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Portal_New_Hire_Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Portal_New_Hire_Import.htm

Importing New Hires from Employee Portal

You can use the Portal New Hire Import form to import new hires all at once from several clients who were registered in Employee Portal (EP). After uploading a file for import, you can view any errors that occurred during the import or view successfully imported rows. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Important! This process applies as follows:

To perform an import using the Portal New Hire Import form, simply upload a file for import and then view any errors that occurred during the import or view successfully imported rows.

Note: Note the following:

To import new hires from Employee Portal:

  1. Select Download Spreadsheet Template to download a .csv file to your computer that contains the new hires import headings in row 1. A separate window displays the downloaded file link.

Important! The first row of the import file must contain all the columns in the downloaded spreadsheet template in the same order. (Optional fields with no data can be included, but must be left blank.)

  1. Click Open File. The spreadsheet template displays, where you can enter the new hires information.

The spreadsheet template contains the following columns:

Column Description
Employer ID Employer ID associated with the new hire (required). Note: If the Employer ID or Client ID is not valid, the system does not validate the remaining data in that row. In addition, this Employer ID must be associated with the Client ID.
Client ID Client ID associated with the new hire (required). Note: You must set Electronic On-Boarding to Prompt or Always in the client-level settings on the Control tab in the Client Details form. Otherwise, the entire import will fail and an error message displays, “Client does not use Electronic On-Boarding. New Hires cannot be imported.”
First Name First name of new hire (required).
Last Name Last name of new hire (required).
Middle Name Middle name of new hire (optional).
Employment Status Current employment status associated with the new hire (required). Note: If there are restrictions on the Control tab in the Client Details form, only those employee statuses listed in the form can be used.
Employee Type Employment type associated with the new hire (required). Note: If there are restrictions on the Control tab in the Client Details form, only those employee types listed in the form can be used.
Work Location Work location associated with the new hire (required).
Position Position of new hire (required).
Start Date Date when new hire began employment (required).
Pay Method Pay method associated with the new hire (required): - S = Salary - V = Variable Salary - H = Hourly - D = Driver - C = Commission Note: The Variable Salary option only displays if the VARSALMETHOD custom feature code is enabled on the System Parameters form. You can use the Variable Salary option to accurately track the hours that salary-exempt employees actually work. For example, non-profit companies could use this option to track the work hours of their employees who are paid a standard salaried amount, so they can use these hours and their allocations for grant purposes.
  1. Select Upload File. Click Add Files and select the file to upload, then click Start Upload.

  2. Click Close. The uploaded filename displays.

  3. Select Preview Data. (If you select Preview Data before uploading the file, no information displays.) Information displays on the following tabs:

Note: If no successful rows display in the file and you select File Content a message displays, “No New Hires to import.”

  1. Click Import Data to import new hires that display on the File Content tab. The “File content successfully imported” message displays. Click OK. The imported new hires display on the New Hire Dashboard in Employee Portal (EP) where the system generates a welcome code, so these new hires can obtain that code in the New Hire Dashboard.

Note: Any additional errors that occur during the import display in the existing errors list on the Errors tab.

  1. Click Confirmation Report to download a .csv report that contains the successfully imported new hires information.

Note: Columns that are blank indicate an unsuccessful data import.

========================================================================

Create Positive Pay Files

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Positive_Pay_Files_Create.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Positive_Pay_Files_Create.htm

Create Positive Pay Files

Use the Create Positive Pay Files form to create the file that you will send to the financial institution.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Before you begin, disable the pop‑up blocker on your browser.

  2. You can generate a positive pay file for one checking account, or for multiple accounts:

  1. If you are creating one positive pay file for multiple accounts, enter the File Stub ID for the accounts that you want to include in the file.

The file stub is specified in Positive Pay Setup, accessed through the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

of the Bank Accounts form.

  1. Typically, you would enter the Starting Check Date and Ending Check Date to create the positive pay file for a specific range of dates. If you do not enter dates, the positive pay file will include all available data.

  2. Select Include Voided Checks to include voids in the positive pay file.

  3. Click Create Positive Pay Files.

  4. Click Yes in the confirmation message.

The Starting CREATE Positive Pay Files form displays the processing steps.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. When the creation process is complete, click the Close button.

The system prepares to download the file (or the first of multiple files) to your computer. This process depends on the browser you are using and its settings.

  1. Some browsers open a blank window when they process the download file. Close this window when the download is complete; in the case where you have created multiple positive pay files, that window would prevent the additional files from downloading.

  2. If your browser is set to prompt you for the location to save the file, use your computer’s Save As window to navigate to the location where you want to save the file. Otherwise, the system saves it to your default file location. Make a note of the directory and file name.

  3. Go to the location where you saved the file and open it in a text editor such as Notepad. Check the file format; if it is not correct, open Positive Pay Setup for the account and make corrections.

  4. Send the positive pay file to the financial institution.

Related Topics

Positive Pay

Positive Pay Setup

Positive Pay File Report

========================================================================

Recreate Positive Pay Files

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Positive_Pay_Files_Recreate.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Positive_Pay_Files_Recreate.htm

Recreate Positive Pay Files

Use the Recreate Positive Pay Files form to recreate a positive pay file that you created previously, whether or not you sent it to the financial institution.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Before you begin, disable the pop‑up blocker on your browser.

  2. Click the File name field label to open a search window and select the positive pay batch name. The system populates the field with the file name.

  3. Click Create Positive Pay Files.

  4. Click Yes in the confirmation message.

The Starting RECREATE Positive Pay Files form displays the processing steps.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. When the creation process is complete, click the Close button.

The system prepares to download the file to your computer. This process depends on the browser you are using and its settings.

  1. Some browsers open a blank window when they process the download file. Close this window when the download is complete; that window can prevent other files from downloading.

  2. If your browser is set to prompt you for the location to save the file, use your computer’s Save As window to navigate to the location where you want to save the file. Otherwise, the system saves it to your default file location. Make a note of the directory and file name.

  3. Go to the location where you saved the file and open it in a text editor such as Notepad. Check the file format; if it is not correct, open Positive Pay Setup for the account and make corrections.

  4. Send the positive pay file to the financial institution.

Related Topics

Positive Pay

Positive Pay Setup

Positive Pay File Report

========================================================================

Removing Inactive Customer Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Purge_Clients.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Purge_Clients.htm

Removing Inactive Customer Data

Use the Inactive Data Deletion form to remove or deidentify customer data for clients or employees that are inactive for a certain number of years. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: To preserve data integrity, the system deidentifies employee data and removes any Personally Identifiable Information (PII). (The tool tip (

[Image: screenshot]

) displays this information.)

The Inactive Data Deletion form consists of two panels:

Note: Note the following:

To delete files for an inactive client:

  1. Select Clients in the Data Type field.

  2. In the Years of Inactivity field, select the minimum number of years a client must be inactive to display. The clients matching this criteria display. In addition, a message displays, “Please select a maximum of 20 clients per run.”

  3. Select the clients to be deleted in the Clients table.

  4. Select Rebuild Employer Registers to remove employee voucher data from the company tax registers. (Disable this field to prevent the system from removing employee voucher data.)

  5. Once all settings have been verified, click Delete Client Data. A warning displays, “Permanently delete all data for the <number> selected clients?” Confirm the action to remove data for the displayed clients by clicking Yes. (Clicking No returns to the form.)

Note: Note: This action cannot be undone.

  1. Once a deletion is complete, click a link in the Clients column in the History panel to download a report of all clients removed from the system.

To deidentify files for an inactive employee:

  1. Select Employees in the Data Type field.

  2. In the Years Terminated field, select the minimum number of years an employee must be inactive to display. The employees matching this criteria display. In addition, a message displays, “Employee Inactive Data Deletion limited to 1000 employees per run.”

Note: Note the following:

  1. To narrow the search, enter or select the employee’s Client ID. After entering or selecting an ID and moving your cursor off the field, the search immediately displays all inactive employee data for that ID.

Note: To narrow down the list of employees that displays, enter the employee ID or the employee’s first or last name in the Search box. After clicking the magnifying glass icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) or pressing Enter, the employee list redisplays that criteria. (Searches can return up to 1,000 employees at a time since only 1,000 employees can be deidentified at a time.)

  1. Select the employees to deidentify in the Employees table. (Click Employee ID to select all employees that display.)

  2. After verifying the settings, click Deidentify Employee Data. A confirmation message displays, “Deidentify all data for the <number> selected employees?” Confirm the action to remove data for the displayed employees. (The system replaces the attribute values in Column F.)

Note: This action deidentifies employee data (that is, it removes the data instead of deleting it) and cannot be undone.

  1. Once the deidentify process is complete, click a link in the Employees column in the History panel to download a report of all employees removed from the system.

Note: This downloadable report lists the company ID and the employee ID for all employees who were deidentified. However, no PII is shared.

To search for data deletions within a date range:

  1. Open the History panel by clicking the plus sign ( [Image: screenshot] ).

  2. Enter or select the From and To date range. The system adjusts the display of data deletions or deidentifications to match the criteria.

  3. The following columns display:

Column Description
Date Completed Timestamps when the deletion finished, displaying the date, hours, minutes, seconds, and the CST time zone.
Data Type Displays the type of data that was deleted: - Client: Displays if both client and employee data was deleted. - Employee: Displays if only employee data was deleted.

Summary of Employee Data Deidentification Mapping

This information outlines the specific actions taken to deidentify sensitive employee data across various system files. Each file listed contains attributes that are either:

Note: The goal in presenting this information ensures compliance with data privacy standards by systematically removing or anonymizing personally identifiable information (PII) across all relevant datasets.

File Action Attributes Affected
ACH.HISTORY Replace attribute with deidentified data 43
ACH.JOURNAL Replace attribute with deidentified data 43
APPROVALS Replace attribute with deidentified data 14
APPROVALS Replace attribute with null value 30
BATCH.XREF Replace attribute with deidentified data 3 \ 22 \ 23
CHECK.PRINT.FILE Replace attribute with deidentified data 8 \ 13
CHECK.PRINT.FILE Replace attribute with null value 251
COBRA.ENROLLEE Replace attribute with null value 3 \ 4
COBRA.ENROLLEE.HISTORY Replace attribute with null value 3 \ 4
DEPENDENTS Replace attribute with null value 3 \ 2 \ 7 \ 10\ 43\ 13\ 14\ 11\ 12\ 15\ 16\ 44
EMPLOYEE.1099.FORMS Replace attribute with deidentified data 1 \ 2\ 3 \ 18 \ 20\ 21
EMPLOYEE.1099.FORMS Replace attribute with null value 19 \ 22\ 39
EMPLOYEE.ACH Replace attribute with null value 1 \ 2 \ 3 \ 4 \ 5 \ 6 \ 7 \ 8 \ 9 \ 10\ 11\ 12\ 31\ 32\ 33\ 34
EMPLOYEE.BILLING.VOUCHERS Replace attribute with deidentified data 2
EMPLOYEE.BILLING.VOUCHERS.INIT Replace attribute with deidentified data 2
EMPLOYEE.COM Replace attribute with null value 20\ 22\ 23\ 26\ 27\ 39\ 40\ 41\ 42\ 43\ 44\ 51\ 52\ 53\ 54\ 29\ 30
EMPLOYEE.GARNISHMENTS Replace attribute with null value 32\ 33\ 51
EMPLOYEE.HLH Delete record
EMPLOYEE.PAY Starting with 906-XX-XXX 16
EMPLOYEE.PAY Replace attribute with null value 54 \ 55 \ 56 \ 57 \ 79 \ 151\ 152\ 153\ 154\ 155\ 156\ 176\ 182\ 205\ 206\ 207\ 208\ 255\ 256
EMPLOYEE.PAYROLL.VOUCHERS Replace attribute with deidentified data 2 \ 6
EMPLOYEE.PAYROLL.VOUCHERS Replace attribute with null value 7
EMPLOYEE.PAYROLL.VOUCHERS.INIT Replace attribute with deidentified data 2 \ 6
EMPLOYEE.PAYROLL.VOUCHERS.INIT Replace attribute with null value 7
EMPLOYEE.PER Employee ID 1
EMPLOYEE.PER Employee ID Reversed 2
EMPLOYEE.PER Employee ID 3
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 4
EMPLOYEE.PER Randomized 15
EMPLOYEE.PER Randomized 20
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 21
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 23
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 31
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 33
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 35
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 36
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 37
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 38
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 39
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 49
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 50
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 51
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 56
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 58
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 66
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 67
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 70
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 90
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 91
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 114
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 125
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 126
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 127
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 128
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 129
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 152
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 153
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 154
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 155
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 156
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 157
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 158
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 159
EMPLOYEE.PER Null 186
EMPLOYEE.SKL Replace attribute with null value 1 \ 2 \ 3 \ 4 \ 5 \ 10\ 11\ 12\ 13\ 14\ 15
EMPLOYEE.SSN.XREF Starting with 906-XX-XXX 1
EMPLOYEE.SSN.XREF Deidientified 2
OPEN.ENROLLMENTS Delete record
OSHA.CASE.FILE Delete record
PAYROLL.CHECK.REGISTER Replace attribute with deidentified data 6
PAYROLL.CHECK.REGISTER Replace attribute with null value 21
PENDING.EMPLOYEE.CHANGES Delete record
WEB.ENROLLMENTS.OBBE Replace attribute with deidentified data 1
WEB.ENROLLMENTS.OBBE.ARCH Replace attribute with deidentified data 1

The following additional fields are also deidentified:

========================================================================

Recalculating COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client Rebates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Recalculate%20COVID-19%20Tax%20Credits%20&%20Client%20Rebates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Recalculate COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client Rebates.htm

Recalculating COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client Rebates

Use this form to cycle through a client’s payroll batches starting with any payroll batch that contains the selected Starting Pay Date and recalculate the appropriate sick hours, credit accruals and tax credits for each such selected payroll batch. This process will add or remove tax codes from employee payroll vouchers.

Warning! We recommend familiarizing yourself with this functionality first before running on live client data.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, click Back Office. Under Operations|Utility click Recalculate COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client Rebates.

To Recalculate COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client Rebates:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

Client ID — Enter the client ID for whom you want to recalculate COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client rebates or click the Client ID link and select it from the Select Client dialog box.

Start Date — Enter the starting pay date of the date range.

End Date — The end date will auto-populate appropriately.

Include in recalculation:

Billing (Rebates) — Check this box if you want to recalculate all COVID related billing events. However, if you select this option, a warning displays.

CARES Retention — Check this box if you want to recalculate tax codes associated with the CARES Act tax credit.

Sick & Family Leave — Check this box if you want to recalculate tax codes associated with COVID-19 sick and family leave credits.

Families First — Check this box if you want to recalculate tax codes associated with COVID-19 Families First credits.

Medicare — Check this box if you want to recalculate tax codes associated with COVID-19 Emergency Medicare Tax credits.

  1. Click Run to Recalculate COVID-19 Tax Credits & Client Rebates. A job progress window appears showing the processing. A pop-up box indicates that recalculation is complete

========================================================================

Resetting Blocked Filing Status

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Reset%20Federal%20Withholding%20Blocked%20Override.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Reset Federal Withholding Blocked Override.htm

Resetting Blocked Filing Status

This process resets the employee tax filing status of blocked to single with zero exemptions. The filing year for the Form W-4 must be prior to or equal to the applicable tax year.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To reset the employee tax filing status:

  1. On the [Image: screenshot] (Back Office) menu, select Operations|Action > Reset Federal Withholding Blocked Override.

  2. In Year, enter the tax year applicable to the most current federal Form W-4 on file for this employee.

  3. Click Process.

  4. Click Yes when prompted to continue. A progress window opens and notifies you when the Federal Withholding Blocked Initialization has completed along with the number of employees updated. The Close and Report buttons remain disabled number of employees while the report is being generated.

  5. Click Close to close the window.

  6. Click Report to display the Job Control Status Report window.

  7. In the Job Control Status Report window, click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Performing Slavic 401K Imports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Slavic_401K_Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Slavic_401K_Import.htm

Performing Slavic 401K Imports

You can upload a retirement plan’s database file and import its contents using the Slavic 401K Import form. After a successful import, the process updates employee deferral changes.

Using the Slavic 401K Import Form

Use the Slavic 401K Import form to import data from an uploaded database file.

[Image: screenshot]

This form consists of the following fields:

Fields Description
Plan ID Select the Plan ID. After selecting the ID, the system displays the following message: If no Match eligibility rules are found, the Import defaults the “Eligible For Match” field to Y and uses the effective date for the “Match Starts On Date”. If it finds a “Match Starts On Date” less than the effective date, it will set the “Eligible For Match” field to Y and it will use the effective date.
Loan Payment Cycle Select one of the following loan payment cycles: - Per Pay Period (default): Loan payment cycle will be paid per pay period. - Monthly: Loan payment cycle will be paid in monthly increments. (This payment cycle can only be selected for new enrollments.) > Note: Note: If you select the Monthly loan payment cycle option, observe the following: - The loan payment cycle option automatically reverts to the Per Pay Period option when the employee has an existing retirement enrollment record. - If you are creating a new retirement enrollment, then the record reflects Monthly as the loan payment cycle option; therefore, the loan period entered from the import is honored. - If this is an existing record, it retains the original loan payment cycle value. If the original value was set to Monthly and the import runs with that option set to Per Pay Period, the original value remains set to Monthly.

Clicking Start Import in the Slavic 401K Import panel uploads a retirement plan’s database file and import its contents.

Before You Begin

Before you start this process, ensure your database file is set up as follows:

  1. Set up an Excel spreadsheet with the following columns:
  1. Do not include a header row.

  2. Save the file in .csv format.

Also, ensure the employee is employed by the client and enrolled in the retirement plan you want to import.

Uploading/Importing a Database File

To upload a database file in .csv format and import its data, do the following in the Slavic 401K Import panel:

  1. Click Plan ID and select the appropriate ID. A dialog displays as described in the table above. Click OK to close the dialog.

  2. Click the Loan Payment Cycle option.

  3. Click Start Import to upload a database file, then click Choose File and browse to the file. Click submit.

  4. The data file imports and a confirmation dialog displays. Click Close.

  5. The imported data filename displays in the window, along with any errors encountered.

  6. Click Clear to remove information from the window and repeat the process for another retirement plan, or click Close to close the form.

The import process accepts Post-Tax Elections (P) in the import file as well.

Please note the following while importing new retirement plan elections on this form:

========================================================================

Updating Existing Standard Employee Data

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Standard%20Employee%20Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Standard Employee Import.htm

Updating Existing Standard Employee Data

Use the Standard Employee Import form to update existing employee data via the standard employee import file format only.

WARNING! This process needs to be used with utmost caution as you may lose existing employee data. If your import file has incorrect or missing data (blank cells) for existing employees, it will replace existing employee data. If you want to import new hire records, use the New Employee Import menu. The PrismHR Menu Path is Back Office > Operations|Action > New Employee Import.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click Standard Employee Import. You cannot find this form using the normal search option.

To update existing employee data using the Standard Employee Import form:

  1. Enter the Code Set to be used for processing this import or click the Code Set link to select one from the Select Translation Table Code Set.

  2. Click Upload File to select the appropriate import file.

  3. Click Import Employees. A job progress window opens showing the progress. In case of any errors, correct them and redo the process.

  4. Click Close to close the job progress window. The employees are imported into a temporary IMPORT.EMPLOYEES file.

  5. Under the Convert Employees section choose the following:

  1. Click Convert Employees. This will move valid employee from the temporary IMPORT.EMPLOYEES file and overwrite the existing employee data in the permanent employee master file.

========================================================================

TALX Download Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/TALX%20Download%20Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/TALX Download Setup.htm

TALX Download Setup

Use this form to configure the Consortium file version in the Talx Tax Credit and Incentive Download form.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click TALX Download Setup. The system automatically displays the number of total pay codes and Talx pay codes.

To set up the TALX download file:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Report Setup
Source ID This is assigned by TALX and appears in the Header Record.
Source Type This is assigned by TALX and appears in the Header Record.
Submission File Code Select from the following options: - Initial - This is the default option. Select this options if this is the initial submission file. - Replacement - Use this option if this is a resubmission file of a previous file.
  1. Click Save to save the record.

========================================================================

Talx Tax Credit and Incentive Download

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Talx%20Tax%20Credit%20and%20Incentive%20Download.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Talx Tax Credit and Incentive Download.htm

Talx Tax Credit and Incentive Download

Use this process to download the Talx tax credit and incentive information, to send to an automated service, that provides access to employment information.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click Talx Tax Credit and Incentive Download. The system automatically displays the number of total pay codes and Talx pay codes.

To download the Talx Tax Credit and Incentive file:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
File Version Select the file version from the following options: - 1.2.0 - Consortium - Use this file version to build an export file that can be uploaded to the Work Number that will allow for Unemployment claim processing and tax credits. When you select this option, you need to fill up the TALX Download Setup form available on the top right of this form.
  1. Click Build. The system displays the processing status as the download is built. Fix any errors that are found and then rebuild the download.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close to close the status window.

  3. Click the Download File link to download the file.

  4. Click Clear to clear the screen.

========================================================================

Managing Transactions On Hold

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Hold_Review.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Hold_Review.htm

Managing Transactions On Hold

Use the Third Party Check Hold and Review form to manage transactions on hold. From there, you can put transactions on hold, remove a hold, or delete transactions.

Note: Note: When you open this form, the system locks third party check processing until you close it.

To review third party transactions, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] , then select Third Party Check Hold and Review from the Operations|Change menu. The Third Party Check Hold & Review form displays.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: You can also access this form from the Third Party Check Process form by clicking Hold Review. (See Creating a Third Party Check Processing Batch.)

  1. Select the Current On-Hold Status to view: All, On Hold, or NOT On Hold.

  2. Using the other four fields, you can limit the list to review only the third party transactions related to a specific employer, company (client), employee, or payee.

  3. Click Run. The Third Party Check Hold Maintenance & Review form opens, displaying all third party transactions that meet the criteria you specified.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: If you make a change on this form without saving it and then click Close, a message displays, “Any unsaved changes you entered will not be kept. Are you sure you want to exit?” Click Yes to close the form without saving your changes and return to the Third Party Check Hold & Review form.

  1. You can change the on-hold status of the transactions one at a time or all at once:
  1. You can mark transactions for deletion:

The link in the column changes to Y. It will not be deleted until you click the Save button. If you do not want to delete the transaction, click the Y link to set it back to N.

  1. Click Save to save all your changes. This includes the hold statuses for transactions and deletions.

  2. Click Close to exit the form without saving your changes. The system prompts you to confirm that you want to close the form without changing any on-hold statuses or deleting any transactions:

Note: The system prompt that displays when you close the form always displays as a reminder and if you save the changes, these saved selections remain saved.

Related Topic

Processing Third Party Checks

========================================================================

Running Third Party Check Posted Batch Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Posted_Batch_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Posted_Batch_Report.htm

Running Third Party Check Posted Batch Report

From the Third Party Check Posted Batch form, you can print a report of the checks included in the batch using the Remit Advice Report button.

To run a third party check posted batch report, do the following:

  1. Clicking Remit Advice Report in the Third Party Check Posted Batch form. A dialog displays.

  2. Select the Check Type, either Garnishment Checks or Third Party Checks.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. You can enter an Advice Message to display on the report.

  2. You can also click Save Message to save the message you entered, which saves your message and displays it when anyone chooses to print the report again.

  3. Click Run Report.

The report displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Close it when you are finished.

Related Topics

Viewing Posted Third Party Check Batches

Performing Third Party Check Processing

========================================================================

Setting Up Third Party Check Printing Mode

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Printing_Mode.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Printing_Mode.htm

Setting Up Third Party Check Printing Mode

In order to support third party check printing, your organization must set up the Third Party Check Printing Mode in the System Parameters form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To set the print mode for third party checks, do the following:

  1. Open the System Parameters form. (Click Back Office. Select System Parameters under System|Change.)

  2. Select one of the two options for the Third Party Check Printing Mode to support the way your organization wants to work:

Important! If you do not select an option in the Third Party Check Printing Mode field (that is, this field selection remains “–Select–”), the system processes as though it was in Batch Mode. However, to access third party check processing, you must set this field to Batch Mode.

Note: Note: In the backend system, you can manage Third Party Check Printing Mode in mvQuery Third Party Checks Maintenance along with the third party check format, logo, and signature. The setting is always the same setting in both forms.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Creating a Third Party Check Processing Batch

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Process_Create.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Process_Create.htm

Creating a Third Party Check Processing Batch

Use the Third Party Check Process form to select an employer and create a batch of third party checks to process. For example, you can select the employer in this form as part of the third party check processing batch process:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: When you open this form, the system locks third party check processing until you close it. Also, if you set the Third Party Check Printing Mode to Real Time on the System Parameters form, a message displays, “This account is set up to print Third Party Checks during payroll processing. If Third Party Checks should be processed in ‘Batch Mode,’ change the Third Party Check Printing mode at System Parameters.” Click OK.

The Third Party Check Process form serves as the main “hub” for some third party check processing transactions. In addition to creating a third party check processing batch, you can also do the following in this form:

Important! Before you begin this process, you must set the Third Party Check Print Mode field to Batch Mode on the System Parameters form.

To select an employer and create a batch of third party checks to process, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] , then select Third Party Check Process from the Operations|Change menu. The Third Party Check Process form displays.

  2. If necessary, enter the pay date in the Pay Date on or before field to limit the list to payroll batches that were processed for that date or earlier. (The default is the Friday of the current week.)

  3. To begin creating a batch of third party checks, click the Employer Name or Employer ID. This opens the Third Party Check Batch Control form, where you can create a batch. To apply filters, select the + sign next to Batch Creation Filters to expand the form.

Note: If the net payee amount was less than or equal to zero, the following message displays when the Third Party Check Batch Control form opens, “Some items were skipped because the net payee amount was less than or equal to zero.”

  1. Complete the appropriate information:
Field Description
Check Date Enter or select the Check Date.
Checking Account Enter or select the Checking Account. (Note: You can set up a separate checking account only for third party check processing, but this is not a requirement.)
Batch Name Enter the Batch Name.
Batch Creation Filters Use the filters, if you need to limit the items in the third party check processing batch: - Enter or select the Pay Date on or before date. - Select the Check Type. - Select the Filter, then select the Payee ID, Client ID, or Employee ID. Note: If you select a Filter option, such as Payee, add some payees, but then decide not to use them and switch to the Client or Employee options and then select Payee again, the system remembers and displays the payees you originally added. (This behavior also applies to the Pay Date on or before date and the Check Type filter.) Note: Select Clear Filters to remove any filters you selected.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Garnishment transactions are labeled “Garn” in the Check Type column.

  1. To view the details of a line item, click the [Image: screenshot] icon next to the Payee ID. When you are finished, click Close Detail View.

  2. When the list displays only the third party check transactions that you want to include, click Create Batch.

The system displays a message with the ID of the batch that you created.

  1. Click OK to return to the main Third Party Check Process form.

Related Topic

Performing Third Party Check Processing

========================================================================

Posting a Third Party Check Processing Batch

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Process_Post.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Process_Post.htm

Posting a Third Party Check Processing Batch

Use the Third Party Check Batches Available to Post form to select a batch of third party checks to post.

Note: When you open this form, the system continues to lock third party check processing until you close the main Third Party Check Process form.

To view batches available to post and select a batch for posting, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] , then select Third Party Check Process from the Operations|Change menu. The Third Party Check Process form displays.

  2. If necessary, enter the pay date in the Pay Date on or before field to limit the list to payroll batches that were processed for that date or earlier. (The default is the Friday of the current week.)

  3. Click Batches Available to Post to view the third party check processing batches that are ready to post to the system.

The Third Party Check Batches Available to Post form displays the number of employers, journals, and total amount ready to be processed as of the specified effective date. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. To begin posting a batch of third party checks, click the Batch Name or Batch ID. This opens the Third Party Check Batch Processing form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

In addition, you can delete a batch on this form by clicking Delete Batch. A confirmation message displays where you can click Yes to proceed with deleting the batch. (Click No to return to the form without deleting the batch.)

Note: After deleting a batch, the transactions in that batch are once again available to process in a new batch using third party check processing.

  1. If necessary, enter or select a different Check Date and Checking Account. (This updated information will display on the posted batch and checks.) When you select the Checking Account field, a list displays all active bank accounts regardless of the Show in Cash Receipts setting on the Bank Accounts form.

Note: After making these changes, if you close the form without posting the batch the information reverts back to its original state when you reopen that batch.

  1. To view the details of a line item, click the Payee Type-ID. When you finish, click Close Detail View.

  2. When you are ready, click Post Batch.

The system displays a message that the batch is posting. After that, it displays the Printing Third Party Checks job progress form to display the print process. Click Close when it finishes. (Note: The PDF of the check print file automatically loads to display on the screen.)

The system returns you to the Third Party Check Batch Processing form.

  1. Click Close.

The system returns you to the Third Party Check Batches Available to Post form with the list of open batches.

Related Topic

Performing Third Party Check Processing

========================================================================

Posted Third-Party Check Batches

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Process_Posted_Batches.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Process_Posted_Batches.htm

Viewing Posted Third Party Check Batches

Use the Third Party Check Process form to access the Posted Third Party Check Batches form, where you can view a list of all the posted batches. You can then select a batch to reprint or void checks, view the accounting or check information, and run reports.

Note: When you open this form, the system continues to lock third party check processing until you close the main Third Party Check Process form.

To view a list of all posted batches, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] , then select Third Party Check Process from the Operations|Change menu.

  2. Select Posted Batches. The Posted Third Party Check Batches form displays.

  3. Use the filter to limit the list to third party check batches with a particular status: Employer ID, Batch Status, Check Dated, Start Date, or End Date. (The default is to Show All with the current week’s Friday date as the End Date.)

  4. To view batch information or a voided batch, click the Batch Name or Batch ID. This opens the Third Party Check Posted Batch form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

From this form, you can view:

[Image: screenshot]

[Image: screenshot]

[Image: screenshot]

You can also view information about the check and reprint it or void it by doing the following:

Related Topic

Performing Third Party Check Processing

========================================================================

Performing Third Party Check Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Processing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Processing.htm

Performing Third Party Check Processing

Third party check processing connects employee garnishments and voluntary deductions with designated payees. PrismHR deducts the designated pay amounts from the employee and allows a service provider to create a check made payable to the designated payee by using the Third Party Check Process.

Important! Before you begin this process, you must set the Third Party Check Print Mode field to Batch Mode on the System Parameters form.

The Third Party Check Process form lists all third party check payments that are being processed in payroll batches that meet the selection criteria.

From this form, you can maintain third party check batches by doing the following:

Related Topic

Processing Third Party Checks

========================================================================

Reprinting Third Party Checks

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Reprint.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Reprint.htm

Reprinting Third Party Checks

From the Third Party Check Posted Batch form, you can reprint any checks as needed by clicking the Reprint Checks button. This opens the PDF for the check(s) in the selected batch, which you can then print as needed.

To reprint a check, do the folllowing:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] , then select Third Party Check Process from the Operations|Change menu.

  2. Select Posted Batches. The Posted Third Party Check Batches form displays.

  3. Use the filter to limit the list to third party check batches with a particular status: Employer ID, Batch Status, Check Dated, Start Date, or End Date. (The default is to Show All with the current week’s Friday date as the End Date.)

  4. To view batch information or a voided batch, click the Batch Name or Batch ID. This opens the Third Party Check Posted Batch form, where you can reprint checks. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Reprint Checks. A PDF of the check displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click the Print icon to reprint it or download it by clicking the Download ( [Image: screenshot] ) icon.

Related Topics

Viewing Posted Third Party Check Batches

Performing Third Party Check Processing

========================================================================

Voiding Third Party Checks

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Void.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Third-Party_Check_Void.htm

Voiding Third Party Checks

Use the Third Party Check Void form to void a check included in the batch.

Note: Note: You can only void checks that have been printed. Also, when you open this form, the system locks third party check processing until you close it.

To void a check included in the batch, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] , then select Third Party Check Void from the Operations|Action menu. The Third Party Check Void form opens.

  2. Enter or select the Checking Account and the Check Number. The Payable To, Check Date, and Check Amount display. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Review the check information to confirm that it is accurate.

  2. Enter the Reason for Void.

  3. Click Void Check. A confirmation message displays where you can click Yes to proceed with voiding the check. (Click No to return to the form without voiding the check.)

  4. Click Close to release the third party check processing lock.

Note: After a check is voided, it is once again available to process in a new batch using third party check processing.

Related Topics

Viewing Posted Third Party Check Batches

Performing Third Party Check Processing

========================================================================

Transfer Accounting Downloads File to PC

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Transfer%20Accounting%20Downloads%20File%20to%20PC.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Transfer Accounting Downloads File to PC.htm

Transfer Accounting Downloads File to PC

Use this form to transfer PrismHR accounting files from the server’s download directory to the user’s system.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

Note: Note: When you give access to this form on the User Role menu, you will receive the following warning message:

This form does not have any client access group security built into this menu. It is possible for users to gain access to information that they should be restricted from by downloading files from this menu.

Note: Note: A warning message displays on the User Role screen if a user,

The message states:

The user role has access to the Transfer Accounting Downloads File to PC menu. This form does not utilize client access group security so it is possible that maybe be able to download accounting files that contain data they should not be allowed to access. Do you wish to continue?

To access the form, click the Back Office menu > Operations|Action > Transfer Downloads File to PC.

To transfer an accounting download file to a user’s system:

  1. In the Filename field, enter the accounting journal file name that you want to download or click the Filename link to select one. A separate Select Field window opens.

  2. Scroll and select the accounting journal file that you want to download from the list. Refine the search using Filename Description and Date. The list displays 100 options. If there are more than 100 options, scroll down and click the More… link to view the next list of options. Continue till you find the accounting file that you want to download.

  3. Once you select the Filename, the File View shows the first 15 lines of the selected accounting downloads file.

  4. Click Download to download the selected accounting downloads file to your PC .

========================================================================

Transfer Downloads File to PC

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Transfer%20Downloads%20File%20to%20PC.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Transfer Downloads File to PC.htm

Transfer Downloads File to PC

Use this form to download files to a user’s system, from the server’s download directory generated by the PrismHR system.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

Note: Note: A warning message displays on the User Role form if a user,

The message states:

The user role has access to the Transfer Downloads File to PC menu. This form does not utilize client access group security so it is possible that maybe be able to download files that contain data they should not be allowed to access. Do you wish to continue?

To access the form, click the Back Office menu > Operations|Action > Transfer Downloads File to PC.

To transfer a Download File to a user’s PC:

  1. Click the Filename link. A separate Select File window opens.

  2. Scroll and select the Download File that you want to download from the list. You can also search for the Download File using Filename Description and Date. The File View shows the first 15 lines of the selected Download File.

  3. Click Download.

========================================================================

Transfer Tax Basis from Successor Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/Transfer%20Tax%20Basis%20from%20Successor%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/Transfer Tax Basis from Successor Report.htm

Transfer Tax Basis from Successor Report

Use this form to generate a report to show successor tax data in the system. Successor tax data is entered into the system using the Successor Wage Tax Import process. These values are written to the various tax registers during the import so the employees do not accrue specific taxes any longer. This report sorts the information either by the employee name or tax code.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, clickReports menu. Under Operations|Report, click Transfer Tax Basis from Successor Report.

To generate the transfer tax basis from successor report:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
Sort Option Select one of the following options from the drop-down: - Employee Name (Default) - Select this option if you want to sort the report by employee name. - Tax Code - Select this option is you want to sort this report by tax code.
  1. Click Generate to generate the report. The report contains the following columns:
  1. Click XLS to download the report.

========================================================================

Changing a W/C Policy

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/Operations/WC_Policy_Update.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/Operations/WC_Policy_Update.htm

Changing a W/C Policy

You can use the W/C Policy Update form to update a W/C policy that is listed on the Benefits tab in the Client Details record. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This feature is only available for service providers.

To update a W/C policy:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Utility Processing, select W/C Policy Update.

  3. Enter or select one or multiple Policy IDs you want to update. The Description displays in a read-only field.

  4. Select Find Clients. The system populates the table with the clients associated with the selected policies.

  5. Select the clients for updating. (Select the checkbox directly under Select Clients to select all clients.)

  6. Enter or select the existing Policy you want to change, which can consist of the workers’ compensation policy that covers the employees for the client.

  7. Enter or select the Policy Effective Date for the client’s coverage.

  8. Click Process Policy Changes. A message displays, “Are you sure you want to change the selected clients to Policy <policy ID>?” Select Yes to continue.

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Specifying Direct Deposit Terms and Conditions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2019/Direct_Deposit_Acceptance_Text.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2019/Direct_Deposit_Acceptance_Text.htm

Specifying Direct Deposit Terms and Conditions

Enter your organization’s Direct Deposit Terms and Conditions text to display it before accepting direct deposit account information when entered via any web application.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters.

  3. From the Actions menu, select Direct Deposit Acceptance Text.

To create a Direct Deposit Terms and Conditions text:

  1. Enter the effective date when you want the text to display.

You can submit multiple effective dates for different texts. For example, enter text for 07/01/2019, then enter differently worded text effective on 07/03/2019, then a different text for 02/01/2019.

  1. Enter the text in the box below the Effective Date field.

You can also do the following:

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Document Security

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2019/Document_Security_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2019/Document_Security_Maintenance.htm

Maintaining Document Security

Control document category permissions (upload, delete, move, rename, and other updates) for service providers, worksite trusted advisors, and worksite managers on a per‑role basis with the Document Security Maintenance form.

To open the Document Security Maintenance form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select User Roles. The User Roles form opens.

  3. In Role ID, enter a role ID, or click the Role ID link and select a role ID from the list.

  4. From the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] , select Document Security. The Document Security Maintenance form opens.

To add document categories and permissions to a user role:

  1. Click Add. The Document Security Selection form opens.

  2. Select the document category to add or check Select All to add all categories to the user role.

  3. Click Accept.

  4. Click Save.

To change document category permissions for a user role:

  1. Select Change Permissions next to the Document Category you want to update. The Document Category Permissions panel displays.

  2. Select the category permissions for the user role.

  3. Click Accept.

  4. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Global mvQuery Image Path

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2019/Global_mvQuery_Image_Path_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2019/Global_mvQuery_Image_Path_Maintenance.htm

Maintaining Global mvQuery Image Path

Control the logos that appear on checks and reports printed using mvQuery with this form. Each field controls a different image that you can print on your organization’s checks. Fill in the fields as needed.

Note: Note: You can override some of these settings at the client level.

Field Name Field Description
Blank Image File Path This image takes up the same space as a logo, but is blank. Enter the location of this image on the mvQuery print server.
mvQuery Report Logo Filepath This logo prints on all reports. Enter the location of this image on the mvQuery print server. Set a client-level report logo by entering the file path in the Print Service Report Logo Filepath field, located on Client\ Change\ Client Details >Actions menu [Image: screenshot] > Report Print Options.
mvQuery Check Logo Filepath This logo prints on all checks. Enter the location of this image on the mvQuery print server. Set a client-level check logo by entering the file path in the Check Print Service Logo Filepath field, located on Client\ Change\ Client Details >Actions menu [Image: screenshot] > Print Service Options.
Show Logos On Garnishment Checks? You can select: - No Logo - Yes - Always Use Global Logo (use the global logo, established in the mvQuery Check Logo Filepath field) - Yes - Use Client Logo If Entered (use a client-level logo, if one exists). Set a client-level check logo by entering the file path in the Check Print Service Logo Filepath field, located on Client\ Change\ Client Details >Actions menu [Image: screenshot] > Print Service Options.

Managing Cash Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Cash_Types.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Cash_Types.htm

Managing Cash Types

You can manage cash types using the Cash Types form.

[Image: screenshot]

Using this form, you can edit existing cash type codes or enter new ones.

Editing Existing Cash Type Codes

The first time you access this form, it loads any cash type codes that were previously set in the “global” record.

To edit an existing cash type code, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Cash Types. The Cash Types form displays.

  3. Make changes in the following fields:

Field — Description

Cash Type Codes — Edit the cash type code.

Cash Type Descriptions — Edit the cash type code’s description.

Obsolete — Edit the Obsolete option to determine if the cash type code should be obsolete. (Selecting Yes keeps a code and its description from displaying in input fields, so it cannot be re-entered.)

  1. Click Save.

Entering New Cash Type Codes

To enter a new cash type code, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From System|Change, select Cash Types. The Cash Types form displays.

  3. Click + in the header row. A new line displays in the list.

  4. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Cash Type Codes — Enter the cash type code.

Cash Type Descriptions — Enter the cash type code’s description.

Obsolete — Select whether or not the cash type code should be obsolete. (Selecting Yes keeps a code and its description from displaying in input fields, so it cannot be re-entered.)

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Converting Global Pay Rate Changes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Converting-Global-Pay-Rate-Changes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Converting-Global-Pay-Rate-Changes.htm

Converting Global Pay Rate Changes

Change pay rates globally with the Global Pay Rate Change form. This process is typically used for minimum wage rate adjustments.

To change a pay rate globally:

  1. Click Back Office.
  2. From System|Action, select Global Pay Rate Change.
  3. Set the date this change becomes effective.
  4. Select a reason for this change. For example, Promo indicates a promotion.
  5. Optional: Select a state for this pay change. If a state is selected, only employees in that state are processed. Leave this field blank to apply this rate change for all employees.
  6. Enter the current hourly rate and the new hourly rate.
  7. Click Preview Changes to review the desired rate change and all employees whose rates are impacted. The screen displays up to the first 100 changes. [Image: screenshot]
  8. Click Download Report to generate a copy of the report.
  9. Click Close; the system downloads the report to your local drive. This will contain all changes made, not just the first 100 employees.
  10. Click Apply Changes if rate changes are set correctly. This button remains disabled until Preview Changes is pressed.

========================================================================

Defaulting Network IDs by Benefit Plan

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Default-Network-IDs-Benefit-Plan.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Default-Network-IDs-Benefit-Plan.htm

Defaulting Network IDs by Benefit Plan

The Default Network by Benefit Plan utility assigns all employees who are covered by the specified benefit plan, but who do not have an assigned network, to the selected network

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security.

To assign a network for enrollees of a benefit plan who do not have an assigned network:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Action, select Default Network by Benefit Plan. The Default Network by Benefit Plan form opens.

  3. Fill in the form.

Option Description
Benefit Plan Click the link and select the benefit plan to which the members belong.
Network ID Enter the Network ID to assign to the unassigned members of the selected benefit plan.
  1. Click Process. A progress box displays the status.

  2. When the progress box shows that the process is complete, click Close to return to the Default Network by Benefit Plan page or Report to open the Job Control Status Report. See Viewing the Job Control Status Report

========================================================================

Deleting Group Benefit Enrollments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Deleting-Group-Benefit-Enrollments.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Deleting-Group-Benefit-Enrollments.htm

Deleting Group Benefit Enrollments

Use this utility to delete benefit enrollments from all employees regardless of the status of the benefit plan. The benefit plan is not deleted by the utility at either the client or system level.

WARNING: Important: Only use this utility if an Auto-Enrollment process occurred in error. Running this process deletes all employee enrollments for a given plan.

To perform a group benefit enrollment deletion:

  1. Click Work Centers.

  2. From Work Centers|Onboarding & Benefits, select Benefit Plan Maintenance.

  3. From Group Benefit Plans (Global), select Delete Unused Group Benefit Enrollments.

  4. Enter or select a Benefit Plan ID from the Select Benefit Plan list.

  5. Click Process, then click Yes to delete enrollments. A success or fail message then displays.

  6. Click Cancel to clear the form.

========================================================================

Setting EFLEX Group IDs

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/EFLEX-Group-ID-Maint.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/EFLEX-Group-ID-Maint.htm

Setting EFLEX Group IDs

Set EFLEX Group IDs for clients with the EFLEX Group ID Maintenance form (only used by WSP - Service Providers). Once groups are configured, you can use the Eflex by Pay Date Deductions report.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To set EFLEX Group IDs:

  1. Click Back Office menu > System|Change > EFLEX Group ID Maintenance.

  2. Click the Clients link to select a client ID, or enter a client ID in the Clients field. The Client Name is filled in.

  3. Enter a Group ID.

  4. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining the HSA PEO Match

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/HSA-PEO-Match.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/HSA-PEO-Match.htm

Maintaining the HSA PEO Match

The HSA PEO Match form establishes the HSA match amounts paid by the PEO for each medical plan type offered in a specified year. Use this form when the PEO (and not the client) provides an HSA match. The system prorates annual amounts if someone is enrolled mid-year.

To do this, you must add the custom feature code of HSAPEOMATCH to the custom feature codes list. Also, the client needs to check HSA G/L Accounts and add the credit/debit accounts for the HSA PEO Match.

The amount of the PEO match can be overridden on the flexible spending accounts record.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security.

To maintain the HSA PEO match:

  1. Click Back Office menu > System|Change > HSA PEO Match.

  2. Enter the 4-digit calendar year for the match amount.

  3. Select the Plan and Plan Type. See Selecting Data

  4. In Match Amt, enter the match amount paid by the PEO for the specified plan and year.

  5. If necessary, add another Plan, Plan Type, and Match Amt.

  6. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining DataBridge Translation Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Maint-DataBridge-Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Maint-DataBridge-Codes.htm

Maintaining DataBridge Translation Codes

DataBridge is a system that sends pre-formatted files to third party vendors. Maintain these codes with the DataBridge Maintenance form.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To set codes:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Data Bridge Maintenance. The system displays the Data Bridge Maintenance form.

  3. Select an existing DataBridge Code, or enter a new code.

  4. Set up to four codes.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Retiring Vertex GeoCodes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Retire-Vertex-Geocodes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/Retire-Vertex-Geocodes.htm

Retiring Vertex GeoCodes

Periodically, in some Monthly Update packages, Vertex announces the retirement of GeoCodes. This procedure walks you through the steps for retiring and replacing Vertex® GeoCodes and rebuilding Tax Registers once the GeoCodes have been retired. Do not run this process until all users are logged off the system.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To retire and replace GeoCodes:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Action, select Retire GeoCodes.

  3. Click the Retired GeoCode link and select the GeoCode you want to retire.

  4. Click the Replacement GeoCode link and select the GeoCode to replace the retired one.

  5. Click Run.

  6. Rebuild the tax registers.

========================================================================

Entering School District Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2020/School-District-Names.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2020/School-District-Names.htm

Entering School District Codes

You can enter school district codes and names with the School District Names form. This information appears on School Tax Detail and Summary Reports. It can also appear on check stubs when state and school districts are defined.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To enter school district codes:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, click School District Names. The School District Names form opens.

  3. Click + to add a new row.

  4. Enter a School District Code and School District Name.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Viewing Document Storage

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Document_Storage_Dashboard.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Document_Storage_Dashboard.htm

Viewing Document Storage

Use the Document Storage Dashboard to view your total document storage, so you can ensure it is under your storage allocation. (Note: You can work with PrismHR, if you need to add more storage.) In addition, you can view the storage being used by a client. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This dashboard is only available for service providers.

The Document Storage Dashboard displays the following information:

To filter which clients you want to view, enter the company name or a term used in multiple company names in the Filter field. The Companies panel re-displays the company or companies that match the name you entered.

========================================================================

Defining Payday Notifications Daily Start Time

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Notification_Control_Panel_for_Payday_Notify.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Notification_Control_Panel_for_Payday_Notify.htm

Defining Payday Notifications Daily Start Time

You can specify the daily start time for payday notifications using the Payday Notify panel on the Notification Control Panel form, which is accessible from the Operations|Action menu. In addition, you can view the last date/time they were run.

To specify the daily start time for payday notifications, do the following:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Operations|Action, select Notification Control Panel.

  3. In the Payday Notify panel, enter the daily start time in the Daily Payday Notification Start Time field (this field defaults to 05:00:00). Valid entries for this field are times between 12:01AM and 12:00PM (essentially, between midnight and noon), in military time. For example, to start payday notifications at 1:00AM, enter 01:00:00.

Note: Note: If you enter a time outside the 12:01AM and 12:00PM time-frame, an error message displays, “Payday Notification time must be between 12:01 AM and 12:00 PM.”

  1. Click Save.

To the right of the Daily Payday Notification Start Time field a display-only process status displays, which matches the same control number that displays in the BE Notify panel. (See Using the Notification Control Panel (Benefits Enrollment).)

In addition, the display-only Last Run Date/Time field displays the last date and time the process ran.

========================================================================

Identifying Employee Gender Designation and Preferred Pronouns

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Self_Identity_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Self_Identity_Codes.htm

Identifying Employee Gender Designation and Preferred Pronouns

You can review the gender designation and the preferred pronouns for your employees using the Self Identity Codes form, which is available on the System|Change menu. In this form, the two panels, Gender Designation and Preferred Pronoun, work independently of each other, so you can review the gender designation and the preferred pronoun codes either at the same time or one at a time.

Note: Note the following:

The following standard codes are available in the system:

Category Available Codes
Gender Designation - A: Agender - AP: Apathetic - BI: Bigender - DN: Do Not Disclose - F: Female - G: Genderfluid - GQ: Genderqueer - M: Male - MA: Maverique - NB: Non-Binary - NL: Not Listed - T: Transgender - TF: Transgender Female - TM: Transgender Male - TRI: Trigender - TWO: Two-Spirit

Reviewing WSM/WTA Setup and Data Security Access

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Worksite_User_Data_Security_Download_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/2021/Worksite_User_Data_Security_Download_Report.htm

Reviewing WSM/WTA Setup and Data Security Access

Use the Worksite User Data Security Download form to review your worksite manager/worksite trusted advisor user setup, data security access information, and last login information in a downloaded report in .csv format.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This report is only available for service providers and only displays data for worksite manager/worksite trusted advisor users, not service providers or worksite employees information.

After processing this report, you can verify that user data security access is setup correctly. Also, after viewing this report you can ensure that the users have access to the appropriate information and then make updates based on these results, so they cannot access sensitive company and employee data.

Generating the Report

To generate this report, do the following:

  1. In PrismHR, click Reports.

  2. From System|Report, select Worksite User Data Security Download. The report opens.

  3. Enter the Selection Criteria to determine what displays on the report:

Note: A client ID or user ID is not required, so you can leave the filter table option blank.

  1. Click Generate File. A new window opens that displays the reporting process.

  2. When the process is complete, click Report. The Job Control Status Report displays, which indicates the process is complete. Close the report.

  3. Close the process window, then click the downloaded report link that displays at the bottom of the window to open the report in .csv format. Save the report in the appropriate folder.

Reviewing the Report

Note: Note the following when reviewing the downloaded report:

Listed are samples of the report columns, based on the criteria in the form:

Column — Description

Report Title — The name of the report.

Selection Criteria — The user status, which includes all users, active users, or inactive users.

User ID — The user’s ID.

User Name — The user’s name.

Status — The user’s usage status.

Last Password Change — The last date a change was made to the user password.

Email Address — The email address associated with the user ID.

Mobile Phone — The mobile phone number associated with the user ID.

Employee ID — The employee’s ID.

Employee Name — The employee’s name.

Last Login Date — Last successful login date.

Last Login Time — Last successful login time.

Client ID — The client’s ID.

Access — Indicates if the client is granted, denied, or thru XX/XX/XXXX.

Data Security Location ID — Indicates the location ID that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Location Description — Indicates the location description that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member Name column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Location Access — Indicates the location access that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Access column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Division ID — Indicates the division ID that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Division Description — Indicates the division description that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member Name column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Division Access — Indicates the division access that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Access column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Department ID — Indicates the department ID that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Department Description — Indicates the department description that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member Name column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form). (Note: This column only displays if the Data Security Entity field is set to Department on the Client Security form.)

Data Security Department Access — Indicates the department access that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Access column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Shift ID — Indicates the shift ID that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Shift Description — Indicates the shift description that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member Name column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form). (Note: This column only displays if the Data Security Entity field is set to Shift on the Client Security form.)

Data Security Shift Access — Indicates the shift access that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Access column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Work Group ID — Indicates the work group ID that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form). (Note: This column only displays if the Data Security Entity field is set to Work Group on the Client Security form.)

Data Security Work Group Description — Indicates the work group description that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Member Name column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

Data Security Work Group Access — Indicates the work group access that matches the client ID, which is the same value that displays in the Access column in the Data Security form (accessed from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] on the Users form).

User Role — Indicates each user role as assigned to the user in the Users form on the System|Change menu, where each role displays in a separate column. For example, if two user roles are assigned to a user ID in the Users form: [Image: screenshot] Then those user roles display in separate columns in the report: [Image: screenshot]

H/R Role — Indicates each H/R role as assigned to the user in the Users form on the System|Change menu, where each role displays in a separate column. Note: This column displays information in the same manner as the User Role column.

For more information about managing the client’s data security, see the Client Administration Guide.

========================================================================

Using ACH Originators

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/ACH_Originators.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/ACH_Originators.htm

Using ACH Originators

An ACH originator is a financial institution to which a client sends ACH files. The financial institution becomes the “originating DFI” by submitting the transactions to the ACH network. If you process ACH transactions for clients, each client can have a different financial institution. Use the ACH Originators form to maintain records for each institution.

Maintaining Financial Institution Information

Use the ACH Originators panel to maintain the financial institution information.

To maintain financial institution information, do the following:

  1. Go to the ACH Originators form on the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields in the ACH Originators panel:

Field — Description

Processor ID — Enter a Processor ID for the financial institution. The PrismHR Customer Support Team recommends that you use easy-to-remember abbreviations for the processor IDs.

Processing Bank ID — Enter the Processing Bank ID, which is the bank-assigned number that identifies your service bank as the destination of the ACH input files. In line 101, it occupies 10 characters, beginning at position 4.

Processing Bank Name — Enter the Processing Bank Name that processes the ACH file on behalf of your organization. This is the originating depository financial institution (ODFI).

Processing Company ID — Enter the Processing Company ID of the originating company that sends ACH files to the bank. Typically, this is the taxpayer ID of the entity sending the files to the bank.

Processing Company Name — Enter the Processing Company Name of the organization that sends ACH files to the originating bank. Typically, this is the employer’s name.

Customer Data Sender ID — Enter the Customer Data Sender ID.

Reference Code — Enter an optional Reference Code that describes the input file for internal accounting purposes. The system uses this in positions 87 through 94 of the file header record. Note: If the Trace Number Prefix field is left blank, PrismHR uses the first eight (8) digits of the originating bank’s ID.

Trace Number Prefix — Enter the Trace Number Prefix, which is the first eight characters of the trace number that the system will enter in positions 80 through 94 in the entry detail record. (If you leave this field blank, the system uses the first eight digits of the originating bank ID.)

Header Trace Number — Enter the eight-character custom number to automatically include it in positions 80-87 of both the Company/Batch Header and Company/Batch Control records within the NACHA file. (This number meets the specific formatting requirements of certain financial institutions, such as credit unions.)

ACH File Options — Select the ACH File Options to use.

Insert End-of-Transmission Character — Select Insert End-of-Transmission Character to include the end-of-transmission character at the end of the ACH deposit file.

End-of-Transmission ASCII Character — If you have chosen to insert an end-of-transmission character, select the End-of-Transmission ASCII Character to use.

Note: Note: The Local Download Path Name and PC File Name fields are used only by the legacy ACH process. You do not need to complete those fields when you use the PrismHR ACH features. When users process consolidated ACH files, they will name the file and choose the location on their system where they want to save it.

  1. If your organization uses non-consolidated ACH processing, enter the full path to the directory in the Local Download Path Name field, including the forward slash (/) character at the end. The system downloads ACH files built for this checking account to this location on your local machine.

  2. Your organization can use a bank script to transfer ACH files to the financial institution that requires the use of a certain file name. Enter the NACHA Directory Override File Name to use instead of the standard file name when writing ACH files to the NACHA directory on a Windows 2000 operating system.

If you enter an override file name here, the system always uses that file name when writing to the NACHA directory. Users will overwrite files with the same name.

  1. To override the ACH naming convention enter the base name of the files transferred to your PC in the PC File Name field, where the first character must be alpha. (The date and “.txt” extension are included in the downloaded filename.) For example, using PHOTO1 as the base name could display the downloaded filename as PHOTO120200101.txt.

  2. If your organization uses non-consolidated ACH processing, enter the PC File Name, which is the base name of files transferred to your hard drive. The system appends the date and .txt extension to the file name in this field. The first character must be a letter of the alphabet.

  3. Indicate the format used for the Child Support EFT Addenda Format. The default is Fixed and you can choose to set it to Variable.

  4. Enter the number of business Days Into Future for ACH Selection. The system selects ACH transactions to submit to the ACH originator. This overrides the global setting in System Parameters; if you enter a negative number, the system holds the ACH until after its expected due date, which you can use to hold garnishments.

  5. Select Separate Child Support Batches by Company to separate child support batches by client.

  6. Select Separate ACH Batches For Debits/Credits to create separate payroll ACH batches within the file for credit and debit transactions. This applies only when you are separating child support batches by company.

  7. If you use Cachet or Wells Fargo, or want to process a Reverse Wire Transfer for ACH processing, select the appropriate Third Party Format.

Note: Note the following:

[Image: screenshot]

Click OK to continue, then perform the tasks listed in the warning (see the “Setting Up Reverse Wire Transfer Format” section, below).

Setting Up Multiple Email Addresses

When processing multiple ACH files, you must configure the email addresses in the Email addresses for multiple ACH processing section. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

After processing the files, the system distributes two emails:

Note: If you do not configure any email addresses, the system does not send an email.

Entering the File Header/Footer

If required, enter the header and footer records unique to the ACH originator, if required. The system appends these to the start and end of each file, respectively.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter the ACH File Header Record for each line in the file header.

  2. Enter the ACH File Footer Record for each line in the file footer.

Setting Up Cachet Third Party Format

If you selected Cachet for the Third Party Format, complete the fields in the Cachet panel.

[Image: screenshot]

Complete the following information:

  1. Select Generate Cachet ACH File Format to generate a separate direct deposit funding transaction for Cachet.

Note: Note: Cachet prefers the net collection method, so typically you would select this option. If needed, contact the PrismHR Customer Support Team to verify.

  1. Select Generate Cachet Net Collection Funding to use the net collection funding method.

  2. Enter the Net Collection Bank Account to which to post net fund debits. The offset account on this bank account should be the one to which to credit funds.

  3. Enter the number of days prior to any pay date that a funding transaction should take place in the Cachet Funding Transaction Days Prior to Pay Date field.

  4. Select Suppress Child Support EFT from Funding Debit Amount if your organization does not use Cachet to process child support transactions.

  5. Enter the Cachet File Name Prefix for the transaction file sent to Cachet.

  6. To override the days prior to pay date for one or more clients:

  1. — Enter the client ID that makes the ACH transaction in the Cachet Client ID field. The client’s doing-business-as name displays.
b. Enter the number of days for the client in the Override Days Prior Pay Date field.

Setting Up Wells Fargo Third Party Format

If you selected Wells Fargo for the Third Party Format, complete the fields in the Wells Fargo panel.

[Image: screenshot]

Complete the following information:

  1. Enter the Wells Fargo Control No assigned by Wells Fargo Bank.

  2. Enter the CEO Company ID assigned by Wells Fargo Bank.

Setting Up Reverse Wire Transfer Format

Performing a reverse wire transfer allows clients to determine the payment amount prior to posting payrolls, so the system places those funds into a file that is sent before payroll is completed/posted. (This ensures that the client has the funds before payroll is posted.)

Important! The reverse wire process does not work for internal processing. (System validation on the Reverse Wire Account field on the Account tab in the Client Details form will not allow users to make an entry in this field if the active client is set up for internal ACH processing on the System Parameters form.)

Note: You cannot make changes to a reverse wire payroll whose payment has been marked as received because the funds were already sent. (These payrolls display with green checkmarks, marking them as lockedPayment Received payrolls when viewing them in the SuperBatch and Process Payroll forms.)

The following diagram displays the reverse wire transfer process:

[Image: screenshot]

To set up a reverse wire transfer:

  1. Set up an ACH originator to use Reverse Wire Transfer by selecting the desired format in the Third Party Format panel on the ACH Originators form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Important! You must test the ISO file format with your banking institutions before processing a live file. Not all banks may accept this format, so you must complete testing before payroll runs using the ISO format.

  1. Enter the number of Days Before Invoice Date, which is the offset days used to calculate the effective date for a transaction. For example, if you enter -1 and then the effective date, the system sets the offset days to one day before the invoice date.

Note: Note the following:

  1. Associate a bank Account ID in the Bank Accounts form with the ACH originator from the previous steps. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Do not use a checking account the system uses to process employee direct deposits.

  1. Set up the client for reverse wire by setting the ACH status to Wire Transfer Client on the Billing tab in the Client Details form. (You must include the client bank account information.) For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Selecting the Transfer Type helps easily identify which funding is set up for the client. (This step is not required to produce a successful file.)

  1. On the client, associate the bank Account ID from the previous step with the Reverse Wire Account field on the Account tab in the Client Details form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Related Topics

Using ACH Network

Setting Up ACH Parameters for Bank Accounts

========================================================================

Audit

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Audit.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Audit.htm

Viewing the Audit Log

Note: Note: For security purposes, effective October 2019, Audit Log access must be manually added to any applicable user roles. If you need to add access to many roles at once, see Adding Bulk Form Access.

The Audit Log Display lists changes made to a form. Click a Log ID to see the details.

Note: The audit entry for deidentified employees displays the user ID and the IP address of the user who ran the deidentification process. (See Removing Inactive Customer Data for information about how to remove or deidentify customer data for clients or employees.)

Auditing is available for many forms in PrismHR.

Note: All dates and times in PrismHR are Central Time.

The ID for changes to EP are logged as Web User IP.

========================================================================

Maintaining Bank Accounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Bank_Accounts.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Bank_Accounts.htm

Maintaining Bank Accounts

Use the Bank Accounts form to maintain the information for the accounts at financial institutions used in PrismHR.

Entering Bank Account Information

Enter the basic information about the account in the Bank Accounts panel. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: The 00 Checking Account is a special purpose account, the master account for all transactions. Each file header shows the 00 Checking Account as the main file header, with the funds being transferred into the account from whatever checking account the individual ACH shows it is processed. This adds a level of abstraction to the process, but allows a single account to process all the ACH clearing with only summary transactions from each of the actual checking accounts.

To maintain account information:

  1. Enter or select the bank Account ID for this account. You can enter numeric or alphanumeric characters in this field, or a combination of both.

Note: If a bank Account ID has already been used to process a transaction, you cannot delete it when one or more of the following conditions exist:

  1. Enter a Reference for the name of the financial institution where this account is maintained, as well as any other information. For example, Payroll Cash Account at Fleet Bank.

  2. Enter the Bank Name.

  3. Enter the Bank Address, which is the street or mailing address.

  4. Enter the City, State & ZIP Code.

  5. Enter the Transit Number assigned to this financial institution. This number prints on checks drawn on this bank unless you enter a different number in Transit Number (Chks) below.

  6. Enter the client’s Account Number at this financial institution. This account is debited when an offsetting settlement entry is created.

  7. Enter the Fractional Transit number that appears on checks. This number is the same for all checks drawn on a unique checking account, typically in the format NN/NNN.

  8. Enter the Check Title.

  9. Enter the Transit Number (Chks) that print on checks drawn on this bank. If this field is left blank, PrismHR uses the Transit Number value.

  10. Select Use Positive Pay if this account uses Positive Pay Files. You must also define the layout using the Positive Pay Setup form (see Positive Pay Setup).

  11. Enter the Acct Sys ChkID Number. This is the code your accounting software associates with this account and PrismHR uses for reconciliations or receipts.

  12. Select One Garn/Pay Chk Cntr to use the same check number sequence for payroll, third party, and garnishment checks. Otherwise, the system uses separate counters for each type.

  13. The Next Check Number and Next Garnishment Number display. You cannot modify those values on this form, but the number can be modified using the Managing Next Number Control form.

  14. Enter or select the Offset Account ID for the offset settlement checking account. (Use the same ACH originator as this bank account.)

  15. Enter or select the Rebate Bill Code if this account belongs to the client. The system uses this code to credit the client for net checks that have been drafted.

  16. Enter the MICR Account Number that prints on the MICR line of checks.

  17. Enter or select the Employer ID who is the owner of the checking account, from a general ledger point of view.

  18. Select Inactive Account if this account is no longer used.

  19. Select the ACH Options for this account, if appropriate.

  20. Select Use for Garnishments Only to indicate that the account is used only for garnishment payments. This ensures that the account does not stop processing due to XMit Day/Time rules.

  21. In the Minimum ACH Window (Days) field, enter the minimum number of days prior to the pay date that your organization must process a batch in order for employees to receive direct deposits. This value overrides the global parameter.

  22. Enter the minimum number of days it takes to obtain ACH credit in the Min ACH Receipt Days field.

This value adjusts the G/L receipt date to correspond with your bank’s practices. It also ensures that if you use a negative ACH adjust date for cash receipts, this date is never earlier than the selection made here. If the cash receipt is earlier than the time indicated, the G/L effect adjusts to be this date. This does not change the actual ACH file. For example, enter 0 if you get credit for the same date you send, and enter 1 if you always get credit on the next day.

  1. Select Show in Cash Receipts if this account should be available for cash receipts.

  2. If applicable, enter the Max Void ACH Days, which is the number of banking days this account allows to pass from the Pay Date to Void Date. After that number of days, PrismHR displays warnings.

  3. Enter Post Cutoff Time for posting to begin on a payroll batch that uses this checking account.

  4. Enable Same Day Processing if the bank account is used for same day processing. (If you enable this field, the system translates this information to the ACH file.)

Note: Note the following:

  1. Categorize the bank Account Type ownership by selecting PEO Master, Client Owned, or Demo.

Setting Up Print Parameters

The Print Parameters panel controls how the check print number and signature printed on the check.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the Check Number Print Mask that determines the format of the check number on checks.

  2. Select mvQuery Check Printing to enable mvQuery PSE Check Printing.

  3. Enter the complete mvQuery Signature Filepath, for example, m:\signature.png. This is the location of the check signature file on the mvQuery Print Server.

  4. Enter the Bank Account Name, Bank Account Address, and City, State & ZIP Code for this account.

Setting Up ACH Processing Parameters

Use the fields in the ACH Setup panel if this bank account is used for ACH processing. The panel controls the setup of the Batch Header form. The fields that are available depend on whether your organization is using consolidated ACH file processing or standard file processing. Refer to the instructions that match the setup in your system.

Basic Consolidated Processing

When Consolidated ACH File Processing Used in System Parameters is set to Yes, the ACH Setup panel displays as shown below.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter or select the ACH Processor ID. See Using ACH Originators to learn about creating ACH processors.

  2. Enter the Company Name (Batch Header), which is the name of the client who owns this checking account. This name appears in positions 5–20 of the Company Batch Header Record.

  3. Enter the Company Identification# (Batch Header), which is the client identification number used only on the batch header. Typically, this consists of a 1 followed by the 9-digit EIN.

  4. Enter the Company Identification# (CCD Batch Header), which is an optional client identification number used on the CCD batch header. Typically, you enter a value only when advised to do so by your financial institution.

  5. Enter the Company Identification# (PPD Batch Header), which is an optional client identification number used on the PPD batch header. Typically, you enter a value only when advised to do so by your financial institution.

  6. Enter the Company Identification# (Offset), which is an identification number used on the offset detail form when this account is specified as an offset account.

  7. If the service bank requires you to provide a different account number for offset transactions, enter the Immediate Destination Identification # (Offset).

  8. Enter the Originating DFI Identification # assigned by the service bank. It is 8 characters and appears on the lines that begin with 52 and 82 in positions 80–87.

  9. Enter the PC File Name, which is an optional field used as the base name of files transferred to your computer. The system also appends the date and .txt extension to the end of the name you indicate in this field.

  10. Select Use Suspense Accounting if this bank account should use suspense accounting. When selected, ACH transactions are tracked in a “suspense” account and do not move to the cash account until the ACH batch file is created. That allows users to easily reconcile account balances based on transactions processed by the bank. See Suspense Accounts.

  11. Do not select Process As Wire (only for special File Formats) unless directed to do so by a PrismHR Customer Support Team representative. It is only for custom-designed file formats.

Other Processing

The Company setting uses ACH originators and generates consolidated ACH files sorted by company.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter or select the ACH Processor ID. See Using ACH Originators to learn about creating ACH processors.

  2. Enter the Immediate Destination Identification # that identifies the service bank as the destination of ACH input files.

  3. If the service bank requires you to provide a different account number for offset transactions, enter the Immediate Destination Identification # (Offset).

  4. Enter the Immediate Origin Identification # assigned by the service bank. In the 101 record, this occupies the 10 characters beginning at position 14. If you use headers, this is typically the account number, and could be longer than 10 characters.

  5. Enter the Company Identification# (Batch Header), which is the client identification number used only on the batch header. Typically, this consists of a 1 followed by the 9-digit EIN.

  6. Enter the Company Identification# (CCD Batch Header), which is an optional client identification number used on the CCD batch header. Typically, you enter a value only when advised to do so by your financial institution.

  7. Enter the Company Identification# (PPD Batch Header), which is an optional client identification number used on the PPD batch header. Typically, you enter a value only when advised to do so by your financial institution.

  8. Enter the Company Identification# (Offset), which is an identification number used on the offset detail form when this account is specified as an offset account.

  9. Enter the Company Name. This can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters, and appears in the 101 record starting at position 64.

  10. Enter the Company Name (Batch Header), which is the name of the client who owns this checking account. This name appears in positions 5–20 of the Company Batch Header Record.

  11. The Reference Code is optional; use it to refer to your input file for internal accounting purposes.

  12. Enter the Trace Number Prefix, which is the first 8 digits of the Trace Number entered in positions 80–94 of the Entry Detail Record. If this field is blank, PrismHR populates it with zeroes.

  13. Enter the Company Name (Batch Header), which is the name of the client who owns this checking account. This name appears in positions 5–20 of the Company Batch Header Record.

  14. If required, enter the ACH File Header Record(s), which is unique to the financial institution. This information is placed at the beginning of the ASCII file.

  15. Enter the full DOS File Path Name (Unix Host Only) to which to download the ACH files built for the checking account. Include the  (backslash) at the end of the path name.

  16. Enter the PC File Name, which is an optional field used as the base name of files transferred to your computer. The system also appends the date and .txt extension to the end of the name you indicate in this field.

  17. Enter the NACHA Directory Override File Name (NT Host Only), which is the file name used instead of a standard file name when PrismHR writes to the NACHA directory.

If your organization uses a bank script to transfer your ACH file to a financial institution that requires the use of a certain file name. If you enter an override file name in this field, the system will always use that file name when writing to the NACHA directory.

This process assumes that there will not already be a file by the same name in the directory when writing to the directory. If it finds an existing file, the system displays a message that gives the user the choice of whether to overwrite the existing file.

  1. Enter the destination ACH Bank Name used in the header record of the ACH file. If left blank, the system uses the Bank Name.

  2. Select Suppress EOT Character to suppress appending the end-of-transmission character (Char(26)) at the end of the ACH deposit file.

  3. Enter the Slash Replacement Character that PrismHR replaces with a slash when it builds the ACH file. For example, ^.

  4. Select Use Suspense Accounting if this bank account should use suspense accounting. When selected, ACH transactions are tracked in a “suspense” account and do not move to the cash account until the ACH batch file is created. That allows users to easily reconcile account balances based on transactions processed by the bank. See Suspense Accounts.

Related Topics

Suspense Accounts

Working with ACH Impounding

Setting General System Parameters

========================================================================

Suspense Accounts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Bank_Accounts_Suspense.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Bank_Accounts_Suspense.htm

Suspense Accounts

Rather than have ACH data update immediately against a cash account before it is transmitted to the bank, which can cause confusion when users attempt to reconcile the account, your organization might want to create a “suspense” account for any bank account that processes ACH transactions. Each voucher is posted in detail against the suspense account.

During ACH file creation, the total of the vouchers transmitted in a batch comes out of the suspense account and hits the cash account. This allows for easier reconciliation, as the ACH suspense account should be zero each day or reconcilable. It is easier to balance the bank’s daily reports because the totals in the cash account should match the amounts directly.

Bank Account Setup

Set up the bank account in PrismHR.

  1. Either create a new bank account or edit an existing one; see Maintaining Bank Accounts.

  2. Select the Use Suspense Accounting option in the ACH Setup panel.

G/L Template Setup

Enter the suspense G/L accounts for the account in the appropriate G/L template.

  1. Open G/L Setup Maintenance (found in the Back Office menu under System|Change).

  2. Enter the G/L Template.

  3. From the G/L Type drop-down, select Checking Accounts. The form lists each Checking Account and Description in the system.

  4. For the accounts that indicate they use a suspense account, enter the Suspense GL Account.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Save.

Voucher Examples

The suspense G/L account displays in the Accounting tab of each ACH Employee Voucher.

[Image: screenshot]

The standard G/L account displays in the Accounting tab of vouchers for any paper checks.

[Image: screenshot]

Once your organization posts the ACH batch, the money moves from the suspense account to the cash account. The Account Distribution on the vouchers does not change.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Bank Accounts

========================================================================

Bank Routing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Bank_Routing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Bank_Routing.htm

Bank Routing

Use the Bank Routing form to establish bank routing and contact information, as well as how to support debit card transactions.

  1. Enter the Routing Code for the financial institution.

  2. Enter the Bank Name.

  3. Enter the Bank City, State, and ZIP Code.

  4. Enter the Bank Phone Number.

  5. If your organization has enabled the pay card custom feature for any client, then the PayCard (Automove) option displays. Use this to indicate that the account is for pay cards that can be replaced automatically by a checking account. See Setting Up Pay Cards and Direct Deposit for details on this feature.

  6. Select Debit Card Update if this routing code supports debit cards and requires an update to the issuer for use of a new card.

  7. If you track debit card updates, the Debit Card Track option displays. Select this option if this financial institution tracks a debit card ID. The system then requests the debit card ID at ACH entry.

  8. Click Save.

========================================================================

Setting Benefit Network Locations

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Benefit_Network_Locations.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Benefit_Network_Locations.htm

Setting Benefit Network Locations

Use the Network Zip Codes form, accessed by selecting Network ZIP Codes in the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

, to enter locations by ZIP code for benefit plans that have a network assigned. This form only displays in the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

when the Collect Network Information option in the Other Processing Parameters panel is selected.

You can also import multiple locations using the Import Network ZIP Codes import template. To quickly access this import template, select Import Network ZIP Codes. For more information, see Importing Network ZIP Codes.

To set benefit network locations:

  1. On the Actions menu, click Network Zip Codes.

Use this option — To define this

Benefit Plan ID — This field is read only. This field auto populated with the benefit plan ID that was entered on the Group Benefit Plans form.

Network ID — The ID of the network to which the plan is assigned. This is required. > Note: Note: When a benefit plan is set up to use networks (for billing, premium or both) and a network is marked as Inactive, the inactive network now displays in the Network ID dropdown with ‘(Inactive)’ next to it. All inactive networks filter to the bottom of the list in the order that they appear on the networks grid. You cannot modify or add new rates for Inactive networks. However, you can view existing rates for Inactive networks. When an inactive network is selected, the table is disabled. The Save and Delete buttons are also disabled. A warning message displays stating The selected network is inactive. No modifications can be made. Click the OK button to acknowledge the message.

ZIP Codes — The five-digit ZIP code where this benefit plan is offered. The City & State display if the ZIP code exists in the system. You can enter multiple ZIP Codes as needed by clicking + to add additional rows. You can also click the Zip Code hyperlink and select the ZIP Codes from the Select ZIP Codes selector that displays. On this selector, you can filter the ZIP Codes according to State by using the State drop-down filter.

  1. Click Save.

Updating ZIP Codes

All ZIP codes must first be entered at the system-level to be attached to a benefit plan. ZIP code records that are in the system always display City & State information in the table. If city and state information does not display, the ZIP code record does not exist at the system-level.

It is recommended that you review and update all ZIP code records in the Zip Codes form. When a ZIP code record is in the system, you can attach it to a benefit plan. For more information, see Setting Up Zip Codes.

========================================================================

Using Billing Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Codes.htm

Using Billing Codes

Use the Billing Codes form to define billing entry and accounting information.

There are certain bill codes that PrismHR requires, and rules for others. Here is a list of codes used as system defaults and their usage:

All other codes are added to the end of the list at bill time, such as benefits and deductions.

Sales tax codes are formatted TAX{xx}, where xx is the two-character state code, for example, TAXOH for Ohio state tax.

TB{BenefitPlanID} is the first bill code checked during the termination of an employee’s benefits. For example, a benefit plan MEDABC would look for the bill code TBMEDABC. If present, the system uses that, otherwise the system looks for a code TEBA (terminated employee benefit acceleration). This method gives the ability to create accounting detail where it is warranted while lumping smaller plans into one TEBA bucket.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Open the Billing Codes form and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Bill Code Enter or select the Bill Code that describes a billing entry. If you select this field, a selector form displays where you can search for a specific bill code or its description or select a code from the list that displays. When this form opens, the bill code, description, and obsolete date display. To filter the search to display only Obsolete codes, select Yes in the Obsolete field (the default is No). (Note: Codes with an obsolete date earlier than the current date do not display in the selector form.) To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters.
Bill Description Enter a Bill Description of this Bill Code. The description displays on invoices if the bill format does not normally include this bill code. It does not display on normal invoices if the billing code is included in the usual invoice format.
Profitability Rpt Column Select the Profitability Rpt Column of the report in which to include this billing code.
Annualized on Profit Select Annualized on Profit to annualize the bill code for the profitability report.
Invoice Sales Rpt Column Select the Invoice Sales Rpt Column of the Invoice Sales report in which to include this billing code.
Invoice Revenue Analysis Rpt Select the Invoice Revenue Analysis Rpt column of the Invoice Revenue Analysis report in which to include this billing code.
TX Franchise Rpt Accumulator Select the TX Franchise Rpt Accumulator to print on the Texas Franchise Report. The system adds any amount billed to this code to that accumulator.
Obsolete Date Enter the Obsolete Date when this billing code becomes obsolete, if ever.
Memo Client Acct Only Select Memo Client Acct Only if this bill code should not display in the actual invoice, but remain part of the client accounting system. Note: The Memo Client Acct Only field setting is only available for retirement 401(k) match reporting through PEO accounting. Selecting this option causes the client accounting record to be out of balance by the amount of the memo entries unless the client accounting records include a memo offset line. To do this, your organization must have a memo offset set up in PEO Client Accounting as an other bill code. The breakdown of these non-billed entries can be helpful on a retirement plan with a match that your organization does not collect.
Sales Tax Enter each Sales Tax state code where taxes apply to this billing code. If this is a state-based sales tax billing code, do not enter any states in the table.
Bill Redirect Code/Bill Redirect Clent To redirect billing: \ a. \ Enter the Bill Redirect Code to redirect this billing code based on a Redirection Plan. \ \ — \ — \ \ b. \ Enter the Bill Redirect Client against which this plan should redirect this billing code. \ \ — \ — \
a. Enter the Bill Redirect Code to redirect this billing code based on a Redirection Plan.
b. Enter the Bill Redirect Client against which this plan should redirect this billing code.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Working with PEO Client Accounting

========================================================================

Establishing Billing Events

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Events.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Events.htm

Establishing Billing Events

You can use the Billing Events form to establish events to bill, or override prices for various items.

There are certain events that PrismHR requires, and rules for others. Here is a list of codes used as system defaults and their usage:

Note: Note: You can override billing event rates for specific clients using the Billing tab on the Client Details form.

Creating a Billing Event

You can use the Billing Events panel to establish an event to bill.

[Image: screenshot]

To create a billing event, do the following:

  1. Enter or select a Bill Event Code that represents the reason for a billing item. If you select this field, a selector form displays where you can search for a specific bill event code or its description or select a code from the list that displays. When this form opens, the bill event code, description, and obsolete date display.

To filter the search to display only Obsolete codes, select Yes in the Obsolete field (the default is No). (Note: Codes with an obsolete date earlier than the current date do not display in the selector form.)

To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters.

  1. Enter a Description of the billing event.

  2. Enter the Bill Code related to this billing event.

  3. Select Show Detailed if you want to display the details of this billing event on an invoice.

  4. If you selected Show Detailed in the previous step, the Display Duplicate Detail Lines on Invoices field now displays.

If your organization does not use the INVDUPEDETAIL feature code, you can select this option to only display duplicate detail line items associated with this billing event. Please note that this is a system-level setting and will take effect for any client in your system that is billed under this billing event code.

Note: Note: Your profits are the difference between the Standard Price billed to your client and the Standard Cost to your organization.

  1. Enter the Standard Price if the event has a standard amount to bill for this billing event.

  2. Enter the Bill Pend Std Cost if there is a standard cost associated with this billing event. For example, 2nd Day Air could have a standard cost of $9.00.

  3. Enter the Obsolete Date when this billing event is no longer valid.

  4. Enter the desired template combination in the Comment Template text box. This text box is available only for the following Third Party Sick Bill Event Codes:

Establishing Price Overrides

You can use the Price Overrides panel to establish prices that override the standard price of this billing event.

[Image: screenshot]

To establish override prices, do the following:

  1. For each cost center that requires a different standard price from the default:
a. Enter the Cost Center ID.
b. Enter the Override Rate to use for the cost center.
— —
  1. — Enter the Bill Pend Cost to charged against this override. A negative number represents a decrease in costs.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Establishing Billing Formats

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Formats.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Formats.htm

Establishing Billing Formats

The Billing Formats form establishes bill formats/invoices that you can use for one or more clients.

Note: Note: If a user creates a new billing code, you must define a bill format that links to that code, or else it displays as an “other” line on the invoice.

To set up a billing format:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Billing Formats.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

Field Description
Format Specifies the Billing Format ID.
Format Description A description that indicates how this billing format is used. If the format is specific to one client, indicate that in the description.
Invoice Print Format Format for printing invoices. For example, STACK Print 3Col by Break Stacked Version (WCSort on Template!). > Note: Note the following: - The STACK Print 3Col by Break Stacked Version (WCSort on Template!) option is only valid in PrismHR Core and will not display in Employee Portal (EP). - The STDNOBANK Standard Invoice with suppressed banking info option hides ACH/banking account information (that is, the system removes the bank account and all ACH Payment record data from the on-screen invoice display and the invoice’s PDF output) when the client is using any of the Electronic Billing options on the Billing tab in the Client Details form. Note: This format is only valid in PrismHR Core and will not display in Employee Portal (EP).
  1. Click Save in the Billing Formats form.

Note: Note: You can copy data by selecting the Copy option from the Actions menu; however, do not use spaces in the Copy To field (an error message will display).

Adding Billing Codes to a New Line Item

This section describes how to add billing codes to new line items on a billing format.

To add billing codes to a new line item:

  1. Select an existing bill format. The form is populated with the billing format settings and existing line items for this format.

  2. Click + to add a new line item. A new row appears at the bottom of the multi-value grid (MVG). [Image: line items, along with company account and the view and edit icons]

  3. Enter a Line Description. When you click outside that field, the View and Edit icons appear.

  4. Click the Edit icon [Image: screenshot] . The Bill Codes selector appears.

  5. Select a code from the list. The view switches to the Bill Codes for MVG with that code displayed in the first row.

Note: Note: You can enter additional rows either by entering codes manually or by using the search link in the Bill Code header. The form should not insert any blank rows.

  1. Click Save to save that code to the line item. The system returns to Billing Formats.

  2. Click View for the new line item to confirm that the billing code was added. For example, Auto401k for NEW. [Image: Bill Code and Description]

  3. Click Save on the main Billing Formats form to commit these changes to your billing format.

Related Topic

Stack Invoice with Workers’ Comp Broken Out

========================================================================

Rate Groups

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Rate_Groups.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Rate_Groups.htm

Rate Groups

Use the Rate Groups form to maintain rate group codes. The system uses these codes to manage billing for benefit plans.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Rate Group Codes can contain any alphanumeric characters except 0. They also cannot contain a period (.).

To set up a rate group:

  1. Enter the Rate Group code.

  2. Enter a description of the rate group in the Group Name field.

  3. Select Inactive if this rate group is not currently used in PrismHR.

  4. Select Premium Rate Group to use this rate group for premiums instead of billing.

  5. Click Save.

When you select an existing Rate Group and save the form, the system checks for the following validations for the Premium Rate Group checkbox:

Note: Note: If any Billing Rate or Premium Rate is found in any of the above mentioned validation, an error message stating, Rates are currently associated with this Rate Group. Changes to the ‘Premium Rate Group’ are not allowed. is displayed.

========================================================================

Defining Methods for Billing Clients

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Templates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Billing_Templates.htm

Defining Methods for Billing Clients

Use the Billing Templates form to define methods for billing clients.

Establishing Parameters Required to Bill Clients

The Billing Templates panel establishes the parameters required to bill a client for services.

Example of the Billing Templates form (PEO type)

[Image: screenshot]

Example of the Billing Templates form (ASO type)

[Image: screenshot]

To configure billing templates:

  1. Enter the Template ID used to access this billing template.

  2. From the Template Type list, select whether this template applies to PEOs or ASOs. Selecting one of these options does the following:

  1. Enter a Template Description.

  2. Select Bundled if this is a bundled billing template. The client is billed at a fixed rate and the Admin fee is a squeezed computation.

Note: You cannot select the Default Rates check box unless you also select the Bundled check box.

  1. Select Default Rates to use the standard default rate.

  2. Select the Based On method, which determines whether to base the Admin fee on Units or Wages. If you select Units, you must also complete the Bundled Unit Based Maintenance panel.

  3. Select Workers’ Comp Sort if the invoice should sort and break on Workers’ Compensation codes. The system applies this sort after other sorts for the stack invoice only.

Other sorts are set at the client level (by department, division, location, and so on). The stack invoice formats the invoice differently, presenting hours, wages, and extensions—usually for bundled billing.

  1. Select the service types and matching G/L templates:
  1. Enter the billing template expiration date in the Expires On field, if any. After this date, PrismHR will not allow your organization to process payrolls using this template until it is updated.

  2. Select the Replaced By template, which is the template that replaces this one after the expiration date in the Expired On field.

  3. Select the check boxes as appropriate. (Fewer check boxes are available for ASO templates than for PEO templates.)

For Workers’ Comp (if Hourly), this determines whether to add hourly based workers’ compensation to each billing item.

Note: Note: Use the Special FUTA Rate only as an override; do not use it for all clients. If the federal government changed FUTA to be 0.85% and you used this field to set the FUTA rate for each client, you would have to change it for every client.

  1. If appropriate, enter the Special FUTA Rate as a percentage.

  2. Select Skip Employee Fees for New Clients if you will not charge the client for new hires and terminated employees during the first 30 days of service.

  3. Complete the additional sections below, as needed. When finished, click Save.

Maintaining Bill Rates and Administration Fees

If this is a bundled billing template that uses default rates, use the Bundled Rate Maintenance panel to maintain the bill rates and administrative fees.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: If the Default Rate is greater than zero, the system uses it for any Workers’ Compensation code not listed in the table. If there is a value in this field and no value in the W/C Code field, there may be billing errors; use the Default Rate with care. If you leave the Default Rate blank, users entering data for clients with this billing template see messages that the listed Workers’ Compensation code does not have a billing amount. The system continues to display this message until you update the bill template for the code or enter a default amount.

Field Name Description
Default Rate Enter the Default Rate to use for all clients’ Workers’ Compensation rates not defined in the table. This value is useful for “one-price-fits-all” clients.
W/C Code Grid For each Workers’ Compensation code that requires a different rate: - Enter the W/C Code. The Class Description displays. - Enter the Min Admin Fee amount to use. This overrides any amount entered on the client record, except for special rates. The system discounts the minimum fee by the special discount rate. - Enter the WC Def Bill Rate, which is the default billing rate for the W/C Code.

If this is a bundled billing template with rates based on units, use the Bundled Unit Based Maintenance panel to select the pay codes that control the unit-based Admin fee.

Enter all Pay Codes to include in the Admin fee computation.

[Image: screenshot]

Defining Benefits Included in Administration Fees

Use the Benefits Included panel to define the benefits included in the Admin fee.

[Image: screenshot]

For each benefit:

  1. Enter any Included Benefits for this billing template’s Admin fees.

  2. Indicate whether the benefit plan is Included on Arrears:

  1. Select Retirement Match Included to include the match amounts in the billing template amount.

Including Other Taxes

Use the Other Tax Code Billing Options panel to include other taxes in the billing template.

[Image: screenshot]

To include other taxes:

  1. Enter each Tax Code to include.

  2. Indicate whether to Add the tax code to the Comp rates.

Note: Note: On bundled billing, the rate decreases when the limit is met for items that are limited. It decreases by the amount of the client’s bill rate of the item.

  1. Indicate whether to stop at high Limit if this tax code stops at prescribed limits.

Note: You cannot set the Limit or Discount Shelter for an ASO billing Template Type to Yes. (An error message displays when you click Save.)

  1. Indicate whether the billing template includes Discount Shelter limits.

  2. Enter the Override Wage Base if there is a wage base override for this tax code. Leave this field blank if the standard wage base applies.

Entering Overrides by State

Use the SUI Billing Wage Base Overrides panel to enter overrides by state.

[Image: screenshot]

To enter overrides by state:

  1. Enter each State Code. The State Name populates.

  2. Enter the taxable Wage Base Override the system should use for SUTA billing calculations for the state.

  3. Enter the overriding FUTA Bill Rate for the state. This overrides the Special FUTA Rate, if any.

Classifying Expense Reimbursement Pay Codes

Use the Taxable Expense panel to classify any expense reimbursement pay codes as taxable pay codes for the purposes of tax billing.

Select each Taxable Expense Reimbursement Pay Code. The Description populates.

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Changing Benefit Groups for Multiple Employees

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Bulk-Change-Benefit-Group.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Bulk-Change-Benefit-Group.htm

Changing Benefit Groups for Multiple Employees

To change the benefit group for multiple employees at one time, use the Bulk Change Benefit Group form.

Note: Note: You must create benefit groups at the client level before you can move employees to another benefit group.

To change benefit groups for multiple employees:

  1. On the CLIENT menu, select Client|Action > Bulk Change Benefit Group. The Bulk Change Benefit Group form opens.

  2. To improve the response time for loading results, you can filter the results by benefit group. Click Continue.

To load all results without filtering, do not select a benefit group and click Continue. The load time is longer than normal.

Column — Description

Client ID — The unique identifier for the client.

Employee ID — The unique identifier for the employee.

Employee Name — The name of the employee.

Benefit Group — The benefit group the employee is assigned.

Enrollment Status — A unique code describing the enrollment status. For example, A for active. This value is defined on the Employee Statuses form.

Enrollment Type — A unique code describing the enrollment type. For example, FT for full-time. This value is defined on the Employee Types form.

Position — A unique code describing the position. For example, OPER for operator. This value is defined on the Positions form.

Location — A unique code describing the worksite location. For example, MA for Massachusetts. This value is defined on the Worksite Locations form.

Division — A unique code describing the division. For example, 1 for the First Division. This value is defined on the Divisions form.

Department — A unique code describing the department. For example, 300 for Accounting. This value is defined on the Departments form.

  1. Using the checkmarks, hold the CTRL key and select multiple employees from the list. The employees must be in the same benefit group.

  2. Click Change Benefit Group. The Change Benefit Group dialog box displays.

  3. In Select benefit group, select the benefit group to move the selected employees. The shown benefit groups are existing benefit groups for the client.

  4. In Effective Date, select the date for the change to take effect.

  5. Click Continue. To view a report of the changes, click View Report. You can view and download the report at the time you make changes. You cannot access the report after viewing it the first time. To confirm and close the dialog box, click Done.

========================================================================

Change Reason History- State Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Change-Reason-History-State_Rules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Change-Reason-History-State_Rules.htm

Change Reason History- State Rules

Use this form to get the change reason history for the State Rules form.

Note: Note: This form will be able to capture the change reason history only if the field named Require change reason on critical forms on the System Parameters form is either selected as Optional (and the user has entered a reason for record update) or Required. When you make any change to the State Rules form, you will be presented with the following dialog box. Once you record the reason for the change herein, the same will be presented in the Change Reason History form.

[Image: screenshot]

To access the form, under the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

on the State Rules form, click Change Reason History.

On this form the following two fields are available:

Click Close to close this form and return to the base form.

========================================================================

Clearing Backup Account Assignments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Clear_All_Backup_Account_Assignments.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Clear_All_Backup_Account_Assignments.htm

Clearing Backup Account Assignments

Use the Clear All Backup Account Assignments form to clear all backup account assignments regardless of which clients are listed in the import file.

Important! This process cannot be reverted.

Note: This form is only available for service providers.

To clear all backup account assignments:

  1. Click Back Office and select System Parameters under System|Change.

  2. Click Process. A message displays, “This will clear all Backup Account Assignments for ALL Clients. Do you wish to continue?” Click Yes to continue.

  3. The clearing process runs. A message displays indicating that all backup account assignments for all clients have been cleared. Click OK.

Note: Note: The backup account assignments no longer display when you select Backup Assignments on the Account tab in the Client Details form. Use the Data Import Tool to import new backup account assignments.

========================================================================

Attaching Files to Client Records

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Client-Documents.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Client-Documents.htm

Attaching Files to Client Records

Use the Client Documents form to attach files to the client record and open any files attached to it. To access the form, open the Actions menu in Client Details select Documents.

To upload a document:

  1. Click Load a Document.

  2. In the Upload a File window, click Choose File.

  3. Navigate to the file that you want to upload, and click Open.

  4. In the Upload a File window, click Submit.

  5. In the successful upload message, click Close.

  6. On the Confirm Document form, Document Name populates with the file name.

  7. To enter any document notes, use the Document Notes option.

  8. Click Accept. The Client Documents form displays.

For a document in the list:

========================================================================

Defining Client Access Groups

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Access_Groups.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Access_Groups.htm

Defining Client Access Groups

Client access groups define the clients, cost centers, and sub cost centers a user can access. Use the Client Access Groups form to manage user access to clients, cost centers, and sub cost centers. Access this form in the Back Office menu under System|Change.

Assign a client access group to any service provider in the system. After entering initial setup information (name and ID), you can restrict clients in one of several ways.

Permit and restrict user access to these entities using the panels on this form. Different panels display for different Assignment Method values. Use the Assignment Method panels and procedure that most closely matches your organization’s requirements. For example, if Grant Access to all Clients with exceptions is selected, Restricted Clients, Restricted Cost Centers, and Restricted Sub Cost Centers are visible.

Note: Note: The system includes a feature for grouping clients into cost centers and sub cost centers. For example, you can have one cost center and sub cost center for clients in the Northeast and another for clients in the South. Use these groupings to control client access at a high level.

To do this Perform these steps
Set up a client access group You must define basic information about the group before you can add clients, cost centers, and sub cost centers to a client access group. When you set up PrismHR for the first time, you need to specify a value in the Assignment Method field. After users and client companies are created, return to this screen to set up further restrictions. 1. Enter a Group ID. 2. Enter a descriptive Group Name. 3. Select the Assignment Method to define the group. Different panels display based on the Assignment Method that is selected.
  1. Enter a Group ID.
  2. Enter a descriptive Group Name.
  3. Select the Assignment Method to define the group. Different panels display based on the Assignment Method that is selected. | Grant access to all clients, cost centers, and sub cost centers You can create a client access group with no restrictions, though there is no specific Assignment Method for this option. | - Select Grant access to all Clients with exceptions in the Assignment Method field. Do not assign any clients, cost centers, or sub cost centers. | | Restrict access to clients and cost centers | Use the Restricted Clients and Restricted Cost Centers panels to specify clients that a user cannot access. To restrict access to specified clients and cost centers: 1. Select Grant access to all Clients with exceptions in the Assignment Method field. 2. Enter each Client ID in the Restricted Clients panel. The Client Name displays. 3. Enter each Cost Center ID in the Restricted Cost Centers panel. The Cost Center Name displays. |
  4. Select Grant access to all Clients with exceptions in the Assignment Method field.
  5. Enter each Client ID in the Restricted Clients panel. The Client Name displays.
  6. Enter each Cost Center ID in the Restricted Cost Centers panel. The Cost Center Name displays. | Grant access to specified clients Use the Authorized Clients panel to specify clients that a user can access. The system automatically restricts access to all other clients. | To grant access to specified clients: 1. Select Grant access to specified Clients in the Assignment Method field. 2. Enter each Client ID in the Authorized Clients panel. The Client Name displays. |
  7. Select Grant access to specified Clients in the Assignment Method field.
  8. Enter each Client ID in the Authorized Clients panel. The Client Name displays. | Grant access to specified cost centers and sub cost centers Use the Authorized Cost Center panel to specify cost centers and sub cost centers that a user can access. The system automatically restricts access to all other cost centers and sub cost centers. | To grant access to specified cost centers and sub cost centers: 1. Select Grant access to specified Cost Centers in the Assignment Method field. 2. Enter each Cost Center and Sub Cost Center in the Authorized Cost Center panel. The Cost Center Name and Sub Cost Center Name displays. |
  9. Select Grant access to specified Cost Centers in the Assignment Method field.
  10. Enter each Cost Center and Sub Cost Center in the Authorized Cost Center panel. The Cost Center Name and Sub Cost Center Name displays. | Grant Security Access by Client Assignments Administrators can assign security access to Client Access Groups according to the client assignments made on the Company Account Form. | Select Grant Security Access by Client Assignments in the Assignment Method field to grant the users specified in the Account Assignments fields on the Company Accounts form. | | View and edit existing groups You can view and edit existing client access group data at the same time. | To view an existing client access group: - Enter the Group ID and tab into the next field. The group data populates on the form. If you don’t know the ID, click Group ID to view a complete list. | | Assign a client access group to a user | - Once you create one or more client access groups, you must assign one to every new user. Assign client access groups on the Users form with the Client Access Group field. This is a required step during new user creation. You can also use this field to assign a new client access group to a user. | ========================================================================

Creating Client Categories

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Categories.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Categories.htm

Creating Client Categories

Group and sort companies with Client Category Codes.

To create a new client category code:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select Client Categories under System|Change.

  3. Enter a Category Code that represents a client category (for example, RET or CON).

  4. Enter a Category Description (for example, Retail or Construction).

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Creating or deleting a Client Status

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Status_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Status_Codes.htm

Creating or deleting a Client Status

Use this form to create or delete a client status.

To create or delete a client status:

  1. Click Back Office. Under System|Change, click Client Statuses.

  2. Status Code - Enter an alphabet from one of the following options or click the Status Code link and select an existing status code from the Select Client Status dialog box. To create a new status code, enter the appropriate option.

  1. Status - The status description auto-populates for existing status codes or enter the appropriate one from above while creating a new status code.

  2. Status Class - The status class auto-populates for existing status codes or select the appropriate one from the following drop-down while creating a new status code:

  1. Click Save to save the changes.

  2. Click Delete to delete an existing status code.

  3. Click Cancel to clear the form at any time.

========================================================================

Establishing Reason Codes for Client Terminations

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Term_Reasons.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Client_Term_Reasons.htm

Establishing Reason Codes for Client Terminations

You can establish a reason code when terminating a client using the Client Term Reasons form.

To establish a reason code when terminating a client:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select Client Term Reasons under System|Change.

  3. Enter or select a Reason Code for terminating a client. If you are creating a new code, enter something brief but meaningful.

  4. Enter a Reason Description for terminating a client. This is the full description.

  5. Select a Valid Status Uses option for terminated clients, inactivated clients, or both.

  6. Enter the Obsolete Date when this code is no longer used.

  7. Click Save.

========================================================================

Administering PTG Commission Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Commission_Period_Lookback.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Commission_Period_Lookback.htm

Administering PTG Commission Types

Use the Commission Period Look-back form to administer Percent Target Amount (PTG) commission types. This form streamlines the process of identifying active clients who had payrolls processed during a specified look-back period but have no corresponding invoice data in a target period and automatically generates the invoice records needed to accurately apply PTG commissions. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To administer PTG commission types and generate invoice records:

  1. Enter or select a mandatory Begin Date and an End Date in the Look Back Period panel.

Note: You cannot enter Look Back Period dates or Target Period dates that contain a gap greater than one year.

  1. Enter or select a mandatory Begin Date and an End Date in the Target Period panel.

  2. Enable Active Clients (only) to limit the assessment to active clients only.

  3. Click Run Process. (The system only enables the Run Process button after completing all date fields.) A message displays, “Are you sure you wish to start the Look-back process at this time?” Click Yes to continue.

  4. A progress report displays on-screen. Click Report to view the report details or Close to return to the Commission Period Look-back form.

  5. The system displays a printable/downloadable report titled Commission Period Look-back Report, which lists all invoices created during this process. (Otherwise, a message displays, “No invoices were Created.”) For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following when using the Commission Period Look-back form:

========================================================================

Creating Commission Structures

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Commission_Plans.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Commission_Plans.htm

Creating Commission Structures

Create complex commission structures that your organization can assign to salespeople at the client level with the Commission Plan Maintenance form.

You can use a commission plan as a template. Organizations that use commissions often have a standard commission program for either all or a subset of its salespeople. Assigning a commission plan code to a salesperson rather than entering individual commission structures saves effort.

Note: After creating a commission plan at the client level, if you make updates to that plan and click Save, the system cannot apply those updates. For example, if you create commission plan A and apply it to client 123, then update commission plan A and save the updates the system displays an error message, “This plan is assigned to a client and changes cannot be made. Either unassign from all clients to make changes or create a new plan.” Click OK to continue.

In addition, existing commission plans already in use at the client level cannot be deleted. For example, if you click the Delete button for a client-level plan and then select Yes an error message displays, “This plan is in use and cannot be deleted.” Click OK to continue.

To create a commission structure, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From Operations|Change, select Commission Plan Maintenance.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field Name Description
Commission Plan ID Select a plan ID that represents the commission plan.
Commission Plan Name Enter a name that describes the plan.
Commission Plan Active Select if this commission plan is in use. If you deselect this option, it does not affect currently assigned plans, but it warns users when they review commissions.
Based On Select a value on which to base the commission line. - Gross Wages: Total gross wages of the client payroll invoice. - Admin Fees: Total amount of administrative fees on the client payroll invoice. - Benefit Commission Type: Benefits-based commission for a specific benefit type. You must enter the benefit type code in the Based On Item field. - Benefit Commission Percentage: Percentage based on the benefit list. You must enter the specific group benefit plan ID in the Based On Item field. - Workers Compensation: Total amount of workers’ compensation billed to the client for the payroll period. - Workers Compensation Profit: Checks bill code 005 and computes the profit, and also checks for information entered on losses. - Average Number Lives: Average number of active employees during the commission cycle. - Gross Profit: Sales items minus the direct cost items. The value is shown on the Profitability Report in the backend system. - Tax Profit (001/002/003/004): Sales of tax-based items (FUTA, SUTA, and FICA, as associated with the listed tax bill classes) minus the cost for those tax items. Tax profit is rarely used for commissions because when not passing shelter credits it can often show a loss for the month. - Percent of Bill Code: Fixed percentage for the amount charged on a specific bill code. Enter that in the Based On Item field. - Profits to Admin [Enter Bill Code in Based On]: The system uses the specified Bill Code and then subtracts the cost associated with that Bill Code. That amount (profit or loss) is used in the percent computation. For example, if you choose Bill Code 004 (SUTA) and specify 5% of profits, and there was $1000 in sales and $960 in costs, the payout would be $2.00 ($40.00 x 0.05). - Fixed Per Paid EE [PayFrequency in Based On if needed]: Fixed amount per paid employee. Specify a pay frequency if appropriate (see Based On Item description).
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Setting Commission Levels

Assigning a Benefit Commission Code

Grouping Commissions

Computing Commissions

========================================================================

Globally Reviewing Pending Payroll Voucher Reversals

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Confirm_Pending_Reversal_Global.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Confirm_Pending_Reversal_Global.htm

Globally Reviewing Pending Payroll Voucher Reversals

You can globally review pending payroll voucher reversals for multiple employees using a range of start and end dates on the Confirm Pending Reversal Global form. You can then confirm the reversal of pending payroll vouchers by selecting each link that displays in the results. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

To globally review and then individually confirm payroll voucher reversals:

  1. Click Back Office [Image: screenshot] .

  2. From System|Action, select Confirm Pending Reversal Global.

  3. Obtain a list of employees with a pending voucher reversal by date range:

a. Enter or select the start date in the Date Submitted Start field.
b. Enter or select the end date in the Date Submitted End field.
— —
  1. Select Find Employees. A list of those employees with a pending voucher reversal for that date range displays.

Note: You can sort the results by clicking the column headers in the list of pending reversals. Also, select Download Report to open the displayed information in CSV format.

  1. Select the Process ID link. The Employee Payroll Voucher Reversal form displays.

  2. A message displays, “Confirm processing of Reversal?” Click Yes to process the reversal.

  3. Click Save.

========================================================================

Managing Contact Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Contact_Types.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Contact_Types.htm

Managing Contact Types

You can manage contact types using the Contact Types form.

To manage a contact type, do the following:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Contact Types. The Contact Types form displays.

  3. Complete the fields as required.

Field Description
Contact Type Enter or select an ID for the contact type. For example, GEN for General Manager.
Description Enter a description. For example, Payroll Only.
Owner Class Select this field if this contact type is for a company owner.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Using Corporate/Staffing Accounting

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Corporate_Accounting.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Corporate_Accounting.htm

Using Corporate/Staffing Accounting

Use the Corporate/Staffing Accounting form to select the accounts to use. For example, the following fields display when you select the accounts to use for Deduction Codes. (The fields that display in this form depend upon the particular account you need to maintain.)

Note: Note: This only applies if your organization is set to use PrismHR as a corporate/staffing product.

To select the accounts to use, complete the fields that display in this form. For example, the following fields must be completed for Deduction Codes:

  1. In the Credit Account field, enter the account to credit with the amount of the deduction. This is usually an accrued liability account.

An amount deducted from an employee’s pay is usually payable to a third party. For example, if deducted as part of a payroll savings plan, the employer is responsible for depositing the deduction to each employee’s savings account. The payroll is a liability on the part of the employer. The account here is credited with any amount deducted from any employee’s pay using the deduction code.

  1. In the Debit Arrears field, enter the G/L account to debit (receivable account for arrearage) with any deduction amount due from an employee that goes into arrears.

  2. In the Credit Arrears field, enter the G/L account to credit when the employee pays the amount held in arrears.

Parent Topic

Maintaining Global Deduction Codes

========================================================================

Managing Cost Centers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Cost_Center.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Cost_Center.htm

Managing Cost Centers

Manage cost centers and sub-cost centers with the Cost Centers form. Your organization can use cost centers and sub-cost centers to track different things. For example, some organizations use these to track sales offices, and assign each of their clients to their associated office. Sub-cost centers are not linked to a specific cost center, allowing your organization more flexibility in using this feature.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Cost Centers.

  3. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Cost Center ID — Enter an ID or click this field to search for existing cost centers. - For new cost centers, enter text that is brief but descriptive, such as NE for Northeast. - When searching for an existing cost center, in the Search Cost Centers dialog, select a cost center from the list or enter the Cost Center ID or Cost Center Name in the Refine Search section, then click Refine.

Cost Center Name — Name for the cost center.

Sub-Cost Center — Select if this is a sub-cost center. Note: You can add an Invoice Logo override to a sub-cost center using the Report Print Options form. (See Configuring an Invoice Logo Override for Sub-Cost Centers.)

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Using Custom Feature Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Custom_Feature_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Custom_Feature_Codes.htm

Using Custom Feature Codes

Your organization can specify custom feature codes in PrismHR at the system level to customize its behavior for all clients. These are some of the most common feature codes available for you to use; do not implement other custom feature codes unless instructed to do so by the PrismHR Customer Support Team.

Custom Feature Code Type Category Short Description
2019STATUSES Controls when access to 2019 W-4 filing statuses is removed/displayed since users might delay converting to the new form and need to continue accessing these older records. If you activate the 2019STATUSES custom feature code, the following options display in the Federal Tax Filing field on the HR\ Change\ Employee Tax form: - Single or Married, but withhold at higher Single rate - Married If you remove this custom feature code, these options no longer display. However, any employees with one of these settings already configured remains in this status.
- Single or Married, but withhold at higher Single rate
- Married
A/RMASTDBA Global Accounting Updates A/R Master using the Client DBA, not Legal Name.
A/RMASTUPD Global Accounting Updates A/R Master on save of matching Client Master.
ACADATABUILD Global ACA Enables improved performance for building ACA data. See Activating the ACA Data Build for more information.
ACHBREAKONPRBATCH Global ACH Segregates ACH files into separate accounts.
ACHCONSOLMIXED Global ACH Consolidates mixed transactions (DB/CR) even when single type file built.
ACHHARDENFORCE Global ACH When a payroll batch is dated such that ACH cannot be processed, the system stops the posting process rather than displaying a warning and converting ACH payments to checks. ACH causes POST to halt, if batch date fails ACH tests.
ACHNAMEPARSE Global ACH Uses space delimiter between last name and first name. Use this feature code if your bank does not accept child support files that include commas. In the ACH journal for child support, when the last name is shorter than seven characters, the first name will be appended with a space separating it from the last name. (The default behavior is to separate the names with a comma.) The name displays in the ABBREV.NAME field in the ACH journal and comprises exactly ten characters. If the last name includes seven or more characters, there is never a separator. The names are concatenated with neither a space nor a comma.
ACHNOCONSOLIDATE Global ACH Does not ‘Net’ ACH journal transactions for the same employee.
ACHPROCESSLOCK Global ACH During ACH build, checks for pending batches and provides options for dealing with them.
ACHTOMORROW Global ACH Sets ACH Effective Date to tomorrow’s date. This is specifically if your bank does not allow for same-day dated pre-notes, etc. If the field under System Parameters has an N, it uses today’s date but if you add the feature code it overrides that date with tomorrow’s date.
ALLOW-LOCN-BASED-SUI Global Tax Allows location-based SUI accruals. Displays the Location Based SUI panel in Worksite Locations and the Location field in Tax Adjustment Entry. Allows your organization to track SUTA information for your clients by worksite locations.
ALLOW999SSNS Global System Params Allows entry of SSN as 999.
ALLOWALLTAXADJTTO Global Tax Adjustments Allows All Tax Adjustments on Terminated Take on Employees.
ALLOWDUPDEDNS Global Deductions Allows duplicate deduction codes for employees.
ALLOWONESIDEDFICA Global Tax Adjustments Allows one sided FICA tax adjustments for codes 00-11,00-12,00-15,00-16.
ALLOWTANDEMCROSSHIRE Global Onboarding Allows registering employees in the tandem environment.
ALLOWWCLOCCALC Global Workers Comp Allows choice of W/C Work Loc Based option at Company/Job level.
ALLOWWMNEWHIREALTEMP Global Onboarding Allows New Hire Alternate Employers for WS managers. Allows all users of the New Hire form to select one of the alternate employers defined in Client Details instead of the client’s primary employer. This applies to worksite managers and trusted advisors of all clients in the system.
ALLOWWMNEWHIREALTEMP.C Client Onboarding Allows New Hire Alternate Employees for WS managers.
ALLOWWSMWTABDLR Global Time Off Allows processing of backdated Lave Request processing for worksite managers and trusted advisors.
ALLOWZEROSSNS Global System Params Allows SSNs to be 000-00-0000.
ALLPAYCODESINT Global System Params Allows Internal Payroll Users to select from ALL pay codes and deduction codes. By default, users do not see any pay or deduction codes except those specified in the Client Details Control tab. If service providers need to see all codes, then your organization must enable this custom feature code. When you enable this feature code, the following happens: - Service Providers: Hyperlink returns all fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, you can continue. (Note: No error message or warning displays.) - Worksite Managers: Hyperlink returns only fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes listed in the Client Details Control tab. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, the system displays an error message and you cannot continue. When you do not enable this feature code, the following happens: - Service Providers: Hyperlink returns only fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes listed in the Client Details Control tab. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, the system displays a warning and you can continue. (Note: No error message displays.) - Worksite Managers: Hyperlink only returns fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes listed in the Client Details Control tab. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, the system displays an error message and you cannot continue.
- Service Providers: Hyperlink returns all fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, you can continue. (Note: No error message or warning displays.)
- Worksite Managers: Hyperlink returns only fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes listed in the Client Details Control tab. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, the system displays an error message and you cannot continue.
- Service Providers: Hyperlink returns only fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes listed in the Client Details Control tab. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, the system displays a warning and you can continue. (Note: No error message displays.)
- Worksite Managers: Hyperlink only returns fixed amount pay codes or deduction codes listed in the Client Details Control tab. If you enter a pay code or deduction code that is not listed in the Client Details Control tab, the system displays an error message and you cannot continue.
ALT_Alloc_Handling Global System Params Does not suppress labor allocations during payroll calculation when the home position in the employee details is effective, but does not match the timesheet position (outside of the pay period dates).
ALT-TDI Global Tax - State Specific Uses Alternate Hawaii TDI Calculation.
BATCH-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS Global Payroll Allocates batch payments. Note: You must set the BATCH-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS (system level) and BATCH-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS-C (client level) custom feature codes to display the Edit Employee Details column on the Batch Payments form.
BDSW2-6STLOCAL Global Exports Used for BDS download. Six state/local taxes maximum.
BENEBILLRPT Global Reporting Suppresses the call to ASI’s alternative custom global Benefit Billing report.
BENEFIT-B4-401K Global Benefits - Payroll Processing Deducts benefits prior to 401(k) when insufficient pay. To override at the client level, use client custom feature code NO-BENEFIT-B4-401K. See Specifying Client Custom Feature Codes.
BENENROLLREHIRES Global Benefits Allows Rehire Electronic Benefits Enrollment - Currently NOT supported.
BILLALLOCEXP Global Accounting Does not allocate Admin Fees to Expense Reimburse Pay.
BILLDETRPT Global Reporting Suppresses the call to ASI’s alternative custom billing detail report.
BILLPENDMAXNEGATIVE Global Payroll Sets a specific dollar limit for negative Bill Pending entries (credits).
BIRTHDAYONFIRST Global Benefits Enables new rate in effect for this month, if person’s birthday occurs on the first of this month and is a new rate change.
BLENDED-STAFFING Global System Params Indicates an account that includes Staffing and PEO clients.
BLOCKHRAPPROVALNOTIFY Global HR Turns off email notifications for WSM/WTA for HR Action Approvals/Denials. Disables the notification email that would otherwise be sent to worksite users to let them know the results of their requested HR action (either denied or approved). This is associated with the HR Actions Resolution template type in Email Services.
BLOCKHRAPPROVALNOTIFY-C Client HR Turns off email notifications for WSM/WTA for HR Action Approvals/Denials.
BLOCKPRTAXINDEC Global Tax - State Specific Blocks Puerto Rico employee withholding for all pay dates in December.
BNKACCTCUTOFFENFORCE Global Payroll Uses Bank Account cutoff times to override system-level Same Day Check Cut Off
CALCERNYSDI Global Tax - State Specific Calculates employer portion of New York Disability tax.
CALSUTACOMPOVERRIDE Global Tax - State Specific When this feature code is enabled, the system will use different logic when determining whether to report a particular California tax deduction code on the client (C) or service provider (P) level: - Any California tax deduction code flagged as SUTA Component will report on the same level as California SUTA (05-24). - Any other California tax code will follow the reporting rule set up for California State Income Tax (05-20).
- Any California tax deduction code flagged as SUTA Component will report on the same level as California SUTA (05-24).
- Any other California tax code will follow the reporting rule set up for California State Income Tax (05-20).
CASCADE.STATE.ELIG Global Benefits Allows Plan eligibility check for Location/Client as well as Resident State.
CENSUSDEPEND Global Reporting Displays Dependents on the Census Report.
CHANGEALTEMPLOYERDATA Global Client Changes Alternate Employer Data.
CHKPRNTBOTH Global System Params Performs a CheckFile (for ODBC) and an mvQ (for Web ONLY).
CHKRATECHNG Global Payroll Checks for pay rate change in pay period during INIT.
CLIACDBCR Global Client Accounting Stores Client Accounting Data as DB/CR instead of all +/.
CLIENTINVOICEFEIN Client Reporting Prints Client FEIN in Invoice Contact Info.
CLIENTSERVICETEXT Client Reporting Adds “In Service To:” client information to check.
COFEDTAXSHUTOFF Global Tax - State Specific Deactivates the default filing status determination logic for Colorado state income tax. This was introduced in April 2022 to support a state-level change where Colorado employees must fill out Colorado form DR 0004 (Employee Withholding Certificate) instead of a copy of the federal Form W-4. If this code is enabled, the system no longer defaults to using a Colorado employee’s Federal tax filing status. It instead expects a Colorado filing status in the State Tax Filings panel of Employee Details > Tax.
CUSTGLREVDET Global Client Accounting For Custom PEO G/L Accounting Only: Revenue can use <> tag.
CUSTPROCINIT Global Payroll Calls Custom Process at the End of INIT.
DEFAULTNONRESIDENTCERT Global HR Defaults to Non Resident certificates.
DEFAULTWEBMENU Global Web Allows Default Web Menus to come from a configuration table.
DFLT.EE.STATE.W4 Client Payroll Defaults to Employee State W4.
DFLT.EE.WORK.STATE.W4 Client Payroll Defaults to Employee Work State W4.
DFLTCATCHUPNO Global Benefits - Retirement Defaults ‘Catch Up Starts at Limit’ field to “N.”
DFLTCATCHUPYES Global Benefits - Retirement Defaults ‘Catch Up Starts at Limit’ field to “Y.”
DFLTCOURTESYPAEIT Global Tax - State Specific Withholds PA Local EIT for employees working out of state.
EDITTERM Global HR Allows adding, updating, or deleting the Termination Explanation on the Other tab in the Employee Details form for a terminated employee.
EENYSDIWEEKLY Global Tax Calculates EE NYSDI only using weekly rate.
EESALESTAX Global Tax Uses Employee Based Sales Tax.
ELASTIC Global Marketplace Partner Removes Elastic (“TF”) ACH transactions on post.
EMAIL_ADD_LOCATION Global HR Adds location to employee change emails.
EMAILINVMAPI Global System Params Uses Client PC Email to email invoices, not HRPWE based email.
EMAILVOIDS Global Payroll Option to email notification when a payroll voucher is voided.
EXCLCORPTX Global Reporting Asks to Exclude Corporate Data from Tax Reports.
EXPENSE1099 Global 1099 Includes Expense Reimbursements for 1099 Earnings.
EXPENSECHK Global Check Stub Expense Check stub (Limited Display).
EXPSFUNDALLDED Global Deductions May Fund Deductions field works as it did prior to 5.2.
FAILINITSCORPFLEX Global Deductions Blocks ability to enroll Business Owner in Pre-Tax FSA/HSA Plans.
FAMILY_RELATIONSHIP Global Human Resources Displays Related section on the Work tab in the Employee Details form, where you can indicate a fellow employee who is related to the selected employee.
FAMMBRMUSOWNERS Global Deductions Blocks ability to enroll Business Owner in Pre-Tax FSA/HSA Plans.
FAXBACKDEDN Global Reporting Includes Employee Standard Deductions in the Fax Back Report (Landscape).
GARNDFLTSUPPORTS Global Garnishments Defaults “Supports Others” to “Y” if EE Fed F/S=Married with 2+ Depend.
GARNSTOP Global Garnishments Does NOT place a stop date on garnishments upon employee termination. (If you do not use this code, the system automatically places a stop date on garnishment records 15 days after the employee’s termination date.)
GLOBAL.PTO Global PTO Activates the Global PTO feature set, which enables you to create system-level PTO plans and assign those plans to specific states and worksite locations, defined by GeoCode ranges. For complete details, see the task sheet on Setting Up Global PTO Plans.
GLOBAL-ADD-DEPENDENTS-REQ-FIELDS Global Human Resources Sets the following additional fields as required on the Employee Dependents form: - First Name - Birth Date - Gender - Social Security Number - Relation
- First Name
- Birth Date
- Gender
- Social Security Number
- Relation
GPBREAK Global Accounting Great Plains: Break Journals per Batch.
GPERPREF Global Accounting Great Plains: Create Single Employer Export Files with Employer ID prefix on GL Code.
GPSEEF Global Accounting Great Plains: Create Single Employer Export Files.
GRNFTBSTATERULES Global Garnishments Sets up FTB Garnishments to follow state garnishment rules.
GUAM-FEDERAL Global Tax - State Specific Generates Guam-specific tax code for Federal tax.
HIDEFLSATIMESHT Hides the FLSA Exempt field so it does not display in the Summary Time Sheet Entry form.
HIDETOBACCO Hides the Tobacco User option so it does not display in Employee Portal.
HIDEHANDICAPED Hides the Disabled option so it does not display in Employee Portal. (You must enter the custom feature code exactly as spelled here.)
HIDEBLIND Hides the Blind option so it does not display in Employee Portal.
HRPSGLNOALLOC Global Payroll Suppresses allocation of payroll expenses (except labor).
HSAPEOMATCH Global Benefits Computes the PEO HSA Match if present.
I9LAX Global Onboarding The I9LAX feature code turns off the system requirements for I9 documentation. Any fields that are currently required for I9 entry or updates will no longer be required while that feature code is on. If you disable this code in the future, you might receive errors when updating employees with the missing (required) information.
I9LAX-COVID-ONBOARDING Global Onboarding This custom feature code accommodates the U.S. Citizenship and Immigration Services policy in response to COVID‑19 that allows Form I-9 Section 2 List B documents with expiration dates of March 1, 2020, or greater for states offering extensions.
IMINCOL Global Billing Makes IMIN rule add back credited for OverLim taxes/comp.
INTLEMPLOYEE Global Human Resources Waives requiring a US-based resident address on the Address tab in the Employee Details form for an international employee. See Establishing and Maintaining Employee Address Information for more information.
INVDUPEDETAIL Client Reporting Invoices allow duplicate detail lines to display in the invoice so that all detail items correctly display and their totals match what displays in the invoice summary. > Note: Note: If you only want to display duplicate detail lines for certain billing events, you can opt to disable this feature code and instead use the Display Duplicate Detail Lines option on the Billing Events form. Please note that this setting will then apply to all clients in your system who use that billing event. See the Billing Events setup topic for details about setting up this feature.
LEGACYDEDUCTSTOPDATECALC Global Deductions Uses Legacy method for calculating deduction stop date. More information can be found in this article: TEBA Enhancements available in September 2016.
LEGACY-PAYROLL-GLOBAL Global Payroll Restarts the legacy payroll process instead of stopping each time the system encounters an error. The process tracks the issue that caused the error and moves forward to the next employee. All vouchers successfully processed during the prior run are preserved, and the payroll process restarts only on those employees where errors were encountered.
LIFETIME-HOURS Client Reporting Uses Lifetime hours on mvQuery Check.
MCTAXCALC Client Tax Enables Multi-Company Tax Calculation.
MCTAXCALC-GLOBAL Global Tax Enables multi-company tax calculation globally. Performs validation on employees who have multiple payroll vouchers in the same pay period end date to ensure that taxes are calculated on the total gross. This applies to those employed by multiple clients or in multiple batches for one client.
MINWAGECHARGE Global Payroll When the CFC is enabled, Tip Credit Makeup is only triggered when an employee is paid under minimum wage for a specific charge date. If the payroll period spans two minimum wage effective dates and the charge dates are correctly assigned based on those effective dates, minimum wage calculations will be based on the minimum wage in effect at the time of that charge date.
MINWAGETEST Global HR Checks Fed and State Min Wage in Pay Rate Change and New Hire.
MISCINVMAXNEGATIVE Global HR Holds miscellaneous invoices for approval before posting when they have a negative amount greater than the configured maximum.
MVQ.INVOICE.PRINT Global System Params Prints Invoices via mvQuery instead of PCL2PDF.
NES-TEP-FULLTYPECODE Global Billing Uses Full Type Code for NES and TEP Billing Events.
NEWHIRETOEMPDETAILS Global Onboarding Allows User to move from New hire to Emp Details.
NEXTMONTHPRECALC Global Benefits Next Month Pre-Calc Method - Enforce Employee Plan Eligibility Option. Changes Eligibility Date to start of Next Month if Feature is added.
NOCLIENTTEMPLATE Global Client No Client Template Options Required. When this feature code appears, the Payroll Option Templates will be source from a global list and will not need to be setup at the client level. Removes the requirement for assigning payroll option templates to clients.See Payroll Option Templates Overview for details on this feature.
NOGOTHERE Global Payroll Hides the “Continue, Go There” text in payroll error messages during batch initialization/calculation.
NOMATCHDEFAULT Global Benefits Does NOT default retirement match start.
NOTIPALLOWANCE Client Reporting Does NOT show tip allowance on pay stubs. The tip allowance does not display on pay stubs for employees whose home or work location is in New York or Oregon. If your organization does not set this custom feature code, then the tip allowance displays on the pay stubs for employees in those states. Limitation: The system only supports this for one position per employee. If an employee has multiple tipped positions with the client, then the tip allowance is the average for each of the tipped positions.
NOTIPALLOWANCE-SYS Global Check Stub Does NOT show tip allowance on pay stubs.
NRADEFAULT This code applies to non-resident alien employees. During payroll processing, the system uses all an employee’s allowances as listed on their Employee Details record, instead of defaulting to one allowance.
OHNONRES-SHOWTXBL Global Tax Displays OH Non-Resident Local Taxable Wages on PTS file. If this feature code is used, the Taxable Wages display on MasterTax PTS file.
ONE-TIME-HSA-MATCH Makes the One Time Match option available in the Benefit Plan Setup form.
PAYCARD-AUTOMOVE.C Client Pay Cards On PayCard Routing Codes, allows additional Balance Prenote that auto replaces.
PAYDATEMOVE Global Payroll Does NOT update the Benefit Update Date on Batch automatically.
PAYEECODEIDSEARCH Global Garnishment Allows PAYEE CODE lookup to use ID field not name.
PAYOR-LOCATION Client Reporting Uses Location description as Payor name on check.
PAYRATECHANGEAPPRVL Global HR Displays field to enter Pay Change % Limit that is the % increase requiring approval.
PAYRATECHANGEAPPRVL.C Client HR Displays field to enter Pay Change % Limit that is the % increase requiring approval.
PAYREGRPT Global Reporting Suppresses the call to ASI’s alternative custom pay register report.
PDCHECKCODEMATCH Client Reporting Allows report to run, ensuring job and pay code match with per diem.
PDDAILYADDBACK Client Payroll Adds per diem back to regular pay on check stub.
POSITIONMINWAGE Client Payroll Used for tipped positions, so the employee is guaranteed a specific hourly wage. - When running a payroll for the tipped employee, if the employee earned less than the minimum wage set at the Position, the payroll adjusts to meet the Position Minimum Wage. - PrismHR uses the TCM Pay Code to adjust the employee up to the Position Minimum Wage or adjust the Reported Tips up to the Minimum Wage, based on Client settings.
- When running a payroll for the tipped employee, if the employee earned less than the minimum wage set at the Position, the payroll adjusts to meet the Position Minimum Wage.
- PrismHR uses the TCM Pay Code to adjust the employee up to the Position Minimum Wage or adjust the Reported Tips up to the Minimum Wage, based on Client settings.
PRECALCFEDTAX Global Tax Uses the precalc federal tax for accumulated multiple payrolls with the same period ending date. (See MCTAXCALC-GLOBAL.)
REGZERODETAIL Global Payroll Marks Zero Vouchers as Regular (Not Arrears). Ordinarily, when a paycheck that includes no pay or hours but has a zero-unit detail line in the time sheet, the system automatically sets the voucher type to A (arrears). If you want the voucher type to be R (regular), enter the REGZERODETAIL custom feature code.
REKEY.DDA Global HR Requires user to enter the Direct Deposit Account number twice for validation on the Employee Deposit form (accessed from the Deposit tab on the Employee Details form) and the New Hire form (accessed from the HR\ Action menu). (This validation helps avoid typographical errors.) When you enable this custom feature code, the following happens on the Employee Details form: - After entering the account number in the Direct Deposit Information panel, a window opens over the form covering the account number you just entered. - If you re-enter an account number that does not match the original number, an error message displays asking you to try entering the number again. - If you decide to stop the procedure and click Close, a confirmation dialog displays. Clicking Yes returns you to the Employee Deposit form where you can re-enter the information (the original changes you made no longer display).
- After entering the account number in the Direct Deposit Information panel, a window opens over the form covering the account number you just entered.
- If you re-enter an account number that does not match the original number, an error message displays asking you to try entering the number again.
- If you decide to stop the procedure and click Close, a confirmation dialog displays. Clicking Yes returns you to the Employee Deposit form where you can re-enter the information (the original changes you made no longer display).
REKEY.SSN Global HR Requires user to enter the SSN twice for validation. When a new hire is entered, the user is prompted to enter the employee’s social security number twice on the New Hire form. This is to try to avoid typographical errors.
REKEY.TAXID Global Tax Adjustments Requires user to enter the ID twice for validation for the following fields on the Tax tab in the Client Details form, which helps avoid typographical errors: - State Unemployment Insurance ID - Secondary SUI ID - State Tax ID - Misc Tax ID
- State Unemployment Insurance ID
- Secondary SUI ID
- State Tax ID
- Misc Tax ID
RHSFEE-ON Global System Params Enables rehire fees, so clients with seasonal/temporary employees can bill fees for each returning employee.
SAMEDAYSTOP Global System Params Prevents clients from posting a same-day payroll after the defined time/pay date, which is associated with the Same Day Processing field on the Bank Accounts form.
SCHEDULED-PAYMENTS-CHANGE-DEFAULTS Global Payroll Enables editing the time sheet allocation details for an employee scheduled payment by clicking an “Edit” icon on the Scheduled Payments form. You can assign time sheet locations, projects, and other entities (such as Departments or Divisions) that differ from the employee’s home locations and assignments.
SELF.SERVICE.NOTIFY Client Payroll Turns on email notifications for self-service. Sends email notifications with the payroll batch number and the client ID with the client name and status to the payroll representative.
SEPFRINGECHK Global Check Stub Separates Fringe Earnings on Check Stub.
SHIFTPAYRATES Client HR Defines pay rates on the shift record.
SHOWALT1095 Global Exports Uses ALT version of 1095 third-party download. This feature code builds the 1094 Counts Report based on the Employer ID involved and not based on the client ID, which is the default.
SHOWEPAY1095 Global Exports Uses EPAY’s version of 1095 third-party download.
SHOWGLALLOCOVR Enables client-based fields for G/L Allocation and Suppresses Labor Allocations, which are available at the system and client level.
SHOWHALFPAYHOURS Global Reporting Displays hours for pay codes with Factor < 1.00 on Batch Register Report.
SHOWOBSOLETE-LCDPDV Global Security Displays obsolete locations when setting up Data Security for worksite managers and trusted advisors (accessed from the Users form).
SHOWOBSOLETE-LCDPDV-C Client Security Displays obsolete Loc/Dep/Div in selection for data security settings for WSM/WTA.
SHOWPAYLIMITMSG Global Payroll Displays warning message when pay limits are applied during initialization.
SHOWSINGLEGROSSWAGE Global Displays Single Coverage Gross Wages %.
SHOWSSNFORTAX Client Tax Adjustments Displays Social Security Numbers (SSNs) in the Client Tax Register Report and the Tax Register Detail Report.
SHOWYTDACHCLOSED Global Check Stub Displays YTD Direct Deposit for closed accounts on check stub.
STATEW4REQONNH Global Onboarding Makes entry of state W4 information required on new hire entry.
STOPAUTOI9NOTICE Global HR Disables automatic email notifications for the approval of new hire Forms I-9 completed in Onboarding.
SUMSHIFTDESCS Client Reporting Summarizes shift code descriptions on check stub, if they are numbers.
SUPERBATCHLOOKBACK Global Payroll Adjusts the lookback period for the SuperBatch process. (Any numeric value entered here changes the lookback period the system uses for the Cutoff Date Up To field on the SuperBatch form.)
SUPP-VISION-MASTER-VLDN Global Client Suppresses error message that pops up concerning payroll reports in client details Payroll tab.
SUPPRESS-CCDBILLPAY Global Accounting - Cachet Suppresses Cachet CCD BILLPAY transactions.
SUPPRESS-INIT-MINMAX Global Payroll Suppresses minimum/maximum pay check during INIT.
SUPPRESSCSACH Global ACH Suppresses Child Support ACH.JOURNAL records.
SUSPENDENH Delays benefit enrollments for new hires. Use when the benefits setup for your organization is not complete. The system enforces this in conjunction with the Benefits Rules Good Through Date field in the Client Details Benefits tab. See Suspending Benefit Enrollments for more information on other related settings.
TAXADJINVDATE Global Tax Adjustments Uses Adjust Date as Invoice Date on Tax Adjustment.
TAXFEDSUPPASREG Global Tax Taxes Federal Supplemental Pay as Regular Pay.
TAXFEDSUPPASREG-C Client Tax Taxes Federal Supplemental Pay as Regular Pay.
TAXFORMVALWARNSONLY Global Onboarding Displays a warning instead of initiating a hard stop when the system encounters Tax form completion errors during payroll calculation. (Payroll continues calculating after you click Continue.)
TERM_EMAIL_NAME Global HR Displays Terminating Employee Time Off Balance Warning.
TERMEXPLAIN Global HR Allows entering over 200 characters in the Termination Explanation on the Other tab in the Employee Details form.
TESTGARNEXT Global Beta feature: enable this code to test PrismHR’s improved garnishment calculation logic. Eventually, this logic will be implemented globally and provide a foundation for future garnishment enhancements.
TRIMETBYZIP Global Tax Calculates OR Transit tax based on employee’s Home Location zip code.
TS-LOAD.HRS.WORKED Global Payroll Populates Hours Worked with the Hours from the Import file and Hours Paid from the Employee Default Hours in the Detail Time Sheet Entry form.
TS-SUPPRESS-SPECIAL Global Payroll Suppresses build time sheets for special batch add.
TSRPTNOFRINGE Global Payroll Excludes Fringe Pay Codes from Batch Time Sheet Reports.
UNRESTRICT-VOID-DATE Global Payroll Enables updating of the Reversal/Void Date on the Employee Payroll Voucher Reversal form during employee payroll voucher reversals. Important! Since this is a global setting, if you enable this feature code it impacts the Reversal/Void Date field for all users who have access to process voids.
USEDIVINBILL Global Client Accounting DV ensures NO CliAc Consol of G/L, even if accts match.
USEHIGHESTCUSTNUM Global System Params Automatically assigns an employee number that is one greater than the highest number for new employees of clients that have the Auto Employee Number option selected in the Client Details Control tab. (The default behavior for Auto Employee Number without this feature code is to assign the next available number to new employees.)
VAC-SUPP Global Benefits-GTL Treats Vacation as Supplemental (same pay period).
VAL-POSITION-WCOMP Global Work Comp Checks for position in a given Worksite Location on New Hire form. The New Hire form requires users to select a position with the following defined for the worksite location’s state: - W/C Classification listed on Position Classification associated with the job/position. - Rates defined in W/C Classification Rates record. - Rates in Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers record.
- W/C Classification listed on Position Classification associated with the job/position.
- Rates defined in W/C Classification Rates record.
- Rates in Employer W/C Accrual Modifiers record.
VALIDATE.MAIL.ZIP Global HR Validates Mailing Zip on Employee Address Screen.
VALIDATEDEPENS Global Benefits Validates dependents entered on group benefits enrollment screen.
VARSALMETHOD Global HR Displays Variable Salary option in Pay Method field. When enabled, the Variable Salary option lets you track the hours that salary-exempt employees actually work.
VI-FEDERAL Global Tax Assigns Virgin Island FIT to tax code 78-10.
VSUPPLEMENTAL Global Tax Ensures federal taxes on supplemental income greater than 1 million dollars are handled properly. This also applies to local supplemental taxes for New York City and Yonkers.
VOLUNTARYDEDACH Global System Params Sets a voluntary deduction code to be paid through a specific direct deposit account.
WBATCHPROGRESS Global Payroll Suppresses warning in Manual batch entry when another batch is in progress.
WISUPPRESS705 Global System Params Suppresses the leading “705” prefix for the state of Wisconsin. Note: Enabling the WISUPPRESS705 custom feature code prevents the leading “705” prefix from printing in the ACH download file. (To re-enable printing, remove the custom feature code from the feature code list.)
WSMWTAINVVARRPT Global Payroll Enables worksite managers and trusted advisors to access the Invoice Variance Report.
ZIPCODEREAD Global HR Provides more efficient Network Structure to speed up Employee Zip Code validation.

Parent Topic

Setting General System Parameters

========================================================================

Creating Custom HR Approval Roles

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Custom_HR_Approval_Roles.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Custom_HR_Approval_Roles.htm

Creating Custom HR Approval Roles

Create custom HR approval roles for Account Management (Service Providers) or HR Role (Worksite Managers/Trusted Advisors) with the Custom HR Approval Roles form.

To create a custom approval role:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select Custom HR Approval Roles under System|Change.

  3. Create a Role ID and enter a Description.

Custom approval roles are available on the Approval Policies form and the Global Approval Policies form, where you can add the custom A/M Role or HR Role to the appropriate Approval Type. Once you create a new custom HR approval role, you must assign it to a user.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Dashboard

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Dashboard.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Dashboard.htm

Using the Dashboard

The Dashboard provides quick access to company information and relevant features.

[Image: screenshot]

Panels

The Dashboard is organized into the following panels.

Panel Description
Favorites tab Provides links to the pages you have flagged as favorites.
Work Centers tab Categorizes functional areas in your organization and provides links to landing pages where you access the forms for completing a process. See Using Work Centers for details.
Perspective Provides a list where you can view the following graphs of the selected company’s employees. - Employees by Status (the default) - Employees by Location - Employees by Department - Employees by Shift - If you are using Onboarding, you can view the onboarding dashboard by selecting Onboarding Tasks by Status. - If you are using Benefit Enrollments , you can view the Benefits Enrollment dashboard by selecting Benefit Enrollments by Status.

The menu bar near the top of the page provides access to menus and other features.

Feature — Description

[Image: Logo that when clicked returns the user to the Home screen] — Returns you immediately to the Dashboard.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Work Centers menu.

[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot] — Opens the Client or My Company menu.

[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot] — Opens the HR or My Employees menu.

[Image: Payroll Menu when clicked routes the user to the Payroll page] [Image: screenshot] — Opens the Payroll or My Payrolls menu.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Reports menu.

[Image: screenshot] — Displays the list of forms designated as favorites.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Back Office menu.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the PrismHR Marketing|Expanded Services web site, where you can connect with vendors.

[Image: screenshot] — Search for forms, employees, and other items.

[Image: screenshot] — Indicates whether you have messages. Click it to access the messages.

[Image: screenshot] — Indicates whether you have pending approvals. Click to access the approvals.

[Image: Profile Menu, Click to change your password or sign out.] — Click to change your password or sign out.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens video help.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens menu that displays associated forms.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens WebHelp.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Actions menu for a form.

The header is below the menu bar. It provides the following information:

The footer is at the bottom of the page.

[Image: Footer information including the version number]

It provides the following information:

Note: Note: Video help is available on many of these features. Click the video help icon at the top right of the form to watch the video.

========================================================================

Controlling Dashboard Views

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Dashboard_Access.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Dashboard_Access.htm

Controlling Dashboard Views

Use the Dashboard Access form to control which dashboard views are available for clients when they view the At a Glance Dashboard part of the Enhanced Dashboard.

Important! This is a global form whose access can be customized at a global level or at a client level using overrides, and is accessible only for service providers.

To access this form, select Dashboard Access on the Global Configuration form. For example:

[Image: Selecting the Dashboard Access link on the Global Configuration form opens the Dashboard Access form]

Note: By default, the At a Glance view for employees will always display for all users and therefore, it cannot be controlled by this form.

Selected settings on this form control which At a Glance Dashboard views are available for clients on the Enhanced Dashboard on a global level, with the option to override these views at the client level.

Note: Note the following regarding user access to the Dashboard Access form:

To set up At a Glance dashboard views for worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors:

  1. On the System|Change menu, select Global Configuration.

  2. As a service provider for worksite managers or worksite trusted advisors, select Dashboard Access.

  3. The following panels display where you can control the client’s At a Glance Dashboard views:

Panel Action
Global Access Settings Make selections in this panel based on the options you want to display on a global level when a worksite manager or a worksite trusted advisor views the At a Glance Dashboard. For example, if you only select the Onboarding Tasks and Recent Payrolls options in this panel, only the Employees, Onboarding Tasks, and Recent Payrolls options display in the Employees menu on the At a Glance Dashboard view. (Note: The Employees menu is always enabled for all clients and is therefore not included as a controllable view.) Selecting the Support Contacts option and adding clients in the Support Contacts column displays the Support tab on the Enhanced Dashboard for worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors. However, note that the client-level custom feature code HIDE-SUPPORT-TEAM continues to hide the Support tab when you apply it to a client even when the Global Access Setting is enabled. In addition, note the following: - By default, only the Support Contacts option is checked, so if you do not make a selection in this panel or the Client Access Overrides panel, only the Employees menu and the Support Contacts option displays for worksite managers or worksite trusted advisors. - If you make a selection in the Global Access Settings panel but you do not set any overrides in the Client Access Overrides panel, only the Employees menu and the views for the global access settings you select on the Global Configuration form would display for worksite managers or worksite trusted advisors.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Company Home

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Dashboard_Client_Home.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Dashboard_Client_Home.htm

Company Home

The PrismHR Dashboard gives you quick access to company information and relevant features.

The top bar of the PrismHR screen gives you access to menus as well as some other features.

Here are some other tips on using PrismHR:

========================================================================

Creating Translation Tables for Deduction Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Deduction%20Import%20Translation%20Table.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Deduction Import Translation Table.htm

Creating Translation Tables for Deduction Codes

Use this form to create translation tables for deduction codes that are not set up in PrismHR (Foreign Code) and map them to the codes that are set up in the PrismHR system.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click Back Office, then select Deduction Import Translation Table from the System|Change menu.

To create a deduction import translation table:

  1. Click the Client ID link and select the client for the translation table.

  2. In Foreign Code, enter a code that is not recognized in PrismHR and the click the Deduction Code link and select the code to which it should be mapped.

  3. To create a blank row for adding another Foreign Code, click +. You can delete a row by clicking x.

  4. When the table is complete, click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Global Deduction Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Deduction_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Deduction_Codes.htm

Maintaining Global Deduction Codes

Use the Deduction Codes form to maintain global deduction codes. There are four main panels on this form (five if the deduction is marked Voluntary):

Viewing and Editing Existing Deduction Codes

You can view or edit deduction code information on the Deduction Codes form. Enter or select the Deduction Code you want to view. The form populates with the relevant information.

Note: Note: When making edits to an existing deduction code, be aware that you can cause issues with any existing records that use the deduction code.

Creating a New Deduction Code

Setting Up Basic Deduction Code Information

Select the parameters that define the new code in the Deduction Codes panel.

To set up basic deduction code information, do the following:

  1. Enter or select the code in the Deduction Code field. (When creating a deduction code, use something brief but descriptive, such as LIFE for life insurance.) If you select this field, a selector form displays where you can search for a specific deduction code or its description or select a code from the list that displays. When this form opens, the description, deduction type, and obsolete date display.

To filter the search further:

To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters.

  1. Enter a more detailed Description of the deduction code.

  2. Select the Deduction Type.

Important! Some deduction types and calculation methods are not compatible with each other. If you make an incompatible selection, the system displays a validation message. For example, if you first select a deduction type and then make a calculation method selection that is incompatible with the deduction type, the following message displays, “That method is invalid for this Deduction Type.” (The reverse applies if you first select a calculation method.) The message includes a warning that changing an existing deduction type or a calculation method may adversely affect any employee records that have already been setup. (If you are unsure whether or not to continue, check with your local system administrator or contact PrismHR Customer Support.)

Deduction Type — Description

Voluntary — Select for an employee-authorized deduction that does not fall under a more specific deduction type. Note: the Voluntary Classifications panel displays.

Section 125 Plan — Select for fixed-amount deductions associated with an employer’s Section 125, or cafeteria, benefit plan. (These plans allow employees to use pretax contributions for eligible benefits.)

Post Tax Benefit — Select for fixed-amount deductions associated with benefits that are handled as post-tax deductions.

Flexible Spending Account — Select for fixed-amount deductions for employee FSA contributions. (FSAs can be used for eligible expenses, such as medical, dental, vision, or dependent care expenses.)

Wage Garnishment — Select for deductions that withhold part of an employee’s earnings to satisfy a garnishment order.

Employee Loan Payment — Select for fixed-amount payroll deductions used to repay an employee loan.

Pre-Tax Retirement Contribution — Select for retirement plan deduction codes that reduce taxable earnings before payroll taxes are calculated.

Catch-Up Retirement Contribution — Select for retirement plan deduction codes that record an employee’s catch-up contribution.

Post-Tax Retirement Contribution — Select for retirement plan deduction codes that record an employee’s post-tax contribution.

Retirement Plan Loan Payment — Select for retirement plan deduction codes that record employee repayments for a retirement plan loan.

Roth 401(k) Contribution — Select for retirement plan deduction codes that record employee Roth 401(k) contributions made post-tax.

Roth 401(k) Catch-Up Contribution — Select for retirement plan deduction codes that record employee Roth catch-up contributions.

For proper reporting on W2 forms, do not set up Roth retirement contributions using the Post-Tax Retirement Contribution deduction type.

Note: A warning displays if you try to update the Deduction Type for an existing Deduction Code, which results in the following after clicking OK and saving the record:

  1. Select the Calculation Method used to calculate the payroll deduction amount for this deduction code. For example, you can use the % of Earnings with Included Pay Codes option to associate a non-qualified deferred compensation (NQDC) plan that the client set up with another company, where a percentage of the commissions is deferred, reducing taxable earnings. (This deduction code functions similar to a pre-tax deduction.)

Deduction Type — Description

Fixed Amount — Select for deduction codes that deduct a specific amount from an employee’s pay.

Rate X Hours Worked — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction amount by multiplying a rate by the employee’s hours worked.

Garnishment — Select for deduction codes that calculate and withhold employee earnings for a garnishment order.

Retirement Plan — Select for deduction codes that calculate retirement-related deductions, including retirement contributions and retirement plan loan payments.

% of Gross Pay — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction as a percentage of the employee’s gross pay.

% of Gross Earnings — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction as a percentage of the employee’s gross earnings.

% of Straight Pay — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction as a percentage of straight-time pay.

% of Pay Rate — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction using a percentage of the employee’s hourly pay rate.

% of Pay Rate (Rounded to nearest dollar) — Select for deduction codes that calculate a percentage of the employee’s hourly pay rate and round the result to the nearest dollar.

% of Prior Month Pay Rate (Rounded to nearest dollar) — Select for deduction codes that calculate a percentage using the employee’s prior-month pay rate from payroll history and round the result to the nearest dollar.

% of Retirement Earnings — Select for deduction codes that calculate a retirement-related deduction as a percentage of the employee’s retirement-eligible earnings.

% of Gross Earnings (less Deductions) — Select for deduction codes that calculate a percentage of gross earnings after subtracting selected deductions.

% of Gross Earnings (less Deduction Types) — Select for deduction codes that calculate a percentage of gross earnings after subtracting deductions from selected deduction types.

% of Earnings — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction as a percentage of selected employee earnings.

% of Earnings with Included Pay Codes — Select for deduction codes that calculate a percentage of earnings from selected pay codes.

Rate X Certified Job Hours Worked — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction by multiplying a rate by the employee’s hours worked on a certified job.

Rate X Hours Paid — Select for deduction codes that calculate deductions based on hours paid for selected pay codes.

% of Certified Job Earnings — Select for deduction codes that calculate a percentage of earnings associated with certified job work.

Union Dues Table — Select for deduction codes that calculate union dues using the rules defined for the employee’s labor union.

Ohio JEDD Tax — Select when a deduction code must calculate Ohio local tax for wages associated with a Joint Economic Development District.

Ohio SERS — Select for deduction codes that calculate employee retirement contributions for the Ohio School Employees Retirement System.

Rate by Union Job Hours — Select for deduction codes that calculate an amount from a rate and the employee’s union job hours.

Rate by Union Project Hours — Select for deduction codes that calculate an amount from a rate and the employee’s union project hours.

Sum of Union Fringe — Select for deduction codes that calculate the deduction from the total of applicable union fringe benefit amounts.

In/Out Deduction — Select or deduction codes that calculate the deduction using the associated in/out pay code setup.

Rate X Hours Paid (Selected Pay Codes) — Select for deduction codes that calculate deductions from hours paid for selected pay codes.

Rate Table Lookup — Select for deduction codes that calculate benefit plan deductions using a defined rate table.

Per Ten-Thousand Gross Pay — Select or deduction codes that calculate an amount for each $10,000 of an employee’s gross pay.

Per Ten-Thousand Gross Earnings — Select for deduction codes that calculate an amount for each $10,000 of an employee’s gross earnings.

Per Ten-Thousand Gross Straight Pay — Select for deduction codes that calculate an amount for each $10,000 of an employee’s straight pay.

Per Ten-Thousand Gross Retirement Pay — Select for deduction codes that calculate an amount for each $10,000 of an employee’s retirement pay.

Note: Note the following when using % of Earnings with Included Pay Codes:

  1. Enter the Pay Stub Name, which is a brief description that prints on pay stubs and certain reports.

Optional Settings

If necessary, you can also set up other basic deduction settings in this panel:

Field — Description

Mandatory — Select this option if this deduction code is for goods and services that are a mandatory part of employment.

Print on Paystub — Select whether or not you want this code to display on employee pay stubs.

Third Party Required — Voluntary deductions only. Select this option if this deduction must have a Third Party Payee associated with it. You can set this at the client level. See Maintaining Third Party Payees Vendor Information for more information.

To Arrears — Voluntary deductions only. Select this option if the deduction can go into arrears when the employee does not have enough pay to cover it.

Obsolete Date — The date after which this deduction code is no longer in effect.

Rate X Hours Paid (Selected Pay Codes)

If the Calculation Method is set to Rate X Hours Paid (Selected Pay Codes), use the RPS Pay Codes panel to select the pay codes. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Enter each applicable Pay Code in the table.

% of Gross Earnings (less Deduction Types)

If the Calculation Method is set to % of Gross Earnings (less Deduction Types), use the Exclude Ded. Type Code panel to exclude pre-tax benefit deduction types for plans that require contributions to be calculated as a percentage of gross earnings, such as COPERA. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following when using % of Gross Earnings (less Deduction Types):

Selecting Voluntary Classifications

The Voluntary Classifications panel only displays if the Deduction Type is Voluntary. Select any options that correspond to the type of voluntary deduction.

Note: Note: Selecting both of the Section 125 and Health Savings Account fields causes a double-shelter of the deduction amount. Only select one of these fields since each performs the same function.

Configuring Maximums and Limits

If necessary, use the Maximums and Limits panels to establish the maximum deduction amounts and the deduction limits for this deduction code.

Setting up Maximums

You can define monthly, quarterly, and annual maximums. Payroll automatically tracks the amount deducted from an employee’s pay during the period and stops making the payroll deductions once the maximum is reached. Enter maximums only when the maximum amounts apply to most employees.

To set up deduction maximums, do the following:

  1. Set the time period in the Basis field.

  2. Enter the Maximum amount that the system will deduct during the selected Basis. You can define maximum amounts for a specific employee on the employee’s Payroll Deduction form, which overrides the amount in this field.

Setting up Limits

You can define limits for the deduction. Since PrismHR only checks limits during batch payroll processing (as opposed to when you enter an online pay check), you can specify only pay periods supported during batch payroll processing. Enter limits only when the limit amounts apply to most employees.

Note: Note: The payroll period used as the basis for defining a limit displays in the Cd and Period fields.

To set up deduction limits, do the following:

  1. Enter the deduction’s Limit amount for the payroll period.

The value in the Limit field defines the maximum amount that PrismHR can deduct for this code during a payroll period. You can also define limits for a specific employee on the employee’s Payroll Deduction form, which overrides the value of this field.

Configuring Other Specific Deduction Options

The Other Processing Parameters panel establishes additional deduction code parameters. When you finish, click Save.

Field Description
Default Amount This value varies depending on the Calculation Method. It can be an amount, a percentage, or an hourly rate. The value entered here displays when you set up the employee’s deduction form. For any employee, you can override the value on that form. If you leave this field blank, you must set it at the employee level.
Default Periods Enter the Default Periods when the system should make this deduction; this displays when you set up each employee’s deduction form. You can override the default period on the employee form. Define up to five deduction periods, each one represented by a single digit corresponding to the deduction period. - To process the deduction in the second period, enter 2. - For multiple period deductions, enter multiple digits with no spaces; to process the deduction in periods two and four, type 24. - For deductions that should be made on every pay check, enter 12345. The frequency with which you pay your employees determines the length of these deduction periods. For employees paid on a weekly basis, the PrismHR Customer Support Team recommends that you make each week of the month a separate deduction period (deduction period one corresponds to week 1, deduction period two to week 2, and so on).

Defining the Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy Role for Service Providers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Defining_Worksite_Manager_Proxy_Users.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Defining_Worksite_Manager_Proxy_Users.htm

Defining the Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy Role for Service Providers

You can enable the Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy account manager role for service providers, so they can proxy into the system as a worksite manager or worksite trusted advisor. (This role allows them to validate and troubleshoot user access).

Important! Do not enable the Activate User Administration Security field on the Global Configuration form unless you have already assigned the Service Provider User Administrator and Worksite User Administrator roles. This setting restricts user account access to service providers with user administrator roles. If you enable this field before assigning any roles, all users will be prevented from assigning the roles to user accounts.

To enable the Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy account manager role:

  1. Select Users on the System|Change menu.

  2. Enter or select the User ID.

  3. Select Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy in the Account Management Roles panel.

  4. Click Save.

After you enable the Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy role, the Worksite Manager Proxy option displays on the Actions menu for worksite managers or worksite trusted advisors user records. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following when using the Worksite Manager/Trusted Advisor Proxy role:

========================================================================

Defining Delivery Methods

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Delivery_Methods.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Delivery_Methods.htm

Defining Delivery Methods

Use the Delivery Methods form to define methods that users can select for shipping clients’ payrolls. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To define delivery method for shipping:

  1. Enter the Code for the delivery method. If you are creating a new code, use something brief but descriptive, for example, USPS or FEDX.

  2. Enter the Method description, which is usually the name for the service (for example, US Postal Service or FedEx).

  3. Enter the Days In Transit, which is the delivery method’s number of days in transit.

  4. Enter the Bill Event Code, which is the ID of the billing event that the system uses to track this delivery method. If there is no charge for the delivery method, leave this field blank.

  5. Select Create Spec Sheet to indicate that a special sheet will print during payroll processing. Do not select this option if a special sheet is not necessary.

  6. If a special sheet will print:

a. Enter the Special Message that prints on the sheet.
b. Enter the Name that should appear on the sheet.
— —
c. Enter the Address to print on the sheet.
— —
d. Enter the City, State, Zip Code to print on the sheet.
— —
  1. Select the Delivery Sheet Format, which ensures that the address on the printed delivery sheet displays in the window envelopes your organization uses. You can select one of the following:

Note: If you select one of the 2 Window formats, you must enter the full address.

  1. Click Save.

After changing these settings, you can rerun the delivery sheet report from the Payroll Summary form, if needed.

========================================================================

Configuring Direct Pay Entries

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Direct_Pay_Entry_Configuration.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Direct_Pay_Entry_Configuration.htm

Configuring Direct Pay Entries

Use the Direct Pay Entry Configuration form to configure the payroll data file’s specifics into a .csv file that you can later import using the Direct Pay Entry form, which the system applies to the specified payroll.

Note: The Direct Pay Entry Configuration form is only available for service providers.

To configure the payroll data file:

  1. Select Direct Pay Entry Configuration on the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following information:

Field — Description

Payroll Cutoff Time — Enter the time when the payroll for the current period must be entered.

Manual Payroll Pay Date Logic — Select the appropriate option if the time needs to be added to a manual payroll. (The system uses this date to determine if a manual payroll is needed.)

Pay Period Lookback — Enter the Pay Period Lookback to include up to 10 pay periods before the current pay date (the default is 3 pay periods).

  1. Define the rules to apply a Payroll Option Template to the manual payroll:
  1. Click Save.

Note: To import the payroll data file, see Processing Direct Pay Entries.

========================================================================

Maintaining EEO Class Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/EEO_Class_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/EEO_Class_Codes.htm

Maintaining EEO Class Codes

Use the EEO Class Codes form to maintain position classifications for reporting to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission and similar state-level entities.

To maintain EEO class codes:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select EEO Class Codes under System|Change.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field Description
Class Code Enter or select the EEO Class Code.
Description Enter a Description for the code.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining EEO Ethnic Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/EEO_Ethnic_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/EEO_Ethnic_Codes.htm

Maintaining EEO Ethnic Codes

Use the EEO Ethnic Codes form to maintain race and ethnicity classifications for reporting to the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission.

To maintain EEO ethnic codes:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select EEO Ethnic Codes under System|Change.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field Description
Ethnic Code Enter or select the Ethnic Code for the race and ethnic identification, as defined by the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission.
Description (English) Enter the Ethnic Group, in English, represented by the code.
Description (Spanish) Enter the Ethnic Group, in Spanish, represented by the code.
EEO Report Code Select the EEO Report Code to display on the EEO-1 report. Select one of the following options: - Black / African American - White / Caucasian - Hispanic / Latino - American Indian / Alaska Native - Asian - Native Hawaiian / Pacific Islander - Middle Eastern / North African - Two or More Races - Some Other Race
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining EEO Position Group Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/EEO_Position_Groups.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/EEO_Position_Groups.htm

Maintaining EEO Position Group Codes

Use the EEO Position Groups form to maintain the employee position groups that can appear in the EEO-1 reporting file.

To maintain EEO position group codes:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select EEO Position Groups from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Group Code — Enter or select a position Group Code. If you are creating a new group, use something brief but descriptive. For example: EXEC or LABOR.

Description — Enter a Description of the position group, such as Executive or Laborer.

EEO Class — Enter or select the EEO Class associated with this EEO position group. These are defined on the EEO Class Codes form.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Employee Statuses

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Employee_Status.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Employee_Status.htm

Maintaining Employee Statuses

You can maintain employee status codes and define how the employee’s status affects various pay functions using the Employee Status form. Statuses indicate whether an employee is active, on leave, or terminated.

To maintain employee status information, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Employee Statuses from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Employee Status Code — Enter the one- or two-character Employee Status Code, for example, A for active or L for on leave.

Full Description — Enter a Full Description of this employee status code, for example, Active or Leave of Absence.

Abbreviated Description — Enter an Abbreviated Description of this employee status code, for example, Act or Leave.

Status Classification — Select the Status Classification for this employee status code.

Allowed Action Codes — For the Allowed Action Codes, select each of the Allowed HR Actions. When users perform those associated human resource actions, this status is available. For example, if you want to allow terminated employees to be rehired, select Rehire for a Terminated employee status. Users can enter terminated employees in the Rehire form. If you do not select Rehire for Active or On Leave employee statuses, then only terminated employees can be rehired.

Suppress Auto Pay — Select Suppress Auto Pay to suppress the automatic creation of time sheets or other payments for employees with this employment status.

Suppress Time Sheets — Using the Suppress Time Sheets drop-down, indicate whether to suppress the selection of time sheets for payment for employees with this employment status, or to display a warning before allowing users to proceed.

Suppress Other Pay — Select Suppress Other Pay to suppress the other payments to employees with this employment status.

Obsolete — Select Obsolete if this employee status code is no longer used. If you do not want this status to be available in HR action forms, you must also remove the Allowed Action Codes.

Selectable By Service Provider Only — Select Selectable By Service Provider Only to hide the Employee Status Code from Worksite Managers.

Skip EE Eligibility Test — For the Skip EE Eligibility Test option, when the benefit rule calculates eligibility based on the status date and an employee changes eligibility statuses, the Skip EE Eligibility Test option calculates eligibility based on their original status date. For employees with leave of absence statuses due to COVID‑19, this option calculates the correct open enrollment Benefit Effective Date.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Employee Suffixes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Employee_Suffix.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Employee_Suffix.htm

Maintaining Employee Suffixes

You can maintain suffixes that can follow employees’ name using the Employee Suffix form.

To maintain employee suffixes, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Employee Suffix from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following field:

Field — Description

Suffix List — To add a new suffix, click + to add a new line to the end of the Suffix List and enter the suffix. You can also edit an existing suffix directly in the field.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Establishing Employee Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Employee_Types.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Employee_Types.htm

Establishing Employee Types

You can establish employee types in PrismHR that are used to define employee employment type, such as full time or part time, using the Employee Type form.

To establish employee type information, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Employee Types from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field Description
Employee Type Enter or select the one- or two-character Employee Type that represents the employee type; for example, F for full-time or P for part-time.
Full Description Enter a Full Description of the employee type, for example, Full-Time Employee or Part-Time Seasonal.
Abbreviated Description Enter an Abbreviated Description of the employee type, for example, Full or Season.
Type Classification Select the employee Type Classification.
Tax Exemption This field is optional. You can enable a specified form of income tax suppression for the selected Employee Type instead of setting income tax suppression at an employee level. You can select one of the following options: - –Select One– - No income tax suppression happens for the selected Employee Type. - Suppress All But Federal Income Tax - All income tax except Federal Income Tax is suppressed for the selected Employee Type. - Suppress All But State Income Tax - All income tax except State Income Tax is suppressed for the selected Employee Type. > Note: Note: This Tax Exemption field has field level security. It is set to DENY by default. You can add this field to a user role and set it to Enable, Disable or Hidden. - Enable - This field setting allows you to make changes. - Disable - This field setting allows you to see the data in the field but not change the data. - Hidden - This field setting will not display this Tax Exemption field on the Employee Types form for you.
  1. Click Save to save the changes made on this form.

  2. Click Delete to delete an employee type.

  3. Click Cancel to clear this form at any time. Any unsaved changes will be lost.

========================================================================

Using the Enhanced Dashboard

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard.htm

Using the Enhanced Dashboard

The Enhanced Dashboard provides quick access to company information, favorite forms, and work centers from a central location.

The Enhanced Dashboard includes the following helpful features:

To access the Enhanced Dashboard, click Client, select Client|Dashboard, and then select Enhanced Dashboard.

[Image: Enhanced Dashboard form, showing the Favorites and Work Centers sidebar and the ‘At a Glance’ data visualization panel.]

Note: Before you use the Enhanced Dashboard, you must enable the dashboard using the Global Configuration form (see Setting Global Configuration). In addition, the User Role assigned to the user must be granted access to the Enhanced Dashboard using the User Roles form (see Defining User Roles).

Working in the Dashboard

The Enhanced Dashboard is organized into the following tabs, panel, and data table.

Attribute Description
Favorites tab Links to forms that have been added to the user’s favorites display in this tab (see Designating Favorites).
Work Centers tab Links to various Work Center forms display in this tab (see Work Centers).
At a Glance panel This panel is used to review information about employees, benefits, payrolls, and onboardings. Select an option in the first drop-down to display information about the selection in the graph and/or data table. Some options allow for additional selections to be made using additional drop-downs or a search bar, which can be used to further customize the type of information that displays. The following options are available in the first drop-down: - Benefit Enrollment Workflows: This option is used to view information about active benefit enrollment workflows, such as the status of each workflow and a list of employees who have an active workflow (see Benefit Enrollment Workflows). - Benefit Plans: This option is used to view information about benefit plans, such as the insurance carrier associated with each plan and the number of employees enrolled in each plan (see Viewing Benefit Plans). - Employee Benefit Enrollments: This option is used to view a list of employees along with their benefits information and the benefit plans in which employees are enrolled (see Viewing Employee Benefit Enrollments). - Employees: This option is used to view a list of employees along with basic employment information, such as their position and hire date (see Viewing Employees). - Onboarding Tasks:This option is used to view information about active onboarding workflows, such as the status of each workflow and which forms in the workflow remain outstanding (see Onboarding Tasks). - Recent Payrolls: This option is used to view a list of recent payrolls as well as the files and reports associated with each payroll (see Viewing Recent Payrolls). > Note: Note: If the user navigates to another form, the last selection that was made in the first drop-down is retained when the Enhanced Dashboard is next accessed.

The menu bar near the top of the page provides access to menus and other features.

Feature — Description

[Image: Logo that when clicked returns the user to the Home screen] — Returns you immediately to the Dashboard.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Work Centers menu.

[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot] — Opens the Client or My Company menu.

[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot] — Opens the HR or My Employees menu.

[Image: Payroll Menu when clicked routes the user to the Payroll page] [Image: screenshot] — Opens the Payroll or My Payrolls menu.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Reports menu.

[Image: screenshot] — Displays the list of forms designated as favorites.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Back Office menu.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the PrismHR Marketing|Expanded Services web site, where you can connect with vendors.

[Image: screenshot] — Search for forms, employees, and other items.

[Image: screenshot] — Indicates whether you have messages. Click it to access the messages.

[Image: screenshot] — Indicates whether you have pending approvals. Click to access the approvals.

[Image: Profile Menu, Click to change your password or sign out.] — Click to change your password or sign out.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens video help.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens menu that displays associated forms.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens WebHelp.

[Image: screenshot] — Opens the Actions menu for a form.

The header is below the menu bar. It provides the following information:

The footer is at the bottom of the page.

[Image: Footer information including the version number]

It provides the following information:

Note: Note: Video help is available on many of these features. Click the video help icon at the top right of the form to watch the video.

========================================================================

Viewing Benefit Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_BenefitPlans.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_BenefitPlans.htm

Viewing Benefit Plans

When you select Benefit Plans in the primary drop-down menu of the At a Glance panel, you can select:

Benefit Plans - All Offer Types

When you select All Offer Types, the system displays a chart and a search bar above the plans data list. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Chart for Benefit Plans - All Offer Types

The chart illustrates the number of plans by offer type for all of the offer types for the indicated client. For example, you can quickly review the chart to determine how many plans exist for the Dental offer type and compare that number to the total number of plans in the Medical offer type. The chart illustrates the number of plans on the Y-axis by the offer types on the X-axis for the selected company. Each bar in the chart corresponds to an offer type and the number of plans for that offer type. The system color codes each bar in the chart. The color codes for each type correspond to the color codes in the data list.

Using the Plan Search Option

Use the search option to search the list of all plans. Enter a keyword to find one or more plans.

[Image: At a Glance search box to search for a plan ID or description.]

After entering part of a plan ID or plan description and pressing Enter, the data list re-displays all plans that match that criteria.

The system sorts the search results in the data list alphabetically.

Data List for Benefit Plans All Offer Types

The Benefit Plans All Offer Types At a Glance panel displays a list of data that contains information associated with each plan. The following table outlines the data that displays in the list.

Column — Description

(Color Codes) — This column indicates a colored dot that the system uses to color code the offer type. The color of each dot corresponds to the color of a bar in the chart.

Plan ID — This column indicates the Plan identifier.

Plan Description — This column indicates the plan description.

Plan ID and Plan Description include a hyperlink. Click the hyperlink to display the Benefit Plan Setup form in a modal window so that you can view or edit the plan. When finished with the Benefit Plan Setup form close the modal window to return to the At a Glance dashboard. When you click on a link, the actions menu is not available on the Benefit Plan Setup form. If you need to access the actions menu, you can set up the plan. See Setting Up a Benefit Plan > Note: Note: If a user has Inquiry access they can only view the Benefit Plan Setup form. If the user has Deny access they can not access the form.

Carrier — This column indicates the name of the insurance carrier.

Enrollments — This column indicates a count of employee enrollments in a plan with an active status. A hyperlink is available to the count of employees enrolled in is greater than 0. Click this hyperlink to open the Employees Assigned To modal form. > Note: Note: The hyperlink in this column is unavailable for users who do not have access to the Benefit Plan Setup form.

Start Date — This column indicates the plan start date for the indicated plan.

Stop Date — This column indicates the plan stop date for the indicates plan (if applicable).

Renew Date — This column indicates the date by which the subscriber must renew the plan.

Offer Type — This column indicates the benefit offer type associated with the plan.

Status — This column indicates the status of the plan.

Benefit Plans - Specific Offer Type

When you select a specific offer type, the system displays a chart and a search bar above the plans data list. For Example:

[Image: At a Glance panel, showing a split bar graph of employer/employee contributions to vision plan offer types.]

Chart for Benefit Plans - Specific Offer Type

The chart illustrates the total number of annual contributions by benefit plan for the selected offer type. For example, you can quickly review the chart to determine the total number annual contributions for a plan and how that breaks down between employee contributions versus employer contributions. The chart displays the total annual contributions on the Y-axis by the plans on the X-axis for the selected offer type. Each bar in the chart corresponds to the total employee (EE) and total employer (ER) contributions for each plan. For each bar in the chart, the system color codes the employee portion of the contribution in dark blue and the employer contribution in light blue. Hovering the pointer over the column will indicate the plan description, employee or employer contribution amount, and the total premium amount for the plan.

Using the Plan Search Option

Use the search option to search the list of plans for a specific offer type. Enter a keyword to find one or more plans.

[Image: At a Glance search box to search for plan IDs or descriptions.]

After entering part of a plan ID or plan description and pressing Enter, the data list re-displays all plans that match that criteria.

The system sorts the search results in the data list alphabetically.

You can select a plan id or description from the search results list to display the Benefit Plan Setup form.

Data List for Benefit Plans Specific Offer Types

The Benefit Plans Specific Offer Type At a Glance panel displays a list of data that contains information associated with each plan for the selected offer type. The following table outlines the data that displays in the list.

Column — Description

Plan ID — This column indicates the Plan identifier.

Plan Description — This column indicates the plan name.

Plan ID and Plan Description include a hyperlink. Click the hyperlink to display the Benefit Plan Setup form in a modal window so that you can view or edit the plan. When finished with the Benefit Plan Setup form close the modal window to return to the At a Glance dashboard. When you click on a link, the actions menu is not available on the Benefit Plan Setup form. If you need to access the actions menu, you can set up the plan. See Setting Up a Benefit Plan > Note: Note: If a user has Inquiry access they can only view the Benefit Plan Setup form. If the user has Deny access they can not access the form.

EE Contributions — This column indicates the annual employee contribution amount for the plan.

ER Contributions — This column indicates the annual employer contribution amount for the plan.

Enrollments — This column indicates a count of employee enrollments in a plan with an active status.

Start Date — This column indicates the plan start date for the indicated plan.

Stop Date — This column indicates the plan stop date for the indicated plan (if applicable).

Renew Date — This column indicates the date by which the subscriber must renew the plan.

Status — This column indicates the status of the plan.

Actions — Actions (a drop-down that contains a list of actions available to perform for the indicated offer type) > Note: Note: Currently there are no actions available for this At a Glance view on the Enhanced Dashboard.

========================================================================

Benefit Enrollment Workflows

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_BenEnrollWrkFlw.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_BenEnrollWrkFlw.htm

Benefit Enrollment Workflows

The Benefit Enrollment Workflows option on the Enhanced Dashboard is used to view information about active benefits enrollment workflows.

When this option is selected in the first drop-down, a color-coded pie chart displays to indicate the number of workflows in each status and the percentage of total active workflows made up by each status. In addition, a list of employees who have an active workflow displays in the data table, and a second drop-down displays to allow the user to filter the chart and table based on enrollment type.

Note: Note: The data table only displays employees to which the user has been granted access using the Users form (See Editing a User).

Viewing Employee Details

In the data table, click an employee’s name in the Employee Name column or click an employee’s ID number in the Employee ID column display the Employee Details form, where information about the employee can be reviewed or modified (See Maintaining Employee Details).

Note: Note: Reviewing employee information using these links requires inquiry access to the Employee Details form, and modifying employee information using these links requires full access to the Employee Details form. Access to this form can be granted to the User Role assigned to the user using the User Roles form (See Editing a User Role).

Actions

Click the Actions link for an employee to display a list of additional functions that can be performed for the employee.

The following options display:

Option — Description

Archive — This option is used to archive the employee’s benefit enrollment workflow. When this option is selected, a message displays to indicate that archiving the workflow will prevent the employee from being able to complete the enrollment and that the workflow’s end date will be unable to be extended. Click Yes to archive the workflow, or click No to close the message window without archiving the workflow. > Note: Note: This option is available if the User Role assigned to the user has been granted full access to Web Enrollment Configuration using the User Roles form. Otherwise, the option displays when the Actions link is clicked but cannot be selected.

Extend — This option is used to extend the end date of the employee’s benefit enrollment workflow. When this option is selected, a dialog displays to allow the user to enter a new end date for the enrollment. Enter the date and click Extend to apply the new end date. A message window displays to indicate the update was successful. > Note: Note: This option is available if the User Role assigned to the user has been granted full access to Web Enrollment Configuration using the User Roles form. Otherwise, the option displays when the Actions link is clicked but cannot be selected.

Proxy — This option is used to access the Proxy Login form, where the user can complete the workflow on behalf of the employee (See Logging in as an Employee). > Note: Note: This option is available if the User Role assigned to the user has been granted full access to Proxy Login using the User Roles form and the Enrollment Proxy role or the Onboarding Proxy role has also been assigned to the user using the Human Resource Roles panel on the Users form. Otherwise, the option displays when the Actions link is clicked but cannot be selected.

View Web Enrollment — This option is used to access the Web Enrollment Configuration form, where the user can review information about the employee’s enrollment period (See Changing an Enrollment Period). When the Web Enrollment Configuration form is accessed using this link, enrollment period information for the employee cannot be modified.

========================================================================

Viewing Employee Benefit Enrollments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_EmployeeBenEnroll.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_EmployeeBenEnroll.htm

Viewing Employee Benefit Enrollments

When you select Employee Benefit Enrollments in the primary drop-down menu of the At a Glance panel, you can select:

Employee Benefit Enrollments - Employees

When you select Employee Benefit Enrollments in the primary drop-down menu of the At a Glance panel and you select Employees in the secondary drop-down menu, the employees for the selected client display. For example:

[Image: At a Glance Employee list, showing employees associated with benefit enrollments.]

Using the Employee Search Option

Use the search option to search for one or more employees. Enter a keyword to find one or more employees.

[Image: At a Glance search box to search for employee names or IDs]

After entering part of an employee name or employee ID and pressing Enter, the data list re-displays all employees that match that criteria.

The system sorts the search results in the list alphabetically. You can select an employee name or employee id from the search results list to display the Employee Benefit Enrollments - Employees - specific employee At a Glance panel.

Data List for Employee Benefit Enrollments > Employees

This At a Glance panel displays a list of data that contains information associated with each employee.

When viewing the Employee Benefit Enrollments > Employees At A Glance Enhanced Dashboard and there are more than 500 employees, the system displays only a portion of the employees. You can click the View All Employees link in the lower right corner of the page to load all of the employees. The system paginates the list of employees. You can use the pagination tool in the lower right corner of the page to navigate to the next page or previous page, or you can enter a page number to jump to a specific page.

Tip: When the list contains a large list of values, use the search option to perform a keyword search and limit the number of values that displays in the list.

The list includes the following information:

Column Description
Employee Name This column indicates the employee’s name.
Employee ID This column indicates the employee’s ID.
You can navigate from the Employee Benefit Enrollments > Employees > All At a Glance View to the specific employee panel by clicking the link on the Employee Name or Employee ID in the list of all users.
Hire Date This column indicates the date of hire for the employee.
Benefit Group This column indicates the employee’s benefit group.
EE Type This column indicates the employee employment type, such as full time or part time.
Status This column indicates the employment status for the employee.
Actions Actions (a drop-down that contains a list of actions available to perform for the indicated employee) - Create a Life Event - Select this action to display the Life Event form. - Employee Details - Select this action to display a modal window to the Employee Details form. After saving any changes to the Employee Details form, click the close button for the window and the system returns you to the Enhanced Dashboard. - Update Dependent Info - Select this action to display the Employee Dependents form.

When you select the link associated with an employee name or employee ID on the Employee Benefit Enrollments > EmployeesAt a Glance panel, the employee benefit enrollments for that specific employee display in the At a Glance panel. For example:

[Image: At a Glance bar graph of employee benefit enrollments for a specific employee]

When viewing the Employee Benefit Enrollments > Employees > (specific employee) At A Glance Enhanced Dashboard, you can:

Chart for Employee Benefit Enrollments - Specific Employee

The chart illustrates the number of plans by status for the selected employee. For example, you can quickly review the chart to determine how many plans the selected employee is eligible for. The chart displays the number of plans on the Y-axis by the status on the X-Axis. Each bar in the chart corresponds to a status and the number of plans in that status for the employee. The system color codes each bar in the chart. The color codes for each status correspond to the color codes in the data list.

Using the Plan Search Option

Use the search option to search the list of the employee’s plans. Enter a keyword to find one or more plans.

[Image: screenshot]

After entering part of a plan ID or plan description and pressing Enter, the data list re-displays all plans that match that criteria.

The system sorts the search results in the data list alphabetically.

You can select a plan id or description from the search results list to display the Benefit Plan Setup form.

Data List for Employee Benefit Enrollments - Specific Employee

The following table outlines the values that display in the data list for the Employee Benefit Enrollments > Employees > At a Glance panel. The Plans data list displays a list of insurance plans and details for those plans.

Column Description
Plan ID This column indicates the Plan identifier.
Plan Description This column indicates the plan name.
Plan ID and Plan Description include a hyperlink. Click the hyperlink to display the Employee Benefits Enrollment form in a modal window so that you can view or edit the plan. When finished with the Employee Benefits Enrollment form close the modal window to return to the At a Glance dashboard. > Note: Note: If a user has Inquiry access they can only view the Employee Benefits Enrollment form. If the user has Deny access they can not access the form.
Coverage Start This column indicates the coverage start date for the plan.
Coverage End This column indicates the coverage end date for the plan (if applicable).
Coverage Level This column indicates the coverage level for the plan.
EE Contribution This column indicates the annual employee contribution amount for the plan. This column is blank if an employee has a plan status of Eligible, Terminated, or Waived.
ER Contribution This column indicates the annual employer contribution amount for the plan. This column is blank if an employee has a plan status of Eligible, Terminated, or Waived.
Status This column indicates the enrollment status of the plan, which include the following: - Active - COBRA - Eligible - Pending - Terminate - Waived

Use this enhanced dashboard to view all active plans associated with a client, and the number of employee enrollments in each active plan.

When you select Employee Benefit Enrollments in the primary drop-down menu of the At a Glance panel and you select Active Plans in the secondary drop-down menu, you can select All in the tertiary drop-down to display a chart and a list of data that illustrate information for all active plans for the selected client. For example:

[Image: At a Glance panel showing a bar graph of active benefit plans]

Chart for Employee Benefit Enrollments - All Active Plans

The chart illustrates the number of employees enrolled in active plans. The chart displays the number of enrolled employees on the Y-axis and the active plans on the X-axis. Each bar in the chart corresponds to an active plan and the number of employees enrolled in that plan. The system color codes each bar in the chart. The color codes for each plan correspond to the color codes in the data list. Hovering the pointer over the column will indicate the plan ID and the total number of employees enrolled in that plan.

Using the Plan Search Option

Use the search option to search the list of all active plans. Enter a keyword to find one or more plans.

[Image: screenshot]

After entering part of a plan ID or plan description and pressing Enter, the data list re-displays all plans that match that criteria.

The system sorts the search results in the data list alphabetically.

You can select a plan id or description from the search results list to display the Benefit Plan Setup form.

Data List for Employee Benefit Enrollments - All Active Plans

The system displays a list that contains data associated with each plan. Tip: Use the search bar to filter the number of entries that display in this list of data. The following table outlines the values that display in the data list.

Column — Description

Plan ID — This column indicates the Plan identifier. The system only displays plans with a status of Active.

Plan Description — This column indicates the plan name.

Plan ID and Plan Description include a hyperlink. Click the hyperlink to display the Benefit Plan Setup form in a modal window so that you can view or edit the plan. When finished with the Benefit Plan Setup form close the modal window to return to the At a Glance dashboard. When you click on a link, the actions menu is not available on the Benefit Plan Setup form. If you need to access the actions menu, you can set up the plan. See Setting Up a Benefit Plan > Note: Note: If a user has Inquiry access they can only view the Benefit Plan Setup form. If the user has Deny access they can not access the form.

Enrollments — This column indicates a count of employee enrollments in a plan with an active status.

Start Date — This column indicates the plan start date for the indicated plan.

Stop Date — This column indicates the plan stop date for the indicated plan (if applicable).

Renew Date — This column indicates the renewal month and day for the plan.

Employee Benefit Enrollments - Active Plans - Specific Plan

Use this enhanced dashboard to view an active plan and a list of all of the employees enrolled in the selected plan

When you select Employee Benefit Enrollments in the primary drop-down menu of the At a Glance panel and you select Active Plans in the secondary drop-down menu, you can select a specific plan in the tertiary drop-down to display a chart and a list of data that illustrate status and employee information for the indicated plan of the selected client. For example:

[Image: At a Glance panel showing a bar graph of eligibility by status for a single benefit plan]

Note: Note: Any plans with a Stop Date in the past do not appear in the chart or the tertiary drop-down. Also, the system sorts plans in the tertiary drop-down alphabetically with capitalized plans sorting before lower case (for example, the system sorts GNRL-Life before General-Life).

Chart for Employee Benefit Enrollments - Specific Plan

The chart illustrates the number of employees by status for the selected plan. For example, you can quickly review the chart to determine how many employees are eligible for the selected plan. The chart displays the number of employees on the Y-axis by the status on the X-Axis. Each bar in the chart corresponds to a status and the number of employees in that status for the plan. The system color codes each bar in the chart. The color codes for each status correspond to the color codes in the data list. Hovering the pointer over a column will indicate the status of the plan and the number of employees enrolled in the plan.

Using the Employee Search Option

Use the search option to search for one or more employees. Enter a keyword to find one or more employees.

[Image: screenshot]

After entering part of an employee name or employee ID and pressing Enter, the data list re-displays all employees that match that criteria.

The system sorts the search results in the list alphabetically. You can select an employee name or employee id from the search results list to display the Employee Details form.

Data List for Employee Benefit Enrollments > Active Plans > Specific Plan

The following table outlines the values that display in the data list for the Employee Benefit Enrollments > Active Plans> At a Glance panel.

Column — Description

Employee Name — This column indicates the Last Name, First Name, and Middle Name of the employee.

Employee ID — This column indicates the employee identifier for the employee.

You can select an employee name or employee ID to display the Employee Details form. You can edit employee information associated with the employee.

Coverage Start — This column indicates the coverage start date for the plan.

Coverage End — This column indicates the coverage end date for the plan (if applicable).

Coverage Level — This column indicates the coverage level for the plan.

EE Contribution — This column indicates the employee contribution toward the plan. This column is blank if an employee has a plan status of Eligible, Terminated, or Waived.

ER Contribution — This column indicates the employer contribution toward the plan. This column is blank if an employee has a plan status of Eligible, Terminated, or Waived.

Status — This column indicates the enrollment status of the plan.

========================================================================

Viewing Employees

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_Employees.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_Employees.htm

Viewing Employees

You can filter both the charts and the data tables by using the drop-down menus in the At a Glance panel, or by selecting the series bars in the chart. For example, to filter out an attribute in the chart, such as a particular location when the Location option is selected in the secondary drop-down menu, select that item in the legend.

Filtering Using Menu Selections

When you select Employees in the primary drop-down menu, the following options display in the secondary drop-down menu:

[Image: At a Glance panel with an employee filter dropdown selected, showing options for Status Classification, Location, Department, Shift, and Contact Info.]

Select one of the following options from the secondary drop-down menu to further filter the results:

Option — Description

Status Classification (previously displayed as Status) — Displays a chart and data table for employees by a status within a status classification that you can filter by clicking on a series bar in the chart. When you select the Status Classification option, a third menu automatically displays the Active (default), On Leave, and Terminated options to further filter the information. Selecting a third status classification refreshes the chart and table to display employees with the statuses within that class.

Location — Displays a chart and data table for employees by location. When you select Location, Department, or Shift, a third menu automatically displays a list of available options to filter the list further (default is All). Selecting a third option filters the data that already displays in the table. Note: Only employees that are in an Active status classification are included in the chart and table data for the Location, Department, and Shift options. In addition, any prior Status Classification selection (using the third drop-down menu) or filtering (using the chart) does not affect the data for Location, Department, and Shift.

Department — Displays a chart and data table for employees by department.

Shift — Displays a chart and data table for employees by shift.

Contact Info — Displays a data table that lists employee contact information, including their name, position, work phone, extension, cell phone, and work email address. This table includes the employee’s functional cell phone and work email links. For example, if you click the employee’s work email address, a separate window displays where you can launch the appropriate application to email that employee.

Note: Each time you make a selection in the secondary drop-down menu, the chart refreshes and a header pertaining to that selection displays above the chart, which lists the number of employees that apply to the selection. For example, if you select Status Classification and Active and the employees that meet that criteria numbers 48, the header displays “Employees by Status (48).”

Click the Client or Company in the header area to search for a different client company.

If the entire list of employees does not fit within the panel, you can click View all employees to display a scroll bar for navigating through the list. If you click the link to an employee, the Employee Details page opens.

When navigating through this list:

Note: These pagination controls continue to display for an employee status of 1000 or less, if you first page through using these controls for 1001 or more employees. However, if you don’t use the pagination controls, a scroll bar displays for an employee status of 1000 or less instead of pagination controls.

You can use the Employee search box to search for an employee using any part of the employee name. For example, a search for “smith” might display “Franklin-Smith, Diane.”

[Image: Employee search box for At a Glance panel]

After entering part of an employee name and pressing Enter, the data table re-displays all employees who match that criteria.

Note: If you clear the search term and press Enter, the table results revert to displaying all employees, which is the default.

Performing Other Functions

In addition, you can perform the following functions in the Employees data table:

Option Description
Employee Termination Select the Employee Termination option to access the Employee Termination form. The system pre-fills the employee’s ID in the form, so you can terminate that employee. After making the update, click Save to return to the Enhanced Dashboard. (Clicking Clear removes the selected employee’s information, so you can terminate a different employee.) > Note: Note the following when using this option: - If you make the employee termination effective as of the current or past effective date, the system refreshes the dashboard data with that update in the Status column after you click Save and the Employee Termination form closes. (If the effective date is in the future, no change displays.) - If you select an employee whose status is “Terminated” an error message displays, “<Employee Name> (<Employee ID>) is already terminated.” Click OK to return to the Enhanced Dashboard. (The Employee Termination form does not display.) - If your access to the Employee Termination form is set to Deny, the Employee Termination option does not display on the Actions menu.

Onboarding Tasks

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_OnboardingTasks.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_OnboardingTasks.htm

Onboarding Tasks

The Onboarding Tasks option on the Enhanced Dashboard is used to view information about active onboarding workflows.

When this option is selected in the first drop-down, a color-coded pie chart displays to indicate the number of workflows in each status and the percentage of total active workflows made up by each status. In addition, a list of employees who have an active workflow displays in the data table, and additional drop-downs display to allow the user to filter the chart and table based on which forms remain outstanding and time period.

Note: Note: The data table only displays employees to which the user has been granted access using the Users form (See Editing a User).

Viewing the New Hire Task List

In the data table, click an employee’s name in the New Hire column to display the New Hire Task List, where a list of the forms included in the employee’s workflow can be reviewed.

[Image: screenshot]

Field Description
Tasks performed by The new hire completing the tasks.
Workflow Status The status of the new hire workflow. - Not Started: Forms in the workflow have not been started - In Progress: At least one form has been started - Complete: All forms, Including the I‑9 Section 2, are complete

Click the Actions link for an employee to display a list of additional functions that can be performed for the employee.

The following options display:

Option — Description

Send Reminder — This option is used to send a message to the employee to remind them to complete their onboarding workflow. The template for this message can be customized using the Message Templates form (See Maintaining Message Templates (Onboarding)).

========================================================================

Viewing Recent Payrolls

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_Recent_Payrolls.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Enhanced_Dashboard_Recent_Payrolls.htm

Viewing Recent Payrolls

When you select Recent Payrolls in the primary drop-down menu of the At a Glance panel, the recent payrolls for the selected client display. For example:

[Image: At a Glance panel with the ‘Recent Payrolls’ option selected, listing scheduled payroll batches]

You can perform the following functions using this feature:

Note: If you clear the search term and press Enter, tab out of the field, or click the search icon (

[Image: Magnifying glass]

), the table results revert to displaying all payrolls, which is the default.

Note: The sorting function is disabled when five hundred or more records display and pagination is enabled.

[Image: Payroll Reports panel, listing date, time, user and title of reports that were run, with output status and options to download.]

========================================================================

Selecting Default Menus with ESS Menu Builder

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Default_Menu_Builder.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Default_Menu_Builder.htm

Selecting Default Menus with ESS Menu Builder

Select default menus for Employee Portal (EP) with ESS Menu Builder. These menus are used for clients that haven’t defined their own menus.

[Image: screenshot]

Adding Menu Headers and Menu Items

Menu headers are the top-level menus seen by EP users.

To do this Perform these steps
Add a new header 1. Click New Menu Header. The Add a New Menu Structure window displays. [Image: screenshot] 2. Enter a menu header label in the Text field. This displays in EP on the menu tile. 3. In the Tool-Tip Text field, enter the text that appears when hovering the mouse over the menu header. 4. Enter the main page web URL for a menu in the Link field. 5. Display a menu icon by entering the Image URL, which is the file path for the image. For example, img/flatimages/svg/tiles/myself.svg. See ESS Menu Tile Images for a list of available images and the associated file path. 6. Click Save. You return to the ESS Menu Builder form, which displays the new header. 7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 to create a new menu, or click Save.
  1. Click New Menu Header. The Add a New Menu Structure window displays. [Image: screenshot]
  2. Enter a menu header label in the Text field. This displays in EP on the menu tile.
  3. In the Tool-Tip Text field, enter the text that appears when hovering the mouse over the menu header.
  4. Enter the main page web URL for a menu in the Link field.
  5. Display a menu icon by entering the Image URL, which is the file path for the image. For example, img/flatimages/svg/tiles/myself.svg. See ESS Menu Tile Images for a list of available images and the associated file path.
  6. Click Save. You return to the ESS Menu Builder form, which displays the new header.
  7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 to create a new menu, or click Save. | Edit header text | 1. Click the edit icon [Image: screenshot] in the header box. The Edit Menu Header window opens. The fields are the same as Add a New Menu Structure. 2. Edit the items as needed. 3. Click Save. |
  8. Click the edit icon [Image: screenshot] in the header box. The Edit Menu Header window opens. The fields are the same as Add a New Menu Structure.
  9. Edit the items as needed.
  10. Click Save. | Add menu items | Drag items from the Available Menu Items list to the rectangle below the appropriate header. 1. Click the name of a menu header to expand it. 2. Click and hold an available menu item you want to add. 3. Drag the item to the rectangle under the menu header and wait until the cursor changes to a + sign. 4. Release the mouse button. The menu item now appears in the menu structure. 5. Rearrange sub-menu items by dragging and dropping them within the list. 6. Delete sub-menu items by clicking the trash can icon. 7. Click Save. [Image: screenshot] |
  11. Click the name of a menu header to expand it.
  12. Click and hold an available menu item you want to add.
  13. Drag the item to the rectangle under the menu header and wait until the cursor changes to a + sign.
  14. Release the mouse button. The menu item now appears in the menu structure.
  15. Rearrange sub-menu items by dragging and dropping them within the list.
  16. Delete sub-menu items by clicking the trash can icon.
  17. Click Save. Related Topics

Maintaining System Parameters

ESS Menu Tile Images

========================================================================

Customizing ESS with the Theme Designer

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Default_Theme_Designer.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Default_Theme_Designer.htm

Customizing ESS with the Theme Designer

Use the ESS Default Theme Designer to customize the default appearance of for your organization.

[Image: screenshot]

To do this Perform these steps
Define the colors for each item Enter the Hex color code or click the drop icon [Image: screenshot] to select the color from a palette. The last column displays a swatch of that color. Colors can be defined for text and tiles, title bars, header bars, the breadcrumb bar, and the background.
Upload a company logo 1. Click Choose File for the Logo Image. 2. Navigate to the image file location and select it. 3. Click Openand then click Upload.
  1. Click Choose File for the Logo Image.
  2. Navigate to the image file location and select it.
  3. Click Openand then click Upload. | Upload a background image | 1. Click Choose File for the Background Image. 2. Navigate to the background image file location and select it. 3. Click Openand then click Upload. |
  4. Click Choose File for the Background Image.
  5. Navigate to the background image file location and select it.
  6. Click Openand then click Upload. | Remove a logo or background image | Click Delete next to the image, then click Save Theme. The image is not deleted from the theme until after changes are saved. | Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Maintaining ESS Menus

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Menu_Definitions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Menu_Definitions.htm

Maintaining ESS Menus

Maintain ESS Menu items with the ESS Menu Definition form.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select ESS Menu Definitions.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Select an existing menu item to make changes. A red asterisk indicates a required field.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Menu Item — Description

Menu Title — Name that displays in EP.

Menu Tooltip — Text that displays when hovering the mouse over the menu header.

Menu Code — Enter a unique code.

Is this Menu for a Single Sign On — Enable for menu items that connect to different products using single-sign on. Additional fields display when this option is enabled. Options include: - Select a Single Sign On - Product that launches when an ESS user selects this menu item. - SSO Service Name, SSO Description, SSO Base URL - Remaining fields that display when SSO is turned on.

Internal Component or External Site — Menu item links to an Internal Component or an External Site. Enter the Internal Component or External URL address.

Menu Image — Displays a menu icon. Supply the file path to the image (for example, img/flatimages/svg/tiles/myself.svg).

Additional Params — Optional parameters that you can add to the menu.

  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining System Parameters

Establishing SSO Services

ESS Menu Tile Images

========================================================================

Setting ESS Menu Tile Images

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Menu_Tile_Images_System.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/ESS_Menu_Tile_Images_System.htm

Setting ESS Menu Tile Images

PrismHR ships with a set of images for use with top-level menus in Employee Portal (EP).

[Image: screenshot]

In the Menu Header editor, enter the Image URL as img/flatimages/svg/tiles/{imagefile}. For example, img/flatimages/svg/tiles/myself.svg.

Image Image File Image Image File
[Image: screenshot] 401k.svg [Image: screenshot] myself.svg
[Image: screenshot] onboarding.svg [Image: screenshot] envelope.svg
[Image: screenshot] enrollment.svg [Image: screenshot] documents.svg
[Image: screenshot] benefits.svg [Image: screenshot] password.svg
[Image: screenshot] heart_health.svg [Image: screenshot] password_change.svg
[Image: screenshot] benefits_summary.svg [Image: screenshot] payroll_inquiry_1.svg
[Image: screenshot] fsa.svg [Image: screenshot] piggy_bank.svg
[Image: screenshot] direct_deposit_auth.svg [Image: screenshot] ESS_UI_1.22.15-11.svg
[Image: screenshot] direct_deposit.svg [Image: screenshot] pto_pending.svg
[Image: screenshot] check_history_1.svg [Image: screenshot] pto.svg
[Image: screenshot] direct_deposit_1.svg [Image: screenshot] time.svg
[Image: screenshot] eew4.svg [Image: screenshot] counter_clock.svg
[Image: screenshot] payroll.svg [Image: screenshot] turning_page.svg
[Image: screenshot] payroll_inquiry.svg [Image: screenshot] w2.svg
[Image: screenshot] ESS_UI_1.22.15-24.svg [Image: screenshot] early_w2_election.svg
[Image: screenshot] help.svg

========================================================================

Favorites

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Favorites.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Favorites.htm

Designating Favorites

You can select forms in PrismHR as Favorites that you access frequently. Favorites are listed on the Dashboard when you first log in to the system. You can also access them from the Favorites menu.

To add a form to Favorites, click the form’s Action menu and select Add to Favorites.

When a form is in your Favorites, the Action menu displays Remove from Favorites. Select this option to remove the form from your list of Favorites.

========================================================================

Importing Favorites

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Favorites_Template_Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Favorites_Template_Import.htm

Importing Favorites

You can use the Favorites Template Import form to pre-populate user favorites by importing the forms identified in the Template Process IDs panel, with the flexibility to add or remove those favorites templates in the future.

There are two sections in this form: Favorites Template and Import User Favorites. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

To create and import a favorites template:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. On the System|Change menu, select Favorites Template Import to access the favorites import utility. The Favorites Template Import form displays.

  3. Expand the Favorites Template panel.

  4. Enter a new Template ID, or enter or select an existing template. Do the following:

  1. — For a new template ID, enter the Template Description (must be one word and only contain alpha-characters).
b. For an existing template ID, the Template Description and Template Process IDs display.

Note: You can update the Template Description, but not the Template ID.

  1. Enter or select the process IDs for the forms to associate with the template in the Process field. (You must select at least one process ID.) If you select the process IDs from the Select User Process list, click Done to add them. The Name displays.

Note: The Select User Process list displays the available Process IDs and their Process Description. (The system only displays process IDs that can be added to a user role in the User Role Maintenance list in the User Roles form.)

  1. Click Save. A message displays, “Saving an existing Favorites Template will not update Users Favorites. Do you wish to continue?” Click Yes to continue.

  2. To use the sample import file template, select Download Sample Header File and download the template.

  3. Select Upload File in the Import User Favorites panel to upload a new or existing template.

  4. Select Add Files, select the template, then select Start Upload. Click Close. The uploaded template name displays.

  5. Click Import. After the import finishes, the system adds the identified forms to the user’s existing favorites list.

  6. Click View Transaction Report to download the import details. (This report lists whether the update was successful for each User ID and the Template ID.)

Note: If both the User ID and the Template ID in a row are invalid, the report lists the error on a separate line in the report.

Note: To delete an existing favorites template, simply enter or select the template and click Delete in the Favorites Template panel. A message displays, “This will delete the Favorites Template. Do you wish to continue?” Click Yes.

========================================================================

File Master Listing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/File%20Master%20Listing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/File Master Listing.htm

File Master Listing

Use this form to generate a list of PrismHR files, their general purposes and the associated key structures.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form click Reports. Under System|Report click File Master Listing.

To generate the File Master Listing:

  1. Open the form. The File Master Listing displays the following columns:

========================================================================

Creating FLSA Exemption Categories

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/FLSA_Exemption_Category.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/FLSA_Exemption_Category.htm

Creating FLSA Exemption Categories

You can group and sort FLSA exemption category codes using the FLSA Exemption Category form.

To create a new FLSA exemption category code:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select FLSA Exemption Category under System|Change.

  3. Enter an FLSA Exemption Category Code that represents that represents an FLSA exemption category. For example, ADMIN or Q1.

  4. Enter an FLSA Exemption Category Description.

  5. Click Save.

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

FLSA Ruleset

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/FLSA_Ruleset.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/FLSA_Ruleset.htm

FLSA Ruleset

Use the FLSA Ruleset form to establish parameters for the Fair Labor Standards Act (FLSA).

FLSA Ruleset

The FLSA Ruleset panel describes the FLSA Ruleset and how to report overtime.

  1. Enter the FLSA Ruleset ID, something brief but descriptive.

  2. Enter a description of the FLSA ruleset in the Reference field.

  3. Select the Reporting Method for overtime:

Overtime Hours Reported Separately

Use the Overtime Reporting Method panel to enter the pay code used only to track overtime pay.

  1. Enter the Premium Pay Code. This should be a pay code defined with the appropriate factor, for example, 0.5.

  2. Click Save.

Straight Hours Reported on One Pay Code

Use the Straight Reporting Method and Daily Overtime Rules panels to define how to calculate overtime. The number of hours you enter triggers the overtime calculations.

Straight Reporting Method

Use the Straight Reporting Method panel to enter the weekly number of hours for each level of overtime.

  1. Enter the number of hours worked on a weekly basis for this level in the When Hours Worked in a Week Are Greater Than field. For example, 40.

  2. In the Pay Excess Hours with Pay Code field, enter the pay code used to pay employees who work overtime at this level.

  3. Click Save.

Daily Overtime Rules

Use the Daily Overtime Rules panel to define the parameters for daily calculations.

  1. Rule for Calculating Daily Overtime:
  1. Rule for Calculating Premium Pay for Consecutive Days Worked:
  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Common Issues with FLSA Rulesets

========================================================================

Form Library

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Form_Library.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Form_Library.htm

Form Library

Use the Form Library form to create and maintain forms, which are the components you use to build workflows for enrollments and onboarding.

This form is used only in Benefits Enrollment and in Onboarding.

Refer to the following:

========================================================================

Importing G/L Account Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/GL_Import_Entry.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/GL_Import_Entry.htm

Importing G/L Account Codes

You can use the G/L Import Entry form to quickly import account codes to the G/L setup by uploading a file for import and then viewing any errors that occurred during the import or viewing successfully imported rows.

To import G/L account codes:

  1. Enter or select the GL Template. The template name displays.

  2. Select the GL Type.

  3. Enable Overwrite Existing Account Codes to replace previously imported account codes. Otherwise, leave this field blank and the system will only import new codes.

  4. Select Download Template File to download a .txt file to your computer that contains the headings that match the selected GL Type. A separate window displays the downloaded file link.

  5. Click Open File. The spreadsheet template displays, where you can enter the G/L account codes information.

  6. Select Find File. Click Add Files and select the file to upload, then click Start Upload.

  7. Click Close. A progress window displays.

Note: If an error occurs a message displays, “It may be possible to recover from this error. Do you want to repeat your last action?” Click OK.

  1. Click Close. The import process extracts account codes from the external file.

Note: Note the following:

  1. A preview of imported G/L account codes displays in the G/L Import Data panel.

Note: You can download a .csv version of this information by clicking Preview Report.

  1. If the import process encounters errors, you can select one of the following:

========================================================================

Defining and Applying Global PEO Accounting Templates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global%20PEO%20Client%20Accounting%20Templates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global PEO Client Accounting Templates.htm

Defining and Applying Global PEO Accounting Templates

The Global PEO Client Accounting Templates allow you the flexibility to define and apply a PEO accounting template for related clients globally without having to repeat the setup on a client-by-client basis. A service provider with a PEO Client that has sister companies might want all their accounting to be set up the same, for example, a chain of hotels. You can define a Global PEO Client Accounting Template and then select it in the Global Account Template field in the PEO Client Accounting form. From there, you will only have to enter any overrides a client might have in the individual PEO Client Accounting form for that client. These account codes can be replaced by the invoice format. If items are to be summarized on the invoice format, an account number there will replace these.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

Caution: The client accounting templates that prepare downloads must be of specific design to work correctly. Please make sure you understand the format requirements before making changes here.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under System|Change, click Global PEO Client Accounting Templates.

To change the Global PEO Client Accounting Templates:

  1. Access the Global PEO Client Accounting Templates form in the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following:

Field Name Description
Accounting Template ID - To create a new global client accounting template that can be shared by multiple clients, enter the name of global Accounting Template here. - To change a global client existing accounting template, enter the client accounting template ID or click the Accounting Template ID link and select the one that you want to change from the Select Global Accounting Template dialog box.
  1. Click Save to either save the new global client accounting template or save the changes made to an existing global client accounting template. Upon saving, the form is cleared.

  2. Click Delete to delete an existing global client accounting template any time.

  3. Click Clear to clear this form.

========================================================================

Configuring Client-specific Global PTO Override Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global%20PTO%20Client%20Override.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global PTO Client Override.htm

Configuring Client-specific Global PTO Override Rules

Use the Global PTO Client Override form to view and configure client-specific Global PTO override rules.

You can only access form using the Client Global PTO Maintenance form. Click the New Rule button on this form to open the Global PTO Client Override form. (You will not find this form from the search bar.)

To configure client-specific Global PTO override rules:

  1. Complete the following fields:

Field Name — Description

Employee Type — Select groups of employees based on their Employee Type to override the existing global pto enroll and accrual logic. Select either Include or Exclude from the drop-down for one more Employee Type. You can manually enter them here. Click the Employee Type hyperlink and select them from the Select Employee Type Codes dialog box.

Pay Method — Select groups of employees based on their pay method to override the existing global pto enroll and accrual logic. Select either Include or Exclude from the drop-down for one or more of the following pay methods: - Hourly - Salary - Variable Salary - Commission - Driver

State Code — Enter the state for which the override rule applies. Enter a two-digit State code that has NOT already been added to the Excluded Plans By State grid on the Client Global PTO Maintenance form.

PTO Benefit Plan — Select the PTO Benefit Plan that the override rule applies to. Select a Global PTO Benefit Plan ID available for the selected state from the drop-down.

Override PTO Plan ID — Select an existing Global PTO Benefit Plan to replace the Global PTO Benefit Plan set in the PTO Benefit Plan field. This is a required field unless the Exempt employees from accruals in this PTO Benefit Plan field is checked.

Exempt employees from accruals in this PTO Benefit Plan — Check this field to exempt employees from accruals in this PTO Benefit Plan for the client. Note: When you check this field, the Override PTO Plan ID field will be cleared.

  1. Click Save to save the changes for the client-specific Global PTO override rule. You cannot save this form if:
  1. Click Close to close this form and return to the Client Global PTO Maintenance form.

========================================================================

Setting Global Approval Policies

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global_Approval_Policies.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global_Approval_Policies.htm

Setting Global Approval Policies

There are many places in PrismHR where actions require approvals before they are finalized. Examples of this include new hires, pay rate changes, and client payroll approvals. Approval policies are defined at the global or client level. See Setting Approval Policies to learn about creating client-level approval policies.

Each approval policy specifies who must approve an action before it is finalized. There are different approval levels. Client worksite personnel can approve actions (for example, a pay rate change entered for an employee by a departmental manager), and a service provider’s internal staff can approve actions. Approval policies might also require approval from both worksite and service provider users.

Note: Note: Click View All Policies to view the policies defined for your organization, and select one to edit.

At the global level, policies for each approval type can be defined by service type. For example, you can define that all payroll approvals for PEO clients must be approved by any client worksite user who has the Payroll Authorizer role assigned to their user account.

Note: Note: When service providers enter HR-related changes, those changes go through without requiring approvals. Only payroll-related processes made by service providers are subject to approval policies.

To set global approval policies:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select Global Approval Policies under System|Change.

  3. Fill in the fields as required.

Field Description
Service Type Select a service type. Some of the options available are Payroll Only and Professional Employer.
Approval Type The type of action that requires approval. Some of the options available are Direct Deposit Change , ACH Maximum, Late Payroll Posting , New Hire , Position Change , and Leave of Absence . You can use the Payroll Approval (Multistep) option to set up a multi-step payroll approval process. (See the PrismHRApprovals Guide.) Note: The ACH Maximum option is only available for service providers. > Note: Note the following about the Approval Type options: - Selecting Direct Deposit Change requires approval at the client or global level to store direct deposit information in the employee details record. (After approval, the direct deposit follows the regular prenote process, if one is in place.) - Selecting Late Payroll Posting stops payrolls from being posted on or after the ACH Late Payroll Posting date and time during the finalization process, which prevents the payroll from finalizing until it is approved by a user in accordance with the applicable Approval Policy configuration. Note: To stop a payroll from finalizing, the client must have ACH billing configured on the Billing tab on the Client Details form by selecting one of the following statuses in the ACH Status field, Active, ACH by Division, or ACH by Location. In addition, the approval observes the positive or negative value in the Adjust to ACH Bill Day field, which adjusts the processing of the ACH if it is different from the employee pay date. - You can use the ACH Maximum option to create or update an ACH Maximum Approval policy at the client or global level. Note: Service providers who have Inquiry access to the Approval Policies and Global Approval Policies forms can view existing ACH Maximum Approval policies in read-only format and cannot make updates to the policy setup.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Setting Global Configuration

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global_Configuration.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global_Configuration.htm

Setting Global Configuration

Set up system-level functionality with the Global Configuration form, which can enable or disable major features such as Onboarding and Benefits Enrollment. It also controls user home pages and some user security features. (For more information on these features, see the appropriate user guide.)

Enabling the Enhanced Dashboard

The Enhanced Dashboard provides quick access to company information and relevant features. (See Using the Enhanced Dashboard.)

To enable this dashboard:

  1. Click Back Office, then select Global Configuration on the System|Change menu.

  2. In the Home Form field, enter HRPY.WORK_ENHANCED.DASH.

  3. Click Save.

Note: Note: You can only view the Enhanced Dashboard if permissions allow you to view it. (See Defining User Roles for details on adding this menu to a user role.)

Once the dashboard is enabled, it is available through Search.

Setting Up System-level Functionality

To set up system-level functionality:

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Name Description
Product Version Select one of the following options: - Professional: Configures the system to provide services to clients. - Corporate: Configures the system for internal payroll and HR services (that is, for employees of your own organization). > Note: Note the following: - A warning displays if you change the Product Version. Click OK to continue. (If you did not intend to change the Product Version, you can reset it to the original version.) - If you enabled the BLENDED-STAFFING custom feature code and need to change the Product Version from Corporate to Professional, you must disable this custom feature code and log out/in again to ensure the system applies the correct version update and the Corporate/Staffing Accounting option no longer displays on the Actions menu.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Defining Users

========================================================================

Configuring Global New Hire and Dependent Fields

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global_New_Hire_Fields.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global_New_Hire_Fields.htm

Configuring Global New Hire and Dependent Fields

Specify whether fields are optional or required for standard and onboarded new hires and employee dependents on the New Hire and Dependent Required Fields (Global) form. The new hire fields display on the New Hire form. The dependents fields display on the Employee Dependents form.

Note: Note: These fields apply only to clients that do not have custom override settings applied. For instance, fields that are not flagged as required on the New Hire and Dependent Required Fields (Global) form but have been flagged as required on the New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides form (located in the Client menu under Client|Action| New Hire and Dependent Field Overrides) override the global settings for the specified clients.

To indicate global required field settings for the New Hire and Employee Dependents forms:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select New Hire and Dependent Required Fields (Global) under System|Change.

  3. For each of the New Hires fields, indicate whether it is mandatory:

  1. For each of the Dependents fields, indicate whether it is mandatory:
  1. Click Save.

Note: Clicking Cancel while editing this form reverts the form to the state it was initially in when you first accessed the form (if you have performed no Save actions) OR reverts the form to the state it was in after the most recent Save action (so that only unsaved changes are removed).

========================================================================

Printing Setup for Global Payroll Reports

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global_Payroll_Reports.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global_Payroll_Reports.htm

Printing Setup for Global Payroll Reports

Select reports that print during payrolls for all clients with the Global Payroll Reports form. You can also set reports at the global level. See Using Report Parameters Feature, managed in the Client Details Actions menu.)

[Image: screenshot]

Related Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Maintaining Global PTO Benefit Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global_PTO_Benefit_Plans.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global_PTO_Benefit_Plans.htm

Maintaining Global PTO Benefit Plans

Use the Global PTO Benefit Plans form to set up and maintain rules for PTO carryover and accrual on the system level.

You can then assign these plans to particular states or GeoCode ranges on the State Rules form. For details about this process, see the article on Setting Up Global PTO Plans.

Setting Up Basic Rules

This panel defines the general rules for accruing and carrying over global PTO hours.

To configure a global PTO benefit plan:

  1. Click Back Office > System|Change > Global PTO Benefit Plans.

  2. Enter or select a Global PTO Benefit Plan ID. Use the Copy from another plan option if you want to use an existing plan as your template.

  3. Enter a brief Plan Description.

  4. Specify the Global PTO Register Type that will track accumulations and PTO usage under this benefit plan. You cannot assign a Global PTO Register Type to more than one global PTO benefit plan. For more information, see Setting Up Global PTO Register Types.

  5. Fill out the remaining fields as needed. These settings behave like the ones on the client-level PTO Benefit Plans form (see Defining Time Off Plans). Refer to the table for field-level guidance.

Field — Description

Annual Carryover — Enter the maximum number of unused hours that employees can carry over from one plan year to the next.

Lifetime Maximum Carryover — Enter the maximum number of unused hours that employees can carry over for the duration of their employment. This includes all plan years, starting from the employee start date.

Negative Carryover — Select this option if negative hour amounts, as recorded in the PTO register of the employee, can carry over from one year to the next.

Carryover Expiration — If you want employee PTO hours to expire a certain number of days, months or pay periods after the new year, enter that time frame here. Leave this field blank if hours do not expire.

Expiration Period — Define whether the Carryover Expiration field specifies the number of days, months, or pay periods.

Suppress Print Method — Use these fields if you want to suppress printing of PTO hours on pay stubs. For the amount of time (days or months) specified in these fields, the system will not print the PTO balance on any payroll check stubs. The balance will not display in Employee Portal either.

Add To Balance On First Accrual — Enter a flat amount to add to the accrual balance when the first accrual triggers for any employee assigned to this PTO benefit plan. Note: This amount only applies to plans with a Calculation Basis of Flat Amount or Hours Worked (by Months).

Plan Starts — Enter the date when employee paid time off begins accruing under this plan.

Plan Expires — Enter the PTO benefit expiration date. After this date, no paid time off accrues for this plan.

Usage Waiting Period — Specify the amount of time after an employee’s original hire date during which the system will suppress PTO accrual. Using the text field and the drop-down, enter the number of hours, days, or months until employees can request time off, if appropriate for this PTO benefit plan. The value must be a whole number. For the amount of time specified here, accrued time off will not display as “available” on pay stubs / advices. If an employee leaves the company and is then rehired, the system uses the original hire date, not the rehire date.

Max Usage Limit Per Plan Year — Enter the maximum number of PTO hours an employee can use in a given plan year. This works in tandem with the Stop Init If Exceed Limit setting.

Stop Init If Exceed Limit — Select this option if you want the system to stop time sheet calculation / initialization whenever one or more employees on that time sheet exceed the Max Use Limit per Plan Year.

  1. Continue to the next panel.

Hourly Accrual and Accrual Thresholds

In order to accrue hours based on hours worked, you must assign pay codes to the benefit plan.

  1. Complete the tables in this panel:
  1. Continue to the next panel (Flat Amount per Hours Worked).

  2. Click Save when finished.

Flat Amount per Hours Worked

Use this panel to associate a certain number of hours worked with the accrual of a certain amount of PTO hours.

Setting Maximum Accruals and Stopping Accruals

The following conditions apply to the values in the Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year and Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches fields:

List of Options

Fill out the fields in this panel, as needed:

Field or Fields — Description

Accrue a flat X hours for every Y hours worked. — X = number of PTO hours that employees can accrue after working a certain number of hours. For example, 1.00. Y = number of hours that employees must work to accrue the value in X. For example, 40.00.

If the actual hours worked are not an even multiple of YY.YY hours worked then accrue a fraction of the XX.XX hours (where X and Y are defined in the field above) — Select this option to accrue a fraction of PTO hours if employee hours worked are not an even multiple of the hours specified in the fields above.

Maximum Amount Accrued Per Year — Specify the maximum number of PTO hours to accrue in a year. See the section below for more information about the logic behind this field.

Stop Accrual if Balance Reaches — Specify the number of accrued PTO hours after which employees do not accrue any more. See the section below for more information about the logic behind this field.

Apply Carryover toward Maximum Accrual Per Year — When this field is checked, accruals will stop when Carryover Hours plus the Accrued Hours reach the Maximum Amount Accrued per Year. No additional accruals will be made for the remainder of the year. For example, if the “Maximum Amount Accrued per Year” is 40 hours, and the Carryover Hours is 39 hours, the employee can only accrue 1 hour for the current year.

Apply Current Hours Taken before applying Stop-Balance limits — Select this option to subtract the number of PTOhours used before applying a stop-balance limit to employee hour accrual. If you do not select this option, the system ignores any used PTO hours when it stops new hour accrual for an employee.

Maximum Hours That Can Be Used in a Block — Enter the maximum number of PTO hours that can be used in a single block.

========================================================================

Setting Up Global PTO Register Types

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Global_PTO_Register_Types.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Global_PTO_Register_Types.htm

Setting Up Global PTO Register Types

Use the Global PTO Register Types form to set up PTO register types for plans that are not client-specific. For details about the Global PTO feature set, please see Setting Up Global PTO Plans.

PTO registers track the usable hours of PTO that employees accrue over the course of the year. The events that trigger PTO accrual, and the strict definition of “year”, are defined on this form. After setting up these rules, you can assign these type codes on the Register Types table, located on the PTO Absence Codes form. For more information, see Creating Time Off Absence Codes.

Setting Up Basic Parameters

Note: Note: You cannot set up a global PTO register type code with the same ID as a client-level PTO register type.

To set up a global PTO register type:

  1. Click Back Office > System|Change > Global PTO Register Types.

  2. Enter a unique Global PTO Type Code.

  3. Enter a Description of the global PTO register type.

  4. Select the Year End Basis – the means by which the system measures the end of a year (Anniversary or Fiscal).

  5. Specify a Fiscal End Month and Day.

  6. In the Trigger Method field, select Pay Period Acrrual.

  7. Set the optional parameters below, as needed.

  8. Click Save.

Optional Parameters

Set the following parameters as needed:

Field Description
Trigger Date Select the date through which the accrual calculation is triggered. The options vary based on the selected Trigger Method.
Print on Check Select whether to print balances for this register type on employee check stubs from the following options: - Always – The Global Register will always print on the employee check when associated with the employee record. - Never - The Global Register will never print on the employee check when associated with the employee record. - If Used/Accrued Only – The Global Register will only print on the employee check if - the employee is paid in a worksite that triggers that Global Register or - a Pay Code linked to the absence code triggers that Global Register (appearing on the PTO tab of the current payroll voucher)

Importing Client Benefit Plans

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Importing%20Company%20Benefit%20Plans.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Importing Company Benefit Plans.htm

Importing Client Benefit Plans

After you complete the steps for setting up a group benefit plan at the system level (see the Benefits Administration Guide for detailed information), you can begin the steps for importing the client benefit plan. After that, you must set up a data file and a benefit import definition.Important! Client Access Group security is enabled on this form. Only service providers can use the Client Benefit Plan Import form to import client benefit plans from an external text file.

Admin Surcharge Message

If a user attempts to import client benefit plans and the import file contains data for any of the Admin Surcharge fields, the system displays the following message when the user attempts to validate the import file:

The Admin Surcharge feature is not available in this release.

This error message blocks the user from importing the file. The user must edit the file and remove the Admin Surcharge field values in order to continue with the import process.

The Admin Surcharge feature will be available in a future release.

To import client benefit plans:

  1. On the Work Centers panel, under Benefits, click Benefit Imports & Reporting.

  2. Under Benefit Imports, click Client Benefit Plan Import.

  3. Click Upload File and then Choose File to select the data file. Alternatively, you can first download a sample header file by clicking the Download Sample Header File link on the Client Benefit Plan Import.

After you click the Download Sample Header File link, the system downloads or prompts for download a sample header file that displays columns and headers that match each column and description for the import template option. Also, the file displays a title that matches the selected option.

Note: Note: The header file is in .csv format. You can save the file in .csv or .txt format. Additionally, a the sample import file also contains the a column for Only apply to S-Corp Principal Employees.

  1. Click Submit. A confirmation message displays.

  2. Click Close.

Next, validate the import:

  1. Click Validate Import File.

  2. When the process is complete, click Close.

  3. Click Import.

  4. When the process is complete, click Close. The data file imported.

  5. Click Print Import Report. The Company Benefit Plan Import Report opens.

  6. Click the XLS link to download the report.

========================================================================

Adding Messages to Invoices

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Invoice%20Messaging.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Invoice Messaging.htm

Adding Messages to Invoices

Use the Invoice Messaging form to add messages to the invoices.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under System|Change, click Invoice Messaging.

To set up invoice messaging:

  1. Complete the following:

Field Name — Description

Invoice Msg ID — Enter the Invoice Message overlay to add to the invoice or click the Invoice Msg ID link and select one from the Select Invoice Msg dialog box.

Invoice Name — This field is optional. Enter the name to display on the invoice. > Note: Note: It will replace the Employer Name on the Invoice.

Invoice Phone — This field is optional. Enter the phone number to be displayed on the Invoice for invoice questions.

Return Address 1 — This field is optional. Enter the Invoice return address. If the address is multi-line, then this is line 1. > Note: Note: If an address is entered, then it will be used as the return address on MVQ Invoices in place of Employer Address.

Return Address 2 — This field is optional. Enter the Invoice return address. If the address is multi-line, then this is line 2.

Return City — This field is optional. Enter the Invoice return city name.

Return State — This field is optional. Enter the Invoice return 2 character state code.

Return Zip Code — This field is optional. Enter the Invoice return zip code and zip extension if applicable.

Invoice Notes — This field is optional. These notes will be printed on each Invoice.

Positioning and Styling — Set up standard formatting for the invoice message.

Overlay Macro — This field is optional. Enter the path to the Invoice Overlay macro, if different than the system standard overlay. If no overlay should be used, enter NONE here to bock all.

  1. Click Save to save the changes.

========================================================================

Labor Distribution Report Formats

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Labor%20Distribution%20Report%20Formats.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Labor Distribution Report Formats.htm

Labor Distribution Report Formats

Use this form to determine how the columns are configured on the Labor Distribution Report in PrismHR.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under System|Change, click Labor Distribution Report Formats.

To configure the Labor Distribution Report Formats:

  1. Complete the following:

Field Name — Description

Client ID — Enter the ID for the client these settings apply to.

Include other earnings — Normally pay amounts that appear on the Other Earnings tab of the voucher display are not included on this report. Check this box if you want to include pay amounts in this report that are other earnings.

Save Global — Check this box if you want to save this configuration as the global parameters for this report. These options will become the default parameters used for this report, if a Client level parameter is not set.

Delete Global — Check this box to delete the global parameters for this report. If there is no global parameters record, the system defaults will become the default parameters used for this report, if a client level parameter is not set.

Report Columns - Click Add Column to add a column. Around 10 columns will typically fit on a printed (landscape) page. Additional columns will appear in the exported report, but may not be visible on a printout. Click Delete Column to delete a column.

Column Header Line 1 — Enter the first line of the column heading.

Column Header Line 2 — This field is optional. Leave blank if header is only one line.

Add all unlisted Pay Codes to this column — This field is optional. Check this box if you want to add any missing pay codes into this column. The last pay code is the only one that will be used.

Pay Code — Enter the pay codes to be reported under this column or click the Pay Code link and add them from the Select Pay Code dialog box. You can add multiple Pay Codes to combine them into a single “bundled” total.

  1. Click Save to save the report format.

========================================================================

Logo Path Maintenance

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Logo_Path_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Logo_Path_Maintenance.htm

Logo Path Maintenance

Use the Logo Path Maintenance form, accessed in the System ParametersActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

, to specify the logos you want to display in PEO and non-PEO invoices; see Setting Up Invoice Header Information for more information.

To update the logo path:

  1. Enter the PEO Invoice Global Logo File Path, which is the complete path to the location on the mvQuery print server for the logo image for PEO invoices.

  2. Enter the Non-PEO Invoice Global Logo File Path, which is the complete path to the location on the mvQuery print server for the logo image for non-PEO invoices.

Note: Note: The invoice employer entered in the Billing Tab in Client Details overrides the Non-PEO Invoice Global Employer entered below. The Non-PEO Invoice Global Employer is used only if there is no invoice employer entered inClient Details.

  1. Enter the Non-PEO Invoice Global Employer you want to use as the invoice employer. This information displays in the PDF version of the invoice, though not in the display invoice.

Note: Note: PEO Companies use the invoice employer associated with the invoice, as entered in the Client Details form.

  1. Click Accept.

========================================================================

Value Search

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Looking_Up_Values.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Looking_Up_Values.htm

Searching for Values

In PrismHR, a field or column label may provide a link that enables you to search for values. The user interface for searching depends on the selected form. For example, in some forms you can navigate through a list of available values using navigation keys. In other forms, you use scroll bars to navigate through the list of values.

Some fields accept only one value. Other fields accept multiple values.

Using Navigation Keys

This section is relevant for forms in which you select values for a field using navigation keys. The following example explains how to use navigation keys to find one or more values for the Position field.

To find available positions:

  1. Either press Ctrl + Enter while the cursor is in the field or click the Position link. The search window opens.

  2. To move through multiple pages of values, use the Pg Up or Pg Dn keys or click Previous and Next. You can go directly to a page by entering the page number in the Select Page field and then clicking Go To Page.

  3. Use the Refine Search fields to modify the search criteria. For example, enter some of the Employee ID or Sort Name.

  4. To select a value, enter the row number in the Select Row field or click the value in the list. You return to the previous screen and the selected value populates the field. If you know the value, you can simply enter it in the field instead of selecting it.

Using Scroll Bars

This section is relevant for forms in which you select values for a field using scroll bars. The following example explains how to use scroll bars to find a value for the Client ID field.

To find client IDs:

  1. Click the Client ID link. The Select Clients window opens.
  1. Select one or more clients. Totals are shown for the number of available clients and the number of selected clients.

Most employee search fields enable you to search for the employee directly from the Employee field. You can also click the field label link to use a search form.

If you choose to search from the field, type the first part of the employee’s name or ID and then select the name from the list. The list filters as you type.

========================================================================

Maintaining Custom Message Groups

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Message_Groups.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Message_Groups.htm

Maintaining Custom Message Groups

You can create and maintain custom groups of recipients that are contacted through the Message Center using the Message Groups form.

Note: Note: Message groups cannot be deleted if they are set up as notification recipients. See the Benefits Enrollment User Guide for information about managing notification recipients.

[Image: screenshot]

Creating or Maintaining a Message Group

To create or maintain a message group, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Message Groups from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Group Id — To edit an existing group, enter or select the group ID. The Group Name automatically displays. (You can make additional changes in the fields that display.)

New Group — To create a new group, click this field. NEW displays in the Group Id field.

Group Name — Enter a name that describes the group, such as Managers.

User List — Enter or select the User ID to add specific users to the group. The User Name automatically displays.

Company List — Enter or select the Company to add specific companies to the group. The Company ID automatically displays. You can refine the recipients further by specifying Dept, Division, Location, Project, and Shift, as required.

  1. Click Save.

Viewing the Audit Log for a Message Group

To view the Audit Log for an existing message group, click Audit on the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

. The File Audit form displays the Audit Log, which lists the changes.

========================================================================

Managing Messages

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Message_Review.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Message_Review.htm

Managing Messages

Manage messages with the Messages form, which displays messages sent through the system. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To Do this
Read a message Click Date Received, From, or Subject. The Message Review form displays. A check mark displays in the Read column for each message read. Messages display on this panel as follows: - Unread messages display in bold text at the top of the list - Messages display in chronological date order, with the newest messages displaying first. Note: Pagination controls display for clients who have more than 26 messages.

Note: Note: Not all forms are available to all users.

========================================================================

Using Substitution Variables

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Message_Substitution_Variables.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Message_Substitution_Variables.htm

Using Substitution Variables

Substitution variables are tags that you can use as placeholder text when building message template content. When generating the message, the system replaces the variable with data pulled from the system. Substitution variables are similar to mail merge fields in word processing programs. They give content a more personal impact and make it easier to customize and reuse content for multiple employees, clients, workflows, and enrollment periods.

Substitution variables behave differently depending on where you use them:

Specifying Substitution Variables for Messages

Substitution variables for messages behave differently based on the message type they are used for and only work in specific message types.

For example, you might set up a form for a workflow that includes text using the substitution variable for the employee’s name:

Welcome, <<EMPLOYEE.NAME>>!

When the employee views the form, the substitution variable is replaced by the employee’s name and displays as:

Welcome, Jane M. Smith!

Users can include the following substitution variables in both notifications and custom forms.

These variables are case-sensitive and you must type them exactly as shown in the Substitution Variable column.

Field Description Substitution Variable Message Types
Account Suffix Account suffix. <<ACCOUNT.SUFFIX>> Payday Notification
Support e-mail Set in Email Services, which is accessed through the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] in System Parameters. <<SUPPORT.EMAIL>> Password Reset, Password Reset Confirmation, and HR Approval
Client ID Client ID number. <<COMPANY.NO>> HR Approval and Payroll Reminder
Client Name Client name. <<COMPANY.NAME>> Payday Notification and Payroll Reminder
Client Name Client name and ID. <<CLIENT.NAME>> Payday Notification
Approval URL This takes the user to the main PrismHR login screen. You might want to include the URL as well as the menu path, such as, “Click the link to log in, then open the Client menu and select Approvals Pending: <<APPROVAL.URL>>” <<APPROVAL.URL>> HR Approval
Approval Type Type/Description of approval, such as Payroll or Leave Request. <<APPROVAL.TYPE>> HR Approval
Resolution of HR Action Either Approved or Denied. <> HR Actions Resolution
Employee Name Name of the employee to whom the approval applies. Note: The employee’s preferred name replaces their legal first name if it is listed in the Employee Details record. <<EMPLOYEE.NAME>> HR Approval
EP Password Reset Link One-time use unique link to reset a password using Employee Portal only. <> Password Reset ESS
Number of Live Checks Includes the number of live checks in a Payroll Finalization notification to help alert a worksite manager or other service provider that there is a check for printing or recording. (This is especially useful for clients that are paperless and do not normally have any paper checks, stubs, or reports to print.) > Note: Note the following: - The check count excludes arrearage voucher types, garnishments, third party checks, and direct deposit vouchers. - If there are employees with both Direct Deposit and a live check, the count includes that employee’s live check. <<LIVE.CHECK.COUNT>> Payroll Finalization Notification
- The check count excludes arrearage voucher types, garnishments, third party checks, and direct deposit vouchers.
- If there are employees with both Direct Deposit and a live check, the count includes that employee’s live check.
PTO Approver PTO approver. <<HR.SUPERVISOR>> HR Approval
Invoice Invoice for client’s payroll. <> Payroll Approval and Payroll Finalization Notification
Key One-time use unique validation key. <> MFA and Password Reset
Worksite Location Location related to the approval. <<WORKSITE.LOCATION>> HR Approval
Division Division related to the approval. <> HR Approval
Department Department related to the approval. <> HR Approval
Work Group Work group related to the approval. <> HR Approval
Position Code Code for the position. <<POSITION.CODE>> HR Approval and Employee Termination Approval
Position Title Title for the position. <<POSITION.TITLE>> HR Approval and Employee Termination Approval
Position Description Description of the position. <<POSITION.DESC>> HR Approval and Employee Termination Approval
Reason for Termination Reason employment was terminated. <<TERM.REASON>> HR Approval and Employee Termination Approval
Payroll Batch or Number Batch or number assigned to the payroll. <<PAYROLL.NO>> Payroll Approval and Payroll Reminder
Payroll Batch or Number Batch or number assigned to the payroll. <<PAYROLL.NUMBER>> Payroll Approval
Payroll Pay Date Date of the payroll; format is MM/DD/YYYY. <<PAYROLL.PAY.DATE>> Payday Notification and Payroll Reminder
Payroll Pay Date Date of the payroll; format is MM/DD/YYYY. <<PAY.DATE>> Payday Notification
PTO Benefit Plan Name of employee’s PTO benefit plan. <> HR Approval
PTO Hours Available Number of hours available in employee’s PTO balance. <> HR Approval
Cutoff Date Cutoff date for payroll. <<CUTOFF.DATE>> Payroll Reminder

Working with Substitution Variables for Onboarding

Substitution variables used in Onboarding are tags you can use as placeholder text when building content in custom forms and notifications.

For example, you might set up a form for a workflow that includes text using the substitution variable for the employee’s name:

Welcome, <>!

When the employee views the form, the substitution variable is replaced by the employee’s name and displays as:

Welcome, Jane M. Smith!

Users can include the following substitution variables in both notifications and custom forms.

These variables are case-sensitive and you must type them exactly as shown in the Substitution Variable column.

Field — Substitution Variable

Client ID — <>

Client Name (DBA) — <>

Client Legal Name — <>

Deny Approval Reason — <>

Employee ID — <>

Employee Name — <>

Employee Last Name — <>

Employee First Name — <>

Employee Middle Initial — <>

Employer Name — <>

Employer ID — <>

Payroll Representative — <>

Human Resources Representative — <>

Benefits Representative — <>

Email Address for user specified in the Payroll account assignment in Client Details — <>

Email Address for user specified in the Human Resources account assignment in Client Details — <>

Email Address for user specified in the Benefits account assignment in Client Details — <>

Location Name — <>

Location Code — <>

Employee Full Address — <

Division Name — <>

Position Title — <>

Hire Date — <>

Client EIN — <>

Employee Work Email — <>

Employee Personal Email — <>

Employer Phone — <>

Preferred Name — <>

Users can include the following variables in notifications only.

The fields pulled by these variables are set up at the system level in Employer Details. For more information, see the System Administration Guide. If these fields are not set up, the substitution variable uses system defaults.

Field Substitution Variable
ESS URL Employer Override <>
EP URL Employer Override <>
Prism URL Employer Override <>

Users can include the following variables in custom forms only.

Field — Substitution Variable

Service Provider Name — <>

Hire Due Date — <>

Workflow Due Date — <>

Direct Deposit Acceptance Text — <>

Client Phone Number — <>

Client Address — <>

Workers Comp Carrier Name — <>

Workers Comp Policy Number — <> > Note: Note: To determine the value for this variable, the system first checks the worksite location. If the worksite location includes a Workers Comp policy override, then the system uses that value for the <> substitution variable. If the worksite location does not include a Workers Comp policy override, then the system pulls the value for the <> substitution variable from the Client Master.

Working with Substitution Variables for Benefits Enrollment

Substitution variables in Benefits Enrollment are tags you can use as placeholder text when building content in custom forms and notifications.

For example, you might set up a form for a workflow that includes text using the substitution variable for the employee’s name:

Welcome, <>!

When the employee views the form, the substitution variable is replaced by the employee’s name and displays as:

Welcome, Jane M. Smith!

Users can include the following substitution variables in both notifications and custom forms.

These variables are case-sensitive and you must type them exactly as shown in the Substitution Variable column.

Field — Substitution Variable

Enrollment Effective Date — <>

Enrollment Start Date — <>

Enrollment End Date — <>

Client ID — <>

Client Name (DBA) — <>

Client Legal Name — <>

Employee ID — <>

Employee Name — <>

Employee Last Name — <>

Employee First Name — <>

Employee Middle Initial — <>

Employer Name — <>

Employer ID — <>

Payroll Representative — <>

Human Resources Representative — <>

Benefits Representative — <>

Email Address for user specified in the Payroll account assignment in Client Details — <>

Email Address for user specified in the Human Resources account assignment in Client Details — <>

Email Address for user specified in the Benefits account assignment in Client Details — <>

Location Name — <>

Location Code — <>

Employee Full Address — <

Division Name — <>

Position Title — <>

Hire Date — <>

Client EIN — <>

Employee Work Email — <>

Employee Personal Email — <>

Employer Phone — <>

Users can include the following variables in notifications only.

The fields pulled by these variables are set up at the system level in Employer Details. For more information, see the System Administration Guide. If these fields are not set up, the substitution variable uses system defaults.

Field Substitution Variable
ESS URL Employer Override <>
EP URL Employer Override <>
Prism URL Employer Override <>

Users can include the following variables in custom forms only.

Field — Substitution Variable

Service Provider Name — <>

Hire Due Date — <>

Workflow Due Date — <>

Direct Deposit Acceptance Text — <>

Client Phone Number — <>

Client Address — <>

Workers Comp Carrier Name — <>

Workers Comp Policy Number — <> > Note: Note: To determine the value for this variable, the system first checks the worksite location. If the worksite location includes a Workers Comp policy override, then the system uses that value for the <> substitution variable. If the worksite location does not include a Workers Comp policy override, then the system pulls the value for the <> substitution variable from the Client Master.

Related Topics

Maintaining Message Templates

Setting Up Automated Email Messages

Creating Custom Forms (Onboarding)

Setting Up Notification Templates (Onboarding)

Creating a Custom Form

Setting Up Notification Templates (Benefits Enrollment)

========================================================================

User Account Access with MFA

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Account_Access.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Account_Access.htm

User Account Access with MFA

Once a user triggers the MFA login process, the system sends an authorization code to the email address associated with the user’s account.

Note: Note: To use MFA, your organization must ensure that all users who might be affected have an email address on their accounts.

Related Topics

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

Configuring MFA Email Templates and Services

Defining Users

========================================================================

Configuring MFA Email Templates and Services

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Email_Templates_Services.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Email_Templates_Services.htm

Configuring MFA Email Templates and Services

You must set up an email template before implementing MFA. This template contains the text and passcode (the <> substitution variable) that users receive by email when they attempt log in.

Note: Note: Multi-factor authentication requires a message template. You can associate the message template with the MFA passcode email service.

  1. Open Message Templates (found in [Image: screenshot] under System|Change).

  2. Enter a Message ID (for example, MFA).

  3. Enter a Description (for example, MFA Template).

  4. Select the Content Type: TEXT or HTML.

  5. Enter the Subject line for emails that use this template.

  6. Enter the Body of the message. Be sure to include the <> substitution variable in the message. The user enters this when they log in with multi‑factor authentication. [Image: screenshot]

  7. Click Save in the Message Templates form.

Setting Up Email Services

Use Email Services to maintain the information PrismHR uses to send automatic email messages.

  1. Open System Parameters (found in [Image: screenshot] under System|Change).

  2. Select Email Services from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] .

  3. Complete these fields as required:

  4. Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP Server.

  5. Enter the SMTP Port number the server is listening on.

  6. Enter the Email Service URL.

  7. Enter the Support Email, which is the email address that recipients see for most messages.

  8. Enter an email address in sMFA Email that recipients see when they receive an email for multi‑factor authentication. This does not need to be an actual, monitored email account. However, you can use a monitored account for testing or to enable users to communicate if they have a problem.

Note: Note: The Benefits Security Email Subject field is for Benefits Enrollment. You can leave this field blank.

  1. Create a new line in the Email Templates table.

  2. Select MFA Passcode from the Template Type drop-down.

  3. Enter the ID of the template you created in the Template column (for example, MFA). The Description displays.

  4. Click Save, then click Save in System Parameters.

========================================================================

Enabling Multi-Factor Authentication

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Enabling.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Enabling.htm

Enabling Multi-Factor Authentication

Your organization can enable multi-factor authentication security at the system, client, or user level. After the number of days is specified in Authentication Services, affected users are prompted to request an authorization. This authentication applies to each device used to access PrismHR (computer, tablet, and so on).

Enabling System-Level MFA

Enabling MFA at the system level affects all service provider, worksite manager, and worksite trusted advisor users, and the period applies to all levels of authentication.

To enable MFA for the entire system:

  1. Open System Parameters (found in [Image: screenshot] under System|Change).

  2. Select Authentication Services from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] .

  3. Set the sMFA Device Expiration period.

  4. Set the sMFA Device Expiration for Employee Portal period.

  5. Set the sMFA Security Code Access method to Email (default) and/or SMS (text sent to mobile device). This determines where security codes are sent during the Account Access Confirmation process.

  1. Optional: Select IP Whitelist Skips sMFA. This feature applies only to PrismHRand not to EP.

  2. Click Save in Authentication Services.

  3. Click Save in System Parameters. After enabling MFA, whenever a service provider, worksite manager, or worksite trusted advisor logs into PrismHR, the Account Access Confirmation dialog displays: [Image: screenshot] After enabling Send SMS to, a generic message displays stating that the user will receive the security code via email. However, the code is actually sent as a text message. Once the user requests the security code, this message (or a similar one) displays: [Image: screenshot]

Enabling Client-Level MFA

Enabling MFA at the client level can affect all service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors associated with the client.

To enable client-level MFA:

  1. Select the client to enable MFA.

  2. Open Client Details (found in the Client menu under Client|Change).

  3. Select Security from the Actions menu.

  4. Set security options (under Access) as needed:

Option — Description

sMFA Device Expiration — Use the global setting, a different interval period from the global setting, or disable MFA for this client. When enabled, all users associated with this client who access the system will need to re‑authenticate their access after the specified time interval, if any, for each device they use. The system prompts them to request an authentication code, which it sends to the user’s specified email address. The user can then enter the authentication code to regain system access.

MFA Expiration for Employee Portal — Use the global setting, a different interval period from the global setting, or disable Employee Portal (EP)MFA for this client. When enabled, all users associated with this client who access EP will need to re‑authenticate their access after the specified time interval, if any, for each device they use. The system prompts them to request an authentication code, which it sends to the user’s specified email address. The user can then enter the authentication code to regain EP system access.

Note: Note: To implement MFA, your organization must set up a message template for MFA Passcode.

sMFA Enabled for Trusted Advisor Password Reset — Enable MFA for all worksite trusted advisors who have access to the client, requiring them to use MFA when the Forgot Password link is clicked.

  1. Click Accept in the Client Security form.

  2. Click Save in the Client Details form.

Enabling User-Level MFA

Enabling MFA at the user level only affects each specified user. At the user level, MFA settings apply to both PrismHR and EP.

To enable user-level MFA:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] and open the Users form under System|Change.

  2. Enter the User ID for a service provider, worksite manager, or worksite trusted advisor user.

  3. Set sMFA Device Expiration to use the global setting, a different interval period from the global or client setting, or disable MFA for this user. When enabled, the user will need to re‑authenticate their access after the specified time interval, if any, for each device they use. The system prompts them to request an authentication code, which it sends to the user’s specified email address. The user can then enter the authentication code to regain system access.

  4. Click Save.

Related Topics

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

Configuring MFA Email Templates and Services

========================================================================

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Overview.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Overview.htm

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

Note: Note: As of September 2019, Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is now automatically enabled for Service Provider users.

A major challenge of system security is keeping user credentials secure. User names, passwords, and personal information such as date of birth are no longer considered secure. This is especially true for people who have ever used a public computer in a library, or accessed a secure website over a public Wi-Fi network. Community computers and public Wi-Fi are vulnerable to screen scraping or decrypting technologies which put credentials at risk.

Because many people use the same credentials across websites, phishing schemes and malicious redirects also play a part in security breaches. If a cyber-criminal has access to one set of your credentials, that criminal may have access to all of them.

MFA security for service providers, worksite managers, worksite trusted advisors, and customer users helps keep credentials secure. MFA provides an additional level of user authentication outside of the web browser. When MFA is enabled in PrismHR and a user tries to log in, the system generates an email or text message with a unique validation key. This key, or passcode, is valid for a single use and expires after a set time period. The email or text message authenticates the legitimate user. It also notifies the rightful account owner that an unauthorized user has stolen their credentials.

To begin using MFA, you must first set up a message template in PrismHR. Message templates send the emails or text messages that contain the text and unique passcode.

Note: Note: For MFA to be effective, all users must have a valid email address or mobile device number associated with their user account.

MFA requires that after a certain number of days accessing the system from a device, each user is prompted to request an authorization code. The system sends the code to the email address or mobile device number associated with the user account, after which the user enters it and can access the system.

Authentication is necessary for each device that accesses the system. For example, if a user logs in with multiple devices, they must authenticate separately on each device.

========================================================================

Resetting MFA Passwords For Trusted Advisors

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Pwd_Recovery_WTAs.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Pwd_Recovery_WTAs.htm

Resetting MFA Passwords For Trusted Advisors

You can enforce MFA for worksite trusted advisor password resets. Enable this feature at the system, client, or user level.

Resetting System-Level MFA Passwords

Note: Note: Enabling MFA for password resets at the system level requires all worksite trusted advisors to use MFA when the Forgot Password link is invoked.

To enable MFA for password resets at the system level:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select System Parameters under System|Change.

  3. Select Authentication Services from the Actions menu.

  4. Select the Use MFA for Password Reset option for Trusted Advisors.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Save.

  2. Click Save in System Parameters.

Resetting Client-Level MFA Passwords

Enabling MFA for client-level password resets affects all worksite trusted advisors who have access to the client, requiring them to use MFA when the Forgot Password link is invoked.

To enable MFA for password resets at the client level:

  1. Select Client Details under Client|Change.

  2. Select Security from the Actions menu.

  3. Select the sMFA Enabled for Trusted Advisor Password Reset option in the Access panel.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Accept in the Security Entities form.

  2. Click Save in the Client Details form.

Resetting User-Level MFA Passwords

Enabling MFA for password resets at the user level requires that worksite trusted advisor to use multi-factor authentication when they use the Forgot Password link.

To enable user-level MFA for password resets:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select Users under System|Change.

  3. Open the worksite trusted advisor user account.

  4. Select sMFA Support in the Password Recovery panel.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Reauthorizing Standard MFA Login

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Standard_Access.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_Standard_Access.htm

Reauthorizing Standard MFA Login

Service providers, worksite managers, and worksite trusted advisors are prompted to request an authorization code after a specified number of days accessing the system from a device.

The user follows this process:

  1. A message notifies the user that they will receive a security code by email (the email address is masked for security) The user must click Submit.

  2. The system sends the message with the authorization code and displays a form that allows the user to enter the security code.

  3. The user receives the email with the authorization code and enters it in the form.

  4. The user clicks Submit and is logged in to the system.

Related Topics

User Account Access with MFA

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

========================================================================

Resetting Forgotten Passwords For MFA Login (Trusted Advisors)

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_WTA_Access.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/MFA_WTA_Access.htm

Resetting Forgotten Passwords For MFA Login (Trusted Advisors)

This process applies to worksite trusted advisors who use MFA when resetting a forgotten password.

  1. Click Forgot your password? in the login form.

  2. Enter your Username and click Continue. The system sends two messages: a link to a form, and the authorization code itself.

  3. Click the link in the email to access the User Registration & Password Reset form.

  4. Enter [the] Security Code received in the second email. Manually type in the code to avoid copy and paste mistakes.

  5. Enter the New Password and Confirm New Password.

  6. Click Continue.

If there are any issues with the password, the system displays a message to try again.

  1. Once the password is successfully reset, the system returns to the login screen where you can log in with the new password.

Related Topics

User Account Access with MFA

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

========================================================================

Creating New Multi-Entity Groups

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Multi_Entity_Group_Details.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Multi_Entity_Group_Details.htm

Creating New Multi-Entity Groups

You can use the Multi-Entity Group Details form to create a new multi-entity group. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: To access this form, select Create New Group in the Multi-Entity Groups form. (See Organizing Similar Clients.)

To create a new multi-entity group:

  1. Enter the Multi-Entity Group Code.

  2. Enter the Multi-Entity Group Description.

  3. Enter or select the Client ID to associate with the multi-entity group. The Client Name displays.

Note: You must enter at least one Client ID, which cannot contain a space.

  1. Select Common Law Employer Group to define the multi-entity group as that type.

  2. Click Save. The new multi-entity group displays in the Multi-Entity Groups form.

========================================================================

Organizing Similar Clients

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Multi_Entity_Groups.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Multi_Entity_Groups.htm

Organizing Similar Clients

You can use the Multi-Entity Groups form to organize similar clients. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This form is only available for service providers.

To organize similar clients:

  1. Select a Group Code. The Multi-Entity Group Details form opens displaying the Group Details.

  2. Enter or select the Client ID. The Client Name displays.

Note: You must enter at least one Client ID, which cannot contain a space.

  1. Click Save. The Client Count and Modified On columns display the updates.

Note: Select the trash can icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to delete a multi-entity group.

========================================================================

Creating/Editing NAICS Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/NAICS_Codes_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/NAICS_Codes_Maintenance.htm

Creating/Editing NAICS Codes

Use this form to create/edit North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) codes in PrismHR that identify various industries.

To create or edit an NAICS code in PrismHR:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Description
NAICS Code To create a new NAICS Code in PrismHR, enter it here. To edit an existing NAICS Code in PrismHR, enter it here or click the NAICS Code link and select it from the Select NAICS Code dialog box for example 311221.
Description To create a description for a new NAICS Code in PrismHR, enter the appropriate description here. To edit an existing NAICS Code in PrismHR, edit the description that appears here when you enter an existing NAICS Code in PrismHR above. For example the updated description for NAICS Code 311221 from 2022 onwards will be Wet Corn Milling and Starch instead of Wet Corn Milling earlier.
Obsolete This box is unchecked by default for valid codes as of 2022. For NAICS Codes obsolete as of 2022 it will be checked by default. Check this box if you need to identify an NAICS code as an obsolete NAICS code in PrismHR. For example NAICS Code 811219 is now an obsolete code as per 2022 NAICS Code. When building the EEO-1 data, you will receive an error message and the EEO-1 build will fail if: - The NAICS Code assigned to a client here or a worksite location in the Worksite Locations form is obsolete in PrismHR. - No NAICS Code is assigned to a client in PrismHR. > Note: Note: NAICS codes are not mandatory in the Worksite Locations form. You will not receive an error if there is no NAICS Code assigned to a worksite in the Worksite Locations form. This field is only necessary if the worksite location NAICS code differs from other locations.
  1. Click Save to save the changes made to this form in PrismHR.

  2. Click Delete if you want to delete an NAICS Code from PrismHR.

  3. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

========================================================================

Setting New Hire Questions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/New_Hire_Questions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/New_Hire_Questions.htm

Setting New Hire Questions

You can create new hire employee questions using the New Hire Questions form. These questions can be assigned to a specific work location state with the New Hire Wizard.

Note: Note: You can submit a maximum of 30 questions. For more information about assigning new hire questions, see the System Administration Guide.

To do this Perform these steps
Creating a New Hire Question 1. Click Back Office. 2. Select New Hire Questions from the System\ Change menu. 3. Click New Question. The Question ID field populates with NEW, and the system generates an ID when you save the new question. 4. Enter the Question Text to display in the New Hire Wizard. 5. Select the Field Type to define the format for the answer to the question. - If you select Dropdown, the system prompts you to enter the values for the drop-down. - If you select Radiobutton, the system prompts you to enter the default value (No = unselected, Yes = selected) as well as the description of the radio button. Only one option can be set to Yes. 6. Select Mandatory if users must answer the question. 7. Click Save.
  1. Click Back Office.
  2. Select New Hire Questions from the System|Change menu.
  3. Click New Question. The Question ID field populates with NEW, and the system generates an ID when you save the new question.
  4. Enter the Question Text to display in the New Hire Wizard.
  5. Select the Field Type to define the format for the answer to the question.
  1. Select Mandatory if users must answer the question.
  2. Click Save. | Editing a New Hire Question | 1. Enter the Question ID. 2. Change the Question Text and Field Type, if needed. 3. Click Save. |
  3. Enter the Question ID.
  4. Change the Question Text and Field Type, if needed.
  5. Click Save. | Assigning New Hire Questions | The PrismHR administrator assigns questions to specific states using the State Rules form. The system then presents the question to new employees on the Additional State Questions page of the New Hire Wizard during the new hire process. | ========================================================================

Configuring New Messages

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/New_Message.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/New_Message.htm

Configuring New Messages

Send messages through the system or by e-mail with the New Message form. You can also search for and review previous messages.

[Image: screenshot]

To Do this
Create and send messages 1. Click Create a New Message. 2. Enter a Subject line. 3. Enter the required text in the Message body. 4. Click Email to send the message using regular email. Otherwise, the message is sent using the system. 5. Optional: Enter a User ID to include specific users in a message. 6. Optional: Enter a Company ID to include specific companies in a message. 7. Optional: Refine the work assignment by specifying Dept, Division, Location, Project, or Shift. 8. Click Send when the message is ready. > Note: Note: If the message is sent through the system, recipients can see it in Message Review. If the message is sent by email, it is delivered to a recipients’s email inbox.
  1. Click Create a New Message.
  2. Enter a Subject line.
  3. Enter the required text in the Message body.
  4. Click Email to send the message using regular email. Otherwise, the message is sent using the system.
  5. Optional: Enter a User ID to include specific users in a message.
  6. Optional: Enter a Company ID to include specific companies in a message.
  7. Optional: Refine the work assignment by specifying Dept, Division, Location, Project, or Shift.
  8. Click Send when the message is ready. | Search for messages | 1. Click Search Messages. 2. Select the message you want to view. The Message Center form populates with information from the selected message. When you are finished, click Cancel. |
  9. Click Search Messages.
  10. Select the message you want to view. The Message Center form populates with information from the selected message. When you are finished, click Cancel. | View Message History | Click Message History. The Sent Message Review form populates with the user’s sent message history. When you are finished, click Close. | Parent Topic

Managing Messages

========================================================================

Notification Control Panel

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Control_Panel.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Control_Panel.htm

Using the Notification Control Panel

You can use the Notification Control Panel to do the following:

Refer to the following:

Related Topics

Setting Up Content for Notifications

Setting Up Notification Recipients

========================================================================

Scheduling ACH Processing

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Control_Panel_for_ACH_Processing.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Control_Panel_for_ACH_Processing.htm

Scheduling ACH Processing

Important! This topic refers to a feature that will be available in a future release.

You can specify the daily start time for ACH processing using the ACH Processing panel on the Notification Control Panel form, which is accessible from the Operations|Action menu. In addition, you can view the last date/time they were run.

Based on the scheduled time specified in the ACH Processing panel, the system runs multiple ACH processing by selecting all the files and then building the file.

Note: You must use the options in the ACH Processing panel in conjunction with multiple ACH processing. (See Performing Multiple ACH Processing for more information.)

To specify the daily start time for ACH processing:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Operations|Action, select Notification Control Panel. The Notification Control Panel form displays.

Note: If the notifications engine is already running, select BE Stop, then select BE Start before using the ACH Processing panel.

  1. In the ACH Processing panel, enter the following information:

Note: This user must have access to the ACH Processing form for external payroll.

Note: The ACH processing start times only apply to the ACH Processing form for external payroll.

  1. Click Save.

To the right of the Daily ACH Start Time field a display-only process status displays, which matches the same control number that displays in the BE Notify panel. (See Using the Notification Control Panel (Benefits Enrollment).)

In addition, the display-only Last Run Date/Time field displays the last date and time the process ran.

========================================================================

Scheduling Payroll Reminders

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Control_Panel_for_Payroll_Reminders.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Control_Panel_for_Payroll_Reminders.htm

Scheduling Payroll Reminders

You can use the Payroll Reminders panel in the Notification Control Panel form to schedule payroll reminders for worksite advisors and worksite trusted advisors if the payroll is still in timesheet entry status as the payroll’s completion date gets closer to the cutoff date. For example, if the payroll will no longer be available to worksite advisors and worksite trusted advisors as of 4/15/2024 and it is not completed, the system sends a reminder to those users on 4/13/2024 that payroll is almost due.

Note: This feature is only available for service providers.

To schedule a payroll reminder:

  1. Click [Image: screenshot] (Back Office).

  2. From Operations|Action, select Notification Control Panel. The Notification Control Panel form displays.

  3. In the Payroll Reminders panel, enter the number of hours before the payroll cutoff date and time to send the reminder in the Payroll Reminder Timing field.

  4. Click Save.

To the right of the Payroll Reminder Timing field a display-only process status displays, which matches the same control number that displays in the BE Notify panel. (See Using the Notification Control Panel (Benefits Enrollment).)

In addition, the display-only Last Run Date/Time field displays the last date and time the process ran.

========================================================================

Notification Recipients

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Recipients.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Recipients.htm

Setting Up Notification Recipients

Use the Notification Recipients form to set up recipients for the notifications created in the Notification Templates form.

Note: Note: This form is used only in Benefits Enrollment and in Onboarding.

Refer to the following:

Related Topics

Setting Up Content for Notifications

Using the Notification Control Panel

========================================================================

Setting Up Content for Notifications

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Templates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Notification_Templates.htm

Setting Up Content for Notifications

Use the Notification Templates form to set up content for the notifications you want to send to employees or groups during enrollments or onboarding.

Note: Note: This form is used only in Benefits Enrollment and in Onboarding.

See the following topics:

========================================================================

Working with ACH Impounding

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Offset_Impound_Accounts.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Offset_Impound_Accounts.htm

Working with ACH Impounding

Use the Offset Impound Accounts form to work with ACH impounding, where the system creates offset transactions for various client fund types. You can designate impound bank accounts where client net-pays, payroll taxes, and retirement contributions are deposited. The system deposits the remainder of the client invoice amount leftover after deducting for net-pays, taxes, and retirement contributions into the bank account designated by the Offset Account ID on the Bank Accounts form.

Note: Historically, PrismHR has supported generating a single ACH transaction to offset the client invoice amount. For a typical payroll, this transaction would be an ACH credit transaction. For most PEO/ASO clients, the total invoice amount is the aggregate of the client fees, employee net pays, taxes, and benefits, such as retirement. The system uses this functionality to designate the impound bank accounts where client net-pays, payroll taxes, and retirement contributions are deposited. The remainder of the client invoice amount leftover after deduction for net-pays, taxes, and retirement are deposited into the bank account designated by the “Offset Account ID” on the primary bank’s account form.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: You must enable the ACHBREAKONPRBATCH custom feature code on the System Parameters form to access the Offset Impound Accounts form on the Actions menu for the Bank Accounts form.

To set up ACH impounding for an account:

  1. Go to the Bank Accounts form on the System|Change menu.

  2. Enter or select an Account ID.

  3. Select Offset Impound Accounts on the Actions menu.

  4. Select the Fund Type to designate the billing component for which the offset credit applies on the ACH file. (You can set multiple types.)

  5. Enter or select the Bank Account to return records from the system-level Bank Accounts file.

  6. Click Close. The Bank Accounts form re-displays.

  7. Click Save.

========================================================================

Establishing OSHA Event Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/OSHA_Events.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/OSHA_Events.htm

Establishing OSHA Event Codes

You can establish codes that describe events that might be tracked by the Occupational Safety & Health Administration (OSHA) using the OSHA Events form.

Note: Note: To see a list of all existing OSHA events, open the Actions menu and select View OSHA Event Codes.

To establish an OSHA event code, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select OSHA Events from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Event Code — Enter or select an Event Code that represents an OSHA event. Use something brief but descriptive, such as PHL for permanent hearing loss.

Type — Select the Type of event, either Illness or Injury.

Event Description — Enter a short Event Description, such as Permanent Hearing Loss.

OSHA Illness Type — Select the OSHA Illness Type used for reporting purposes. If the Type is Illness, this is required.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Activating Pending Enrollments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Part-Req-Maint.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Part-Req-Maint.htm

Activating Pending Enrollments

After you define participation requirements and medical waiver reasons, employees can submit their enrollments, which are assigned to the posting queue as pending. The Participation Requirement Maintenance form enables you to activate pending enrollments.

To activate pending enrollments:

  1. In the Back Office menu, go to Operations|Action > Participation Requirement Maintenance.

  2. In the Participation Requirement Maintenance panel, complete the following fields:

Field Action
Benefit Plan ID Enter a plan ID or click the link to select from a list.
Participation Requirement Criteria - To view posted enrollments with the start date and percentage entered at the system level on the Group Benefit Plans form, select System check. - To view posted enrollments with client overrides entered at the client level on the Benefit Plan Setup form, select a Client ID check. The Client ID field is disabled.
  1. Click Search. The Search Results panel displays posted enrollments with effective dates on or before the Participation Requirement Start Date.

The table includes:

Field Description
Client The client ID number and name.
Employee The employee name and ID number.
Plan ID The plan ID.
Effective Date The plan’s effective date.
Status - Pending - Active - Waived - Terminated - Eligible

Field — Description

Participation Requirement Needed — The total Participation Requirement percentage.

Estimated Participation Achieved — Percentage = (Pending Employee count + Active Employee count) / (Total Employee count - Waived Employee count)

Pending Employee count — The number of employees with a Pending enrollment status.

Active Employee count — The number of employees with an Active enrollment status.

Waived Employee count — The number of employees with a Waived enrollment status.

Terminated Employee count — The number of employees with a Terminated enrollment status.

Eligible Employee count — The number of employees with an eligible benefit enrollment for this plan. Note that when adding the benefit plan after entering the employee into the system, the employee is eligible, but an eligible benefit enrollment does not exist.

Total Employee count — Total of all employee counts.

  1. To activate enrollments displayed in the table, click Activate Pending Plans. A dialog displays confirming you want to change the pending enrollments to an active status.

  2. To continue, click Yes. Or, click No to return to the Participation Requirement Maintenance form.

========================================================================

Changing Passwords

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Password_Change_Form.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Password_Change_Form.htm

Changing Passwords

Change a user password on the Change Password form.

To change your password or that of another user:

  1. Verify the Username is correct and you are on the correct user’s page.

  2. Change your own password by entering your Current Password.

Note: If you are resetting an employee’s password, you don’t need to enter their current password.

  1. Enter a New Password. The system validates the password. If validation fails, PrismHR provides information on creating a valid password.

  2. Re-enter the password in the Confirm New Password field. The next time the user logs on, use the new password.

Note: The read-only Requires New Password field, which is enabled by default and cannot be disabled for security purposes, prompts employees to create a new password the next time they log into the system.

  1. Click Save. The next time the user logs on, use the new password.

Note: If you are resetting an employee’s password, this resets the lockout period, if any, in cases where the password is being changed because the employee was locked out of EP after too many failed login attempts.

========================================================================

Working with Pay Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes.htm

Working with Pay Codes

Use the Pay Codes form to establish pay code information and processing parameters required to process pay information in PrismHR.

In addition, you can access pay code-related features and settings using the Actions menu:

Defining Basic Pay Code Information

Use the Pay Codes panel to define the basic pay code information.

Note: Click the Data Import Tool icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to upload a database file and import data. (This icon displays for all user roles, except “Inquiry Only.”)

Note: Note: For more information about the Data Import Tool form, see the Payroll Administration Guide.

To define basic pay code information:

Field Description
Pay Code Enter a Pay Code to use for this type of payment or click this field to display existing pay codes and select it from the list. (When creating a pay code, use a mnemonic, such as OT for overtime.) If you select this field, a selector form displays where you can search for a specific pay code or pay description or select a code from the list that displays. When this form opens, the pay code, pay description, pay type, pay class, calculation method, and obsolete date display. To filter the search further: - Select a Pay Type, Calculation Method, or Pay Class (the default is All for these fields). - Display only Obsolete codes by selecting Yes (the default is No). (Note: Codes with an obsolete date earlier than the current date do not display in the selector form.) To refresh the list, select Reset Search and Filters.

One of the following panels displays, which depends on the rules for the selected Calculation Method:

For detailed information about these panels, see See Defining Pay Code Calculation Rules.

Note: Note: If you import a pay code that contains a value in the Alt. Pay Rate # field in the Standard Method Rules panel, but there is no corresponding value for the employee in the Pay tab on the Employee Details form, no import occurs and the system does not display an error message.

Setting Up Billing Codes

Use these fields to determine how to bill the clients for this pay code, if appropriate. For example:

To setup billing codes:

Field — Description

Bill Code — Enter the bill code to use for this pay code. Leave this field blank if your organization does not re-bill clients for this pay code, for example, a Section 125 expense reimbursement or a PEO discretionary payment.

Bill Code Job Rate — Enter the billing code to use if you bill clients using job rates. Leave this field blank if your organization does not re-bill clients for this pay code.

Non-Cash Rebate Bill Code — Enter the billing code for pay codes classified as Non-Cash Fringe Benefits or Reported Tips. Leave this field blank if your organization does not re-bill clients for this pay code.

Setting Processing Options

The Processing Options panel controls how PrismHR processes pay code information.

To set processing options:

Field Description
Pay Code is Used to Pay Productive Work Select if this pay code represents an amount earned for productive labor. For example, do not check this box for pay codes intended for vacation or sick time.
Used to Pay Cash Wage for Tipped Employees Select to use this pay code to pay cash wages for tipped employees, usually at the minimum cash wage required by state law.
Pay Code Used to Pay Employee for Charged Tips Select if this pay code is for compensating employees for charged tips. This is valid only when the Pay Class is Earnings.
Include Hours/Amount Paid in Overtime Calculation Select to include this pay code in any overtime calculation. Note that Hours is hours worked, whereas the Amount is the paid amount.
Use Hours Paid instead of Hours Worked in Overtime Calculation If you selected the Include Hours/Amount Paid… option, you can also enable this option to use the paid hours instead of the hours worked when calculating overtime. Note: Overtime calculations require that the client has an FLSA ruleset defined. These calculations only work for scheduled payroll batches; the system does not use FLSA rulesets for manual or special payrolls. (See Overtime Calculation Examples.)
Include Amount Paid Only in Overtime Calculation Select to include only amounts paid with this pay code in any overtime calculation.
Add to O/T Hours in lieu of Threshold Calculation Select to add hours paid using this pay code to overtime hours instead of the overtime threshold calculation. You would only select this when the FLSA Ruleset is configured to report overtime hours separately. (For more information, see FLSA Ruleset.)
Round to Period Pay if Salaried Employee Select to have this pay code force time sheet pay to total period pay if salaried employee and hours paid are equal to standard hours. Note: The system uses the last detail timesheet entry for rounding.
Include when Calculating Shift Differential Pay Select if this pay code should include premium hours paid with this pay code when calculating the number of shift differential/longevity pay premium hours to be paid.
Charge Expense Admin (For Expense Reimbursements) Select if this pay code is an expense reimbursement. It is subject to the same administrative fees as a regular earning.
Third Party Administrator (Unemployment) Pay Code Enter the pay code used to report this pay type to a third-party administrator, usually an unemployment claims processor.
May Fund Voluntary Deductions Select to use the cash from this expense reimbursement pay code to fund voluntary payroll deductions.
Exclude From Payroll Overtime Recalculation Select to exclude this pay code when recalculating payroll batch overtime. Select this option if you use this pay code with a separate half-time pay code for overtime. > Note: Note: Changes made to this setting on the pay code form after processing the payroll batch will not be applied in the recalculation. For example, if the bonus/commission pay code is set to exclude when the bonus/commission payroll batch is calculated, changing the pay code to be included in overtime recalculation will not take place upon recalculation.
Qualified OT Factor This field is optional. Define the percentage of overtime pay that should be included in qualified overtime calculations by selecting the appropriate factor from the following options to ensure only eligible overtime amounts are reported in compliance with OBBBA’s rules. - – Select– (default) - 100% : Half time - Calculates at the standard 0.5 of the employee’s hourly rate. - 50% : Double Time (1x) - Calculates at the standard employee’s standard full hourly rate. - 33% : Time & A Half - Calculates at 1.5x of the employees standard hourly rate. - 25% : Double time (2x) - Calculates at 2x of the employees standard hourly rate.
Pay Code is Used to Pay Daily Overtime This field is optional. This is an informational setting that will be used in future reports to flag employees who may be receiving daily OT and require additional review for FG overtime.
Exclude from Qualified Tip Reporting This field is optional. This field is unchecked by default. Check this field if you want to exclude the pay code from Qualified Tip Reporting.
Include in Variable Salary Pay Select to include this pay code in the employee’s Variable Salary pay. Important! You must enable all pay codes within a payroll as Include in Variable Salary Pay, so the system performs the correct calculation. If you need to pay an employee with a mix of variable salary and non-variable salary pay codes, you must pay the non-variable salary pay codes in a different payroll batch. In addition, if you need to pay an employee with a mix of Pay Types for the variable salary pay codes, you must pay each Pay Type in a different payroll batch. The Variable Salary pay method accurately tracks the hours that employees actually work. For example, non-profit companies could use this pay method to track the work hours of their employees who are paid a standard salaried amount, so they can use these hours and their allocations for grant purposes. Important! When using Include in Variable Salary Pay, the pay codes paid to the employee must be set to Regular for the Pay Type. In addition, you must enable the VARSALMETHOD custom feature code on the System Parameters form to include the pay code in the employee’s Variable Salary pay.
Unpaid Variable Salary Time Select to reduce an employee’s Variable Salary pay by the percentage of unpaid hours assigned to the Unpaid Pay Code (default is disabled). For example, if an employee makes $3000 per pay period and they submit 100 hours, where 90 hours are worked and 10 hours are unpaid. This indicates that the employee’s wages should be reduced by 10 hours, so the system reduces the wages for the pay period from $3000 to $2700. This calculation works as follows: $3000/10 hours of unpaid time is $300, so $300 is subtracted from the gross pay. (On the voucher, the Unpaid Time hours display as the number of hours in the time sheet entry for the unpaid pay code, but the unit rate and amount display as zero (0).) > Note: Note the following: - The Unpaid Variable Salary Time field only displays when the Include in Variable Salary Pay field is enabled for the pay code. - The system still allocates wages for the reduced amount, except the pay is reduced by the unpaid hours.

The Conditional Rules panel allows users to include non‑discretionary bonuses (flat sum) in overtime calculation. Users can attach payroll warning messages to pay codes that display in the payroll calculation if the pay code is in use.

To include non-discretionary bonuses:

Field Description
Flat Sum Calculation Select this checkbox to include non‑discretionary bonus pay in the payroll calculation.
Overtime Paycode Enter the appropriate overtime pay code, or click the link to select from a list.
Payroll Warning Select this checkbox to assign a warning message to the pay code.
Custom Message text box (not labeled) Enter a custom message in the text box.
State Limiter Select the appropriate state based on the user’s home worksite location.

========================================================================

Defining Pay Code Calculation Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Calculation_Rules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Calculation_Rules.htm

Defining Pay Code Calculation Rules

Different pay code calculation rules are available based on the Calculation Method selected in the Pay Codes form. Refer to the relevant panel descriptions.

Standard Method Rules

The Standard Method Rules panel displays for pay codes with these calculation methods:

Note: Note: The calculation methods that start with “Rate x” also display the Maximum Calc Hours/Maximum % of Gross Earnings field, which is described in Working with Pay Codes.

[Image: screenshot]

Complete the following fields:

  1. Enter the Factor to multiply against the pay rate to arrive at the actual rate used to calculate earnings. You would typically use this to define the rate to pay employees for overtime pay.

Note: A value of zero (0) or a value greater than or equal to .5 is acceptable for Standard Calculation Method pay codes. (Entering a negative value displays an error message.)

  1. Select the Rate Class:
  1. Enter the Alt. Pay Rate #, which is the alternate employee pay rate to apply when this pay code is entered on a time sheet.

Note: If “1” displays in this field and the employee’s Sequence 1 Alternate Pay Rate is left blank, no data imports.

Fixed Method Rules

The Fixed Method Rules panel displays for pay codes with the Fixed calculation method. You can specify the amount in the Amount field or enter it directly on employees’ Other Earnings Records.

[Image: screenshot]

Complete the following fields:

  1. Select the Rate Class:
  1. Enter the Default Pay Amount to use when this pay code is entered on employees’ Other Earnings Records.

  2. Select Default Auto Hours to automatically associate employees’ standard hours worked with this pay code. You would typically use this for a salary pay code.

Calculated Method Rules

The Calculated Method Rules panel displays for pay codes with the Calculated calculation method. The system stores the rate used as a default on the Pay Code Record instead of the Employee Payroll Record or Job Record.

[Image: screenshot]

Complete the following fields:

  1. Enter the Hourly/Unit Rate, which the system multiplies by the number of hours worked/units produced entered in conjunction with this pay code.

  2. Enter the Factor to multiply against the pay rate to arrive at the actual rate used to calculate earnings. You would typically use this to define the rate to pay employees for overtime pay.

  3. Select the Rate Class:

Per Diem Method Rules

The Per Diem Method Rules panel displays for pay codes with the Per Diem calculation method.

[Image: screenshot]

Complete the following fields:

  1. Select the Per Diem Method used to calculate this pay code: percentage, per day, or mileage.

  2. Select the Per Diem Taxable Pay Code used for the taxable wages portion of the total wages entered when using the percentage per diem method.

If the pay code uses the per day method for per diem, this field stores the pay code which, if paid to an employee in the same batch, the amount paid using the pay code is reduced by the amount of the per day amount. For example, if regular wages are $1000, and per diem is $300, during initialization the regular wages are reduced by $300 for a net of $700.

  1. Select the Per Diem Non-Taxable Pay Code to use for the non-taxable wages portion of total wages entered when using the percentage per diem method.

  2. Select the Other Per Diem Taxable Pay Codes, which is the additional pay code for the non-taxable wages portion of total wages entered when using the percentage per diem method.

Calculated Fringe Benefit

The Calculated Fringe Benefit panel displays for pay codes with these calculation methods:

Note: Note: These calculation methods also display the Maximum Calc Hours/Maximum % of Gross Earnings field, which is described in Working with Pay Codes.

[Image: screenshot]

Enter the Percent/Rate per Hour to calculate for the pay code.

Fringe Calculation Pay Codes

The Fringe Calculation Pay Codes panel displays for pay codes with the Rate x Hours Paid (Selected Codes) calculation method. Use this to set up employee taxable benefits such as insurance, uniforms, a company car, and so on.

[Image: screenshot]

Enter each of the Fringe Pay Codes for which hours will accumulate. The system uses these to calculate the fringe benefit amount. The Pay Description displays.

Parent Topic

Working with Pay Codes

========================================================================

Defining Maximum Earnings

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Maximums.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Maximums.htm

Defining Maximum Earnings

Use the Earnings Maximums form to define maximum earnings per pay basis for the pay code.

  1. Open the Pay Codes form’s Actions menu and select Maximums. The Earnings Maximums form opens.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select the pay Basis that best represents the time period over which the total amount paid to an employee should not exceed the amount entered in the corresponding Maximum Earnings field.

  2. Enter the Maximum Earnings amount to pay for this code during the period specified in the Basis field.

  3. Click Accept.

Parent Topic

Working with Pay Codes

========================================================================

Overtime Calculation Examples

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_OT_Calculation_Examples.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_OT_Calculation_Examples.htm

Overtime Calculation Examples

The following table lists some examples of overtime calculations, based on selections in the Processing Options panel of the Pay Codes form.

When the options are… The system calculates…
[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot]
[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot]
[Image: screenshot] [Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Overtime calculations require that the client has an FLSA ruleset defined. These calculations only work for scheduled payroll batches; the system does not use FLSA rulesets for manual or special payrolls.

Parent Topic

Working with Pay Codes

========================================================================

Exempting Taxes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Tax_Exemptions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Tax_Exemptions.htm

Exempting Taxes

Use the Tax Exemptions form to exempt certain taxes.

WARNING: Do not exempt this pay code from taxes unless you are a qualified tax professional and understand the potential consequences for employee tax calculations.

  1. To exempt the pay code from taxes, open the Pay Codes form’s Actions menu and select Tax Exemptions.

  2. Click Yes in the warning message. The Tax Exemptions form opens.

a. Select the Tax ID to exclude gross taxable earnings from payments with this pay code.
b. Indicate whether the exemption applies to S-Corp Principals Only.
— —
  1. — In the Tax Exempt States field, enter each of the two-character state codes for the states where the exemption for the tax ID applies, separated by commas.
  1. Click Accept.

Parent Topic

Working with Pay Codes

========================================================================

Creating Weighted Average Calculations for Pay Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Weighted_Average.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Codes_Weighted_Average.htm

Creating Weighted Average Calculations for Pay Codes

Your organization can create weighted average calculations for pay codes using the Weighted Average form. For example, California requires that employees be paid at their “regular rate” when using state-mandated paid time off. Other states, such as Arizona, permit a regular rate calculation rate.

Weighted averages are used for either pay codes that are set to include hours/amount paid in overtime calculations or those that include amount paid only:

[Image: screenshot]

[Image: screenshot]

When applied to a pay code, it provides a weighted average of pay over a specified time frame. You might use weighted averages when improving calculations for FLSA.

Use weighted average calculations when you need to:

Please note that you should use caution when using the pay code for tipped employees with pay rates below minimum wage. Currently the calculation does not gross all such rates up to the minimum wage. Also note that weighted averages do not include system-calculated shift differentials within the payroll that the pay code is used.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Select Calculated Weighted Average Pay Rate to indicate that the pay code will use a calculated weighted average pay rate.

  2. The Exclude FLSA Exempt Employees field is a checkbox. This field is un-checked by default. You can check it and click Accept to enable this option.

  1. Enter each required pay period weighted average calculations:
a. Select the Pay Period: weekly, biweekly, semi-monthly, or monthly.

The work week method can be used only with weekly and biweekly pay periods.

b. Select the weighted average Method:
  1. — If you selected a look back method, enter the Lookback Period number and then indicate whether the period is Days or Months.
  1. Click Accept.

Parent Topic

Working with Pay Codes

========================================================================

Setting Up Pay Import Definitions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Import_Definition.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Pay_Import_Definition.htm

Setting Up Pay Import Definitions

Use the Pay Import Definition form to set up pay data import definitions from tab-delimited, comma-delimited (CSV), or fixed-length data import files.

Note: Note: After you create a pay import definition, you assign it to the appropriate client(s) in the Time Sheet tab of the Client Details form.

Defining Time Sheet Pay Import Definition Parameters

Define the parameters required to import the pay data from the file in the Time Sheet Pay Import Definition panel.

[Image: screenshot]

To set up pay data import definitions:

  1. Enter the Definition ID for the pay import.

Note: You can only create and save a New Definition ID using the following characters: numbers zero through nine, lowercase letters a through z, and capitalized letters A through Z. Otherwise, an error message displays.

  1. Select Hourly Only to load only hourly employees from the import file. The system reports any salaried employees included in the file as download exceptions.

  2. In the File Format field, select a format for the data import:

If you select Delimited, select a delimiter from the Delimiter drop‑down:

  1. If necessary, enter the Number of Header Lines To Skip. This setting skips any header content lines in the import file, and begins the import after that. For example, if the first line in the file has the column headings, and the second line is the first record, enter 1.

  2. Select Rates Have Four Decimal Places if the pay rates have four decimal places.

  3. Select Allow Zero Pay On Time Sheets to pass zero amounts to the time sheet.

WARNING: Do not use the Special Processing Routine fields unless directed to do so by the PrismHR Customer Support Team.

  1. Enter the Special Processing Routine to use to convert the import file.

  2. Enter the Special Routine after Import for the system to execute immediately after importing the file from DOS; this can reformat the file.

  3. Enter the Post Processing Routine to execute at the end of the import process.

Note: Note: You must select All Special Routines Using Message Format if this is a web-based import. If this parameter is not selected, do not select it unless directed to do so by the PrismHR Customer Support Team.

  1. Select All Special Routines Using Message Format if the system uses a routine to pass back status and message information.

  2. Select Show Original File Data in Error Report if the error report should show the complete line of data from the original file.

  3. From the Use STD Allocation On drop-down, select the standard allocation to use for time.

Indicating Outcome of Existing Data After Data Import

Use the When Posting Imported Data to Time Sheets panel to indicate what happens to any existing data after a data import.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. From the Clear Existing Pay From Time Sheets for drop-down, select how to manage existing information:

Note: Note: If you chose to clear existing pay (All Employees or Employees in Import File Only), you can only select Overwrite existing amounts from the Update existing pay on time sheets drop-down. If you chose not to clear existing data (None), then you can choose a method for how to handle existing pay.

  1. From the Update existing pay on time sheets drop-down, select whether the imported data overwrites any existing pay data or adds to it.

  2. Select Auto Add Option (when employee is in file import but not on payroll) to have the system automatically add active employee time sheets.

  1. Select Recalculate Overtime Pay Rate to have the system recalculate overtime pay rates (based on the rate multiplier) on imported overtime hours that use the definition.

For example, an employee is included in the import with a pay rate of $10. If this option is not selected, then the employee will be paid $10. If this option is selected, then the employee will be paid at the overtime rate (such as $15 for a 1.5 multiplier).

Note: If you enable Recalculate Overtime Pay Rate, make sure the import file has a pay rate for the corresponding overtime pay code. Otherwise, an error message displays, “Recalculate Overtime Pay Rate is checked for Import Definition <import definition name> but the overtime Pay Code does not have a corresponding Pay Rate on line <letter> which will result in an incorrect pay calculation.”

Defining Standard Pay Imports

There are two methods for defining the pay import:

Mapping Data Import File Fields

Use the Import Field Definitions table to map the fields of the data import file to those in PrismHR.

[Image: screenshot]

To map the data import file fields:

  1. Specify the fields in the file:
  1. Select the Field Name of the field into which the data imports. The system skips any missing fields or applies a default value.

  2. Use the Conversion Mask field only with direction from the PrismHR Customer Support Team. The system uses this value when data in the import file is in a non-native format.

Mapping Data Import File

Use the Import Translation Table to map the data import file codes to those in PrismHR.

[Image: screenshot]

To map the data import file codes:

  1. Enter the Foreign Code from the other system.

  2. Enter the Prism Code to use once the data imports, for example, REG.

  3. Select the PTO Type Flag if this code is for Vacation, Sick, or Other paid time off.

  4. Click Save.

Translation Code Description
V* Division
D* Department
J* Position Code
S* Shift Code
C* Project/Cost Center
L* Location Code

Note: For more information about setting pay codes, see the Importing More Than 20 Pay Codes Using Match Pay Import Method article in the Customer Resource Center.

Viewing Assigned Clients for Pay Import Definitions

Select Clients Assign To on the Actions menu to view the assigned clients for the selected pay import definition. The Clients Assigned To Pay Imports Definition form displays. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: If you do not select a Definition ID in the Pay Import Definition form and then select the Clients Assigned To option an error message displays, “You must enter a Definition ID first.” Click OK to continue.

The Clients Assigned to Pay Import Definition form displays all active, pending, inactive, terminated, and client-canceling clients assigned to the selected pay import definition ID.

Note: You can filter the client list by selecting an option from the Status field.

Related Topics

Time Sheet Import Issues

Performing Standard Pay Imports

Client Details Setting Client Time Sheet Parameters

========================================================================

Setting Up Vendors to Receive Payments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payees.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payees.htm

Setting Up Vendors to Receive Payments

Use the Payees form to set up vendors and other entities who can receive payments.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Payees.

Setting Up Payee Information

Set up basic payee information in the Payees panel.

To set up vendors to receive payments:

  1. Complete these fields:
Field Description
Payee ID The payee identification number. Enter it here or click the Payee ID hyperlink and select it from the Search Payee selector.
Payee Name For a new payee, enter the payee name or description here. For an existing payee, this field will be auto populated based on the information in the system.
Payee Type For a new payee, select one of the following options: - Garnishing Authority - State Disbursement Unit - Tax Authority - Carrier - Other - Loans Note: Selecting Loans displays the Loan EFT Parameters panel, where you can enter EFT details specific to loan payees. For an existing payee, this field will be auto populated based on the information in the system.

Use the EFT Parameters panel to enter the information required to send electronic payments to the garnishing authority.

Note: Note: You must select Garnishing Authority as the Payee Type to display EFT Parameters.

  1. Complete these fields:
Field Description
Transit Number The financial institution where the garnishing authority maintains the account.
Bank Account Number Account number of the receiving financial institution. Note: You can enter numeric characters 0-9, the dash (-) character, and alphabetic characters in this field, which can be combined. For example, CSP-98765 is an allowed Bank Account Number.
Case Number Required? Optional. A case number might be required as part of the electronic file transfer addenda record layout.
Case Number Format Enter one or more codes for the SDU case number. Use any valid Basic MATCH operator. The MATCH function determines if a string matches a specific pattern of characters, numbers, or literal strings. Use a format code in the pattern, for example, len [A,N] [text] where len denotes the number of characters to match, A specifies only alphabetical characters, N specifies only numeric characters, and text specifies a literal string. Enclose literals in single quotation marks. For example, to display a Social Security number with hyphens, use 3N’-‘2N’-’4N.
Tp Identifier The third-party identifier for the authority. For example, the seven-digit ID number for Minnesota.
Eft Addenda Format Select one of these: - California - Colorado - Minnesota - Wisconsin

Use the State Disbursement Unit Parameters panel to enter the information required to send electronic payments to state government agencies.

Note: Note: State Disbursement Unit must be selected as the Payee Type to display State Disbursement Unit Parameters.

  1. Complete these fields:

Field — Description

Transit Number — The financial institution where the state disbursement unit maintains the account.

Bank Account Number — Account number of the receiving financial institution. Note: You can enter numeric characters 0-9, the dash (-) character, and alphabetic characters in this field, which can be combined. For example, CSP-98765 is an allowed Bank Account Number.

Case Number Required? — Optional. A case number might be required as part of the electronic file transfer addenda record layout.

Case Number Format — Enter one or more codes for the SDU case number. Use any valid Basic MATCH operator. The MATCH function determines if a string matches a specific pattern of characters, numbers, or literal strings. Use a format code in the pattern, for example, len [A,N] [text] where len denotes the number of characters to match, A specifies only alphabetical characters, N specifies only numeric characters, and text specifies a literal string. Enclose literals in single quotation marks. For example, to display a Social Security number with hyphens, use 3N’-‘2N’-’4N.

FIPS Code Required — Optional. Select this if the state disbursement unit requires a valid FIPS code in the electronic file transfer addenda record.

FIPS Code Length — Optional, used with FIPS Code Required. Enter a code length of either 5 or 7 digits.

Activate Test Mode — Enable this option to send test payment entries. The system sends zero payment entries for testing purposes.

Establishing Address for Mailing Payments to Payee

Use the Payee Mail-To Address panel to establish the address for mailing payments to the payee.

Note: Note: Use this panel only when the check format supports the printing of the mail-to address on the check.

Complete these fields:

  1. Enter the Mail-To Name if it is different from the remit-to name.

  2. Enter the payee’s Mail-To Address One, Mail-To Address One and Mail-To City, State, ZIP.

Adding Carrier Website Information

Use the Payee Websites panel to add carrier website information. Since carriers may have multiple URLs for different purposes, you can enter multiple URLs for a carrier.

The table contains the following columns: Description, URL, Website.

  1. Complete these fields:

Field — Description

Description — Enter the website Description. It is helpful to add identifying information if the carrier has multiple URLS. Example: BCBS - Health

URL — Enter the website URL.

Website — Once you enter the Description and URL , a “visit website” link to the URL auto-generates in the Website column. Click the “visit website” link to open a website in a separate browser tab. > Note: Note: Depending on your configuration, when 1Password is used to store site credentials, clicking “visit website” to launch the URL may also simultaneously log you in to the site.

  1. Repeat step one to add additional websites, if necessary.
  1. Click Save to save the new payee information or the changes made to an existing payee on this form.

  2. Click Delete to delete a payee.

  3. Click Cancel to clear this form at any time. All unsaved changes will be lost.

========================================================================

Establishing Payroll Holidays

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Holidays.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Holidays.htm

Establishing Payroll Holidays

Use the Payroll Holidays form to establish the holidays when your organization does not process payrolls. Your organization must maintain these each year.

You can group holidays when you never process payrolls into a set, which allows the system to retrieve the holidays faster. This also makes it easier to set holidays in Client Details. For example, STDBANK could be for all of the bank holidays defined by the Federal Reserve. (Note: STDBANK determines bank holidays even when it is not listed in the Client Payroll Holidays Observed.)

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter a Holiday Code that represents holidays observed by your clients, for example, NYD or STD4.

  2. Enter the Holiday Description, for example, New Year’s Day or Standard 4 holidays.

  3. Click the Action icon [Image: screenshot] next to a holiday. The existing Holiday Dates for that holiday populate.

  4. Enter new Holidays Dates as required.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Managing Payroll Option Templates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Option_Templates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Option_Templates.htm

Managing Payroll Option Templates

You can manage the payroll option templates that your organization uses to override specific calculations for one or more employees in a payroll batch using the Payroll Option Templates form. For example:

[Image: Payroll Option Templates form]

To manage payroll option templates, do the following:

  1. Enter or select the Template ID. When creating a new template, use something brief but descriptive such as SUPRETDED. You are limited to 10 characters so that it displays cleanly on the Summary Time Sheet Entry form.

  2. Enter the Description of the payroll options template that explains its purpose; for example, Suppress Retirement Deductions.

  3. Select ACH in the Suppress ACH field to prevent the generation of direct deposit transactions. (Employees normally paid by direct deposit will receive paper checks instead.) For example, you might select this option when the client wants to deliver live checks for year-end bonuses.

Note: Note the following:

  1. Select the ACH Earn Type Limiter to specify the voucher types that will be processed as ACH transactions. Voucher types that you do not specify will be processed as paper checks. This overrides the settings defined in the Employee Details Deposit tab.
  1. Select Suppress Other Earnings from the Suppress Earnings drop-down to prevent payment for other earnings.

  2. From the Suppress Deductions drop-down, select what payroll deductions (other than payroll taxes) to suppress for this payroll batch, if any. For example, you might need to suppress retirement deductions from bonus pay if employees opt not to have it deducted.

Note: Note the following:

  1. Select Suppress Arrears to prevent the deduction of any amounts in arrears.

  2. Select Suppress Garnishments to prevent garnishment deductions.

  3. Select Suppress Benefits Calculation to suppress withholding of any benefits deductions and benefit accruals/arrears calculations. If you suppress benefits for this payroll batch, the system does not calculate benefits for the pay period, and therefore no benefit deductions go to arrears.

  4. Select Suppress Benefits Update to suppress the benefit update step that updates benefit-related deduction amounts on employee standard deduction records.

The system normally updates the benefits on the employees’ standard deduction schedules according to the parameters set at the system level. For example, if you change the amount of the employees’ contributions on the Group Benefit Plan, the system updates the employees’ standard deduction schedule to reflect the change. Use the Suppress Benefits Update option to suppress that update.

  1. Select Suppress Benefit Adjustments to suppress the processing of benefits adjustments.

  2. Select Suppress Loan Payment to prevent the loan payment from processing in the current payroll when the template is applied.

  3. Enter the Federal Tax Rate - Supplemental Pay, which is the rate to use as the federal tax percentage rate for all supplemental pay. This overrides the aggregate method.

  4. You can override the state tax percentage rate for all states, or for specific states.

  1. Use the Show Future Dated Checks On ESS drop-down to indicate whether employees can view paychecks in the payroll that have future dates in Employee Self Service or Employee Portal (EP). This overrides the global setting.

Related Topic

Payroll Option Templates Overview

========================================================================

Client Setup for Payroll Option Templates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Option_Templates_Client_Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Option_Templates_Client_Setup.htm

Client Setup for Payroll Option Templates

When your organization is managing payroll option templates at the client level, you must assign the appropriate templates to the client that will use them.

[Image: Payroll Option Templates grid, with Description and Show Template columns]

To set up payroll option templates for a client:

  1. Open the Client menu and go to Client|Change > Client Details.

  2. Select the Time Sheet tab.

  3. In the Payroll Option Templates panel, complete the following fields:

Field Description
Template Select each Template that applies to the client. The Description displays.
Show Template To see the settings in the template, click the icon in the Show Template column. This opens a read-only version of the Payroll Option Templates form.
Template Display (Time Sheet) Use the Template Display (Time Sheet) drop-down to indicate the availability of the Payroll Template column in the Summary Time Sheet Entry form. - Do not display: The column is hidden; users cannot access the column in the time sheet. - Service Provider: Service provider users can choose to see the template column using the filter options in the time sheet; worksite manager and trusted advisor users cannot access the column. - Worksite Manager: Worksite manager and trusted advisor users can choose to see the template column using the filter options in the time sheet; service provider users cannot access the column. - All users: All users with access to the time sheet can use the filter options to see the column.
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Payroll Option Templates Overview

Filtering Time Sheet Data

Global Management of Payroll Option Templates

========================================================================

Global Management of Payroll Option Templates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Option_Templates_Global_Management.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Option_Templates_Global_Management.htm

Global Management of Payroll Option Templates

Your organization can choose not to require that users define templates at the client level for all clients that will use them. You must set a global custom feature code to disable the requirement.

With this custom feature code set:

To enable global management of payroll option templates:

  1. Open System Parameters (found in the Back Office menu under System|Change).

  2. In the Custom Feature Codes table, click + to add a new row.

  3. Enter NOCLIENTTEMPLATE.

[Image: System-level feature code grid with NOCLIENTTEMPLATE entered.]

  1. Click Save in System Parameters.

Related Topics

Payroll Option Templates Overview

Client Setup for Payroll Option Templates

Setting General System Parameters

========================================================================

Validating the Payroll Process

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Process_Validations.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Process_Validations.htm

Validating the Payroll Process

During the payroll process, PrismHR performs validations in the Users form. A system administrator can suppress these for payroll processors to prevent any of these validations or warning messages.

Validation and Process Step — Details

Lock Out - Calculation — This validation occurs when a system administrator has executed a system-wide lockout from the payroll calculation process. System administrators might do this when they must apply an emergency patch that affects the payroll calculation process. A system administrator can then suppress this validation and have one user test the updated process before allowing any other payroll processors to proceed.

Service Type “HRN” - Calculation — If a client’s service type is HRN (HR Services Only), the system does not allow users to calculate a payroll for the client.

Payroll Processing Through Date - Calculation/Finalization — This validation compares the value of the Payroll Processing Through Date set on the Lockout Payroll Processing Control Date form to the pay date being processed. If the payroll processing date is earlier than the pay date, the system prevents the process from continuing.

7 Days Future - Calculation — This validation does not allow the calculation to proceed if the pay date is more than seven days in the future.

ACH Days Warning - Calculation/Finalization — This is a warning that the system displays if the pay date is not far enough into the future to meet the ACH processing deadline.

Lock Out - Finalization — This validation occurs when a system administrator has executed a system-wide lockout from the payroll finalization process. System administrators might do this when they must apply an emergency patch that affects the payroll finalization process. A system administrator can then suppress this validation and have one user test the updated process before allowing any other payroll processors to proceed.

Do Not Service - Finalization — This validation does not allow the finalization process to proceed if the client is marked as Do Not Service.

Payroll Calculation Timing — This is a warning that the system displays if the payroll calculation was not completed on the same day as the finalization.

Re-Start Warning - Finalization — This is a warning that the system displays if it detects that the user is restarting the payroll finalization process.

Post Time Cutoffs - Finalization — This validation fails if the time at which the payroll finalization process starts is beyond any of the process cutoff times defined.

Terminated Client - Finalization — This validation checks the client status before termination.

Validate Pay Date (LE/LT Today) — This validation is based on the value of the Validate Pay Date Code value in System Parameters.

SUTA State Lockdown — This validation is based on the SUTA state lockdown rules defined in the system.

Payroll Finalization Warning — If this is selected, then the user can see the Finalize All button in SuperBatch.

Related Topic

Editing a Service Provider User

========================================================================

Establishing Pay Schedules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Schedules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Payroll_Schedules.htm

Establishing Pay Schedules

Use the Pay Schedules form to establish pay schedules, which users assign to pay groups. Each pay schedule determines:

This example displays a weekly pay schedule:

[Image: screenshot]

This example displays a semi-monthly pay schedule:

[Image: screenshot]

To establish pay schedules:

  1. Enter the ID for the Pay Schedule.

  2. Enter a short Description of the pay schedule.

  3. Specify the Pay Period and Pay Day(s):

Pay Period Pay Day(s) Details
Daily Daily-paid
Weekly Day of the week Select the day of the week for the pay date.
Biweekly Day of the week Select the day of the week for the pay date.
Semi-monthly Dates of the month, or the last day of the month, for first and second pay days Specify the days of the month for each pay date. You can also choose the last day of the month.
Monthly Date of the month, or the last day of the month
Monthly [Find nth Occurrence of Day of Week in Month] - Occurrence (1-5) - Day of the week Specify the occurrence of the day of the week for the pay date. For example, Third Wednesday.
Monthly [Find the Day of Week in the nth week of Month] - Day of the week - Week of the month (1-5) Specify the day of the week and the week of the month. For example, Thursday in the Second week of the month.
Monthly [Find Last Occurrence of Day of Week in Month] Day of the week Specify the last day of the month for the pay date. For example, Friday.
Monthly [Find the Day of Week after a Date in Month] - Day of the week - Date of the month Specify the day of the week for the pay date, and the date of the month after it occurs. For example, Thursday after 15.
Monthly [Find the Day of Week before a Date in Month] - Day of the week - Date of the month Specify the day of the week for the pay date, and the date of the month it precedes. For example, Monday before 20.
  1. Specify when the Pay Period Ends:

Important! The following options in these fields must be set to display the On this Day of the Following Month option:

Note: If you try to select On this Day of the Following Month without setting the fields listed above, an error message displays.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Position Classifications

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Position_Classifications.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Position_Classifications.htm

Maintaining Position Classifications

You can maintain position class information, which can span multiple states, using the Position Classifications form.

To maintain position class information, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Position Classifications from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field Description
Position Classification Enter or select a unique Position Classification ID.
Description Description of the position classification. For example, the job title.
EEO Position Group Enter or select the appropriate group. PrismHR automatically displays the EEO Position Class based on the EEO position group entered.
Special Requirements Select this option to indicate that this position classification involves special physical or mental requirements; the position must be closely monitored for ADA compliance when applications are accepted for any positions with this classification. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) prohibits employers from discriminating against qualified individuals with disabilities. Not including a particular person in the applicant pool for a certain job is nondiscriminatory only if that person does not meet any physical or mental requirements that have been identified as a essential functions of the position.
FLSA Exempt Select this option to exempt this position from the provisions of the Fair Labor Standards Act, which defines the workers who must be paid for overtime.
FLSA Type Select the type that best describes this FLSA exempt position. If the position classification is not FLSA exempt, do not select an FLSA type. - Standard Duties Test: The position satisfies standard duties test, or is exempt from duties test but still subject to standard salary test. - Exempt Executive Duties: The position satisfies the highly compensated duties test only. - Exempt Professional Duties: The position is exempt from the duties and salary tests (such as teachers, doctors, and lawyers).
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Positive Pay Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Positive_Pay_Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Positive_Pay_Setup.htm

Positive Pay Setup

Use the Positive Pay Setup form to set up the positive pay file for the bank account. To access the form, open the Actions menu in Bank Accounts and select Positive Pay Setup.

The Positive Pay file is created by interpreting the specifications from the bank, entering the Header, File Header, Detail, and Trailer Record parameters, and entering the appropriate UniData Masking Codes.

[Image: Positive Pay setup]

Note: Note: Enter the masks required for the fields using standard UniData masking parameters. For example, R%10 places the item on a field of 10 zeroes. See Table 116 for a list of commonly used parameters.

To set up positive pay:

  1. Access the setup form: click the Back Office menu and select System|Change > Bank Accounts. Then, click the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] and select Positive Pay Setup.

  2. To copy existing positive pay information, click Copy From Another Bank Account. Enter the bank account ID and then click Copy.

  3. Enter a File Stub code. The system can group all accounts with the same file stub together for downloading, and it appends the year, month, and day to create the file name. For example, if you have multiple accounts with the same financial institution, enter the same File Stub for each account.

  4. Enter the positive pay File Extension that defines the file type, typically .txt.

  5. Set up the header record information, which determines the format for the header information for each record included in the overall positive pay file your organization will send to the bank:

  1. Set up a detail record information, which specifies the format for the individual checks that are grouped under each header:
  1. Set up a trailer record information; trailer records indicate the end of a group of checks:
  1. Set up a file header record information, which is used for the entire file sent to the bank:
  1. Click Save.
Parameter Definition Example
CRLF Carriage return and line feed Moves cursor to the next line
DD Converts a date format to a day of the month Converts a date format 7-14-2017 to 14.
DM Converts a date format to a numbered month Converts date format 7-14-2017 to 7.
DY Converts a date format to a numbered year Converts date format 7-14-2017 to 2017.
D4- Converts a UniData date to a date with month-date-year format Converts UniData date 14806 to 7-14-2008.
D2/ Converts a UniData date to a date with month-date-year format Converts UniData date 14806 to 7/14/08.
L#XX Left justify text and pad with spaces L#8 will cause “text” to appear as text_ _ _ _.
R%XX Right justify numbers and pad with zeros R% 8 will cause “1234” to appear as 00001234.

Note: Note: Go to http://www.ibm.com/us/ and search for the latest IBM UniData Commands Reference for additional UniData Masking parameter information.

Related Topics

Maintaining Bank Accounts

Create Positive Pay Files

Recreate Positive Pay Files

Positive Pay File Report

========================================================================

Configuring Default Check Formats

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Print%20Service%20Check%20Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Print Service Check Maintenance.htm

Configuring Default Check Formats

Use the Print Service Check Maintenance form to configure the default check formats. For example, you can select letter or legal size paper options and where the stub appears, adjust margins, and align fields. This form contains the following panels:

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group security.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under System|Change, click Print Service Check Maintenance.

To set up the Print Service Check Maintenance:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Check Name Enter the record name to reference this query. To look up and edit an existing record click the Check Name link and select one from the Select Check Reports dialog box.
mvQuery Query Name Enter the name of the Query using mvQuery. Select the appropriate option from the drop-down.
Default Report Form This field is optional. Enter the default report form name to use from the mvQuery Query. Select the appropriate option from the drop-down.
Report Class This field is optional. Enter a single letter to designate the class of the report.
Report Title This field is optional. Enter a descriptive title to be displayed on the web.
Control Tag This is system generated. It is a text tag to identify the report for the web.
Sequence Number This is system generated. This is an accumulator used to assign an ID to PDF files for the web.
Query Version This is system generated. It is the version of the query used by the print server.
mvQuery Custom Check Report? Indicate if this is an mvQuery report record used to print checks. Select one of the following options from the drop-down: - No (default) - Yes

Note: Note:

Field Name Description
Top Margin This field is optional. Enter a number between 0 to 30 to indicate the number of blank lines to be added as part of the Top Margin on mvQuery checks.
Middle Margin This field is optional. Enter a number between 0 to 30 to indicate the number of blank lines needed to position the second section of mvQuery checks. (The default value is 3.)
Bottom Margin This field is optional. Enter a number between 0 to 30 to indicate the number of blank lines to be added as part of the Bottom Margin on mvQuery checks. (Default value is 0. Only use with third section on check.)
Test Margins? This is an optional field. You can set this flag to true when TESTING margins. You will see the number of lines and margin used when printing between each section. Select one of the following options from the drop-down: - No (default) - Yes

MICR Line Adjustments

Note: Note:

Field Name — Description

MICR Print Line — This is an optional field. Enter the line within the MICR print area to position the MICR. (Valid adjustment range is between 1 to 5. Default value is 3. Enter zero if no adjustment is required.)

MICR Indent — This is an optional field. Enter the value for the number of spaces to indent the entire MICR line from the left. (Valid indent range is between 0 to 30. Enter zero if no MICR indent is required.)

Transit Number Indent — This is an optional field. Enter the number of spaces to indent the Transit Routing Number of the MICR from the MICR indent. (Valid indent range is between 0 to 30. Enter zero if no Transit Number indent is required.)

Account Number Indent — This is an optional field. Enter the number of spaces to indent the Bank Account Number of the MICR from the MICR indent. (Valid indent range is between 0 to 30. Enter zero if no Bank Account Number indent is required.)

Special Font Adjustments

Note: Note:

Field Name — Description

Default Payee Font — This is an optional field. Select the font size for the Payee section on the check form. (Default value is Arial 9pt.) > Note: Note: Increased font size will affect window size adjustments.

Default Micr Font — This is an optional field. Enter the code from the table of the MICR font to use on checks. Valid range is between 1 and 7. (Default value is 1.)

Default Security Font — This is an optional field. Enter the code from table of the security font to use on checks. Valid range is between 1 and 6. (Default value is 1.)

MEMO Font Size — This is an optional field. Enter a number between 8 and 12 for the font size to display Memo field comments on customized fonts. Valid range is between 7 and 12. (Default value is 7.)

Check Stub Adjustments

Note: Note:

Field Name — Description

Current Earnings Detail Section — This is an optional field. Enter the number of lines to display on each check stub for the Current Earnings Detail section. (Valid range is between 0 and 100, Default value is 10. Zero means use the current default value.)

Deduction & Taxes Section — This is an optional field. Enter the number of lines to display on each check stub for the Deduction & Taxes section. (Valid range is between 0 and 100, Default value is 22. Zero means use the current default value.)

Direct Deposit Section — This is an optional field. Enter the number of lines to display on each check stub for the Direct Deposit section. (Valid range is between 0 and 100, Default value is 10. Zero means use the current default value.)

YTD Earnings Section — This is an optional field. Enter the number of lines to display on each check stub for the YTD Earnings section. (Valid range is between 0 and 100, Default value is 10. Zero means use the current default value.)

Paid Time Off Section — This is an optional field. Enter the number of lines to display on each check stub for the Paid Time Off section. (Valid range is between 0 and 100, Default value is 10. Zero means use the current default value.)

Employer Contributions Section — This is an optional field. Enter the number of lines to display on each check stub for the Employer Contributions section. (Valid range is between 0 and 100. Default value is 10. Zero indicates to use the current default value.)

Deduction Description Length — This is an optional field. Enter a description consisting of letters or numbers up to 15 characters. (You should test this description since it can effect how the data displays.)

Third-Party Payment Section — This is an optional field. Enter a number between 0 and 60 for the maximum number of lines to appear in the Third-Party Payment section. (Default value is 40.)

Void After _ Days Placement — This is an optional field. Enter a number between 1 and 3 to indicate the number of lines to move the “Void After <xx> Days” line up or down from its original position on the check. (Default value is 3.)

Check Window Adjustments

Note: Note:

Field Name — Description

Address Window Line — This is an optional field. This is the line within the Check Window Address print area to position the first address line. (Valid range is between 1 to 5. Default value is 2. A zero is considered no adjustment needed.)

Address Window Indent — This is an optional field. Enter the value for the number of spaces to indent the check window address lines from the left. (Valid range is between 0 to 10. Default value is 5. A zero is considered no indent needed.)

  1. Click Save to either save the form for the client or save the changes made to an existing Check Name. Upon saving, the form is cleared.

Deleting a Check Name

Click Delete to delete an existing Check Name any time.

Note: Note: A standard system check record cannot be deleted.

========================================================================

Setting Up Default Global Check Printing Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Print%20Service%20Global%20Check%20Parameters.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Print Service Global Check Parameters.htm

Setting Up Default Global Check Printing Parameters

Use the Print Service Global Check Parameters form to set up the default global check printing parameters for service providers. You may or may not set these at the client level. The client level parameters take precedence over the system level settings. This form has the following four sections:

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click Back Office. Under System|Change, click Print Service Global Check Parameters.

To set up the Print Service Global Check Parameters:

  1. Complete the following:
Field Name Description
Global Check Configuration
Check Print Form Order This option is used to determine what to do for Multi-Form Checks when building mvQuery check records. Select one of the following: - Print CHECK Last on Multi-Form Advices (Default Option) - Print CHECK First on Multi-Form Advices - No Multi-Form Checks
  1. Click Accept to confirm the default global check printing parameters for the service provider.

========================================================================

Creating Payroll Processing Schedules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Processing_Schedules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Processing_Schedules.htm

Creating Payroll Processing Schedules

Use the Processing Schedules form to establish payroll processing information for your organization.

The processing schedule is set for each client on the Client Details Control tab.

To set up a payroll processing schedule:

  1. Enter the pay Processing Schedule ID. If you are creating a new schedule, enter something brief but descriptive, such as STD.

  2. Enter a brief Description for this pay schedule, such as Standard.

  3. Enter the Remote Entry Cutoff Days Prior to Pay Day, which is the number of days prior to the pay day when the client must submit time sheet information.

  4. Enter the Remote Entry Deadline, which is the time when the client must complete time sheet entry on the cutoff day.

  5. Enter the Delivery Days Prior to Pay Day, which is the number of days prior to the pay day that your organization must deliver checks/advices to the client.

  6. Select Skip Weekends to skip weekend days. Any count that crosses a weekend goes back two additional days.

For example, if the cutoff is five days before the pay date and the pay date is a Tuesday, then the cutoff day is the previous Tuesday (five days back, skipping the two weekend days). If the schedule does not skip weekends, the cutoff day would be Thursday (five days back, including the weekend).

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Creating Reason Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reasons.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reasons.htm

Creating Reason Codes

You can create codes that represent actions that Human Resources can take using the Reason Codes form. When a user performs a human resources action, such as a pay rate or position change, the system prompts you for a reason code.

To create a reason code, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Reason Codes from the System|Change menu.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Reason Code — Enter or select the Reason Code for this action. If you are creating a new reason, use something brief but descriptive, such as MI or PRO.

Reason Description — Enter the Reason Description, such as Merit Increase or Promotion.

Valid Actions — Select one or more Valid Actions to which this reason applies. For example, Promotion could apply to both Pay Rate Change and Job Change.

TPA Separation Code — Enter a TPA Separation Code if this reason code is for actions, typically terminations, used by a third-party when your organization reports the action.

Show on Web — Select Show on Web to display the reason code in Employee Portal (EP).

Obsolete On Date — Enter the Obsolete On Date when this reason code is no longer valid.

Termination Type — If this reason applies to termination, select the Termination Type.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Globally Recalculating Workers Compensation on Vouchers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Recalculate%20Workers%20Compensation%20on%20Vouchers%20(Global).htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Recalculate Workers Compensation on Vouchers (Global).htm

Globally Recalculating Workers Compensation on Vouchers

Use this form to recalculate workers’ compensation accrual (liability) amount in payroll vouchers, for a specific date range. You can also use this form to update both vouchers and the employee workers compensation register.

Security

Note: Note: This utility will use the rates in effect on the voucher pay date. But, any workers’ compensation parameters taken from company records, state processing rules, or worker’s compensation policies will use current values.

Worker’s compensation will be recalculated using current values of the following parameters:

File Name Field Description
WC.RATES Gross Rate
WC.POLICIES Suppress G/L Accrual Suppress TRIA Premium Rate Template
WC.MODS Use Override Rates Override Rate
STATE.CODES W/C Wage Basis W/C Wages Sheltered Week Ends on Day Rate/Hundred
LOCATION.CODES Wc Policy Work Comp State
JOB.CODES Job Master Classification
JOB.CODE.MASTER Work Comp Class
EARNING CODES Factor Worker Comp Taxable Pay Class Rate Class Comp State
CLIENT MASTER W/C Policy Work Location Based W/c Calc Service Type
To access the form, click System. Under System Action, click Recalculate Workers Compensation on Vouchers (Global).

To globally recalculate workers’ compensation on vouchers:

  1. Enter a Start Date, which is the date from which you want to recalculate, by globally applying the changed rates, or other changed workers’ compensation parameters.

  2. Enter an End Date, which is the date up to which you want to recalculate, by globally applying the changed rates, or other changed workers’ compensation parameters.

  3. Click Update W/C Values. A job progress window displays. Select Yes to continue. (Since this is a global utility, the processing time depends on the date range selected.)

  4. Click Close. A message box appears, telling you the number of voucher records updated and number of voucher errors if any.

  5. Click OK to close the message box. The job progress window also closes now.

  6. Click Update Report. The Workers Compensation Recalculation Report opens, showing the amount of Accrual Change made for each affected employee.

  7. Click the XLS link on the Workers Compensation Recalculation Report to download the report.

  8. Click Error Report. The Workers Compensation Recalculation Error Report opens, showing the list of prior payroll vouchers not updated, and the reason thereof.

  9. Click the XLS link on the Workers Compensation Recalculation Error Report to download the report.

  10. Click Clear to clear the form.

========================================================================

Maintaining Relationship Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Relationships.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Relationships.htm

Maintaining Relationship Codes

You can maintain the codes that represent dependents’ relationships to employees using the Relationships form.

Note: Note: If your organization is an Aetna reporting PEO, you must use the two-digit code supplied by Aetna for the Relationship Code.

To maintain a relationship code, do the following:

  1. Click the Back Office menu and select Relationships from the System|Change menu, OR under Work Centers, under the Onboarding & Benefits section click Benefit Plan Maintenance. Under Group Benefit Plans (Global) click Relationships.

  2. Complete the following fields:

Field — Description

Relationship Code — Enter or select a Relationship Code that briefly represents the dependent’s relation to the employee. This field is required.

Relationship Description — Enter a description of the Relationship between a dependent and an employee.

Relationship Description (Spanish) — Enter a description of the relationship in Spanish.

Relationship Type — Specify the Relationship Type you want to use for the relationship. This field is required. Benefits Enrollment uses this setting when selecting dependents to enroll in benefit plans that include those relationships.

Plan Types — The plan types connected to the relationship allow the system to show the correct cost for employees based on the dependents specified during benefits and open enrollments. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

Obsolete — Select Obsolete if the relationship is no longer used. This hides the relationship so it cannot be selected by employees during enrollments. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

  1. Click Save to save the record.

  2. Click Delete to delete an existing relationship code. However, please note that:

  1. Click Cancel to clear this form at any time. All unsaved changes will be lost.

========================================================================

Configuring an Invoice Logo Override for Sub-Cost Centers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Report_Print_Options.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Report_Print_Options.htm

Configuring an Invoice Logo Override for Sub-Cost Centers

You can use the Report Print Options form to add an override to the Print Service Report Logo Filepath when configuring a sub-cost center, which helps manage branding for all clients within the same cost center.

Note: Note the following:

To configure an Invoice Logo override for a sub-cost center:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Cost Centers.

  3. Enter or select a cost center that is a sub-cost center.

  4. Select Report Print Options on the Actions menu. The Report Print Options form displays.

  5. Specify the complete path to the location on the mvQuery print server for report logo images in the Print Service Report Logo Filepath field. For example, C:.gif.

  6. Click Accept.

Note: If you selected a cost center that is not a sub-cost center (Sub-Cost Center is not enabled on the Cost Centers form) or you did not select any sub-cost center an error message displays, “Print Service Report Logo Filepath override is only available for Sub-Cost Center.” Click OK to continue.

========================================================================

ACH Journal Edits Audit Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/ACH_Journal_Edits_Audit_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/ACH_Journal_Edits_Audit_Report.htm

ACH Journal Edits Audit Report

You can use the ACH Journal Edits Audit Report form to run a report that captures ACH updated or manually created records.

Note: Note the following:

To access the form, clickReports menu. Under System|Report, click ACH Journal Edits Audit Report.

To capture ACH updated or manually created records:

  1. Complete the following:

In this Field — Enter or select this

Client ID — The ID for the client whose information you want to capture. After entering or making a selection, the client’s name displays. (You can select multiple clients at once by selecting them from the list that displays and then click Done.) Note: You can only select clients in your client access group.

User ID — The ID for the user whose information you want to capture.

Start Date — This field is required. Enter or select a date to limit the report to a specific date or to use as the start date in the date range. Note: The total date range cannot be greater than one year.

End Date — This field is required. Enter or select a date to limit the report to a specific date or to use as the last date in the date range. Note: You cannot enter an End Date that is prior to the Start Date.

  1. Click Generate Report to generate the ACH Journal Edits Audit Report, which displays the updates (Before/After Value) made to all the audited database files for the selected client and employee, for the selected date or date range.

  2. Click Clear to clear the form.

========================================================================

ACH Journal Hold/Release Audit Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/ACH_Journal_Hold_Release_Audit_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/ACH_Journal_Hold_Release_Audit_Report.htm

ACH Journal Hold/Release Audit Report

You can use the ACH Journal Hold/Release Audit Report form to run a report that captures ACH hold and release activity.

Note: Note the following:

To access the form, clickReports menu. Under System|Report, click ACH Journal Hold/Release Audit Report.

To capture ACH hold and release activity:

  1. Complete the following:

In this Field — Enter or select this

Client ID — The ID for the client whose information you want to capture. After entering or making a selection, the client’s name displays. (You can select multiple clients at once by selecting them from the list that displays and then click Done.) Note: You can only select clients in your client access group.

User ID — The ID for the user whose information you want to capture.

Start Date — This field is required. Enter or select a date to limit the report to a specific date or to use as the start date in the date range. Note: The total date range cannot be greater than one year.

End Date — This field is required. Enter or select a date to limit the report to a specific date or to use as the last date in the date range. Note: You cannot enter an End Date that is prior to the Start Date.

  1. Click Generate Report to generate the ACH Journal Hold/Release Audit Report, which displays the changes (Before Value and After Value) made to all the audited database files for the selected client and employee, for the selected date or date range.

  2. Click Clear to clear the form.

========================================================================

Client SUTA Billing Rates Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Client%20SUTA%20Billing%20Rates%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Client SUTA Billing Rates Report.htm

Client SUTA Billing Rates Report

Use this form to generate a report on unemployment billing rates for all or selected clients.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, clickReports menu. Under System|Report, click Client SUTA Billing Rates Report.

To generate the Client SUTA Billing Rates Report:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Client Status This field is optional. Leave this field blank to select all client statuses. If you want to run this report for a specific client status, select it from the following options: - Pending - Inactive - Client Canceling - Active - Terminated
  1. Click Run to generate the report on screen.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

  3. Click Close to close this form at any time.

Report Output

The Client SUTA Billing Rates Report displays the following columns:

Columns
- Client ID - Client Name - State - Effective Date - Rate - Employer ID - SDI Rate - Misc1 Rate - Misc2 Rate - Misc3 Rate This report also provides you with a Code Count on the last page of the report.

Login History Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Login-History.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Login-History.htm

Login History Report

The Login History Report records login history information including the time, date, and IP address used for the login. This report is useful to identify any unusual IP addresses used to log in to a user’s account.

  1. In PrismHR, click [Image: screenshot] (Reports).

  2. From System|Report, select Login History Report. The Login History Report opens.

  3. You can use the following selection criteria and sort options to filter the report results:

Use this option To do this
Identifier ID Enter an identifier ID or click the link to select from a list.
Company ID Enter a company ID or click the link to select from a list.
Employee ID Enter an employee ID or click the link to select from a list.
Proxy App Enter the application used to log in.
User Database Select a user database: - Prism Users (HRP.USERS file) - Webservice Users (WEBSERVICE.URSERS file)
  1. Click Run.

========================================================================

Identifying Employee Status

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Reason_Code_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Reason_Code_Report.htm

Identifying Employee Status

The Reason Code Report displays all the reasons that your client has entered into PrismHR. These reasons identify why employees are in a certain status. For example, if an employee terminated their employment, the reason code provides additional information such as whether the termination was voluntary or involuntary. To run the report:

  1. Click Back Office.
  2. From System|Change, select Reasons.
  3. Select a Reason Code
  4. Select Reason Code Report from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] .

The report columns are:

========================================================================

Setting Up Invoice Header Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Setting%20Up%20PEO%20and%20Non-PEO%20Invoice%20Headers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/Setting Up PEO and Non-PEO Invoice Headers.htm

Setting Up Invoice Header Information

Organizations can customize client and employer information that displays in invoice headers, as well as include global, employer, and client logos in the PDF versions.

Invoice Logos

There are multiple fields in PrismHR where administrators can enter invoice logo file paths (the image locations on the mvQuery print server).

Once the logo file paths are entered, the system can include the logo images in the PDF versions of invoices – logos do not show in the display version.

Note: Note: Contact the PrismHR Customer Support Team to upload logos to the mvQuery print server.

The system chooses the logo to display in the invoice header based on the following hierarchy:

If you enter a logo path for the … Then …
Employer invoice logo the Invoice Logo File Path field in in Employer Details - The employer invoice logo displays in the invoice header; - Otherwise, the system checks to see if the global invoice logo is available.

Enter the complete path to the image locations on the mvQuery print server in the Invoice Logo File Path in the Invoice Information Maintenance panel in Employer Details.

[Image: screenshot]

Global Invoice Logos (PEO and Non-PEO)

Enter the complete paths to the image locations on the mvQuery print server in the PEO Invoice Global Logo File Path (for the PEO global invoice logo) and Non-PEO Invoice Global Logo File Path (for the non-PEO global invoice logo) in the Logo Path Maintenance form, accessed in the System ParametersActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

.

[Image: screenshot]

Company Invoice Logos

Enter the complete path to the image locations on the mvQuery print server in the Print Service Report Logo Filepath in the Report Print Options form, accessed in the Client DetailsActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

.

[Image: screenshot]

Enter the complete paths to the image locations on the mvQuery print server in the mvQuery Report Logo Filepath and the Blank Image Filepath in the Global mvQuery Image Path Maintenance form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu and select System|Change > System Parameters. Then, selectActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

Global mvQuery Image Path Maintenance.

For complete documentation, see Maintaining Global mvQuery Image Path.

MVQ Invoice Information

Users can enter additional MVQ invoice data as needed using the Invoice Messaging form.

For complete documentation, see Adding Messages to Invoices.

Information pertaining to the period end date and the batch number has also been moved in portrait formats for invoice, and displays under the Invoice Number and Invoice Date.

Headings and descriptions have been changed to read Pay Period Ending and Control Number for all invoice formats.

Client Information

The client name and address information included in the invoice header is based on the client specified in the invoice. The information displayed is the same in invoices for both PEO and non-PEO clients.

Client Name

The client name displayed is either the Client Name (DBA) or the Legal Name specified for the client in the Client Details form.

This choice of name is defined by the value in the Name to Print Invoices field, located in the Report Print Options form, which is accessible from the Client DetailsActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

.

[Image: Name and Address fields on Client Details, with Legal Name and Client DBA Name highlighted.]

[Image: Name to Print on Invoices field, under the Report Print Options panel]

Client Address

The client address displayed is based on the following hierarchy.

Note: Note: If the Address Line 1 field in any of the above addresses does not have a value entered, the system skips the address and the next address in the hierarchy is used.

If there is an address entered in … Then …
The Alternate Billing Address panel in Pay Groups - The alternate billing address entered displays in the invoice header; - If no address is entered, the system uses the next address in the hierarchy.

PEO and non-PEO clients use different logic to define the employer whose information is included in the invoice. Whether the client is PEO or non-PEO is defined by the Service Type selected in the Contract panel in Client Details.

[Image: Service Type field set to “Professional Employer” in the Contract panel]

If the Service Type selected is … Then …
Professional Employer The client is a PEO client.
Any other value in the drop-down The client is a non-PEO client.

PEO Clients

If the client is a PEO, it uses the employer associated with the invoice. Typically this is the Employer specified in the Contract panel in Client Details.

[Image: Employer ID entered in the Contract panel]

Non-PEO Clients

If the client is non-PEO, it uses the Non-PEO Invoice Employer specified in the Billing Tab in Client Details.

Note: Note: The Non-PEO Invoice Employer field only displays in Client Details if the client is non-PEO.

[Image: Non-PEO Invoice Employer field in the Billing panel]

[Image: Non-PEO Invoice Global Employer field under Invoice Parameteres]

Once the system determines an employer to use in the invoice, it uses the employer name, address, and other information entered in Employer Details.

Employer Name

The Employer Print Name displays in the invoice as entered in Employer Details. If an Employer Print Name is not entered, the Employer Name is used.

[Image: Employer Details form with Employer Name and Print Name highlighted]

Employer Address

If an employer has return address information entered in the Invoice Information Maintenance panel in Employer Details, this is the address that displays in the invoice. If an address is not specified in the Invoice Information Maintenance panel, the employer’s standard address as entered in the Employer Details panel displays.

Note: Note: If the first return address field in the Invoice Information Maintenance panel does not have a value entered, the system uses the employer’s standard address.

[Image: Invoice Information Maintenance panel]

Other Employer Information

If any of the following fields have information entered in the Invoice Information Maintenance panel in Employer Details, the information displays in the PDF version of the invoice (it is not included in the display version).

========================================================================

Determining Process ID Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/User_Process_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/User_Process_Report.htm

Determining Process ID Information

Use the User Process Report form to determine the process ID information that displays and controls the display order that appears on the User Process Report.

To launch the form:

  1. Click Reports.

  2. From System|Report, select User Process Report.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter the Selection Criteria to determine what displays on the report. If left blank, all user processes display.
Field Description
Category Select from display categories, such as Report.
Type Type of user. For example, Payroll.
Display In Menus If enabled, processes display in menus.
Display In Search If enabled, processes show up in searches.
Sort Criteria Sort on Process Name, Category, and Type.
  1. Click Run.

  2. Listed are samples of the report columns, based on the criteria in the form:

========================================================================

Determining User Display

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/User_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/User_Report.htm

Determining User Display

Use the User Report form to determine which users will display on the User Report and in what order. You will be able to view their status, user type, date of last password change, and access groups. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To determine user display for the report:

  1. Enter the Selection Criteria to determine what displays on the report:

Note: If you select Worksite Manager, Trusted Advisor, or Worksite Employee, you can filter further by Client ID. (After selecting the Client ID, the Client Name displays.)

  1. Click Run. The reports displays. (If you selected a User Role, it displays in the report header.)

[Image: screenshot]

Listed are samples of the report columns, based on the criteria in the form:

========================================================================

Determining User Role Details Display

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/User_Roles_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/User_Roles_Report.htm

Determining User Role Details Display

Use the User Roles Report form to determine which user role details display in the User Roles Report (for example, Process ID, Description, and Access Level). For example:

[Image: screenshot]

To generate this report, do the following:

  1. In PrismHR, click Reports.

  2. From System|Report, select User Roles Report. The report opens.

  3. Enter the Selection Criteria to determine what displays on the report (if left blank, all user roles display):

  1. Click Run.

The report columns are based on selections on the form:

========================================================================

Determining Client Details Display

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/WC_Override_Rates_Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Reports/WC_Override_Rates_Report.htm

Determining Client Details Display

Use the W/C Override Rates Report form to determine which client details display in the W/C Override Rates Report.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter the Selection Parameters to determine what displays on the report:

Listed are samples of the report columns, based on the criteria in the form:

========================================================================

Updating User Role Descriptions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Role_Description.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Role_Description.htm

Updating User Role Descriptions

You can update user role descriptions by selecting the Role Description option on the Actions menu. In the Role Description form, enter or select a user from the Role ID field and the current description displays. Enter a New Description and click Save. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Creating S-Corp Benefit Tax Adjustments

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/S-Corp%20Benefit%20Tax%20Adjustment.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/S-Corp Benefit Tax Adjustment.htm

Creating S-Corp Benefit Tax Adjustments

Use the S-Corp Benefit Tax Adjustments form to calculate and create tax adjustments to Federal Income Taxable wages ONLY (no state or local income tax) for S-Corp owner employees for the amount of company paid benefit plans (up until the date the utility ran).

The process selects the records in the Employee Benefits Register for each employee that fits the criteria and totals the company contributions to any or all benefit plans for the selected insurance class. Once the process has completed the calculation and accumulation of fringe pay amounts, a report is generated that details the fringe benefit amounts for each employee.

Fringe benefits are often considered extra benefits outside of a company’s standard health insurance offerings. The employer is the provider of the fringe benefit, even if a third party provides the actual benefit. For example, an employee may receive legal services through an attorney that is paid by the employer, but the employer is still the provider of the fringe benefit. Before using this process, ensure that a Fringe Pay Code was set up. The total amount paid by the client for the applicable benefits will be assigned to this pay code and appear on each adjustment voucher. The pay code must be a non-cash fringe benefit type, otherwise, taxes will be deducted if the wrong pay code is selected.

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form click Back Office > Employer|Action > S-Corp Benefit Tax Adjustments.

To calculate and create S-Corp benefit tax adjustments:

  1. Complete these fields as required:

In this field — Enter this

Year — The year for the download. Defaults to the current year.

Quarter — The quarter for the download. Select 1, 2, 3 or 4 depending for which quarter you want to calculate.

Insurance Class Code — Click the link and select the insurance classes to include in the report. Employer contributions for plans with these classes will be calculated. When selection is complete, click Done to close the Select Insurance Classes list.

Fringe Pay Code — Click the link and select the fringe pay code.

Tax Adjustment Date — Click in the field and select the adjustment date for the report.

Employer ID — Click the link and select the employer or leave blank to select all employers.

Client ID — Click the link and select the client for the report or leave blank to select all clients.

State Income Tax Code — If you want to change the tax adjustment amount to consider that state income tax, enter the state income tax codes. Otherwise, the system does not take the state income tax into account when calculating the Tax Adjustment.

  1. To see a preview of the report, click Preview Changes. The system displays the processing status and notifies you when it is complete.

  2. Click Close. The system displays a preview and provides a Download Report link.

  3. When you are ready to make the adjustments, click Generate Adjustments.

========================================================================

Establishing Sales Tax Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Sales_Tax_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Sales_Tax_Codes.htm

Establishing Sales Tax Codes

Establish codes that represent a sales tax rate for the specified state with Sales Tax Codes form.

To set up a new sales tax code:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select Sales Tax Codes under System|Change.

  3. Enter the Tax Code that represents this sales tax. Use something brief and descriptive, such as FLTAX for Florida’s sales tax.

  4. Enter the Sales Tax Rate for the specified state. If the rate is 7%, for example, enter 7.00.

  5. Enter the two-character postal code for the Tax State.

  6. Click Save.

========================================================================

Search

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Search_Field.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Search_Field.htm

Searching Techniques

The Search field at the top of the PrismHR window enables you to search for forms, employees, and other items. This field gives you quick access to features without needing to navigate to them in the menus.

To initiate a search, start entering to do a broad search or narrow the search using an initial letter followed by a colon:

To initiate a broad search:

  1. Enter the text of the item you want to find. As you type, the system presents a list of suggestions.

  2. Click an item to open it. If there is an arrow next to the item [Image: screenshot] , click it to open the form as a layer over the current page. This makes a second form available while continuing to display the main form.

To search for a feature or a form (application):

  1. Type A: and then enter the name of the feature you want to access. As you enter, the list filters to the features that match your search.

  2. Click the feature’s name to open the form or click the arrow to open the form in a new window and layer it over the current page.

To search for a client:

  1. Enter C: and then type the name of the client. As you type, the list filters client records that match your search. The Search field lists only clients to which you have access.

  2. Click the client name to open the Employee Details form.

To search for an employee:

  1. Enter E: and then enter the name of the employee. As you enter, the list filters to employee records that match your search. (The Search field lists only employees to which you have access.)

Note: Note the following:

  1. Click the employee name to open the Employee Details.

Note: Note: To see employees with an onboarding status displayed, you must be enrolled in the Onboarding module.

To search for a report:

  1. Type R: and then type the report name. As you type, the list filters reports that match your search. The Search field lists only reports to which you have access.

  2. Click the report name to open the report’s selection criteria screen.

  3. Make your selections and then run the report.

========================================================================

Maintaining SIC Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SIC_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SIC_Codes.htm

Maintaining SIC Codes

Maintain Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) codes used to identify industries with the SIC Codes Maintenance form.

To set up an SIC code:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select SIC Codes Maintenance under System|Change.

  3. Enter the SIC Code for the industry.

  4. Enter the Description.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Configuring System-Level Settings for Coronavirus-Related Paid Leave

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP-Coronavirus_Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP-Coronavirus_Setup.htm

Configuring System-Level Settings for Coronavirus-Related Paid Leave

Note: Note: Known Issue with Billing - Workarounds are now available for this issue. See the article Compliance with COVID-19-Related Legislation on the CRC for more information.

The Families First Coronavirus Response Act establishes coverage rules for employees who must take time off due to the COVID-19 outbreak. Use this form to configure system-level settings for paid leave defined by this act.

For detailed, step-by-step instructions on setting up COVID-19 features, please see the article Setting Up Coronavirus-Related Paid Leave on the Customer Resource Center.

Note: Note: Please ensure that you set up all necessary COVID-19 pay codes and bill codes before you edit this form.

To set up pay codes for emergency paid leave:

  1. Select the bill codes you want to assign for system-level COVID-19 leave tracking.

  2. Select one or more pay codes to associate with emergency FMLA, self care-related paid sick leave, and dependent care-related paid sick leave. See the table below for descriptions of each field.

  3. Set the wage and tax cap logic, as appropriate.

  4. When you finish, click Save.

Assigning Pay Codes for Emergency Paid Leave

Pay and Billing Event Settings

Field — Description

Emergency Tax Credit Rebate Billing Event — Select the billing event you set up to track COVID-19 paid leave credits.

Emergency Medicare Credit Rebate Billing Event — Select a billing event to track employer-side Medicare tax credit rebates for COVID-19 leave.

Emergency Paid Sick Leave (Self-Care) Pay Code — Select or enter a pay code to use for COVID-19-related sick leave payments when the employee takes time off to care for themselves.

Emergency Paid Sick Leave (Dependent-Care) Pay Code — Select one or more pay codes to use for COVID-19-related sick leave payments when the employee takes time off to care for a dependent.

Emergency FMLA Pay Code — Select one or more pay codes to use for COVID-19-related FMLA payments. For example, you can enter one pay code with a Factor of 1.00 and another with a Factor of 0.67.

Cap and Credit Settings

You can configure credit cap settings according to your needs. Refer to the following table for descriptions of the fields and their settings. The federal legislation defines the creditable wage limits as follows:

Aggregate

Daily

Note: Note: We strongly recommend setting wage cap and tax credit cap logic to the same value. Using different settings can cause serious irregularities.

Field — Description

Default Wage Cap Logic — The federal legislation specifies the legal extent to which employers must compensate workers for coronavirus-related leave. Employers can pay employees more, but they only receive credit up to the defined limits. Select whether to use the daily caps or overall (aggregate) caps specified in the legislation. This setting reduces employee pay to the appropriate limits, if it exceeds those limits. While we strongly recommend against using this setting in general, you can select No Limits if you don’t want employee pay reduced in this way.

Default Tax Credit Cap Logic — Select whether to enforce the federally defined tax credit caps. You can limit based on either the aggregate or daily cap. This should use the same setting as Default Wage Cap Logic.

Default Suppress Client Rebate — The client rebate is reflected as a separate bill pending entry in an invoice line item. The line item shows total credits accumulated this pay period, along with the rebate associated with this invoice. If the entire rebate is not owed at once, the system tracks rebates that are owed and that can be taken, based on the limit structure. If you don’t want the system to automate the rebate process, select this option. Otherwise, select an option for Default Client Tax Credit Rebate Cap Logic, below.

Default Client Tax Credit Rebate Cap Logic — If you choose not to suppress the client tax credit rebate, you can select an option for applying caps to this rebate. You can either apply No Limits (the system bills the client and subtracts all credit accrued ) or you can cap at the client’s Form 941 liability, where the rebate for this pay period is calculated based on whether there is 941 liability from prior payrolls against which it can rebate. In other words, the amount available to rebate for a payroll = QTD 941 Liability minus QTD system-generated rebates. For example, if you have $1,000 in creditable wages and Medicare tax for a payroll (no 941 liability) and, quarter-to-date, you have $5,000 in un-rebated 941 liability, you can rebate the full $1,000 for the payroll because there is enough liability to rebate against. > Note: Note that if the rebate for a payroll is higher than the 941 limit, the system creates a client bill pending entry with a date of 10/14/2114. This is an intentional programming decision to prevent the entry from being pulled into the next payroll. For more information about this setting, see the Known Issues section at the top of this document.

Setting Up Client-Specific Overrides

Use the COVID-19 Emergency Processing Parameters Client Overrides form to establish client-specific settings, if necessary. These fields mimic the system-level fields for COVID-19 credit logic.

To set up client overrides:

  1. On the COVID-19 Emergency Processing Parameters form, select the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] .

  2. Select Client Overrides. A new form displays.

  3. Add clients to this form as needed. To add clients, enter the Client ID. The Client Name populates automatically.

  4. Select the appropriate options for each client override parameter. These are identical to the system-level settings.

  5. When you finish, click Save.

========================================================================

Creating 1095-C Election Text

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_1095C_Election_Text.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_1095C_Election_Text.htm

Creating 1095-C Election Text

This is the first step in setting up employee access to Forms 1095-C (See Giving Employees Access to Form 1095-C).

Set up the Early 1095-C Election page in Employee Portal (EP) with the 1095C Election Configuration form. This lets employees choose to receive their Form 1095-C electronically and saves money on printing and mailing costs. Employees also receive their Forms 1095-C earlier than a form sent by mail.

  1. In PrismHR, open System > Change > System Parameters and select 1095C Election Text from the Actions menu.

  2. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Lockout Period — Period during which employees are unable to access their 1095-Cs. Set 1095C Elect Disable From and 1095C Elect Disable To to set this lockout period. Outside of these dates, employees are able to access the Early 1095-C Election page.

1095C Elect Intro — Displays text in the Introduction field.

1095C Elect Terms — Displays terms to help employees understand how to use the page.

1095C Disabled Message — Displays when the page is not available.

1095C Elected Message — Displays when employees return to the page after electing to receive 1095-Cs electronically.

1095C Elect Accept — Statement that displays above the Click Here to Accept check box on the page. This implies that an employee agrees with the terms and conditions established by your organization.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Specifying Corporate Edition Content

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Corporate_Edition.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Corporate_Edition.htm

Specifying Corporate Edition Content

Set up information to the Corporate Edition with the Corporate Edition form. Fill in the fields as required.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Sales Processing Sub-System In Use — Obsolete: do not use.

Sales Draw Pay Code — Obsolete: do not use.

Use HRPS Version 1 Accounting — Note: This is a legacy field. Do not enable this for new customers or in new accounts. Uses the accounting methodology found in HRPS Version 1.

401(k) Contribution Download Process Name — Sets a download process name for 401(k) downloads.

G/L Post Subroutine Name — Calls to execute posts to an external G/L system.

Employee ID Entry On New Hire — Allows users to enter employee IDs for new hires.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining a Custom Process

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Custom_Process.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Custom_Process.htm

Defining a Custom Process

Custom processes allow your organization to define your own menu items with in PrismHR.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters.

  3. From the Actions menu, select Custom Process.

  4. Complete these fields as required.

Item — Description

Process ID — Enter a unique process ID.

Name — Process name that displays in menu and search.

Category — Menu where the custom process belongs.

Sub-Category — Indicates where the custom process belongs within the selected menu. If you select Other, you can enter a custom sub-category.

Disabled — Suppresses the display of custom processes.

Display in Menus — Displays the custom process in the menu to users who have access to it.

Display in Search — Displays the custom process to users who have access to it and use the search field to find it.

Disable Resizing — Enable to prevent the custom process from adjusting its size based on the browser window.

Role Specific — If the menu item is limited to a specific user role, select Service Provider or Worksite Manager as appropriate. If the menu item should be available to user roles of either type, leave this drop-down set to Select.

Version Type — For future development. Does not currently impact the functionality of PrismHR.

  1. Click Save.

SSO Forms

You can enter single sign-on information in the SSO Forms panel if the custom process is for something defined in SSO Services.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters.

  3. From the Actions menu, select Custom Process.

  4. From SSO Forms, select SSO Service.

  5. Leave the SSO Action field blank for tandem SSO. Only enter an SSO Action if you know the specific value that should go in this field for a legacy SSO service.

  6. Select the appropriate option from Use SSO Init:

  1. External App indicates whether this was defined as an external application in SSO Services. You cannot edit it here.

  2. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining System Parameters

Establishing SSO Services

Creating Custom Menu Items

========================================================================

Customizing My Support Team Dashboard Contacts

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Customizable_My_Support_Team_Fields.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Customizable_My_Support_Team_Fields.htm

Customizing My Support Team Dashboard Contacts

The Customizable My Support Team Fields are used to administer the Employee Portal for your users. After enabling the DASH_SUPPORT_TEAM_ADD custom feature code (See Using Custom Feature Codes), the Customizable My Support Team Fields panel displays on the System Parameters form.

[Image: screenshot]

You can add a description for each custom field, which determines how these fields display on the Company Account form. For example, you can add shift categories as a description for each custom field.

After saving these field descriptions, go to the Company Account form by selecting the Account tab from the Client|Change|Client Details menu. The customized fields display in the Customize My Support Team Dashboard panel, where you can select a contact for each field. (See the PrismHRClient Administration Guide.)

========================================================================

Setting General System Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Details.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Details.htm

Setting General System Parameters

You can set up general parameters on the System Parameters panel.

To set up general system parameters:

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Installed Company Name Business where the software is installed. This name displays at the top of some reports.
Custom Options Suffix Read-only field used if a system has custom processing installed.
Weeks In Year for Benefit Calculations Calculates payroll deduction amounts for employee benefit contributions. Options are 48 or 52 weeks, but you can override this setting for individual clients. This setting has consequences for the calculation of weekly, bi-weekly,semi-monthly, or monthly premiums. Typically, 48 weeks is recommended because the total amount deducted from the client and employee always equals the same monthly premium (and invoice) from the insurance carrier. You can override this at the client level (Client\ Change\ Benefit Plan Setup).
Minimum Check Amount Validation amount used during payroll calculation that flags checks with gross pay amounts less than this value. (This dollar amount is per pay period with a recommended amount of 0.00.) If a check does not meet this minimum amount, the system flags it and may require manager approval before finalization. Note: This minimum amount can be set at both the system level and the client level, with the client-level setting overriding the system-level setting. You can update or remove this limit as needed, or process the required approval if a check does not meet it.
Maximum Check Amount Validation amount used during payroll calculation that flags checks with gross pay amounts greater than this value. (This dollar amount is per pay period.) If a check exceeds this maximum amount, the system flags it and may require manager approval before finalization. Note: This maximum amount can be set at both the system level and the client level, with the client-level setting overriding the system-level setting. You can update or remove this limit as needed, or process the required approval if a check exceeds it.
Tax Calculation Lock (Formerly “Cross-Company Tax Calculation Lock”) > Note: Note: This field was renamed from “Cross-Company Tax Calculation Lock” to “Tax Calculation Lock,” and the “No” setting was renamed to “Yes, Lock on Client.” However, the functionality of this setting has not changed. Tax calculation locking mechanism used when many employees work for multiple clients. This ensures that calculations such as retirement plan contribution limits are handled correctly. Options are: - Yes, Lock on Client: This is the equivalent of the old “No” feature. It has the same exact functionality: it locks payrolls when multiple payroll batches within a single client include the same employee. Payroll processors can only process the batches one at a time, rather than simultaneously. - Yes, Lock on Employee: Locks payrolls when one or more payroll batches include the same employee. Users can only process those payrolls one at a time rather than simultaneously. This lock applies even if the employee is being paid on batches under two different employers or clients. - Yes, Lock On Employer: Locks the calculation at the employer level. If an employee works for two or more clients of the same employer, users can only process those clients’ payrolls one at a time. If the employee is in payroll batches for different clients and those clients have different employers, calculations are not locked and payrolls can be processed simultaneously.
Automatic Mail Code An existing delivery code to set automatic mailing capability, when items in a payroll batch are shipped. When a delivery method code is entered in this field, the system sets all payrolls that use the same delivery method to Mailed. Payrolls with different delivery methods must have their status manually set to Mailed. For example, if USPS is entered as a code, the system sets all payrolls sent by US mail to Mailed. Payrolls sent by FedEx must have their status manually set so that the tracking number or other information is logged. Enter ALL to set all payrolls to Mailed status, regardless of the Delivery method. A blank entry means users must manually change the status for every payroll.
Consolidated ACH File Processing Used Type of Automated Clearing House (ACH) processing method used. Options include: - No: Uses the non-consolidated method which processes one ACH file for each individual checking account as if they were separate ACH originators. This requires that ACH is processed in the backend system for PrismHR. - Yes: Uses the consolidated method which processes multiple checking accounts for one ACH originating bank. ACH is processed using the features in PrismHR. - Company: Employs the consolidated method with company batching, which processes multiple checking accounts for one ACH originating bank and sorts by client.
  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Setting Up Documentation Servers and Directories

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Documents.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Documents.htm

Setting Up Documentation Servers and Directories

Establish webserver IP addresses and directories that contain client documentation with the Document Services form.

To access this form:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters.

  3. From the Actions menu, select Document Services.

  4. Enter the Webserver IP Address.

  5. Enter the Webserver Directory path that contains client documentation.

  6. Enter the Secure Server IP Address.

  7. Enter the Secure Server Directory.

  8. The Downloads Directory is a holding area where files are stored during a download before displaying in the internet browser.

  9. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Setting Up Automated Email Messages

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Email_Services.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Email_Services.htm

Setting Up Automated Email Messages

You can maintain the information used in automatic email messages using the Email Services form.

To maintain the information in an automatic email message:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select System Parameters.

  3. From the Actions menu, select Email Services.

  4. Complete these fields as required.

Field Description
SMTP Server IP address or host name of the SMTP server
SMTP Port Port number the server listens on
Email Service URL URL where the email application is stored
Support Email Email address that recipients see for most messages
sMFA Email Email address that recipients see when they receive MFA email
Benefits Secure Email Subject Field that activates the option to email confirmation statements to employees. This field has no character limits.
Email Templates Select from these template types (maintained in the Message Templates form): - ACH Maximum Approval: Notification of approval action required for ACH process - ACH Maximum Resolution: Notification of an approved or denied action for ACH process - Password Reset: Password reset notice for PrismHR users - User Registration: EP user registration notice - Password Reset Confirmation: Confirmation notice of successful password reset - Password Reset ESS: Password reset notice for EP users - MFA Passcode: Passcode notice for multi-factor authentication - HR Actions Approval: Notification of approval action required for HR process - HR Actions Resolution: Notification of an approved or denied action for HR process - Payroll Approval: Notification of approval action required for Payroll process - Payroll Calculation: Notification that payroll is calculated for a process - Payroll Finalization: Notice that a payroll has reached the finalization step of payroll processing - Benefits Enrollment Approval: Notification of approval action required for Benefits Enrollment process - Employee Termination Approval: Notification of approval action required for Employee Termination process - Pay Card Account: Needs a definition - Payday Email: Notification that a payment was processed - Payroll Approved - Service Provider: Notification that payroll was approved - Payroll Denied - Service Provider: Notification that payroll was denied - Payroll Reminder Email: Notification that payroll is due for processing - Direct Deposit Change: Notification that a direct deposit was changed when an approval policy is in place - Leave Approval: Notification that an employee’s leave is ready for approval - Late Payroll Posting Approval: Notification that payroll was prevented from being posted on or after the Late Payroll Posting date and time during the finalization process, which prevents the payroll from finalizing until it is approved by a user in accordance with the applicable Approval Policy configuration
  1. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining System Parameters

Maintaining Message Templates

Multi-Factor Authentication Security

========================================================================

Setting Global Accounting Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Global_Accounting.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Global_Accounting.htm

Setting Global Accounting Parameters

Configure the required accounting parameters on the Global Accounting panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Accounting Interface Type — This is the accounting program type used with PrismHR. Build Account # options automatically create accounts for your accounting system’s chart of accounts. - Great Plains/Dynamics - Build Account # - Intacct - Build Account #s - Peach Tree/Sage- Build Account #s - QuickBooks - Build Account #s - Custom Layout - Build Account #s Accounting system options include: - No Accounting: No accounting interface. - Great Plains/Dynamics: Use Great Plains/Dynamics. - Intacct: Use Intacct. - Peach Tree/Sage: Use Peach Tree/Sage. - QuickBooks: Use QuickBooks. - Custom Layout: Create a custom layout. > Note: Note: Automatically building the chart of accounts is useful because it does not stop payroll processing if a G/L account is not in the Chart of Accounts. It adds the G/L number to the chart. However, It can also add “bad” G/L numbers and not all accounting programs can handle these errors. You can remove account numbers added in error.

Export Path — Defines the complete export paths for these options: - Export Path For Cash Receipts - export path for cash receipts. - Export Path For Receivables - export path for receivable data. - Export Path For Journals - export path for general journal data. - Export Path for CustMast - export path for customer data. - Export Path For CompanyAcctng - export path to a client’s accounting download files.

Import Path For Chart — The complete import path for chart of accounts data.

Consolidate Cost Accounting — Consolidates costs by date.

Use PrismHR Accounts Receivable — Enable if your organization is using PrismHR Accounts Receivable and it needs to be the primary accounts receivable. (If you select this option, the system will not track accounts receivable information in your accounting software.)

Suppress File Transfer Message — Suppresses the message that appears when accounting files are successfully transferred to your computer.

W/C General Ledger by State/Policy — Sets up workers’ compensation general ledger accounts by State or Policy. If you do not specify, the system defaults to State.

Require Prepay Benefit Account No. — Selects how PrismHR handles prepaid benefits. Options are: - Yes: Sends liability amounts for prepaid benefit plans to another account. This forces the use of the prepaid account. - No: Uses the same account for all benefit plans. - Setup: Allows setup transition For example, if a single plan has prepaid clients, you would put the current clients into the liability and prepaid clients into a prepaid account that you would manually “sweep” at the end of the month into the liability account for the next month.

Debit Account for EE Paid Tax Adjustment — The account used to record debits to G/L accounting for refunds that are paid out in relation to tax refunds.

  1. Click Save.

  2. Click Yes to confirm you want to save the system parameters.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Setting Up Global Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Global_Codes_Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Global_Codes_Setup.htm

Setting Up Global Codes

Define the deduction, pay, and bill codes in PrismHR on the Global Codes Setup panel.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

401(k) Pre-Tax Deduction Code — 401(k) elective contributions deducted before taxes.

401(k) Loan Deduction Code — 401(k) loan payments.

401(k) Post-Tax Deduction Code — 401(k) elective contributions deducted after taxes.

Garnishment Fee Deduction Code — Garnishment fees that must be set up as voluntary type deduction codes.

Automatic Loan Deduction Code — Automatically converts deductions entered on the Other Deductions form to employee loan deductions.

Employee Loan Deduction Code — Automatically creates employee loan deductions.

Employee Catch-up Deduction Code — Code used for employee’s catch-up retirement deduction.

Roth Post-Tax Deduction Code — Roth contributions deducted after taxes.

Roth Catch-up Deduction Code — Code used for Roth catch-up contributions.

Employer Match Billing Code — Code used for billing employer match.

ACH To Deduction Code — Creates a payroll deduction instead of an ACH direct deposit transaction.

Group Term Life Fringe Pay Code — Group term life insurance over 50K that is a taxable fringe benefit.

Dependents GTL Fringe Pay Code — Group term life insurance for employee dependents.

Tip Credit Make Up Pay Code — Pays tip credit make-up wages.

Calculate Tip Credit Make Up Daily in — Calculates tip credit make up wages for different states on a daily basis.

Auto Term Employee Status Code — Used in employee records when employees are automatically terminated because a client was terminated. This is the status code assigned to all employees.

Auto Term Reason Code — Provides a reason when employees are automatically terminated because a client was terminated. This code is used when you do a “mass termination” of a client. The system prompts you if you want to terminate all employees. If you select Yes, the system automatically assigns this reason code to all employees.

Transfer Term Reason Code — Provides a reason when employees are terminated after being transferred to a different client. When you transfer all employees to a client, this code is assigned to all employees at transfer.

FSA Match Bill Code — Code used for billing client contributions to employee flexible savings accounts.

HSA Match Bill Code — Code used for billing client contributions to employee health savings accounts.

PFML ER Pickup Fringe Pay Code — When this field is selected, then on the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form, in the Rate Breakdown section, the field named PFML Employer Pickup will display. You can click the hyperlink and select a pay code with a pay class of non‑cash fringe benefit from the Select fringe benefit dialog box or you can manually enter a valid pay code with a pay class of non‑cash fringe benefit here. If you manually enter an invalid (non‑fringe or non‑existing) pay code here, and click Save, you will receive an error message stating is not a non-cash fringe benefit. The invalid value will be cleared from this field.

Refund Tax Pay Code — Code used when refunding a tax amount over-withheld from an employee.

Code Test Employer — ID that validates items (such as billing codes) that do not have a particular employer tied to them. This ID must exist in Employer Details. The system validates accounts, sub-accounts, cost centers, and sub-cost centers against the accounting master file. Since this accounting validation requires employer information, PrismHR uses the employer in this field when no other is available. > Note: Note: Since the system performs the validation only for this company, other company flows might be incorrect. The PrismHR Customer Support Team strongly recommends that you test any new code you add for each employer that uses the code.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Setting Miscellaneous Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_More_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_More_Parameters.htm

Setting Miscellaneous Parameters

Set additional parameters for PrismHR using the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form. For example:

Note: You can access the Miscellaneous Global Parameters form by selecting Miscellaneous Parameters on the Actions menu in the System Parameters form.

Maintain tax-related information using the Miscellaneous Global Parameters panel.

To maintain tax-related information:

Complete the following fields as required:

Field Description
Use Employer SUI Rate as Company SUI Bill Rate Bills SUI to clients using an employer’s SUI rate for the applicable work state.
Vertex Tax Geocode Override Option Override standard GeoCode values that are sent to the Vertex tax calculation engine for processing. This is a global setting, and there are also client and employee settings. Options are: - Use Worksite GeoCode as listed: Uses the worksite location GeoCode and performs no overrides. - Override Work GeoCode with Resident GeoCode: Overrides the standard GeoCode values that are sent to the Vertex tax calculation engine for processing. Uses the employee’s resident GeoCode, which is defined in the Employee Details Address tab (either GeoCode or Override GeoCode). This is typically selected when employees work from home. - Override Work GeoCode with Home Location GeoCode:Uses the employee’s “home” location assignment to supply a GeoCode for the location-based portion of taxes. This is not routinely used. - Override T/S GeoCode with Resident GeoCode: Uses the employee’s resident GeoCode from the Employee Details Address tab in place of the GeoCode on the time sheet.

Establish Family and Medical Leave Act (FMLA) fiscal year information using the FMLA panel.

To establish FMLA information:

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

FMLA Year Basis — Establishes the Family and Medical Leave Act year basis that the calculation is driven by. Options are: - Calendar Year - Fiscal Year - Anniversary Year - First Leave Date

Fiscal End Month — Month when the fiscal year ends. Only enter a month if you select Fiscal Year for FMLA Year Basis

Fiscal End Day — Day when the fiscal year ends. Only enter a day if you select Fiscal Year for FMLA Year Basis

  1. Click Accept. The System Parameters form displays.

  2. Click Save.

  3. Click Yes in the message to confirm you want to save parameters.

Related Topics

Maintaining System Parameters

Exclude Internal Employees from SBEA Reporting

========================================================================

Managing Next Number Control

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Next_Number_Control.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Next_Number_Control.htm

Managing Next Number Control

Manage forms with numbers that PrismHR generates automatically with the Next Number Control form.

  1. Perform these tasks as required.
To Do This
Set Pay Check Next Number Defines the checking account and next check number: 1. Enter the Checking Account Number for payroll checks. 2. Enter the Next Check Number to assign to the next payroll check.
  1. Enter the Checking Account Number for payroll checks.

  2. Enter the Next Check Number to assign to the next payroll check. | Specify Pay Advice | Specifies payroll advice numbers for employees that use direct deposit. Enter the advice number in the Next Payroll Advice Number field. | | Reset Invoice Number | Resets the last invoice number and defines the invoice number length and prefix: 1. Enter a new number (if required) in Last Invoice Number to reset invoice numbering. WARNING: Changing the Last Invoice Number can cause invoice numbering problems if a new invoice number duplicates a number that already exists. 2. Enter the number of digits required for your company’s invoice numbers in Inv No Length. For example, if the length is 4, then invoice 10 displays as 0010. If the length is 6, it displays as 000010. 3. Enter a Inv No Prefix to add a character to invoice numbers from different accounts joining into the same system. This prefix is counted as part of the invoice number length. |

  3. Enter a new number (if required) in Last Invoice Number to reset invoice numbering.

  4. Enter the number of digits required for your company’s invoice numbers in Inv No Length. For example, if the length is 4, then invoice 10 displays as 0010. If the length is 6, it displays as 000010.

  5. Enter a Inv No Prefix to add a character to invoice numbers from different accounts joining into the same system. This prefix is counted as part of the invoice number length. | Generate Garnishment Checks | Specifies the account that garnishment checks originate from and supplies the next garnishment check number: 1. Enter the Checking Account number that garnishment checks are drawn from. 2. Enter the Next Check Number for the next garnishment check. |

  6. Enter the Checking Account number that garnishment checks are drawn from.

  7. Enter the Next Check Number for the next garnishment check.

  8. Click Accept.

  9. Click Save in the System Parameters form.

  10. Click Yes in the message to confirm that you want to save the parameters.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Establishing SSO Services

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_SSO_Services.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_SSO_Services.htm

Establishing SSO Services

Use this form to establish the single sign-on service names and URLs that the system uses to negotiate with other web-based software products.

For complete details about setting up SSO services, please review the Single Sign-On Guide.

To set up single sign-on services for this system:

  1. Click Back Office and select System Parameters under System|Change.

  2. Click the Actions menu and select SSO Services.

  3. In a new row, enter a unique Service ID.

  4. Enter a service Description.

  5. Select the service Type, which is typically External for a vendor and Internal for services hosted on your organization’s servers.

  1. In the Service Destination field, select whether single sign-on with this service will be Inbound (to PrismHR) or Outbound (from PrismHR).

  2. Enter the Service URL, which is the web location of the “destination” product.

  3. Click Save.

Related Topics

Maintaining System Parameters

Maintaining ESS Menus

========================================================================

Maintaining Tax Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Tax_Rate.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Tax_Rate.htm

Maintaining Tax Rates

You can maintain federal tax rates, state tax rates for Nevada and NY, and limit rates used to calculate payroll for a specific year with the Tax Rate Maintenance form.

[Image: screenshot]

Setting Federal Tax Rates

Complete the fields as required in the Tax Rates panel.

Field — Description

Year — Four-digit calendar year when the federal tax rates are in effect.

OASDI Rate — Annual Old Age, Survivors, and Disability Insurance (OASDI) rate for the year, including the decimal point. For example, enter 6.2% as .062.

OASDI Limit — Annual taxable OASDI limit for the year in total dollars.

Medicare Rate — Medicare rate for this year, including the decimal point. For example, enter 1.45% as .0145.

Med Tier 1 Limit — Medicare tier 1 rate limit.

FUTA Rate — Federal Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA) rate for this year, including the decimal point. For example, enter 6% as .060.

FUTA Limit — FUTA limit for the year in total dollars.

Configuring State-Specific Tax Rates

Configure certain state tax rates for New York, Nevada, and Puerto Rico in the fields below the Tax Rates panel.

Note: If you are entering New York SDI Tax information, see the Setting up the New York State Disability Insurance Tax article in the Customer Resource Center for complete information.

Field Name — Field Description

Default Nevada Modified Business Tax Rate — Sets the default rate (both accrual and billing) for the State of Nevada business tax.

New York SDI Max Per Week — Amount deducted each week from an employee who lives in New York.

New York SDI Percent — New York taxable gross rate.

New York SDI Employer Rate (EE/Month) — New York employer taxable gross rate (calculated for each employee). Note: This amount occurs in full on the first payroll of each month.

Allow Override by Client — Allows overrides of the NY SDI tax.

Puerto Rico Chauffeur Tax (EE) Per Week — Employee rate for this tax. Note that the Puerto Rico Chauffeur Tax is not calculated by Vertex and must be manually maintained. The tax is triggered for the employee based on a Job Code that is assigned on the Employee Master form.

(ER) Per Week — Employer rate for the Puerto Rico Chauffeur Tax.

Note: The Puerto Rico Chauffeur Tax is not calculated by Vertex and must be manually maintained. The tax is triggered for the employee based on a Job Code that is assigned on the Employee Master form.

========================================================================

Establishing Tax Year Limits

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Tax_Year_Limit.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Tax_Year_Limit.htm

Establishing Tax Year Limits

Tax Year Limits are not maintained by PrismHR. Every year in December, PrismHR sends you a Year-End File Maintenance document that outlines the new year tax year limits. You can use these limits for guidance or consult with a tax expert.

Before starting this process, note that the values entered on this form are applied globally. Enter them manually on the Tax Year Limits Maintenance form before the first payroll of the new year.

Note: Note: To access this form, go to the System Parameters form and select Tax Year Limits from the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

.

This form captures tax year limits for compensation, contribution, catch-up, funding, and FSA deposits. Set limits, percentages, and contributions as needed.

To establish tax year limits, do the following:

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Field Description
Limits Limit settings include: - Year - Specifies the year for the statutory limit. - Comp Limit - The maximum annual compensation limit for a given tax year, which is the compensation limit defined in Section 401(a)(17) for qualified retirement plans. - Contribution Limit - Maximum contribution an employee can make to qualified 401(k) or Roth 401(k) plan for this tax year. - Catch-Up Limit - Maximum catch-up contribution limit for this tax year. The limit applies to participants 50 years or older. When the Disable Accelerated Catchup? field on the Client Details form is checked, and when Catch Up Limit is applied at the system level on this Tax Year Limits Maintenance form only, Vertex limits the sheltered amount based on IRS limits. - 60-63 Catch Up - This field is optional. As a result of the Secure 2.0 Act of 2022, effective 1/1/2025, for employees who will turn 60, 61, 62 or 63 as of 12/31 of the defined tax year, are permitted to contribute an additional amount to their catch-up contribution. The increased contribution amount should be entered in the 60-63 Catch Up field on the following forms for the employee contribution to be treated as a pre-tax amount: - Benefit Plan Maintenance / Retirement Plans / Retirement Plans (under section Plan Year Deferral Limits) - Benefit Plan Maintenance / Retirement Plans / Tax Year Limits Maintenance - The value entered in this field will be the total amount such employees can contribute for the tax year. - For tax year 2025, it is the greater of 150% of Catch-Up Contribution limit OR $10,000. - This field will only accept numerical values. - The 60-63 Catch Up amount must be equal to or greater than the value entered in the corresponding Catch Up Limit field. If not, you will receive an error message stating Amount must be equal to or greater than Catch Up Limit. - The Catch Up Limit amount must be equal to or less than the value entered in the corresponding 60-63 Catch Up field. If not, you will receive an error message stating Amount must be equal to or less than 60-63 Catch Up. - If the Catch Up Limit field is empty, any value in the 60-63 Catch-Up field will present an error stating 60-63 Catch-Up limits must be defined. - Funding Limit - Maximum Section 415 contribution limit for this tax year. - HPE Threshold (Prior Year) - This column was added to support Secure Act 2.0 requirements; however as the implementation timeline of this functionality was delayed, there will be no current functionality around this column. More information will be available in a future release. - FSA Dep Limit - Maximum Flexible Spending Account employee contribution for dependent care. - PEO Tax Basis - Determines the taxable limit basis used for PEO Client billing.
  1. Click Accept.

  2. Click OK in the confirmation message.

  3. Click Save in the System Parameters form.

  4. Click Yes in the message to confirm that you want to save the parameters.

========================================================================

Controlling Employee Termination Messages

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Termination_Date_Validation.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Termination_Date_Validation.htm

Controlling Employee Termination Messages

Control employee termination messages with the Termination Date Validation form.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Display a message when an employee is terminated MORE than this many days in the past or future — Number of days that triggers the system to display a message. For example, if this value is 30, the system will display a message either 31 days before or after the specified value. Leave this field blank if you don’t require this feature.

Allow the user to continue with employee termination — Indicates whether a user can terminate employees outside of the specified range. Values are Allow and Do not allow.

  1. Click Accept.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Setting Up Email Templates for MFA

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_User_Authentication_Services.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_User_Authentication_Services.htm

Setting Up Email Templates for MFA

MFA implementation requires setting up email message templates. These templates contain the text and passcode (the <> substitution variable) users receive by email when attempting log in.

You can associate the message template with the MFA passcode email service:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Message Templates.

  3. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Message ID — ID for the template. For example, MFA.

Description — Template description. For example, MFA Message Template.

Content Type — Content type is either Text or HTML.

Subject — Line required for email that uses this template.

Body — Text area for the message body. Include the <> substitution variable in the message. The user will enter this when they log in with multi‑factor authentication.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Save.

Maintaining Information in Email Services

Email Services maintains the information used for automatic email messages.

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Creating W-2 Election Text

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_W2_Election_Text.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_W2_Election_Text.htm

Creating W-2 Election Text

Set up the Early W‑2 Election page in Employee Portal (EP) with the W‑2 Election Configuration form. This lets employees access W-2s electronically and saves money on printing and mailing costs. Employees also receive their W-2s earlier than a form sent by mail. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note the following:

To set up the Early W-2 Election page:

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Lockout Period — Period during which employees are unable to access their W-2s. Set W2 Elect Disable From and W2 Elect Disable To to set this lockout period. Outside of these dates, employees are able to access the Early W-2 Election page.

W2 Elect Intro — Displays text in the Introduction field.

W2 Elect Terms — Displays terms to help employees understand how to use the page.

W2 Disabled Message — Displays when the page is not available.

W2 Elected Message — Displays when employees return to the page after electing to receive W-2s electronically.

W2 Elect Accept — Statement that displays above the Click Here to Accept check box on the page. This implies that an employee agrees with the terms and conditions established by your organization.

  1. Click Save.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

Maintaining Web Extensions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Web_Extensions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SP_Web_Extensions.htm

Maintaining Web Extensions

Set custom web settings with the Web Extensions form. You can configure Custom Web Script Tags or Custom HTML Tags.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter the Custom Web Script Tags.

  2. Enter the Custom HTML Tags.

  3. Click Save.

  4. Click OK in the confirmation message.

  5. Click Close.

Parent Topic

Maintaining System Parameters

========================================================================

State Garnishment Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/State_Garnishment_Rules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/State_Garnishment_Rules.htm

Creating State Garnishment Rules

Establish the manner in which PrismHR processes state garnishment rules with the State Garnishment Rules form.

The FG state garnishment rules record is for the federal government, and is the default template for all other states. You only need to enter the values that are different for a particular state. Everything else defaults to the values for the federal garnishment rules.

To create state garnishment rules:

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. Select State Garnishment Rules under System|Change.

  3. Enter the two-character State Code, or FG for Federal Government.

  4. Define the Rules for Calculating Withholding for Creditor Garnishments:

Field Description
Maximum Percent of Select either Disposable Pay or Gross Pay, depending on the state rule you are setting up. Enter the maximum amount that can be withheld in the second field.
Minimum Wage Rate Multiplier The multiplier is the number of hours multiplied by an employee’s minimum wage to calculate the maximum disposable earnings that standard creditors can garnish. This is overridden if the garnishment maximum is lower. For example, if the multiplier is 40, the system multiplies the minimum wage by this number. The result is the minimum pay that an employee has after taxes and garnishments. Standard creditors can garnish amounts left after subtracting taxes and the minimum pay amount from an employee’s gross pay. From 1/1/2025 up to 06/30/2027, Oregon Creditor Garnishment calculations have been programmed by effective date to use the following exempt amounts as defined by Oregon State Law based on the pay period for each of the effective dates. These amounts will be applied when the Minimum Wage Rate Multiplier field for the state of Oregon is set to 30. \ Pay Period \ Weekly \ Bi-Weekly \ Semi-Monthly \ Monthly \ \ — \ — \ — \ — \ — \ \ 01-Jan-2025 thru 30-Jun-2025 \ $305 \ $611 \ $655 \ $1309 \ \ 01-Jul-2025 thru 30-Jun-2026 \ $338 \ $675 \ $737 \ $1458 \ \ 01-Jul-2026 thru 30-Jun-2027 \ $400 \ $832 \ $912 \ $1792 \ On July 1, 2027, calculations will default to State Garnishment Rules for the state of Oregon: > Note: Note: It is recommended that for the state of Oregon, on the State Garnishment Rules form, the Minimum Wage Rate Multiplier field be set to 30 until July 2027.
Pay Period Weekly Bi-Weekly Semi-Monthly Monthly
01-Jan-2025 thru 30-Jun-2025 $305 $611 $655 $1309
01-Jul-2025 thru 30-Jun-2026 $338 $675 $737 $1458
01-Jul-2026 thru 30-Jun-2027 $400 $832 $912 $1792
Minimum Wage Rate Source The source that determines the minimum hourly rate for creditor garnishment maximum calculations.
Hours Calculation Method The method that calculates minimum net pay for semi-monthly or monthly pay periods under CCPA rules for creditor garnishments: - Factored – Multiplies the weekly hours by either a factor of 2.16 (for semi-monthly) or 4.33 (for monthly). The factor method may be less accurate because of rounding errors, but some states specify its use. - Annualized – Multiplies the weekly hours by 52 and then divides by the number of pay periods in the year. For example, for semi-monthly, the calculation is ( (30.00 x 52)/24 ).
- Factored – Multiplies the weekly hours by either a factor of 2.16 (for semi-monthly) or 4.33 (for monthly). The factor method may be less accurate because of rounding errors, but some states specify its use.
- Annualized – Multiplies the weekly hours by 52 and then divides by the number of pay periods in the year. For example, for semi-monthly, the calculation is ( (30.00 x 52)/24 ).
Administrative Processing Fee The fee applied per pay period to process creditor wage garnishments.
Maximum Monthly Fee The maximum monthly fee collected from employees for processing creditor wage garnishments.
Reduce Limit by Fee Amount There are two options: - Yes – Reduces the CCPA limit by the administrative processing fee for this state. This is only for non-consumer garnishments. - No –The system does not reduce the limit.
- Yes – Reduces the CCPA limit by the administrative processing fee for this state. This is only for non-consumer garnishments.
- No –The system does not reduce the limit.
Non Consumer Min Wage Multiplier The multiplier is the number of hours multiplied by an employee’s minimum wage to calculate the maximum disposable earnings that creditors can garnish in case of a judgment or non-consumer garnishment. This is overridden if the garnishment maximum is lower. For example, if the multiplier is 30, the system multiplies the minimum wage by this number. The result is the minimum pay that an employee has after taxes and garnishments. A non-consumer creditor can garnish amounts left after subtracting taxes and the minimum pay amount from an employee’s gross pay.
HOH Maximum Percent Enter a value if the state has a maximum allowed creditor garnishment percentage rule for heads of households.
State Tax Levy Maximum Percent of Select whether the state tax levy maximum should be a percent of: - Disposable Pay – income after taxes are deducted - Gross Pay – total income
- Disposable Pay – income after taxes are deducted
- Gross Pay – total income
Allow Creditor Garnishment deduction before State Levy Certain states have varying requirements on how to calculate a State tax levy when an employee has other garnishments. This option allows you the flexibility to better support states allowing other garnishments including creditor garnishment deduction before calculating the amount due to the state levy. If for a selected state, this field is: - Enabled– then the order of priority for deduction of garnishments will be as follows: 1. Child Support (Spousal Support) 2. Bankruptcy 3. Levies (IRS Tax Levy, FTB) 4. Creditor Wage Garnishment / Student Loan 5. State Tax Levy - Disabled – then the order of priority for deduction of garnishments will be as follows: 1. Child Support (Spousal Support) 2. Bankruptcy 3. Levies (IRS Tax Levy, FTB) 4. State Tax Levy 5. Creditor Wage Garnishment / Student Loan > Note: Note: When using this option to prioritize Creditor Wage Garnishments prior to the State Tax Levy, you should ensure that the State Tax Levy maximum percent has been entered for the applicable State Code on this form.
- Enabled– then the order of priority for deduction of garnishments will be as follows:
1. Child Support (Spousal Support)
2. Bankruptcy
3. Levies (IRS Tax Levy, FTB)
4. Creditor Wage Garnishment / Student Loan
5. State Tax Levy
- Disabled – then the order of priority for deduction of garnishments will be as follows:
1. Child Support (Spousal Support)
2. Bankruptcy
3. Levies (IRS Tax Levy, FTB)
4. State Tax Levy
5. Creditor Wage Garnishment / Student Loan
Multiple Order Priority Method This field helps you manage the varying rules for different states for creditor garnishments like child support. Select one of the following options from the drop-down: - First In, First Out – earliest dated garnishment will be deducted first. This is the same as the default behavior. - Prorate Allocation – proportionally deduct creditor garnishments based on wage to garnishment ratio. - Equal Share Allocation – equal and simultaneous deductions for multiple creditor garnishments are in place. > Note: Note: If a Creditor Garnishment has an override state, it will follow the rules for the override state. This feature will work with or without enabling the Enhanced Garnishment Capping field on the System Parameters form.
- First In, First Out – earliest dated garnishment will be deducted first. This is the same as the default behavior.
- Prorate Allocation – proportionally deduct creditor garnishments based on wage to garnishment ratio.
- Equal Share Allocation – equal and simultaneous deductions for multiple creditor garnishments are in place.
Additional Disposable Deductions Other deductions that are removed from gross earnings to calculate disposable income for the purpose of computing creditor wage garnishments.
  1. Define Rules for Calculating Withholding for Child Support Payments.

Note: Note: If a field is left blank, the system defaults to a maximum percentage. If zero is entered, the system uses it as the maximum percentage and no child support garnishments are calculated.

Field Description
Maximum Percent of Disposable When Not Supporting Another Spouse/Child Amount that can be withheld when the employee does not support another child and is not in arrears. The default is 60%.
Maximum Percent of Disposable When Supporting Another Spouse/Child Amount that can be withheld when the employee is supporting another spouse or child and is not in arrears. The default is 50%.
Maximum Percent of Disposable When not Supporting Another Spouse/Child but in Arrears Amount that can be withheld when the employee does not support another spouse or child and is in arrears. The default is 65%.
Maximum Percent of Disposable When Supporting Another Spouse/Child but in Arrears Amount that can be withheld when the employee is supporting another spouse or child and is in arrears. The default is 55%.
Administrative Processing Fee Fee applied per pay period to process child support wage garnishments.
Maximum Monthly Child Support Fee Fee collected from employees for processing child support wage garnishments.
Maximum Monthly Spousal Support Fee Fee collected from employees for processing spousal support wage garnishments.
Multiple Order Priority Method Select the method that determines the priority of multiple child support orders used by the state. This field helps you to manage the varying rules for different states for child support garnishments. Select one of the following options from the drop-down: - First In, First Out – earliest dated child support garnishment will be deducted first. This is the same as the default behavior. - Prorate Allocation – proportionally deduct child support garnishments based on wage to garnishment ratio. - Equal Share Allocation – equal and simultaneous deductions for multiple child support garnishments are in place. > Note: Note: If a child support garnishment has an override state, it will follow the rules for the override state. Also, this feature will work with or without enabling the Enhanced Garnishment Capping field on the System Parameters form.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Processing Taxes for a Specified State

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/State_Rules.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/State_Rules.htm

Processing Taxes for a Specified State

You can maintain the information required to process taxes for a specified state using the State Rules form.

Note: Note: The processing rules that come with PrismHR may not be current. PrismHR is not liable or responsible for the accuracy of these rules. It is your responsibility to verify and update state processing rules according to the laws and statutes of the states where you conduct business.

Establishing Basic State Tax Rules

You can establish basic state tax rules using the State Rules panel.

Important! Do not change the default values in the FIPS 5 Code and Vertex Code fields. This can cause system-wide errors in tax processing.

Note: Note: The Client State Unemployment Tax (SUTA) Rate setting is valid only when the Service Type field in Maintaining Client Details is set to PEO.

Field Name Description
State Code Two-letter abbreviation for state tax information. Enter a code to populate the form with tax information for that state.
State Name Name of the state that corresponds to the State Code.
FIPS 5 Code Do not change this field. This is a default value.
Vertex Code Do not change this field. This is a default value used during state tax calculations.
SUTA PEO/Client Based Select whether SUTA is reported at the PEO level or at the client level.
Client SUTA Report Only Select this option if SUTA rates are set at the PEO level, but reported at the client level. For example, Kansas and Missouri require this type of reporting.
SIT Combined Reporting This field only appears for the state of Oregon. This field is used during payroll processing to force the tax basis for specific state taxes to be assigned the same tax entity (PEO or Client) as is assigned for SUTA. Oregon is a combined reporting state that has historically always been PEO report only. To support Oregon HB 2263(Permits professional employer organizations (PEOs) to report payroll information in aggregate on behalf of their clients) this new option has been added. For combined reporting, all state taxes must report on the same level including SIT. While we support this today for SUTA and SUTA Components, SIT could previously only be set to an override on the employer level. With this option, for pay dates starting 1/1/2026, Oregon employers now can change the PEO/Client reporting designation for additional Oregon state taxes that do not naturally follow the client reporting dates within the client detail tax tab. - This is not a required field. - Unchecked - This field is unchecked by default. When this field is not set on Oregon, AND for all client types other than PEO, AND for all states other than Oregon, there will be no change in tax basis. - Checked - When this field is checked for OREGON PEO CLIENT TYPES, all of the following taxes will report using the same tax basis P or C for PEO Clients: - 38-23 (WBF) - Employee - 38-24 (SUTA) - Employer - 38-26 (WBF) - Employer - 38-27 (State transit) - Employee - 38-28 (SUTA offset) - Employer - 38-20 (SIT) - Employee - 38-40 (PFML) - Employee - 38-41 (PFML) - Employer - 38-51 (Lane Transit) - Employer - 38-52 (TRI COUNTY TRANSIT) - Employer - When you select this field, you will receive a warning stating Warning, payroll processing will use the SUTA tax entity for other state taxes with the tax IDs 20,23,26,27,28,40,41,51,52. Are you sure? You can click Yes or No. - The existing tax basis designation hierarchy Tax Deduction → State Rule → Employer Detail → Client Detail is extended to the State Tax Deduction codes that are currently excluded such that: - If SUTA is configured to be PEO or Client, all of the above tax codes follow the SUTA Reporting designation. - Not all Oregon tax codes will follow the new SIT setting. For example, the following state and local tax codes are excluded from this logic: - 38-46 (Portland Metro SHS). - Any County or Local tax codes.
Client SUTA Rate Select this field to include the client-level SUTA rate during reporting. This option is only available if Service Type on the Client Details form is set to PEO.
Officer SUTA Client Based Select this option to report SUTA for company officers separately from other employees.
Electronic Pay Stubs Allowed Select one of the following options according to state laws for electronic pay stubs: - Allowed, Employee may not un‑enroll: The state allows electronic pay stubs. You can configure direct deposit to disable employees from un‑enrolling. - Allowed, Employee may un‑enroll: The state allows electronic pay stubs. You can configure direct deposit to enable employees to un‑enroll. - Not allowed by the State: The state does not allow electronic pay stubs. - Allowed, Employee must Opt‑In: The state allows electronic pay stubs, but employees must select electronic pay stub when setting up their direct deposit. Employees defaults to paper pay stubs. For more information on how these settings relate to the client‑level settings, See Configuring Electronic Pay Stubs.

You can establish additional rules for processing state taxes using the State Tax Parameters panel.

Field Description
State Tax Codes Enter the codes applicable to a state. See Establishing Sales Tax Codes for more information.
State Income Tax Select if this state levies an income tax on its residents. When users hire employees who live in this state, the New Hire Form displays the Resident State Form W4 Details panel if this option is selected.
Local Income Tax Select if the state levies local income taxes on residents. When users hire employees who live in this state, the New Hire Form displays the Local Form W4 Details panel if this option is selected.
Allow 1099 Income Tax Withholding You will need to first enable the custom feature code 1099WITHHOLDING to display these new options. You will need to enable each state in which you wish to withhold income tax from a 1099 contractor. To support 1099 contractor Federal and State Income Tax reporting, when the Custom Feature Code 1099WITHHOLDING is enabled, the wages and tax withholdings for a 1099 contractor will NOT be included in the Employer 941 Quarterly Report for any 1099 contractor with tax withholding. Additionally, release enhancements for the PTS and RTS to support 1099 withholding will only be present in the files using the NEC tax code when the Custom Feature Code 1099WITHHOLDING is enabled. This box is unchecked by default. - When unchecked, no taxes are withheld for any employee who is a 1099 Contractor in PrismHR. - When checked: - PrismHR will withhold state and federal income tax for 1099 contractors hired for the selected client only. - PrismHR will only withhold federal and state income tax for that state (FG and all other states) if the field Allow 1099 Income Tax Withholding under State Tax Parameters section in the State Rules form is also checked. - PrismHR will honor any tax overrides for the 1099 contractors including Add to, Block, Percentage, and Fixed. > Note: Note: You should NOT have 1099 withholding from a contractor if you do not have the Custom Feature Code 1099WITHHOLDING in place. When leveraging the Custom Feature Code 1099WITHHOLDING, you will need to have a separate Employee ID for any 1099 contractor who has tax withheld. Previously, the system allowed a 1099 Contractor in one client and a W-2 employee in a second client using the same Employee ID. For purposes of 1099 income tax withholding and reporting, the 1099 contractor must NOT be a W2 employee in any other client.

You can maintain various rules for calculating Workers’ Compensation charges using the W/C Calculation Setup panel.

Field Description
W/C PEO/Client Based Select a method for Workers’ Compensation insurance calculations, employee limits, and employee reporting for this state.
National Council State Select if this is a National Council State.
W/C Wage Basis Select the basis for calculating Workers’ Compensation insurance premiums.
W/C Calculation Basis Select the premium calculation basis for this state. For most states, it is Per Hundred Dollars Wages. Otherwise, it is Worked Hours.
W/C Wages Sheltered Select if Section 125 Deductions shelter Workers’ Compensation reportable wages in this state.
State Wage Limit The maximum earnings amount for employees who are subject to Workers’ Compensation insurance for the selected state.
W/C Officer Wage Limit The maximum earnings amount for officers who are subject to Workers’ Compensation insurance for the selected state. If all office wages are exempt in this state, enter 0. If no wages are exempt, enter a number that exceeds the earnings of all officers, such as 99,999,999.99.
W/C Week Ends on Day The day on which the Workers’ Compensation reporting week ends.
OH Weekly Construction Cap Table The Year for the cap on Workers’ Compensation reportable wages in Ohio.
W/C Terrorism Surcharge Table Enter the Effective Date for the W/C Terrorism Surcharge and enter the W/C Terrorism Surcharge Rate/Hundred.
W/C Tax Rates Table The W/C Tax Rates if applicable to the state (for example, in Oregon): - Enter the Effective Date for the tax rate. - Enter the hourly W/C Employee Tax Rate for employee Workers’ Compensation insurance. - Enter the hourly W/C Employer Tax Rate for employer Workers’ Compensation insurance.

You can maintain the minimum wage rate information required for the selected state using the Minimum Wage Rates panel. Fill in the fields as required.

Field Description
As Of Date Date when wage information goes into effect.
Minimum Hourly Wage Enter the minimum hourly wage for the state.
Minimum Cash Hourly Wage If this field is blank, the Federal minimum wage is used.
Minor Min. Hourly Wage The minimum hourly wage for minors if it is different than for adults.
Minor Min. Cash Hourly Wage The minimum cash wage for minors if it is different than for adults.
Adverse Effect Wage Rate The minimum wage that must be offered and paid to agricultural workers in the state. The system enforces this for employees indicated as agricultural workers in the Employee Details Work tab.
Minimum Exempt Salary Amount This field is not mandatory. Enter the annualized rate only for Minimum Exempt Salary Amount. You can only enter numeric values up to 2 decimal places. This is to support state-specific annual exempt salary minimums to accurately record and maintain state-specific annual exempt salary minimums in compliance with regulatory requirements. Note: On the New Hire form, for an FLSA exempt new hire, if the annual salary (entered or calculated) in the Pay Rate field under the Pay Detailssection, is lower than the Minimum Exempt Salary Amount on the State Rules form for that state for the latest entered year, and you try to save the form, then you will receive a warning stating The employee has been assigned a pay rate that is below the [State Abbreviation] Minimum Exempt Salary Rate of [Amount]. This is a warning only. Continue? - Click Yes to save the change. - Click No to return to the Pay Rate field.

You can maintain text that displays in the Employee Termination form using the State Termination Info panel. Different states have rules on tasks that should be performed when an employee is terminated, and the information entered here displays as a reminder to the user entering the termination. Enter any notes that should display when a user terminates an employee, to make sure that user knows what the state requires.

Establishing PEO Tax Billing Information

You can establish information required for a PEO in the PEO Tax Billing Options panel.

  1. Enter the SUTA Over Limit Credit Rate to apply to the SUTA Over Taxable Limit credit calculation. If this field is blank, PrismHR uses the normal SUTA billing rate.

  2. Enter over limit bill rates for tax deduction codes, as needed.

  1. Click Save.

Selecting New Hire Questions

You can select new hire questions to define questions specific to the state.

Note: Note: See Setting New Hire Questions to learn how to define these questions.

  1. Enter the New Hire Questions ID. The Question Text displays.

  2. Click Save.

Establishing State Default Questions

In the records for California, New York, and South Carolina, the default questions display. These are mandatory questions required by those states that display for new hires.

Global PTO

You can maintain the Global PTO information required for the selected state using the Global PTO panel. Complete the fields as required.

Field Description
Apply Local PTO Plan Only when applicable When this field is: - Unchecked - During payroll, both the state and the applicable local global PTO plans will accrue. - Checked - During payroll, when the Geocode on the timesheet for an employee: - falls within the range listed for the Local Plan ID, the employee is enrolled in the specified Local Plan and accruals are calculated as per that specified Local Plan. The employee is not enrolled and accruals are not calculated as per state plans listed. - does not fall within the range listed for the Local Plan ID but works within the state for an existing Global PTO plan, the employee is enrolled and accruals are calculated as per applicable state plans listed. > Note: Note: - The client must be enabled for Global PTO. - If an employee is enrolled in a local plan with no state plan, and then moves to a location which is without a local plan but is subject to the state plan, then PTO will accrue according to the state plan from the time the employee has moved. Prior payroll vouchers for the employee will remain unaffected on account of this change.

SuperView

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/SuperView.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/SuperView.htm

SuperView

Use the SuperView to review payroll batches that are in process.

[Image: screenshot]

You can use the fields at the top of the form to filter the list of payrolls:

The list updates dynamically when you select an item from the drop-downs. If you enter a different Through Date, click the Refresh icon

[Image: screenshot]

to update the list.

To change the processor for a payroll, open the Actions menu and select Changing the Payroll Processor.

========================================================================

Maintaining System Parameters

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/System_Parameters.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/System_Parameters.htm

Maintaining System Parameters

Maintain system-wide settings for PrismHR with the System Parameters form.

Note: Note: Some features are not available to all users.

Using the Actions Menu

You can perform additional tasks using the options on the Actions menu.

Menu Item — Description

Creating 1095-C Election Text — Defines the text that displays on the Early 1095C Election page.

Viewing the Audit Log — Displays all changes made to a form.

Enabling Multi-Factor Authentication — Sets up basic security at the system, client, or user level. After the number of days is specified in Authentication Services, impacted users are prompted to request authorization.

Configuring System-Level Settings for Coronavirus-Related Paid Leave — Configures system-level setup for coverage related to the 2020 COVID-19 outbreak, as described in the Families First Coronavirus Response Act.

Clearing Backup Account Assignments — Clears all backup account assignments regardless of which clients are listed in the import file. Important! This process cannot be reverted.

Defining a Custom Process — Configures custom menu items.

Specifying Direct Deposit Terms and Conditions — Sets the effective date and any terms and conditions that display before accepting direct deposit information.

Setting Up Documentation Servers and Directories — Establishes the web server IP address and directory that contains client documentation

Selecting Default Menus with ESS Menu Builder — Sets up default menus for Employee Self Service.

Setting Up Automated Email Messages — Maintains automatic e-mail information and sets up email message templates.

Setting Enrollment Options — Configures online benefits enrollment settings in EP.

Printing Setup for Global Payroll Reports — Selects reports that print during regular, special, manual, or special/manual payroll runs.

Maintaining Global mvQuery Image Path — Specifies the logos that appear on checks and reports that use mvQuery.

Logo Path Maintenance — Specifies the logos that display in PEO and non-PEO invoice headers.

Setting Miscellaneous Parameters — Sets up tax codes and FMLA parameters.

Managing Next Number Control — Controls the next number types that appear on checks.

Maintaining Global Onboarding Options — Sets global parameters such as enabling benefit enrollment after final submittal.

Establishing SSO Services — Creates and maintains single sign-on names and URLs.

Maintaining Tax Rates — Creates and maintains federal tax rates and rates for Nevada and New York as well as limit rates.

Establishing Tax Year Limits — Adds and maintains tax year limits for compensation, contribution, catch-up, funding, and FSA deposits. Safe Harbor percentages and HSA maximum annual contributions are also maintained here.

Controlling Employee Termination Messages — Provides a method for controlling system messages related to employee termination.

Creating W-2 Election Text — Sets up the Early W‑2 Election page in Employee Self-Service (ESS) so employees can obtain their Form W‑2 electronically.

Maintaining Web Extensions — Creates and maintains custom web scripts and HTML tags.

Maintaining Web Service Users — Creates web service user profiles with allowed or restricted IP addresses and methods (for example, sign-on service methods).

========================================================================

Maintaining Tax Authorities

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Tax_Authorities.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Tax_Authorities.htm

Maintaining Tax Authorities

Maintain federal, state, and local tax authorities with the Tax Authorities form.

Setting Up the Tax Authority

Enter information about the tax authority with the Tax Authorities panel.

  1. Fill in the fields as required.
Field Description
Authority ID Enter the nine digit ID that corresponds to its Vertex GeoCode or click the Authority ID link and select it from the City Tax Authority dialog box..
Authority Name Name for a tax authority. This field auto populates once you enter the Authority ID above.
State Code Enter the two-character sate code that corresponds to this tax authority or click the State Code link and select it from the Select State dialog box. This field auto populates once you enter the Authority ID above.
Do Not Allow City Tax Allowances To Default To State Allowances Check this box is you do not want to allow city tax allowances to default to state tax allowances. Use this option only if the state also has local tax authorities.
Type Select the tax authority type from the following options: - Federal Tax Authority - State Tax Authority - Local Tax Authority
  1. Click Save.

Setting Up Minimum Wage Rates Panel

Establish specific information about a tax authority’s minimum wages with the Minimum Wage Rates panel. This panel displays for some tax authorities after entering the Authority ID.

  1. Fill in the fields as required.

Field — Description

Effective Date — Date when minimum wage rate goes into effect.

Min Wage — If this field is blank, the Federal minimum wage is used.

Min Cash Wage — If this field is blank, the Federal minimum wage is used.

Min Wage Minor — The minimum hourly wage for minors if it is different than for adults.

Min Cash Wage Minor — The minimum cash wage for minors if it is different than for adults.

The Authority Classifies a Minor as any Person Under the Age of — The age that this tax authority classifies individuals as adults. Anyone under that age is considered a minor.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Maintaining Tax Deductions

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Tax_Deductions.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Tax_Deductions.htm

Maintaining Tax Deductions

Set up tax deduction information with the Tax Deductions form.

Tax Deduction

Establish the general information for each deduction with the Tax Deductions panel.

To configure deduction information:

  1. Complete these fields as required.
Option Description
Authority ID Tax authority identification number.
Tax Identifier Tax Identifier that represents the tax type. The system displays the field on the State Tax Rates (SUTA) form to enter this value.
Tax Description Description for this deduction.
Paid By Payer of this tax, either Employer or Employee.
Pay Stub Name Name that prints on check stubs and certain reports.
Suppress Reporting PrismHR & to Mastertax - Unchecked: When unchecked, the APTM tax code appears in the JSON files namely Periodic Tax JSON export, Daily Tax JSON export, Quarterly Tax JSON export and PrismHR Client Setup JSON export. - Checked: When checked, the APTM tax code does not appear in the JSON files noted above. The total tax amounts are reduced by the suppressed tax amount in the JSON file in all fields (Total Tax, EE total tax, Periodic, QTD, YTD totals)
  1. Click Save.

Bill Codes

Enter the billing codes for the tax deduction with the Bill Codes panel.

To set bill codes:

  1. Complete these fields as required:

Field — Description

Bill Code Substitute — Code used in place of the standard system-assigned billing code.

Overlimit Bill Code — Controls the Overlimit Billing Amount if high limit is not selected for bundled billing. If you do not enter a code, the system uses the active tax billing code.

Bun Overlim Credit Bill Code — Bills the client if the bundled billing credit exceeds the limit. If you do not enter a code, the system credits 006O.

Shelter Bill Code — Controls the sheltered billing amount if Discount Shelter is not selected for bundled billing. If left blank, the system uses the active tax billing code.

  1. Click Save.

Tax Deduction Administrative Fund

Establish the tax deduction information with the Tax Deduction Administrative Fund panel.

Note: Note: The information on the Tax Deduction Administrative Fund panel is for reporting purposes only. The system does not perform calculations on this information.

  1. For the deduction administrative fund:
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Reviewing Tax Register Audits

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Tax_Register_Audit_Inquiry.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Tax_Register_Audit_Inquiry.htm

Reviewing Tax Register Audits

Use the Tax Register Audit Inquiry to review tax amounts in registers and compare them to the total tax in payroll vouchers and check for any discrepancies. This utility automatically processes an audit daily. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: This form is only available for service providers. Also, you should only provide access to this form to users who are allowed to view all clients.

To examine errors on registers, click the link in the Register Type column. A report displays with a list of all problems on the selected tax register.

This report can be printed by choosing a printing format in the Actions field. In addition, this report can be downloaded as an XLS file by selecting the XLS link.

========================================================================

Determining Total Compensation Setup

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Total%20Compensation%20Report%20Setup.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Total Compensation Report Setup.htm

Determining Total Compensation Setup

Use the Total Compensation Report Setup form to determine how the screen is configured on the Total Compensation Dashboard in PrismHR. This form contains the following three sections:

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under System|Change, click Total Compensation Report Setup.

To set up the Total Compensation Report:

  1. Complete the following sections:

Field Name — Description

Pay Code Allocation Allocate pay codes and assign descriptions for up to 4 rows on the report.

Row 1

Pay Description — Enter the description of the first pay row on the report. For example Hours Worked Plus Holiday Hours.

Pay Codes — Enter the pay codes to be included in the first row of pay amounts on the report, or click the Pay Codes link and select the appropriate pay codes from the Select Pay Code dialog box. For example REG - Regular Pay.

Suppress description if amount is zero — Check this box if you want to suppress a pay code if the amount is zero.

Row 2

Pay Description — Enter the description of the second pay row on the report. For example Non-Worked Hours (PTO annual entitlement).

Pay Codes — Enter the pay codes to be included in the second row of pay amounts on the report, or click the Pay Codes link and select the appropriate pay codes from the Select Pay Code dialog box. For example VAC - Vacation.

Suppress description if amount is zero — Check this box if you want to suppress a pay code if the amount is zero.

Row 3

Pay Description — Enter the description of the third pay row on the report. For example Bonus (Incentive, referral, commission).

Pay Codes — Enter the pay codes to be included in the third row of pay amounts on the report, or click the Pay Codes link and select the appropriate pay codes from the Select Pay Code dialog box. For example BON - Bonus.

Suppress description if amount is zero — Check this box if you want to suppress a pay code if the amount is zero.

Row 4

Pay Description — Enter the description of the fourth pay row on the report. For example Overtime.

Pay Codes — Enter the pay codes to be included in the fourth row of pay amounts on the report, or click the Pay Codes link and select the appropriate pay codes from the Select Pay Code dialog box. For example OT - Overtime.

Suppress description if amount is zero — Check this box if you want to suppress a pay code if the amount is zero.

Field Name — Description

Retirement Tax Allocation Allocate tax codes and assign a description for retirement taxes.

Tax Description — Enter the description of the retirement tax on the report, for example Social Security/Medicare & Other Tax.

401(k) Description — Enter the description for the 401(k) on the report, for example Employer Match into the 401(k) Plan.

Retirement Tax Codes — Enter the retirement tax codes here or click the Retirement Tax Codes link and select them from the Select Tax Deduction Code dialog box, for example 00-17 FUTA.

Field Name — Description

Benefit Plan Allocation Allocate benefit plans and assign descriptions for up to 8 rows on the report.

Row 1

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the first benefits row on the report. For example Medical.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the first row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example BCBS - Blue Cross Blue Shield.

Row 2

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the second benefits row on the report. For example Dental.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the second row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example DENAET - AETNA Dental.

Row 3

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the third benefits row on the report. For example Vision.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the third row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example JDSVSP - JDS VSP Vison.

Row 4

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the fourth benefits row on the report. For example Life Insurance.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the fourth row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example VSPKC - VSP Kansas City.

Row 5

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the fifth benefits row on the report. For example Other Benefits.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the fourth row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example CBOTHER - CB Other Benefits.

Row 6

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the sixth benefits row on the report. For example Short-Term Disability.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the fourth row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example STD - Short Term Disability.

Row 7

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the seventh benefits row on the report. For example Long-Term Disability.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the fourth row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box. For example LTD - Long Term Disability - Salary Banded.

Row 8

Benefit Description — Enter the description of the eighth benefits row on the report. For example Tuition Assistance.

Benefit Codes — Enter the benefit codes to be included in the fourth row of benefit amounts on the report, or click the Benefit Codes link and select the appropriate benefit codes from the Select Plan dialog box.

  1. Click Save to save the changes.

========================================================================

Downloading ACH Files to Your PC

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Transfer_ACH_File_to_PC.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Transfer_ACH_File_to_PC.htm

Downloading ACH Files to Your PC

Use the Transfer ACH File to PC form to download ACH files to a user’s system, from the server’s download directory generated by the PrismHR system.

Note: Note the following:

To access the form, click the Back Office menu> Operations|Action > Transfer ACH File to PC.

To download an ACH File to a user’s PC:

  1. Click the Filename link. A separate Select Field window opens.

  2. Scroll and select the ACH File that you want to download from the list. You can also search for the ACH File using Filename Description and Date. The File View displays the first 15 lines of the selected ACH File. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Click Download.

========================================================================

Unbundled Billing Rules Report

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Unbundled%20Billing%20Rules%20Report.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Unbundled Billing Rules Report.htm

Unbundled Billing Rules Report

Use the Unbundled Billing Rules Report form to generate a report of unbundled billing rules for all clients (or a subset of clients).

Note: Note: Client Access Group Security is enabled on this form.

To access this form, clickReports menu. Under System|Report, click Unbundled Billing Rules Report.

To generate the Unbundled Billing Rules Report:

  1. Complete the following fields:
Field Name Description
Client Status This field is not mandatory. Leave this field blank to select allclient statuses. If you want to run this report for a specific client status, select it from the following options: - Pending - Inactive - Client Canceling - Active - Terminated
  1. Click Run to generate the report on-screen.

  2. Click Clear to clear this form at any time.

  3. Click Close to close this form at any time.

Report Output

The Unbundled Billing Rules Report for clients displays the following columns:

For example:

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Importing Multiple Unbundled Billing Rules

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Unbundled_Billing_Rules_Import.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Unbundled_Billing_Rules_Import.htm

Importing Multiple Unbundled Billing Rules

Use the Unbundled Billing Rules Import form to import multiple unbundled billing rules for clients associated with a specific bill code. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Client Access Group security is enabled on this form.

To access the form, click the Back Office menu. Under Operations|Action, click Unbundled Billing Rules Import.

Note: This form is only available for service providers.

To import unbundled billing rules:

  1. In the Generate Import Spreadsheet section, create an import spreadsheet by entering or selecting the Client IDs and Bill Codes. (You can select multiple clients from the Select Clients list at once.) The Client Name and Bill Description display next to each client. (If left blank, the system selects all clients and bill codes.)

  2. Select Download Spreadsheet. The system creates a spreadsheet that displays in a separate window, which is suitable for editing.

  3. In the Import Data section, enter an Import Name. (This is a required field; you cannot import a file without this information.)

  4. Select Upload File. Click Add Files and select the file to upload, then click Start Upload. (This file must be in .csv format.)

  5. Click Close. A separate Downloads window displays the name of the .csv file that the system created. (Click Open file to view the downloaded file.)

Note: The first row in the downloaded file displays information about the first rule and the multi-value fields, which are separated by a pipe delimiter (|).

  1. Click Import. Processing steps describe the information saved and include a date and time stamp. You can view this as a report or download in PDF or XLS format by clicking Report.

  2. Click Close.

  3. Click Transaction Report to display a link to a report that contains the unbundled billing rules transactions.

Note: The Transaction Report displays “Skipped” for any column in a row that has valid data but was not imported because a required row contained invalid data. (All invalid data displays in the Transaction Report.)

  1. Click Error Report to display a link to a .csv file that details the errors that occurred during the import. (The system does not import any rows listed in the error file and only imports rows where all data in the row is valid.)

Note: The Error Report link only displays if errors occurred during the import, which confirms that the system is unable to perform the import.

Note: Note the following:

Adding New Rules to an Import

Using the import process, you can define new rules that the system adds to the Billing Rules (Unbundled) form. To do this, you must enter the rule as NEW. For example:

Note: Note the following:

Define the following information for the import:

Field Details Description
Client ID Unique identifier for the client.
Rule This field is pre-defined. Note: If you create a NEW rule, the next sequential value is selected. Existing Billing Rule ID, or New Rule to create a new unbundled billing rule. The system automatically assigns an ID.
Rule Description This is a free-form field where you can enter the description. Describes the rule. (This description cannot exceed 40 characters.)
Rate Allows numeric value up to 4 decimal places. Billing Rate. The system uses this in conjunction with the Based On value.
Based On Codes used as basis for calculating unbundled billing rules. Based On value, which represents the logic to use when calculating the rate.
Rule Start Date Date format MM/DD/YYYY. Rule Start Date when this rule begins.
Rule End Date Date format MM/DD/YYYY. Rule End Date when this rule ends.
Voucher Types Allowed types: - R: Regular - V: Vacation - S: Supplemental - A: Arrearage - H: Adjustment > Note: Note: - If only Regular applies, use R. - If all types apply, use RVSHA. Voucher Types to which a billing rule applies.

When you update an existing rule in the Unbundled Billing Rules Import form, the import must identify the rule number being updated and include details that for the updated rule. For example, Rule 1 defines Pay Group A. If the updated rule then lists Rule 1 as Pay Group B, after the import finishes Rule 1 now uses Pay Group B.

After you import the updated rule, you can view the Transaction Report to determine which values were imported. (You can view errors by clicking Error Report.)

Note: Note the following:

========================================================================

Updating Client History X-Ref Records

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Update%20Client%20History%20X-Ref%20Records.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Update Client History X-Ref Records.htm

Updating Client History X-Ref Records

Use this form to create client history cross reference records for clients that are missing.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form click

[Image: screenshot]

(Back Office) > System|Action > Update Client History X-Ref Records

To update client history x-ref records:

  1. Click Create Client History. The system displays the processing status and sends an e-mail notification when the process is complete.

  2. Click Close.

========================================================================

Updating GeoCodes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Update%20GeoCodes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Update GeoCodes.htm

Updating GeoCodes

Use the Update GeoCodes form to update the employee master and worksite location GeoCodes.

Important! Only run this process when no other users are signed onto the system.

Note: Note: This form does not use Client Access Group Security.

To access the form, click Back Office > System|Action > Update GeoCodes.

To update GeoCodes:

  1. In Update GeoCodes, select one of the following options:
  1. Click Update GeoCodes. A process window opens. When the process is complete, it displays the number of errors that were found.

  2. Click Close.

  3. Click the Error Report link to download the error report in .csv format.

========================================================================

Adding Bulk Form Access

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Role_Bulk_Add.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Role_Bulk_Add.htm

Adding Bulk Form Access

Grant form access to multiple user roles simultaneously with the Bulk Role Update form.

To add form access to user roles in bulk:

  1. Open the User Roles form by clicking [Image: screenshot] (Back Office) and locating the form name under System|Change.

  2. Open the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] and select Bulk Role Update. The Bulk Role Update form displays.

  3. Click Form to view a list of all available forms and select a form name, or enter the desired form name (for example, BILLING.CODES*MAINT).

  4. A list of user roles displays.

  5. Grant access to each user role in the Access column. You can grant full access (Full) or read-only access (Inquiry). To deny access, click Deny.

  6. Select Accept, then click Save in the User Roles form.

========================================================================

Maintaining User Roles

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Role_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Role_Maintenance.htm

Maintaining User Roles

User Role Maintenance lists the forms and features that are not currently associated with the role. You can add any of these forms to a user role by clicking Add in the User Roles form.

Forms may not display in the list for the following reasons:

Note: Note: Forms with the word details in the Description sometimes apply only to the first tabs of Employee Details (Name) and Client Details (Detail), not all tabs in the forms. Each tab has its own security setting. For example, Employee Work (EMPLOYEE.PER*MAINT.WORK) is the Work tab in Employee Details.

  1. Use Type Filter to limit to forms of a specific type.

  2. To select forms:

  1. Click Accept. All selected forms are added to the user role.

  2. Click Save in the User Roles form.

========================================================================

Defining User Roles

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles.htm

Defining User Roles

Define the forms and fields in PrismHR that users with a specific role can access on the User Roles form. Provide either full access to a form (including editing form data) or read-only access. Your organization should have a well-planned strategy for applying role-based security.

Using the Actions Menu

From the Actions menu:

Note: Note: The User Report and the User Roles Report (available from theReports menu) display valuable information about how users and user roles are currently set up.

Viewing Role Information

Enter the Role ID or click the field title and select the role from a list. The form populates with specific information on that role.

Filtering Form Types

Filter the form access list by form Type by selecting an option from the Type Filter field. For example, select Payroll to view payroll-related forms.

Obsoleting a User Role

Obsolete a user role that is no longer in use by enabling Obsolete. (Selecting Role ID displays the User Role Search list, where the Obsolete column indicates whether the user role is obsolete (Y) or not obsolete (N).)

Note: Note the following:

Searching for Forms

Search for a particular form in the list by entering a query in the Search for Description field.

User Role Tasks

You can perform a variety of tasks on the User Roles form and itsActions menu

[Image: screenshot]

:

========================================================================

Copying a User Role

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Copy.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Copy.htm

Copying a User Role

Create a new user role based on an existing one with the Role Copy form.

Note: Note: The new role will be identical to the role you copied, except for its Role ID and Description.

  1. Select the Role ID of the role you want to copy. The list includes all user types, both service providers and worksite managers. Be sure that you know the name of the role you want to copy.

  2. Enter a new Copy To Role ID. The role ID should indicate its purpose (for example, BENADM).

  3. Enter a Description that clearly describes its purpose ( for example, Benefits Administrator).

  4. Click Save.

========================================================================

Deleting a Role

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Delete.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Delete.htm

Deleting a Role

Delete an existing user role with the Role Delete form.

Note: Note: You cannot delete any roles that have users associated with them.

To delete a user role:

  1. Select Delete Role from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] in User Roles.

  2. Select a Role ID from Role ID to Delete.

  3. Click Delete. A pop-up window opens.

  4. The system checks to see whether the user role is associated with any user accounts:

========================================================================

Editing a User Role

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Edit.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Edit.htm

Editing a User Role

Edit new and existing user roles directly from the User Roles form. When you finish editing information on the form, click Save.

Adding and Removing Forms

You can add and remove forms as needed:

Changing User Access to a Form

Configure user access to a form by selecting the text in the Access column until the correct setting displays. There are three access settings:

Note: Note: If one role permits access to a feature and another role prohibits access, the system denies access in both instances. Avoid this by removing the denied form from that user role. If one role permits access and the other role does not include the feature, the user will have appropriate access.

Configuring Field-Level Access

Select the Field option in the Security column to set field-level access to a form. This only applies to certain forms. For more information, see Configuring Field Security.

========================================================================

Configuring Field Security

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Field_Security.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_Field_Security.htm

Configuring Field Security

Your organization can set field-level security for some forms, as indicated in the Security column of the User Roles form. Some fields are required by the system and cannot be customized.

Setting Field Security

To access field security for a form:

  1. Click Field or Field Set in the Security column on User Roles. The Field Security Maintenance form opens.

Note: Note: If no fields display, field-level security is not set up.

  1. Locate the permission you want to configure, and set Permissions by clicking the link until one of the following displays:
  1. Select Y (required) or N (not required) in the Required column. Only enabled fields can be set to required.

  2. When you are finished, click Save.

  3. Click Save in the User Roles form.

A service provider can hide fields that are required by Worksite Managers or Worksite Trusted Advisors. In these cases, a message displays to warn you that hiding a required field could prevent the user from saving the form.

Adding Fields for Security

To require security for a field:

  1. Click Add on the Field Security Maintenance form. This opens the Field Security Selection form, which lists fields without security.

  2. Click Select next to the field that requires security.

  3. Click Accept. The Field Security Maintenance form displays again.

  4. Locate the permission you want to configure, and set Permissions by clicking the link until one of the following displays:

  1. Select Y (required) or N (not required) in the Required column. Only enabled fields can be set to required.

  2. When you are finished, click Save.

  3. Click Save in the User Roles form.

Note: Note: If a user has two roles with different field security settings, the system honors the settings for the first role assigned to the account. The administrator must take this into consideration when designing and assigning roles.

========================================================================

Creating a New Role

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_New.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/User_Roles_New.htm

Creating a New Role

Create and configure new user roles with the Role Maintenance form.

Note: You cannot use a different case structure of an existing Role when creating or copying a new user role. For example, you cannot create the user role glsp if the user role GLSP already exists. If you try to create or copy a new user role using an existing role but with a different case structure, an error message displays.

To create a new user role:

  1. Enter a unique Role ID that briefly indicates its purpose (for example, PAYPROC).

  2. Enter a role Description that clearly describes its purpose (for example, Payroll Processor).

  3. Select a User Type:

  1. Click Save to create the new user role.

Note: Note: By default, no forms are assigned to the role.

========================================================================

Defining Users

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users.htm

Defining Users

You can define user access to clients and system features on the Users form. Also, you can copy or delete existing user accounts, view a user’s login history, and set other information on this form.

Note: Note: Service providers whose user role provides access to the Users form can also access this form by selecting the User Record option on the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

in the Employee Details form.

PrismHR users are one of the following types:

Note: You can only assign this role to service providers.

To do this Perform these steps
Create a user See Creating a New User
Copy a user See Copying a User
Edit a user After entering a user’s basic information, your next steps depend on the type of user you need to create. Click a link below to read the topic that covers the relevant user type, and then proceed to step 3 within those topics: - Editing a Service Provider User - Editing a Worksite Manager User - Editing a Worksite Trusted Advisor - Editing a Worksite Employee User

Changing the User Type

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Changing_User_Type.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Changing_User_Type.htm

Changing the User Type

You can use the Users form to change a Worksite Employee user to a Worksite Manager, or a Worksite Manager user to a Worksite Employee.

To change a user from one type to the other:

  1. Open the user account on the Users form.

  2. Open the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] and select Change to a Worksite Manager or Change to a Worksite Employee.

  3. Click Yes in the confirmation message.

  4. The User Type field changes.

  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Copying a User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Copying_Users.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Copying_Users.htm

Copying a User

Copy an existing user account to create a new one with the same or similar access privileges.

To copy a user, do the following:

  1. Open the Actions menu and select Copy User. The User Copy form opens.

  2. Enter or select the User ID of the user you want to copy.

For worksite managers and worksite trusted advisors, you can copy clients, client access, and data security entities to a new user ID by selecting the Copy all client and data security settings field, which displays when you enter a user ID or select one in the Search users list. After selecting this field, a confirmation message displays, “This will copy over all client access and data security settings from the existing user to the new user. Do you want to continue?” Click Yes to continue. (Clicking No closes the message and returns to the User Copy form, where the field is now unchecked.)

  1. Enter the User ID of the new user.

  2. Click Save.

========================================================================

Creating a New User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Creating_New_User.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Creating_New_User.htm

Creating a New User

Create a new user directly from the Users form. This procedure describes the steps common to all PrismHR user types.

To create a new user, do the following:

  1. Enter a unique User ID and press Tab. User IDs may not contain special characters such as slashes, brackets, apostrophes, or other symbols.

Note: Note: If there is an existing user with this ID, the user account information displays. Click Cancel and enter a different User ID. Select the User ID link to view existing IDs exist to help avoid creating a duplicate ID. In the Search users list that displays, select the User Type and the Status. The field defaults, All User Types and All, allow you to search Active and Disabled user records for all user types.

  1. Select the User Type. The Users form displays the fields and panels appropriate to that type of user. (Note: After selecting the Service Provider, Worksite Manager, or Worksite Trusted Advisor option from the User Type field, the sMFA Device Expiration setting automatically defaults to 30 Days.)

Note: Note the following:

  1. Enter the user’s full Name.

  2. Enter the user’s initial Password. This can be changed later.

  3. Enter the user’s primary Email Address. The system uses this for communications such as password resets.

Note: Note the following:

  1. (Optional) Enter the user’s Mobile Phone number.

  2. Enter the user’s Notification Email.

========================================================================

Establishing User Data Security

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Data_Security.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Data_Security.htm

Establishing User Data Security

You can establish security for worksite manager and worksite trusted advisor users to specify the user’s access to companies, divisions, departments, locations, shifts, and so on.

[Image: screenshot]

The following chart displays a high-level overview of the Data Security access hierarchy:

[Image: screenshot]

To establish security:

  1. While editing the user account in the Users form, open the Actions menu and select Data Security. The Data Security window opens.

  2. Maintain the companies that the user can access:

  1. — Click Add Company and then select the client the user can access. Typically, this is the client that employs the user. The Access is set to Pending.

  2. — Return to the Users form to select the employee ID. If you select an employee that is employed by the client, then the Access changes to Granted.

i. Click the link.
ii. Enter the Optional Override Access Thru date.
— —
  1. — Click Submit. The user’s access to the client expires after 11:59:59 p.m. on that date (Central Time).
i. Click the link.
ii. Delete the Optional Override Access Thru date.
— —
iii. Click Submit. The access is set to Granted.
— —
  1. Configure a user’s Data Security access hierarchy by setting one of the following options in the Security by field:

Note: The Security by field is available for service providers with access to configure a worksite manager’s (WSM) Data Security.

  1. The entities are for the selected client and are set in Client Details. Using the drop-down, you can choose to show All Defined Entities or limit the list to specific entities.
  1. For each defined entity, you can set the access by clicking the row:
  1. When you are finished, click Save. You return to the Users form where you can complete the necessary steps for editing the user.

Related Topics

Editing a Worksite Manager User

Editing a Worksite Trusted Advisor

========================================================================

Deleting a User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Deleting_Users.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Deleting_Users.htm

Deleting a User

Use the delete function to permanently remove a user from the system.

To delete a user:

  1. Go to the Users form on the System|Change menu.

  2. Enter the User ID. The Users form displays the information for the user account.

  3. Click Delete. The system displays a message, “Are you sure you want to delete this record?”

  4. Click Yes to delete the user.

========================================================================

Editing a Worksite Employee User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_Employee.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_Employee.htm

Editing a Worksite Employee User

Worksite Employees are workers at client locations. The Worksite Employee form provides access to Employee Portal (EP).

To set up basic employee information:

  1. Enter or select the User ID. The Users form displays the information for the Worksite Employee.

  2. Select Worksite Employee from the User Type drop-down menu.

  3. Update the user’s First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Mobile Phone, Notifications Email, or Registration Email, if required.

Note: You cannot edit the Email Address after the first time the record is saved. If the user updates his or her primary email address through Employee Portal (EP) or through the Employee DetailsAddress tab, the system displays that in the Email Address field.

  1. Enter the Employee ID to link the user account to the appropriate employee record.

  2. You can include a photo of the user. Mouse over the image and then select Upload to add an image, or select Delete to remove an existing image.

  3. Click Save.

Worksite Employee Settings

Configure these optional settings to control employee password, multi-factor authentication, and activity behavior.

Field — Description

Active User — Deselect if you want to remove system access for this user without deleting their user record.

Requires New Password — Select this option to prompt the user for a new password the next time they log in. This feature works even if passwords are set to never expire on the Authentication Services form.

Logging Enabled — Do not select this option unless you know it is necessary, as it adds overhead and slows the system. This option enables back end logging to assist with troubleshooting.

Last Changed On — This field displays the date and time of the most recent change to the user account.

sMFA Device Expiration — This field determines the amount of time until a user is prompted to verify their login using multi-factor authentication. You can use the global MFA setting for MFA expiration, select a different time interval, or disable it entirely. PrismHR highly recommends that you do not disable MFA expiration. See the previous warning.

Setting User Details (PrismONE ID)

Configure these settings to control the user’s registration with PrismONE ID.

Field — Description

Registration Status — This field displays the user’s PrismONE registration status.

Registration Email — Enter the user’s email address that is used as the registration message’s destination.

Require This Email for PrismONE ID — Select this option to require the user to use the Registration Email address for their PrismONE ID address.

Registration Code — This field displays the status of the PrismONE registration code sent to the user’s Registration Email.

Send Code via Mobile Phone — Select this option to send the registration code as an SMS/Text message.

========================================================================

Editing a Service Provider User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_PEO_User.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_PEO_User.htm

Editing a Service Provider User

Configure accounts for the users who work for your organization with the Service Provider form.

To set up a service provider user:

  1. Enter or select the User ID. The Users form displays the information for the service provider.

  2. Select Service Provider from the User Type drop-down menu.

  3. Update the user’s Name, Password, Mobile Phone, Notification Email, Registration Email, Title, Work Phone, or Ext, if required.

Note: If an existing email address contains an invalid character and you do not remove it, when you click Save the system displays a warning message, but still allows you to save the information, “Warning! Email address cannot contain illegal character: ‘X’. It should be updated to a valid email address.” Click OK to save the other information in the form (the invalid email address remains in the field).

  1. Enter a Client Access Group. This determines the client companies that the user can access (See Defining Client Access Groups).

  2. You can include a photo of the user. Mouse over the image and then select Upload to add an image, or select Delete to remove an existing image.

  3. Click Save.

Setting User Details (Status and Password Recovery)

Configure these optional settings to control service provider password, multi-factor authentication, and activity behavior.

Important! For service provider users, sMFA Device Expiration is set to 30 days by default. For your organization’s security, disabling sMFA Device Expiration is highly discouraged.

Field — Description

Active User — Deselect to remove system access for this user without deleting their user record.

Requires New Password — Select this option to prompt the user for a new password the next time they log in. This feature works even if passwords are set to never expire on the Authentication Services form.

Logging Enabled — Do not select this option unless absolutely necessary, as it adds overhead and slows down the system. This option enables back-end logging to assist with troubleshooting.

Last Changed On — This field displays the date and time of the most recent change to the user account.

sMFA Device Expiration — This field determines the amount of time until a user is prompted to verify their login using multi-factor authentication. You can use the global MFA setting for MFA expiration, select a different time interval, or disable it entirely. PrismHR highly recommends that you do not disable MFA expiration. See the previous warning.

sMFA Support — This field determines if multi-factor authentication is supported for password recovery.

Birth Date — This field is used to enter the user’s birth date for use in password recovery.

ZIP Code — This field is used to enter the user’s ZIP code for use in password recovery.

Setting User Details (PrismONE ID)

Configure these settings to control the user’s registration with PrismONE ID.

Field — Description

Registration Status — This field displays the user’s PrismONE registration status.

Registration Email — Enter the user’s email address that is used as the registration message’s destination.

Require This Email for PrismONE ID — Select this option to require the user to use the Registration Email address for their PrismONE ID address.

Registration Code — This field displays the status of the PrismONE registration code sent to the user’s Registration Email.

Send Code via Mobile Phone — Select this option to send the registration code as an SMS/Text message.

Assigning User Roles

The User Roles panel maintains the roles that apply to this user. Each role determines what forms and fields a user can access.

Note: Note: If a user is assigned more than one user role, and one role allows access to a feature while another denies it, the system does not allow the user to access the feature. This safeguards your organization’s information and that of your clients. Alternatively, if one role allows access and another role does not define access to the form, the user can access it.

Note: Note: If a user has two roles with different field security settings, the system honors the settings for the first role assigned to the account. The administrator must take this into consideration when designing and assigning roles.

Note: Note: A warning message displays on the User Role form if the following occurs:

The message states:

The user role has access to the Transfer Downloads File to PC menu. This form does not utilize client access group security so it is possible that maybe be able to download files that contain data they should not be allowed to access. Do you wish to continue?

Setting Account Management Roles

Account Management roles determine what the user can do in PrismHR.

These roles determine what actions the user can perform, and what assignments they can have in the Client Details Account tab.

Note: Note the following:

Account Management Role Details
Benefits Representative The user can be assigned as a Benefits representative. (This user can also approve benefit-related actions for clients in the assigned Client Access Group.)
Billing Representative The user who can approve ACH Billing threshold approvals for global-level and client-level approval policies. Users can set the Billing Representative Account Management Role as follows: - Users with Full access to the Users form can set up a service provider user with the Billing Representative A/M Role, so they can approve ACH Billing threshold approvals. - Users with Full access to the Global Approval Policies form can create an approval policy and assign Billing Representative to the A/M Role. When the approval policy is triggered, a user with the Billing Representative A/M Role can successfully approve the action. - Users with Full access to the Approval Policies form can create a client-level approval policy and assign Billing Representative to the A/M Role. When the approval policy is triggered, a user with the Billing Representative A/M Role can successfully approve the action.

Note: Note: If your organization wants to enable user administration security, you must apply the user administrator roles to the appropriate users before selecting the Activate User Administration Security option in Global Configuration. If you select that option first, all users will be prevented from assigning the roles to user accounts!

Account Management Role — Details

Service Provider User Administrator — This role allows the service provider user to make changes to other service provider user accounts.

Worksite User Administrator — This role allows the service provider user to make changes to worksite manager, worksite trusted advisor, and employee user accounts.

Report Center User Administrator — This role allows the service provider to access the field-level Security Administration page in the Report Center, which grants access to Report Center administrator rights.

========================================================================

Editing a User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_Users.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_Users.htm

Editing a User

Edit an existing user to configure that user as one of the user types.

To edit a user:

  1. Enter the User ID of the user you want to edit.

  2. Follow the edit user type instructions in the appropriate topic (See Defining Users).

This section discusses:

========================================================================

Editing a Worksite Trusted Advisor

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_WSA_User.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_WSA_User.htm

Editing a Worksite Trusted Advisor

Worksite Trusted Advisors work for one or more clients but are not necessarily employees of those clients. These are typically consultants who are expected to view information but not perform actions like those done by a service provider or worksite manager.

Use the Worksite Trusted Advisor form to edit settings for these users.

To set up a worksite trusted advisor:

  1. Enter the User ID. The Users form displays the information for the worksite trusted advisor.

  2. Select Worksite Trusted Advisor from the User Type drop-down menu.

  3. Update the user’s First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Mobile Phone, Notifications Email, or Registration Email, if required.

Note: If an existing email address contains an invalid character and you do not remove it, when you click Save the system displays a warning message, but still allows you to save the information, “Warning! Email address cannot contain illegal character: ‘X’. It should be updated to a valid email address.” Click OK to save the other information in the form (the invalid email address remains in the field).

  1. You can include a photo of the user. Mouse over the image and then select Upload to add an image, or select Delete to remove an existing image.

  2. Click Save.

Configuring Data Security

Manage data and client security for the user account by opening the Actions menu and selecting Data Security. The Data Security form opens.

[Image: screenshot]

To add companies that the user can access:

  1. Click Add Company and then select the client the user can access. Typically, this is the client that employs the user. Access is set to Pending.

  2. Click Save to return to the Users form to select the employee ID. If you select an employee that is employed by the client, Access changes to Granted. If the employee is not employed by the client, the status remains Pending.

Note: Note: For clients already assigned to the user, the access you can set depends on whether the user is employed by that client. If so, set the access to Granted or a thru date, otherwise you can set only a thru date.

To change from Granted or Pending to a thru date:

  1. Click the link.

  2. Enter the Optional Override Access Thru date.

  3. Click Submit. The user’s access to the client expires after 11:59:59 p.m. on that date (Central Time).

To change from a thru date to Granted:

  1. Click the link.

  2. Delete the Optional Override Access Thru date.

  3. Click Submit. The access is set to Granted.

To remove access completely, click Delete

[Image: screenshot]

in the company row.

Displayed entities are specific to the selected client and are set in Client Details. Using the drop-down, you can show All Defined Entities or limit the list to specific entities.

Note: Note: See Managing Client Security Settings to learn about defining entities for a client.

For each entity, you can set the access by clicking the row:

When you are finished, click Save. You return to the Users form where you can complete the necessary steps for

editing the user.

Worksite Trusted Advisor Settings

Configure these optional settings to control worksite trusted advisor password, multi-factor authentication, and activity behavior.

Field — Description

Active User — Deselect to remove system access for this user without deleting their user record.

Requires New Password — Select this option to prompt the user for a new password the next time they log in. This feature works even if passwords are set to never expire on the Authentication Services form.

Logging Enabled — Do not select this option unless absolutely necessary, as it adds overhead and slows down the system. This option enables back-end logging to assist with troubleshooting.

Last Changed On — This field displays the date and time of the most recent change to the user account.

sMFA Device Expiration — This field determines the amount of time until a user is prompted to verify their login using multi-factor authentication. You can use the global MFA setting for MFA expiration, select a different time interval, or disable it entirely. PrismHR highly recommends that you do not disable MFA expiration. See the previous warning.

Birth Date and ZIP Code — The system uses these fields during password recovery to verify a user’s identity.

Note: Note: Password recovery always requires message templates for Password Reset and Password Reset Confirmation. If you are also using sMFA Support, it requires a message template for MFA Passcode.

Setting User Details (PrismONE ID)

Configure these settings to control the user’s registration with PrismONE ID.

Field — Description

Registration Status — This field displays the user’s PrismONE registration status.

Registration Email — Enter the user’s email address that is used as the registration message’s destination.

Require This Email for PrismONE ID — Select this option to require the user to use the Registration Email address for their PrismONE ID address.

Registration Code — This field displays the status of the PrismONE registration code sent to the user’s Registration Email.

Send Code via Mobile Phone — Select this option to send the registration code as an SMS/Text message.

Assigning User Roles

Maintain the user roles that apply to this user with the User Roles panel. Each role determines what forms and fields the user can access.

Note: Note: If a user is assigned more than one user role, and one allows access to a feature while another denies it, then the system does not allow the user to access the feature. This is to ensure the security of your organization’s information and that of your clients. If instead one role allows access and another role has simply removed it, the users can access it.

If a user has two roles with different field security settings, the system honors the settings for the first role assigned to the account. The administrator must take this into consideration when designing and assigning roles.

You can also select the Human Resource Roles for this user.

Human Resource Roles

Human Resource roles determine what the user can do in PrismHR. The user can only perform actions for client companies assigned in Data Security.

Note: Note the following:

Human Resource Role — Details

Employee’s Manager (Leave Request Only) — User can approve employee leave requests.

H/R Action Approver — User can approve human resource actions for clients assigned in Data Security.

Payroll Approver — User can approve payroll-related actions for clients assigned in Data Security.

Payroll Processor — User can process payroll information for clients assigned in Data Security. (Applies to Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Time Sheet Entry (w/ Pay Rates) — User can enter time sheet data, including pay rates. (Applies to Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Time Sheet Entry (w/o Pay Rates) — User can enter time sheet hours, but cannot see or enter pay rate information. (Applies to PrismHR Core and Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Payroll - Prints Checks — User can view and print regular paychecks. Note: If a user’s role is only set to the Payroll - Prints Checks role, they cannot print garnishment paychecks.

Payroll - Print Garnishment Checks — User can view and print garnishment paychecks. Note: If a user’s role is only set to the Payroll - Print Garnishment Checks role, they cannot print regular paychecks.

Enrollment Proxy — User can act as an employee and execute the employee’s enrollment selections. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

Onboarding Proxy — User can read employees’ full onboarding workflows. (Note: The system bypasses any field-level security when using this role.)

Benefits Approver — User can approve benefits-related actions for clients assigned in Data Security. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

PTO Administrator — User can see all employees in the Planned Time Off Requests form, regardless of whether they are restricted by Data Security settings, not only direct reports.

Client Manager — User can be assigned to receive notifications in the Notification Recipients form.

I-9 Approver — User can approve Form I-9s for employees during the onboarding process.

Pay Card Account Approver — User can approve pending pay card account approvals.

Manager User Setup — Worksite managers can set up other worksite managers.

Custom HR role (defined by your organization)— If your organization has defined custom human resources roles using the Custom HR Approval Roles form, you can add them to the user. These roles are for customizing global or client-specific approval policies.

========================================================================

Editing a Worksite Manager User

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_WSM_User.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Editing_WSM_User.htm

Editing a Worksite Manager User

Configure users who are managers at a client with the Worksite Manager form. Worksite Manager Users need to be linked to an existing PrismHR employee ID. This allows for one manager user to have access to both employee and manager functions inside employee portal.

To set up a worksite manager user:

  1. Enter or select the User ID. The Users form displays the information for the Worksite Manager.

  2. Select Worksite Manager from the User Type drop-down menu.

  3. Update the user’s First Name, Middle Name, Last Name, Mobile Phone, Notifications Email, Registration Email, or Security Email, if required.

Note: If a user updates their primary email address through Employee Portal (EP) or through the Employee Details Address tab, the system displays that address in the Email Address field.

  1. Enter the Employee ID to link the user account to the appropriate employee record.

  2. You can include a photo of the user. Mouse over the image and then select Upload to add an image, or select Delete to remove an existing image.

  3. Click Save.

Configuring Data Security

Manage data and client security for the user account by opening the Actions menu and selecting Data Security. The Data Security window opens.

To add companies that the user can access:

  1. Click Add Company and select a client. Typically, this is the client that employs the user. Access is set to Pending.

  2. Click Save to return to the Users form to select the employee ID.

Note: Note: For clients already assigned to the user, the access you can set depends on whether the user is employed by that client. If this is the case, you can set the access to Granted or a thru date, otherwise you can set only a thru date.

To change from Granted or Pending to a thru date:

  1. Click the link.

  2. Enter the Optional Override Access Thru date.

  3. Click Submit. User access to the client expires after 11:59:59 p.m. on that date (Central Time).

To change from a thru date to Granted:

  1. Click the link.

  2. Delete the Optional Override Access Thru date.

  3. Click Submit. The access is set to Granted.

To remove access completely, click Delete

[Image: screenshot]

in the company row.

The displayed entities are specific to the selected client and are set in Client Details. Using the drop-down, you can choose to show All Defined Entities or limit the list to specific entities.

Note: Note: See Managing Client Security Settings to learn about defining entities for a client.

For each entity, you can set the access by clicking the row:

When you are finished, click Save. You return to the Users form where you can complete the necessary steps for editing the user.

Worksite Manager Settings

Configure these optional settings to control worksite manager password, multi-factor authentication, and activity behavior.

Field — Description

Active User — Deselect to remove system access for this user without deleting their user record.

Requires New Password — Select this option to prompt the user for a new password the next time they log in. This feature works even if passwords are set to never expire on the Authentication Services form.

Logging Enabled — Do not select this option unless absolutely necessary, as it adds overhead and slows down the system. This option enables back-end logging to assist with troubleshooting.

Last Changed On — This field displays the date and time of the most recent change to the user account.

sMFA Device Expiration — This field determines the amount of time until a user is prompted to verify their login using multi-factor authentication. You can use the global MFA setting for MFA expiration, select a different time interval, or disable it entirely. PrismHR highly recommends that you do not disable MFA expiration. See the previous warning.

sMFA Support — This field determines if multi-factor authentication is supported for password recovery.

Birth Date — This field is used to enter the user’s birth date for use in password recovery.

ZIP Code — This field is used to enter the user’s ZIP code for use in password recovery.

Note: Note: Password recovery always requires message templates for Password Reset and Password Reset Confirmation. If you are also using sMFA Support, it requires a message template for MFA Passcode.

Setting User Details (PrismONE ID)

Configure these settings to control the user’s registration with PrismONE ID.

Field — Description

Registration Status — This field displays the user’s PrismONE registration status.

Registration Email — Enter the user’s email address that is used as the registration message’s destination.

Require This Email for PrismONE ID — Select this option to require the user to use the Registration Email address for their PrismONE ID address.

Registration Code — This field displays the status of the PrismONE registration code sent to the user’s Registration Email.

Send Code via Mobile Phone — Select this option to send the registration code as an SMS/Text message.

Assigning User Roles

Maintain the user roles that apply to this user with the User Roles panel. Each role determines what forms and fields the user can access.

Note: Note: If a user is assigned more than one user role, and one allows access to a feature while another denies it, then the system does not allow the user to access the feature. This is to ensure the security of your organization’s information and that of your clients. If instead one role allows access and another role has simply removed it, the users can access it.

If a user has two roles with different field security settings, the system honors the settings for the first role assigned to the account. The administrator must take this into consideration when designing and assigning roles.

You can also select the Human Resource Roles for this user.

Human Resource Roles

Human Resource roles determine what the user can do in PrismHR. The user can only perform actions for client companies assigned in Data Security.

Note: Note the following:

Human Resource Role — Details

Employee’s Manager (Leave Request Only) — User can approve employee leave requests.

H/R Action Approver — User can approve human resource actions for clients assigned in Data Security.

Payroll Approver — User can approve payroll-related actions for clients assigned in Data Security.

Payroll Processor — User can process payroll information for clients assigned in Data Security. (Applies to Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Time Sheet Entry (w/ Pay Rates) — User can enter time sheet data, including pay rates. (Applies to Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Time Sheet Entry (w/o Pay Rates) — User can enter time sheet hours, but cannot see or enter pay rate information. (Applies to PrismHR Core and Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Payroll - Prints Checks — User can view and print regular paychecks. Note: If a user’s role is only set to the Payroll - Prints Checks role, they cannot print garnishment paychecks.

Payroll - Print Garnishment Checks — User can view and print garnishment paychecks. Note: If a user’s role is only set to the Payroll - Print Garnishment Checks role, they cannot print regular paychecks.

Enrollment Proxy — User can act as an employee and execute the employee’s enrollment selections. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

Onboarding Proxy — User can read employees’ full onboarding workflows. (Note: The system bypasses any field-level security when using this role.)

Benefits Approver — User can approve benefits-related actions for clients assigned in Data Security. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

PTO Administrator — User can see all employees in the Planned Time Off Requests form, regardless of whether they are restricted by Data Security settings, not only direct reports.

Client Manager — User can be assigned to receive notifications in the Notification Recipients form.

I-9 Approver — User can approve Form I-9s for employees during the onboarding process.

Pay Card Account Approver — User can approve pending pay card account approvals.

Manager User Setup — Worksite managers can set up other worksite managers.

Custom HR role (defined by your organization)— If your organization has defined custom human resources roles using the Custom HR Approval Roles form, you can add them to the user. These roles are for customizing global or client-specific approval policies.

========================================================================

Understanding Human Resources Roles

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Human_Resource_Roles.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Human_Resource_Roles.htm

Understanding Human Resources Roles

Human Resource roles determine what the user can do in PrismHR. The user can only perform actions for client companies assigned in Data Security.

Note: Note the following:

Human Resource Role — Details

Employee’s Manager (Leave Request Only) — User can approve employee leave requests.

H/R Action Approver — User can approve human resource actions for clients assigned in Data Security.

Payroll Approver — User can approve payroll-related actions for clients assigned in Data Security.

Payroll Processor — User can process payroll information for clients assigned in Data Security. (Applies to Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Time Sheet Entry (w/ Pay Rates) — User can enter time sheet data, including pay rates. (Applies to Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Time Sheet Entry (w/o Pay Rates) — User can enter time sheet hours, but cannot see or enter pay rate information. (Applies to PrismHR Core and Portal Time Sheet Entry.)

Payroll - Prints Checks — User can view and print regular paychecks. Note: If a user’s role is only set to the Payroll - Prints Checks role, they cannot print garnishment paychecks.

Payroll - Print Garnishment Checks — User can view and print garnishment paychecks. Note: If a user’s role is only set to the Payroll - Print Garnishment Checks role, they cannot print regular paychecks.

Enrollment Proxy — User can act as an employee and execute the employee’s enrollment selections. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

Onboarding Proxy — User can read employees’ full onboarding workflows. (Note: The system bypasses any field-level security when using this role.)

Benefits Approver — User can approve benefits-related actions for clients assigned in Data Security. (PrismHR Benefits Enrollment only.)

PTO Administrator — User can see all employees in the Planned Time Off Requests form, regardless of whether they are restricted by Data Security settings, not only direct reports.

Client Manager — User can be assigned to receive notifications in the Notification Recipients form.

I-9 Approver — User can approve Form I-9s for employees during the onboarding process.

Pay Card Account Approver — User can approve pending pay card account approvals.

Manager User Setup — Worksite managers can set up other worksite managers.

Custom HR role (defined by your organization)— If your organization has defined custom human resources roles using the Custom HR Approval Roles form, you can add them to the user. These roles are for customizing global or client-specific approval policies.

========================================================================

Setting Client Device IP Range

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Setting_Client_Device_IP_Range.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Setting_Client_Device_IP_Range.htm

Setting Client Device IP Range

Restrict a user to a specific IP address or range of addresses using the Client Device IP Range form, which you can access on the Actions menu in the Users form. For example, you can grant users access only at a specific location, such as an office or home.

To set a client device IP range:

  1. Select Client Device IP Range from the Actions menu on the Users form. The IP Restrictions form opens.

  2. Enter each Acceptable IP Address Range. Users can only access anything IP addresses or ranges in the list.

  3. Click Close.

  4. Click Save in the Users form.

Examples

In this example, the user can only access PrismHR from the listed IP addresses (123.123.123.101, 123.123.123.102, and 123.123.123.103).

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Your organization can also specify a range of permitted IP addresses.

In this example, the user can only access PrismHR from IP addresses that begin with 123.123.123.

[Image: screenshot]

In this example, the user can only access the system from IP addresses in the range (123.123.123.100, 123.123.123.101, 123.123.123.102, and so on).

If you enter a range, you must separate the first and last addresses with a dash and the first three numbers must match. The system will ignore it if the first three numbers are different.

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Setting User Access to Printers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Setting_Printer_Access.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Setting_Printer_Access.htm

Setting User Access to Printers

Set the default printers available to a user for specific items by selecting Printer Setup from the Actions menu in the Users form.

To set user access to a new printer:

  1. Enter the Printer ID. The Printer Name displays.

  2. Select the Default Code, which is the type of item to print on the printer (for example, Reports).

  3. Click Accept.

  4. Click Save in the Users form.

========================================================================

Viewing Login History

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Viewing_Login_History.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Users_Viewing_Login_History.htm

Viewing Login History

Review a user’s PrismHR login history by opening the Actions menu in the Users form and selecting Login History. A login history displays.

[Image: screenshot]

========================================================================

Tables

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Using_Tables.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Using_Tables.htm

Using Tables

You enter some information in tables.

========================================================================

Viewing or Editing Workers’ Compensation Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Classification_Rate_Matrix.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Classification_Rate_Matrix.htm

Viewing or Editing Workers’ Compensation Rates

Use the W/C Classification Rate Matrix form to view or edit the existing workers’ compensation rates for a template.

  1. Select the Rate Template.

  2. Select the State.

  3. If appropriate, enter a Class Code.

  4. Enter an As of Date and press Tab or Enter. The information displays.

  5. To clear the form, click Cancel.

========================================================================

Defining W/C Classification Rates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Classification_Rates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Classification_Rates.htm

Defining W/C Classification Rates

You can use the W/C Classification Rates form to maintain workers’ compensation classification rate information. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Click the Data Import Tool icon (

[Image: The Data Import Tool icon.]

) to import W/C rates at the system level. (See the Payroll Administration Guide for more information about using the Global W/C Classification Rates Import Template option to perform this import.)

To define workers’ compensation classification rate information, do the following:

  1. Go to the W/C Classification Rates form and complete the following fields:
Field Description
Rate Template Select the Rate Template.
State Select the State.
Effective Date Enter a new Effective Date for this rate template, or select an existing date from the table at the right.
Time sheet based WC tax calculations Only for the State of Washington, this field will appear. This field is a checkbox which is unchecked by default. - Not checked (default) - Payroll programs calculate the Washington State Workers’ Compensation (WC) tax using standard Vertex processing - Checked - When checked: 1. Employee Payroll Vouchers store the following data based on the timesheet positions used in the payroll: \ a. \ WC Hours by position WC Class \ \ — \ — \ \ b. \ EE Charged WC Tax Rate \ \ — \ — \ \ c. \ ER Charged WC Tax Rate \ \ — \ — \ 2. Stored EE Charged WC Tax Rate and ER Charged WC Tax Rate honor the following logical criteria: a. — For exempt/salaried employees only: caps WC hours to 160 hours worked/month for tax calculation purposes b. — Uses the EE and ER Tax rates related to the WC Class code implicated by the time sheet level positions (not the employee’s assigned position) c. — For employees with more than 1 WC class codes on a given charge date, the EE and ER Tax rates reflect the highest Rate for the date, applied to all hours reported on the charge date
  1. Employee Payroll Vouchers store the following data based on the timesheet positions used in the payroll: | | a. | WC Hours by position WC Class | | | b. | EE Charged WC Tax Rate | | | c. | ER Charged WC Tax Rate |
  2. Stored EE Charged WC Tax Rate and ER Charged WC Tax Rate honor the following logical criteria: | | a. | For exempt/salaried employees only: caps WC hours to 160 hours worked/month for tax calculation purposes | | | b. | Uses the EE and ER Tax rates related to the WC Class code implicated by the time sheet level positions (not the employee’s assigned position) | | | c. | For employees with more than 1 WC class codes on a given charge date, the EE and ER Tax rates reflect the highest Rate for the date, applied to all hours reported on the charge date | | Input Columns/Enabled | For the Input Columns you need to update, select Enabled. | | | Search for Class Code | Use the Search for Class Code field if you want to look for a specific code that is already in the table. | | | Class Code/Gross Rate/Published Rate | For each workers’ compensation classification code: d. — Enter the Class Code that is applicable for this workers’ compensation rate. The Class Description displays. e. — Enter the Gross Rate, which is the workers’ compensation insurance premium’s gross rate as a percentage; for example, enter 1 for $1.00 per $100 wages. (The system applies any modifiers or discounts to this gross rate to calculate the accrual and billing rates.) f. — You can enter the Published Rate for the classification. This rate is only for informational purposes; it is not used to calculate accrual or billing rates. | | | | d. | Enter the Class Code that is applicable for this workers’ compensation rate. The Class Description displays. | | | e. | Enter the Gross Rate, which is the workers’ compensation insurance premium’s gross rate as a percentage; for example, enter 1 for $1.00 per $100 wages. (The system applies any modifiers or discounts to this gross rate to calculate the accrual and billing rates.) | | | f. | You can enter the Published Rate for the classification. This rate is only for informational purposes; it is not used to calculate accrual or billing rates. | > Note: Note: The following fields are only used for the state of Washington. Note that W/C is only calculated on the first 160 hours per month in this state.
Field Description
Gross Rate Enter the Gross Rate.
Tax Rate (EE) Enter the Tax Rate (EE) charged to employees for workers’ compensation.
Tax Rate (ER) Enter the Tax Rate (ER) charged to employers for workers’ compensation.
  1. Click Save.

========================================================================

Defining W/C Classifications

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Classifications.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Classifications.htm

Defining W/C Classifications

Use the W/C Classifications form to define the workers’ compensation class information for a state.

[Image: screenshot]

Note: Note: Click the Import icon (

[Image: screenshot]

) to import W/C codes and descriptions by state or to import multiple rate templates and effective dates all at once. (See the Payroll Administration Guide for more information about using the Global W/C Classifications Import Template option to perform this import.)

To define workers’ compensation class information for a state, do the following:

  1. Enter the two-character State code where this workers’ compensation classification applies.

  2. Enter the workers’ compensation Class Code used by the state for this classification. To enter a sub-class code, precede it with a period.

  3. Enter a Class Description for this classification.

  4. Select Ohio Construction Class if the classification pertains to a construction trade class in Ohio. The system uses this in the Ohio Weekly Construction Cap calculation.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Establishing Workers’ Compensation Insurance Policy and Carrier Information

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Policies.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Policies.htm

Establishing Workers’ Compensation Insurance Policy and Carrier Information

If your organization services clients with employees in various states, be sure to use the correct workers’ compensation (W/C) policies for each state where you do business. Use the W/C Policies form to establish workers’ compensation insurance policy and carrier information.

Policy Information

Use the Policy Information panel to maintain basic information about the W/C insurance policy.

Field — Description

Policy ID — Workers’ compensation insurance policy ID.

Description — Description of the insurance policy.

Policy Start Date — Date when coverage begins under this policy. This is the beginning of the policy year.

Policy Type — Select Primary if the policy is maintained by the PEO. Select Individual if the policy is carried by the client.

Rate Template ID — If you use a table-based approach for maintaining W/C insurance rates, enter the appropriate rate template ID.

Suppress Billing — Select this option to suppress billing in cases where the client pays the policy premiums.

Suppress G/L Accrual — Select this option to suppress the generation of a general ledger account for any pay associated with this policy.

Company Mod/Discount — Select this option to use client-level W/C accrual modifiers when calculating W/C liability for this policy.

Use Company Level Override Rates — Select this option to use the rate overrides set at the client level.

Suppress TRIA Premium — Select this option to suppress the calculation of the state-based terrorism risk insurance act premium.

Suppress Shelter for Billing — Select this option to bill on gross W/C taxable wages in states that allow Section 125 to shelter W/C wages.

Carrier Information

Use the Carrier Information panel to establish the W/C insurance carrier information for this policy, including:

========================================================================

Establishing Workers’ Compensation Rate Templates

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Rate_Templates.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/WC_Rate_Templates.htm

Establishing Workers’ Compensation Rate Templates

Use the W/C Rate Templates form to establish workers’ compensation rate templates in PrismHR.

To set up a template:

  1. Enter the unique Template ID.

  2. Enter a descriptive Template Name.

  3. Click Save.

Your organization can use templates to group multiple W/C classification rates. This is useful when you want to offer different rate tiers to your clients, for example, “Good”, “Better”, and “Best”. Then, in the W/C Classification Rates form, you could use the “Good” template to set the classification rate for MA.8810 to 2.00, and the “Better” template to set a rate of 1.50. See Defining W/C Classification Rates.

========================================================================

Work Centers

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Work%20Centers.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Work Centers.htm

Work Centers

Work Centers are groups of forms that let you complete related HR tasks such as Benefits, Compliance, Time Off (formerly PTO), or Taxes. Each Work Center provides a single location from which you can open the forms required to perform a specific task.

The Work Centers panel displays on the PrismHR Dashboard. You can also access Work Centers in the following ways:

The Work Centers panel is organized into categories from which you can select a specific type of processing. Let’s say you open the Quarterly Tax Processing Work Center from the Tax category.

Next, open the Employer Quarterly SUTA Tax Export link from the Government Exports heading. To return to the Quarterly Tax Processing page, you can click

[Image: screenshot]

in the header area of the form. For example:

[Image: screenshot]

Providing Access to Work Centers

Only Service Providers can access Work Centers. You must give users access to the Work Center form to enable them to see it on the home page or under the Work Center menus. You must also give access to each individual form that is located under a Work Center.

To assign Work Center access to a role:

  1. On the Back Office menu, select System|Change > User Roles.

  2. Select a Role ID.

  3. Click Add.

  4. Select the type and category for the Work Center, and then click Accept.

  5. Click Save.

========================================================================

Workflow Library

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Workflow_Library.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Workflow_Library.htm

Workflow Library

Use the Workflow Library form to create and maintain forms, which are the components you use to build workflows for enrollments and onboarding.

This form is used only in Benefits Enrollment and in Onboarding.

Refer to the following:

========================================================================

Maintaining Zip Code Networks

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/ZIP_Code_Network_Maintenance.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/ZIP_Code_Network_Maintenance.htm

Maintaining Zip Code Networks

View or delete networks from a zip code with the ZIP Code Network Maintenance form.

  1. Click Back Office.

  2. From System|Change, select Zip Codes.

[Image: screenshot]

  1. Enter a five-digit ZIP Code for the location whose networks you want to view.

  2. Select Benefit Networks from the Actions menu [Image: screenshot] . This is only visible if the Zip Code has at least one network assigned to it. The ZIP Code Network Maintenance form opens and displays the networks associated with the selected location. [Image: screenshot]

  3. Remove a network from the location by clicking Network ID. An alert displays.

  4. Click Yes to confirm.

  5. Click Close.

Parent Topic

Setting Up Zip Codes

========================================================================

Setting Up Zip Codes

Source: https://tech-docs.prismhr.com/SP_help/Content/PD/Maintenance/System/Zip_Codes.htm Path: PD/Maintenance/System/Zip_Codes.htm

Setting Up Zip Codes

Create and maintain zip codes with the ZIP Codes form. Users can also view and delete networks from a zip code in the ZIP Code Network Maintenance form, accessed by selecting Benefit Networks in the Actions menu

[Image: screenshot]

(see Maintaining Zip Code Networks).

Note: Note: The ZIP Code must have at least one network assigned for this to be visible.

  1. Complete these fields as required.

Field — Description

Zip Code — A location’s five-digit zip code.

City/Town — Name of the location covered by the zip code. > Note: Note: City & State displays the combined information.

State — Two-character state code.

OR Transit Tax — Indicates the type of transit tax that applies to this zip code. Options include TriMet Transit District and Lane Transit District.

  1. Click Save.

Related Topic

Importing Network ZIP Codes

Maintaining Zip Code Networks

Setting Up Eligible ZIP Codes